Trailing-Edge
-
PDP-10 Archives
-
dec-10-omona-u-mc9
-
mig603.rno
There are no other files named mig603.rno in the archive.
.PS58,70;.SP1;.LM0;.RM70;.F;.J;.FG10
.C
\\^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10
.B3;.C
^MONITOR ^INSTALLATION ^GUIDE
.B3;.C
6.03 ^MONITOR
.C
^JUNE 1977
.B3;.LM15;.RM55
^THIS MANUAL DESCRIBES THE STEPS YOU MUST TAKE TO INSTALL THE 6.03 MONITOR.
.LM0;.RM70
.FG10;.C
^DIGITAL ^EQUIPMENT ^CORPORATION. ^MAYNARD, ^MASSACHUSETTS
.PG
.RIGHT
^REVISION:#^JUNE 1977
.B2
^THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ^DIGITAL ^EQUIPMENT ^CORPORATION.
^DIGITAL ^EQUIPMENT ^CORPORATION ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY
ERRORS THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL.
.B
^THE SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS FURNISHED UNDER A LICENSE AND MAY
BE USED OR COPIED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS OF SUCH LICENSE.
.B
^DIGITAL ^EQUIPMENT ^CORPORATION ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE USE OR
RELIABILITY OF ITS SOFTWARE ON EQUIPMENT THAT IS NOT SUPPLIED
BY ^^DIGITAL\\.
.B3
^COPYRIGHT (^C) 1973, 1977 BY ^DIGITAL ^EQUIPMENT ^CORPORATION
.B2
^THE POSTAGE PREPAID ^^READER'S COMMENTS\\ FORM ON THE LAST PAGE OF THIS
DOCUMENT REQUESTS THE USER'S CRITICAL EVALUATION TO ASSIST US IN PREPARING
FUTURE DOCUMENTATION.
.B2
^THE FOLLOWING ARE TRADEMARKS OF ^DIGITAL ^EQUIPMENT ^CORPORATION:
.B;.TS15,30;.NF;.NJ
^^DIGITAL UNIBUS
DEC DEC\\SYSTEM-10
^^PDP DEC\\TAPE
^^DECUS DDT
KA10 KL10
KI10\\
.F;.J
.PG
.FG7
.C
^^CONTENTS\\
.B3;.TS65
^PAGE
.B;.LM16;.TS9,16,65;.NF;.NJ;.I-16
^^PREFACE
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 1 BUILDING THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM
.BR
(KL ONLY) 1-1
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 2 READIN BOOTM 2-1
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 3 START THE MONITOR 3-1
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 4 RESTORE SELECTED FILES 4-1
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 5 COPY MONITOR SUPPORT PROGRAMS 5-1
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 6 WRITE BOOTS 6-1
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 7 MERGE MODIFICATIONS 7-1
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 8 CREATE A MONITOR WITH MONGEN 8-1
.B;.I-16
8.1 INTRODUCTION 8-1
.I-16
8.2 MONGEN ORGANIZATION 8-1
.I-16
8.3 EXECUTING MONGEN\\ 8-2
.I-16
8.3.1 ##^MONGEN ^DIALOGUE ^FORMAT 8-3
.I-16
8.3.2 ##^GENERATING A ^NEW ^MONITOR 8-4
.I-16
8.4 ^^HDWGEN 8-4
.I-16
8.5 TTYGEN
.I-16
8.6 NETGEN
.I-16
8.7 FGEN
.I-16
8.8 PRODUCING RELOCATABLE BINARY FILES
.BR
COMMON.REL, COMMOD.REL, AND COMDEV.REL\\
.I-16
8.8.1 ##^ASSEMBLING THE ^CONFIGURATION ^FILES
.I-16
8.8.2 ##^ASSEMBLY ^ERROR ^MESSAGES FROM
.BR
##^^COMMON\\
.I-16
8.9 ^^DESCRIPTION OF CONFIGURATION FILES\\
.I-16
8.9.1 ##^DESCRIPTION OF ^^COMMON.MAC\\
.I-16
8.9.2 ##^DESCRIPTION OF ^^COMMOD.MAC\\
.I-16
8.9.3 ##^DESCRIPTION OF ^^COMDEV.MAC\\
.I-16
8.10 ^^HDWGEN EXAMPLE
.I-16
8.11 TTYGEN EXAMPLE
.I-16
8.12 NETGEN EXAMPLE
.I-16
8.13 FGEN EXAMPLE
.I-16
8.14 DECIMAL DEFAULT VALUES\\
.I-16
8.14.1 ##^SYMBOLS ^DEFINED IN ^^COMMON\\
.I-16
8.14.2 ##^SYMBOLS ^DEFINED IN ^^COMDEV\\
.I-16
8.14.3 ##^SYMBOLS ^DEFINED IN ^^COMMOD\\
.I-16
8.15 ^^OCTAL DEFAULT VALUES\\
.I-16
8.15.1 ##^SYMBOLS ^DEFINED IN ^^COMMON\\
.I-16
8.15.2 ##^SYMBOLS ^DEFINED IN ^^COMMOD\\
.I-16
8.15.3 ##^SYMBOLS ^DEFINED IN ^^COMDEV\\
.I-16
8.16 ^^SIXBIT DEFAULT VALUES
.I-16
8.17 NON-STANDARD DEVICE PI ASSIGNMENT
.I-16
8.18 TERMINAL INTERFACE LINE NUMBERS
.I-16
8.19 MONGEN ERROR MESSAGES
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 9 ASSEMBLE MACRO FILES
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 10 LOAD AND SAVE THE MONITOR
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 11 MAKE A COPY OF NEW MONITOR
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 13 UPDATE ACCOUNTING FILES
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 14 GET NEW MONITOR
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 15 COPY NEW MONITOR TO SYS
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 16 ONCE DIALOGUE
.B;.I-16
16.1 INTRODUCTION\\
.I-16
16.1.1 ##^SUMMARY OF ^^STARTUP O\\PTIONS
.I-16
16.1.2 ##^SPECIAL ^CONSIDERATIONS
.I-16
16.1.3 ##^SPECIAL ^MULTIPROCESSING ^CONSIDERATIONS
.I-16
16.1.4 ##^CONVENTIONS ^USED IN THIS ^CHAPTER
.I-16
16.2 ^^STARTUP OPTION: QUICK AND NOINITIA\\
.I-16
16.3 ^^STARTUP OPTION: GO
.I-16
16.4 STARTUP OPTION: DESTROY
.I-16
16.5 STARTUP OPTION: REFRESH
.I-16
16.6 STARTUP OPTION: UNITID
.I-16
16.7 STARTUP OPTION: CHANGE
.I-16
16.8 STARTUP OPTION: LONG
.I-16
16.9 WHY RELOAD QUESTION
.I-16
16.10 ERROR MESSAGES
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 17 BACKUP
.B;.I-16
17.1 INTRODUCTION
.I-16
17.2 FEATURES
.I-16
17.3 OVERVIEW OF COMMAND FUNCTIONS
.I-16
17.4 EXAMPLES
.I-16
17.5 OPERATOR USES
.I-16
17.6 RESTORING FROM A DISTRIBUTION TAPE
.I-16
17.7 OBTAINING DIRECTORIES OF BACKUP TAPES
.I-16
17.8 COMPARING TAPE AND DISK FILES
.I-16
17.9 CHECKPOINTING LARGE FILES
.I-16
17.10 BACKUP MESSAGES
.I-16
17.11 CAPACITIES OF DISK MEDIA VERSUS
.BR
MAGNETIC TAPE
.I-16
17.12 BACKUP TAPE FORMAT
.B;.I-16
CHAPTER 18 BOOTM\\
.PG;.LM0;.F;.J
.FG12
.C
^&^^PREFACE\\\&
.B3
^THIS MANUAL DESCRIBES THE STEPS YOU MUST TAKE TO INSTALL THE 6.03
MONITOR. ^THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10
^OPERATOR'S ^GUIDE.
^FORMERLY, SOME OF THE INFORMATION IN THIS MANUAL WAS FOUND IN VARIOUS
SPECIFICATIONS WITHIN THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^SOFTWARE ^NOTEBOOKS. ^FOR EXAMPLE,
^^MONGEN\\ IS NOW ^CHAPTER 8 OF THIS MANUAL INSTEAD OF BEING A SEPARATE
SPECIFICATION.
.B
^WHEN YOU RECEIVE YOUR ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10, YOU WILL RECEIVE A
^MANUFACTURING TAPE LABELED ^^YURMON\\ AND THE NAME OF YOUR
INSTALLATION. ^WHEN YOU
RECEIVE YOUR 6.03 MONITOR, YOU WILL RECEIVE ONE 6.03 MONITOR TAPE
AND ONE ^^CUSP\\ TAPE. ^YOU ALSO MAY RECEIVE TAPES ASSOCIATED WITH UNBUNDLED
PRODUCTS.
.B
\\^THE FILES THAT MAKE UP THE 6.03 MONITOR ARE LISTED BELOW.
.B;.LM15;.TS15;.I-15
*.^^MAC\\ ^NEW MONITOR SOURCE FILES (COMPLETE EXCEPT FOR
UNBUNDLED FILES).
.B;.I-15
603.^^MCO\\ ^A DESCRIPTION OF THE CHANGES MADE TO THE
MONITOR SINCE THE 6.02 MONITOR RELEASE.
.B;.I-15
603.^^DDT\\ ^A ^^DDT\\ PATCH FILE THAT CAN BE APPLIED TO THE MONITOR USING
THE $^Y FEATURE OF ^^FILDDT\\ TO FIX PROBLEMS CONCERNING 6.03.
^THIS FILE CONTAINS THOSE PATCHES LISTED IN ^^BWR603.RNO\\.
.B;.I-15
^^TOPA10.REL\\ ^THE COMBINED _.^^REL\\ FILES NEEDED FOR LOADING A
REGULAR ^^KA\\10 MONITOR.
.B;.I-15
^^TOPG10.REL\\ ^THE COMBINED _.^^REL\\ FILES NEEDED FOR LOADING A
^^KALUG\\ MONITOR.
.B;.I-15
^^TOPI10.REL\\ ^THE COMBINED _.^^REL\\ FILES NEEDED FOR LOADING A
REGULAR ^^KI\\10 MONITOR.
.B;.I-15
^^TOPH10.REL\\ ^THE COMBINED _.^^REL\\ FILES NEEDED FOR LOADING A
^^KILUG\\ MONITOR.
.B;.I-15
^^MONGEN.EXE\\ ^VERSION 50(135) OF THE ^MONITOR ^GENERATION ^PROGRAM,
WHICH IS DESCRIBED IN ^CHAPTER 8.
.B;.I-15
^^FGEN.HLP\\ ^VERSION 075 OF ^^FGEN.HLP\\, WHICH LISTS AND EXPLAINS ALL
THE FEATURE TEST SWITCHES THAT CAN BE SET VIA ^^MONGEN\\.
.B;.I-15
^^CON???.CMD\\ ^THE ^^COMPIL\\ COMMAND FILES THAT ARE NEEDED FOR ASSEMBLING
MONITORS.
.B;.I-15
^^CMB???.CCL\\ ^THE ^^PIP\\ INDIRECT FILES NEEDED FOR MAKING
^^TOP?10.REL\\.
.B;.I-15
^^BWR603.RNO\\ ^THE ^^BEWARE\\ FILE FOR THE 6.03 MONITOR, WHICH CONTAINS
INFORMATION NEEDED TO LOAD AND USE THE 6.03 MONITOR. ^READ
THIS FILE BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE MONITOR.
.B;.I-15
^^BWR603.603\\ ^THE ^^RUNOFF\\ OUTPUT FROM ^^BWR603.RNO\\.
.B;.LM0
^THE ABOVE FILES CONSTITUTE THE STANDARD 6.03 MONITOR RELEASE. ^IN
ADDITION TO THE ABOVE, AN INSTALLATION WILL ALSO RECEIVE ANY FILES
ASSOCIATED WITH THE UNBUNDLED PORTIONS OF 6.03 THAT THAT INSTALLATION IS LICENSED
TO USE.
.B
^THE FOLLOWING ARE THE UNBUNDLED PORTIONS OF THE 6.03
MONITOR, WHICH ARE SHIPPED ONLY TO PROPERLY LICENSED INSTALLATIONS.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
^VIRTUAL ^MEMORY
^^DAS\\78
^^DA28
DC44\\
^TASK TO ^TASK ^COMMUNICATION
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES YOU USE ARE BASICALLY THE SAME REGARDLESS OF
WHICH TYPE OF PROCESSOR YOUR SYSTEM HAS (E.G., ^^KA, KI, KL\\).
^ANY DIFFERENCES IN THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE BECAUSE OF PROCESSOR TYPE
ARE INDICATED WITHIN THE TEXT OF THIS MANUAL. ^READ THE LIST BELOW TO
DETERMINE WHICH CLASSIFICATION YOUR INSTALLATION IS; THEN, START READING
AT THE CHAPTER NUMBER INDICATED.
.B;.LM20;.TS20;.I-15
^CHAPTER ##################^CLASSIFICATION
.B;.I-15
###1 ^GENERATING A 6.03 MONITOR FOR A ^^KL\\10 SYSTEM AT A NEW
INSTALLATION.
.B;.I-15
###2 ^GENERATING A 6.03 MONITOR FOR A ^^KA\\10 OR ^^KI\\10 SYSTEM AT
A NEW INSTALLATION.
.B;.I-15
###4 ^GENERATING A 6.03 MONITOR FOR A ^^KA\\, ^^KI\\, OR ^^KL\\
SYSTEM WITH A CURRENTLY RUNNING 6-SERIES MONITOR.
.NUMBER CHAPTER 1
.CH ^&BUILDING THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM (KL\\10 ONLY)\&\\
\\^THE STEPS DESCRIBED IN THIS CHAPTER COPY THE FRONT-END SOFTWARE
FROM THE ^^RSX20-F\\ ^^DEC\\TAPE TO THE FRONT-END FILE SPACE ON THE PUBLIC
DISK. ^IN PERFORMING THE STEPS, YOU WILL BE USING THE FOLLOWING
FRONT-END PROGRAMS. ^THESE PROGRAMS ARE ON THE ^^RSX20-F\\ ^^DEC\\TAPE
THAT YOU WILL BE COPYING ONTO THE DISK.
.B;.LM20;.TS20;.I-15
^^KLI\\ ^THIS PROGRAM LOADS THE ^^KL\\10 MICROCODE, INITIALIZES THE
^^KL\\10 CACHES, CONFIGURES THE ^^KL\\10 MEMORIES, AND LOADS A
BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM.
.B;.I-15
^^MOU (MOUNT)\\ ^THIS PROGRAM ADDS (^^MOU\\NTS) A DEVICE TO THE LIST OF
ON-LINE FRONT-END DEVICES.
.B;.I-15
^^UFD\\ ^THIS PROGRAM CREATES A DIRECTORY IN THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM
ON THE DISK. ^THIS PROGRAM DOES NOT RESPOND WITH A PROMPT AFTER
YOU ISSUE A COMMAND TO IT. ^THEREFORE, YOU MUST TYPE A ^^CTRL\\/BACKSLASH
AFTER TYPING THE CARRIAGE RETURN. ^NOTE THAT THE ^^CTRL\\/BACKSLASH
DOES NOT ECHO.
.B;.I-15
^^INI\\ ^THIS PROGRAM INITIALIZES THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM.
^THIS PROGRAM DOES NOT RESPOND WITH A PROMPT AFTER YOU ISSUE A
COMMAND TO IT. ^THEREFORE, YOU MUST TYPE A ^^CTRL\\/BACKSLASH
AFTER TYPING THE CARRIAGE RETURN. ^NOTE THAT THE ^^CTRL\\/BACKSLASH
DOES NOT ECHO.
.B;.I-15
^^PIP\\ ^THIS PROGRAM IS A ^^PDP\\-11 PROGRAM THAT COPIES FILES
FROM THE ^^DEC\\TAPE TO THE DISK. ^THE ^^PIP\\ DESCRIBED IN
OTHER CHAPTERS OF THIS MANUAL IS THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^^PIP\\.
.B;.I-15
^^RED (REDIRECT)\\ ^THIS PROGRAM REDEFINES THE FRONT-END LOGICAL NAME
^^SY0\\: FROM THE ^^DEC\\TAPE TO THE DISK. ^THIS PROGRAM DOES NOT
RESPOND WITH A PROMPT AFTER YOU ISSUE A COMMAND TO IT. ^THEREFORE,
YOU MUST TYPE A ^^CTRL\\/BACKSLASH AFTER TYPING THE CARRIAGE RETURN.
^NOTE THAT THE ^^CTRL\\/BACKSLASH DOES NOT ECHO.
.B;.I-15
^^SAV (SAVE)\\ ^THIS PROGRAM SAVES THE FRONT-END MONITOR.
.B;.LM0
^DEVICE NAMES USED IN THIS SECTION ARE ^^PDP\\-11 FORMATTED DEVICE NAMES. ^TABLE 1-1 LISTS
THE ^^PDP\\-11 DEVICE NAMES.
.B2;.C
^TABLE 1-1
.C
^^PDP\\-11 ^DEVICE ^NAMES
.B2;.TS5,23;.NF;.NJ
^^PDP\\-11 ^NAME ^DEVICE
.B2;.TS8,20
^^TT T\\ERMINAL
^^DT DEC\\TAPE
^^MT M\\AGTAPE
^S^Y ^^DB0:[5,5], \\WHICH IS THE
^^PDP\\-11 SYSTEM AREA THAT IS
USED IN THE SAME WAY
AS ^^DSKB\\:[1,4].
^^RF F\\IXED-^HEAD ^DISK
^^RP D\\ISK ^PACK
^^RK D\\ISK ^CARTRIDGE
^^PR P\\APER-TAPE ^READER
^^PP P\\APER-TAPE ^PUNCH
^^CD C\\ARD ^READER
^^LP L\\INE ^PRINTER
^^XY P\\LOTTER
.B2;.LM0;.F;.J
^IN ADDITION TO INITIALLY INSTALLING THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM,
YOU MUST INSTALL THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM USING THE STEPS OUTLINED
IN THIS ^CHAPTER IF YOU EVER DO ANY OF THE FOLLOWING:
.LS;.LE;^REINITIALIZE THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM.
.LE;^CHANGE THE FRONT-END HARDWARE.
.LE;^DESTROY THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM.
.ELS
^THE FIRST STEP IS TO MOUNT THE ^^DEC\\TAPE LABELED ^^RSX20-F\\.
^PLACE THE ^^RSX20-F\\ TAPE (VERSION 0005^J) ON ONE OF THE
FRONT-END (^^PDP\\-11) ^D^E^CTAPE DRIVES. ^MAKE SURE THAT THE
^UNIT ^SELECTOR ^SWITCH IS SET TO 0. ^THIS ^D^E^CTAPE
DRIVE IS CALLED ^D^T0 WHEN YOU SPECIFY IT BY NAME.
.B
^ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE ^UNIT ^SELECTOR ^SWITCH, SET THE
RIGHTMOST BUTTON TO ^^REMOTE\\. ^SET THE LEFTMOST BUTTON (ON
THE LEFT SIDE OF THE ^UNIT ^SELECTOR ^SWITCH THAT IS SET TO 0)
TO ^^WRITE ENABLE\\.
.B
^ON THE OTHER ^D^E^CTAPE DRIVE, SET THE ^UNIT ^SELECTOR
^SWITCH TO 1; MOUNT THE ^^RSX20-F\\ ^AUXILIARY ^FILES ^D^E^CTAPE;
SET THE SWITCHES FOR THIS DRIVE (^D^T1) THE SAME AS YOU DID
FOR ^D^T0.
.B
^MOUNT THE MANUFACTURING TAPE (LABELED ^^YURMON\\ AND YOUR
INSTALLATION'S NAME) ON ^^MTA\\0 (-10 DEVICE). ^IF YOU ARE NOT
A NEW INSTALLATION AND WOULD LIKE TO CREATE YOUR OWN ^MANUFACTURING
TAPE, FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE LISTED BELOW.
.B;.LM5;.TS10;.NF;.NJ
_.^^GET SYS:BACKUP
_.SAVE MTA0:BACKUP
_.SAVE MTA0:BACKUP
_.START
/TAPE MTA0:
/SAVE DSKB:[1,4]=DSKB\\:*.*[1,4]
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE ABOVE PROCEDURE SAVES TWO COPIES OF ^^BACKUP\\ AND THE [1,4]
DISK AREA (^^SYS\\:).
.B
^YOU CAN MOUNT THIS MAGNETIC TAPE ON ANOTHER MAGTAPE DRIVE
(OTHER THAN ^^MTA\\0); HOWEVER, ^^MTA\\0 IS ASSUMED IN THE
FOLLOWING EXAMPLE. ^MOUNT A RECENTLY FORMATTED DISK PACK ON
^^RPA\\0 (OR ANOTHER DRIVE, BUT ^^RPA\\0 IS ASSUMED). ^WHICHEVER
DRIVE YOU CHOOSE, IT MUST BE DUAL-PORTED WITH THE ^R^H11.
.B
^TO REFER TO THE "-11" DISK PACK, YOU SPECIFY A DEVICE
NAME IN THE FOLLOWING FORMAT:
.B;.I5
^D^B UNIT-NUMBER:
.B
WHERE UNIT-NUMBER IS 0-7. ^FOR EXAMPLE, ^^RPA\\0 IS THE EQUIVALENT
OF ^^DB0, RPA\\1 IS THE EQUIVALENT OF ^D^B1, AN ^^RPC\\3 IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF ^D^B3.
.B
^SET THE DATA SWITCHES ON THE -11 FRONT PANEL TO 000001. ^MAKE
SURE THE ^^ENABLE\\ SWITCH IS ON; THEN, PUSH THE ^^SW/REG\\
SWITCH. ^THE TAPE WILL BEGIN LOADING. ^REFER TO ^TABLE 14-1
FOR A DESCRIPTION OF WHAT OCCURS WHEN YOU PRESS THE ^^SW/REG\\
SWITCH.
.B
^THE FOLLOWING 'DIALOGUE' TAKES PLACE AT THE OPERATOR TERMINAL
BETWEEN YOU, THE FRONT-END INSTALLER, AND THE SYSTEM. ^YOUR
RESPONSES ARE THOSE UNDERLINED. ^PRESS
THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY AFTER EACH RESPONSE.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
^^RSX-20F V005J 0:06 21-JUN-76
.B
[SY0: REDIRECTED TO DT0:]
[DT0: MOUNTED]
KLI#--#VERSION V002Q RUNNING
.B
KLI#--#MICROCODE VERSION 131 LOADED
KLI#--#% NO FILE - ALL CACHE BEING CONFIGURED
KLI#--#ALL CACHES ENABLED
KLI#--#% NO FILE - ALL MEMORY BEING CONFIGURED
LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION:
#################CONTROLLER
ADDRESS SIZE RQ0 RQ1 RQ2 RQ3 CONTYPE INT
00000000 256K 04 FOR ALL DMA20 4
KLI#--#?#FILE 'DT0:BOOT.EXB;0'NOT FOUND
KLI#--#?#BOOTSTRAP LOAD FAILED
KLI#--#ENTER DIALOGUE [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?
KLI>#YES
KLI#--#RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,NO]?
KLI>#NO
KLI#--#RECONFIGURE CACHE [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]?
KLI>#NO
KLI#--#CONFIGURE KL MEMORY [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]?
KLI>#NO
KLI#--#LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP [YES,NO,FILENAME]?
KLI>#BOOTM\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THIS EXAMPLE ASSUMES YOU ARE BOOTING FROM MAGTAPE.
.B
^THE FOLLOWING IS THEN PRINTED AT THE OPERATOR TERMINAL.
.B;.I5
^^KLI#--#BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED ;-10 BOOTSTRAP
.LM25;.TS25;.I-20
^^BOOTM##V4(16)
.B;.I-20
^^BTM\\>
.B;.LM0
^AFTER THE ^^BTM\\> PROMPT, TYPE IN A COMMAND STRING TERMINATED BY
A CARRIAGE RETURN. ^AFTER PERFORMING THE COMMAND, THE BOOTSTRAP
LOADER EITHER RESTARTS ITSELF OR TRANSFERS TO A NEWLY LOADED
PROGRAM, DEPENDING ON THE COMMAND YOU TYPE. ^YOU CAN TYPE EITHER
/^^TM02\\ OR /^^TX01\\, DEPENDING ON THE TAPE DRIVE USED (E.G., FOR
^^TU\\70S, TYPE /^^TX\\01). ^OR, YOU COULD TYPE A COMMAND IN THE
FOLLOWING FORMAT:
.B;.I5
STRUCTURE:FILE.EXT[PROJECT,PROG]###/^^TM\\02
.BR;.TS40
/^^TX\\01
.B
^IF YOU DO NOT SPECIFY EITHER /^^TM02\\ OR /^^TX\\01, ^^TM\\10 IS ASSUMED BY DEFAULT.
.B
^IN THIS EXAMPLE /^T^M02 WAS TYPED.
.B;.I5
^^BTM>/TM02\\
.B
^THIS RESPONSE BEGINS THE LOADING OF THE DEFAULT MONITOR (I.E.,
^^DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE\\[1,4] FROM DRIVE 0 (^^MTA\\0) ON THE /^T^M02
MAGTAPE CONTROLLER).
(^FOR MORE INFORMATION ON ^^BOOTM\\ REFER TO ^CHAPTER 18.)
^THE FOLLOWING DIALOGUE IS THEN PRINTED ON THE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL.
^YOU SHOULD TYPE EVERYTHING THAT IS UNDERLINED. ^REFER TO ^CHAPTER 3
FOR A MORE DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THIS DIALOGUE.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
########^^RK275A KL10 SYS_#1026 01-19-77
WHY RELOAD: SA###;\\^SYSTEM IS STAND-ALONE; REFER TO ^SECTION 16.9
^^DATE: 21-JAN-77##;\\^ENTER THE CURRENT DATE
^^TIME: 710########;\\^TYPE THE CURRENT TIME OF DAY, USING
#################;A 24-HOUR CLOCK.
.TS22
^^STARTUP OPTION: REFRESH\\
;^SPECIFY THE ^^LONG\\ STARTUP
;OPTION IF YOUR INSTALLATION IS A NEW
;INSTALLATION OR YOU ARE
;USING BLANK DISK PACKS.
^^TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
^^DSKB#############;T\\HE STRUCTURE ON WHICH THE FRONT-END
#################;FILE SYSTEM IS TO BE CREATED.
;^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.8 FOR
;A DESCRIPTION OF THE ^^LONG\\
;DIALOGUE.
^^TO AUTOMATICALLY LOG-IN UNDER [1,2] TYPE "LOGIN"
_.LOGIN
_.RUN MTA0:BACKUP\\ ;^THIS EXECUTES THE ^^BACKUP\\
/^^TAPE MTA0:\\ ;PROGRAM FOUND ON THE MANUFACTURING
;TAPE. ^REFER TO ^CHAPTER 17.
/^^RESTORE#########;M\\OVE FILES TO ^^SYSB\\
!################;^^BACKUP\\'S INDICATION THAT IT IS BUSY.
"^^DONE
.TS43
?BKPHSG CANNOT GET HIGH SEGMENT BACK\\ ;^IGNORE THIS
.BR
;ERROR MESSAGE.
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^EXECUTING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE CREATES A FILE CALLED ^^FE.SYS\\
ON ^^RPA0 (DSKB\\) THAT WILL BE USED BY THE FRONT-END FOR ITS FILE SYSTEM.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
^^_.R FEFILE
DISK UNIT NAME:RPA0###;^UNIT WHERE ^^DSKB\\ IS MOUNTED.
^^SIZE OF FILE IN BLOCKS (<CRLF> GIVES DEFAULT OF 2000):
.B
[2008 DATA BLOCKS ALLOCATED TO FE.SYS]
[FE.SYS AREA STARTS AT LOGICAL BLOCK 33041.]
[FRONT END FILE CREATED, HOM BLOCKS WRITTEN]
.B
_.K/F\\######;^TO STOP THE -10 BECAUSE THE ^^KL\\10
.LM15
;MUST ^^NOT\\ BE RUNNING
;WHILE INSTALLING THE
;FRONT-END SOFTWARE.
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
.NT
^FROM NOW ON, UNTIL YOU READ OTHERWISE, YOU ARE 'TALKING'
ONLY TO THE -11 FRONT-END, USING THE -11 COMMAND LANGUAGE AND -11
PROGRAMS. ^THE -10 IS NOT INVOLVED IN THIS COMMUNICATION PROCESS.
^THE ^^RESET\\ COMMAND (IN THE EXAMPLE BELOW) ENSURES THAT THE
-10 IS NOT RUNNING.
.EN
^TO BEING COMMUNICATING WITH THE FRONT-END COMMAND PARSER, TYPE
A ^^CTRL\\/BACKSLASH (WHICH DOES NOT ECHO).
^IF AT ANY TIME YOU TYPE AN INCORRECT RESPONSE
TO THE PARSER (I.E., AFTER THE PROMPT ^^PAR\\%), TYPE A ^^CTRL/Z\\
FOLLOWED BY A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH. ^THE SYSTEM RETYPES THE PROMPT,
AFTER WHICH YOU CAN RETYPE YOUR RESPONSE. ^NOTE THAT SOME TIMES A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH
TAKES A FEW MOMENTS TO RESPOND.
.B;.LM20;.TS20;.I-15
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL\\/BACKSLASH.
.BR;.I-15
^^PAR>SHUT
.BR;.I-15
^^DECSYSTEM-10 NOT RUNNING
.BR
;K/F\\ ABOVE KILLS YOUR JOB.
.BR
;^THE ^^SHUT\\ COMMAND STOPS
.BR
;THE -10.
.BR;.I-15
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH.
.BR;.I-15
^^PAR>SET CONSOLE MAINTENANCE
.BR;.I-15
CONSOLE MODE: MAINTENANCE
.BR;.I-15
^^PAR%RESET ;KL\\10 MUST NOT BE RUNNING WHILE INSTALLING
.BR
;FRONT-END SOFTWARE.
.BR;.I-15
^^PAR_#ST MICROCODE\\ ;^START MICROCODE.
.BR;.I-15
^^PAR%MCR MOU \\;^START THE ^^MOUNT\\ PROGRAM IN THE FRONT-END.
.BR
;^^MCR\\ IS THE FRONT-END
.BR
;COMMAND DECODER.
.BR;.I-15
^^MOU>DT1:\\ ;^MOUNT THE TAPE LABELED ^^RSX20-F\\
.BR
;^AUXILIARY FILES.
.BR;.I-15
^^MOU#--#MOUNT COMPLETE
.BR;.I-15
MOU>_^Z\\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/Z.\\
.LM20;.TS20;.NF;.NJ;.I-15
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH
.BR;.I-15
^^PAR%MCR PIP ;^START ^^PIP\\.
.B;.LM5;.TS25,33,36;.NF;.NJ
^^PIP>TT:=DT0:/LI ;D\\IRECTORY OF ^D^T0
.B2
^^DIRECTORY DT0:[5,5]
20-MAR-77 14:28
.B
F11ACP.TSK;41 77. C 21-JUN-76 00:50
PARSER.TSK;37 39. C 21-JUN-76 00:50
TKTN.TSK;45 6. C 21-JUN-76 00:51
MOU.TSK;37 5. C 21-JUN-76 00:51
SETSPD.TSK;41 4. C 21-JUN-76 00:51
KLR.TSK;37 5. C 21-JUN-76 00:52
KLE.TSK;37 23. C 21-JUN-76 00:52
KLX.TSK;43 5. C 21-JUN-76 00:53
KLI.TSK;46 33. C 21-JUN-76 00:53
UA.MCB;150 35. 21-JUN-76 00:53
UB.MCB;150 35. 21-JUN-76 00:54
BT128K.EXB;1 12. 16-MAR-77 10:09
BT256K.EXB;1 12. 16-MAR-77 10:10
BOOTM.EXB;2 34. 16-MAR-77 10:16
.B;.I8
^^TOTAL OF 325. BLOCKS IN 14. FILES\\
.B;.LM0
^^PIP>TT:=DT1:/LI
.B3;.LM0
^^DIRECTORY DT1:[5,5]
20-MAR-77 14:31
.B;.TS20,24,26
RED.TSK;41 6. C 21-JUN-76 00:07
SAV.TSK;40 12. C 21-JUN-76 00:07
DMO.TSK;37 5. C 21-JUN-76 00:08
T20ACP.TSK;37 8. C 21-JUN-76 00:08
UFD.TSK;37 9. C 21-JUN-76 00:08
INI.TSK;37 23. C 21-JUN-76 00:08
PIP.TSK;1321 56. C 21-JUN-76 00:09
COP.TSK;2 8. C 21-JUN-76 00:09
.B;.I8
TOTAL OF 161. BLOCKS IN 9. FILES\\
.B;.LM25;.TS25;.I-20
^^PIP>_^Z
.I-20
_^_\ ;T\\YPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH.
.I-20
^^PAR%MCR INI
.I-20
INI>DB0:\\ ;^INITIALIZE THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM ON ^D^B0.
.I-20
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH.
.I-20
^^PAR%MCR MOU\\ ;^START ^^MOUNT\\ PROGRAM.
.I-20
^^MOU>DB0:\\ ;^MOUNT THE DISK UNIT.
.I-20
^^MOU#--#MOUNT COMPLETE\\
.I-20
^^MOU>_^Z\\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/Z\\.
.I-20
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH.
.I-20
^^PAR%MCR UFD ;S\\TART THE ^^UFD\\ PROGRAM.
.I-20
^^UFD>DB0:[5,5]\\ ;^CREATING THE ^^UFD\\ CALLED [5,5] ON THE
;-11 DISK AREA (^^FE.SYS\\);
;SEE NOTE BELOW.
.I-20
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH.
.I-20
^^PAR%MCR PIP\\ ;^START ^^PIP\\.
.TS31;.I-20
^^PIP>DB0:=DT0:*.*,DT1:*.*\\ ;^TO COPY ALL FILES FROM THE
.TS31
;^^DEC\\TAPE TO THE FRONT-END FILE
;SYSTEM [5,5] ON THE DISK PACK ON ^^RPA\\0.
;^AFTER APPROXIMATELY 35 MINUTES,
;THE SYSTEM PRINTS THE ^^PIP\\ PROMPT.
.B;.LM5;.TS21
^^PIP>DB0:BOOT.EXB=DT0: BT128K.EXB
.TS27
BT256K.EXB\\
.TS21
;^THIS COPIES THE ^^BOOTS\\ THAT
;FITS YOUR
;CONFIGURATION.
.LM5;.TS21
^^PIP>_^Z ;\\^TYPE A ^^CTRL/Z\\.
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH.
^^PAR\\%
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
.NT
^^FE.SYS\\ IS THE LOGICAL -11 DISK SPACE AREA RESIDING ON THE
-10 DISK (^^DSKB:[1,4],RPA\\0). ^^FE.SYS\\ CONTAINS -11 DIRECTORY
AREAS AND FILES WITHIN THESE AREAS. ^NOTE THAT [5,5] IS A DIRECTORY
AREA IN ^^FE.SYS\\.
.EN
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^YOU NOW REBOOT THE FRONT-END. ^SET THE DATA SWITCHES ON THE -11
FRONT PANEL TO 000003. (^REFER TO ^TABLE 14-1.) ^MAKE SURE THE
^^ENABLE\\ SWITCH IS ^O^N; THEN, PUSH THE ^^SW/REG\\ SWITCH.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
^^RSX-20F V00SJ 0:06 21-JUN-76
.B
[SY0: REDIRECTED TO DT0:]
[DT0: MOUNTED\\]
.B;.LM5;.TS23;.NF;.NJ
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH TO START THE PARSER.
^^PAR%MCR MOU\\ ;^START THE ^^MOUNT\\ PROGRAM.
^^MOU> DB0:\\ ;^MOUNT THE DISK UNIT THAT THE -11
;FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM (THAT YOU JUST
;INSTALLED) RESIDES ON (^D^B0:).
^^MOU#--#MOUNT COMPLETE
MOU>_^Z\\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/Z\\.
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH
.TS23
^^PAR%MCR RED\\ ;^START THE ^^REDIRECT\\ PROGRAM.
^^RED>DB0:=SY:\\ ;^MAKE ^^SY:\\ BE ^^DB0:\\ INSTEAD OF ^^DT0:\\.
;^THIS CAUSES THE ^K^L10 TO BE REBOOTED FROM DISK
;INSTEAD OF ^^DEC\\TAPE (-11 DEVICES).
_^_\ ;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH.
^^PAR%MCR SAV\\ ;^START THE ^^SAVE\\ PROGRAM.
^^SAV>SY:/WB\\ ;^SAVE THE FRONT-END MONITOR ON
;^^SY:(DB0:[5,5])\\.
;^THE FRONT-END CAN NOW USE THE FILES FROM
;THE ^^TOPS\\-10 DISK PACK INSTEAD OF THE
;^^PDP\\-11 ^D^E^CTAPES.
[^^DB0: DISMOUNTED]
[DT0: DISMOUNTED]
.B2
.TS35
RSX-20F V005J 2:00 21-JUN-76\\ ;^MESSAGES FROM THE ^^SAVE\\ PROGRAM
^^[SY0: REDIRECTED TO DB0:]\\ ;TO ENABLE YOU TO BOOTSTRAP
^^[DB0: MOUNTED]\\ ;FROM ^^DB0: [5,5\\].
.TS25
_^_\ ;\\^TYPE A ^^CTRL/\\BACKSLASH.
.TS25
^^PAR%MCR PIP\\ ;^START ^^PIP\\.
^^PIP>TT:=DB0:/LI
.B2;.LM5;.TS25,33,36;.NF;.NJ
DIRECTORY DB0:[5,5]
21-JUN-76 01:05
.B2
F11ACP.TSK;41 77. C 21-JUN-76 00:30
PARSER.TSK;37 39. C 21-JUN-76 00:31
TKTN.TSK;45 6. C 21-JUN-76 00:32
MOU.TSK;37 5. C 21-JUN-76 00:33
SETSPD.TSK;41 4. C 21-JUN-76 00:35
KLR.TSK;37 5. C 21-JUN-76 00:36
KLE.RSK;37 23. C 21-JUN-76 00:37
KLX.TSK;43 5. C 21-JUN-76 00:38
KLI.TSK;46 33. C 21-JUN-76 00:39
UA.MCB;150 35. 21-JUN-76 00:41
UB.MCB;150 35. 21-JUN-76 00:43
BT128K.EXB;1 12. 21-JUN-76 00:44
BT256K.EXB;1 12. 21-JUN-76 00:46
BOOTM.EXB;2 34. 21-JUN-76 00:48
KL.CFG;1 1. 21-JUN-76 00:50
RED.TSK;41 6. C 21-JUN-76 00:54
SAV.TSK;40 12. C 21-JUN-76 00:55
DMO.TSK;37 5. C 21-JUN-76 00:56
T20ACP.TSK;37 8. C 21-JUN-76 00:57
UFD.TSK;37 9. C 21-JUN-76 00:58
INI.TSK;37 23. C 21-JUN-76 00:59
PIP.TSK;1321 56. C 21-JUN-76 01:00
COP.TSK;2 8. C 21-JUN-76 01:01
.B2;.I8
TOTAL OF 453. BLOCKS IN 23. FILES
.B
^^PIP>_^Z\\#####;^TYPE A ^^CTRL/Z\\.
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^AT THIS POINT, ^^RSX20-F\\ CAN BE BOOTSTRAPPED FROM THE DISK
BY DEPRESSING THE SWITCH LABELED ^^DISK\\ OR, IF THE FRONT-END DISK
PACK IS ON A DRIVE OTHER THAN ^^RPA\\0, DEPRESS THE ^^SW/REG\\ SWITCH.
^REFER TO ^CHAPTER 2.
.B
^FROM NOW ON DEVICES AND DIRECTORIES SPECIFIED ARE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 DEVICES
AND DIRECTORIES; UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
.NUMBER CHAPTER 2
.CHAPTER ^&READIN BOOTM\&
\\^&^^READIN\\ THE ^^BOOTM\\ BOOTSTRAP AND YOUR 6.03 MONITOR
FROM THE NEW INSTALLATION BOOTSTRAP TAPE.\&
.B
^IF YOU HAVE A ^K^L10 SYSTEM, READ ^STEPS 1 AND 2. ^IF YOU HAVE A ^K^A OR ^K^I SYSTEM,
READ ^STEPS 3 THROUGH 7.
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 1\&###(^^KL\\10 ONLY)
.B
^SET THE ^^ENABLE/DISABLE\\ LOAD SWITCH TO ^^ENABLE\\.
^THIS WILL ENABLE THE OTHER THREE LOAD SWITCHES.
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 2\&###(^^KL\\10 ONLY)
.B
^PRESS THE UPPER HALF OF THE SWITCH LABELED ^^DISK\\ ON THE ^^KL\\10
FRONT PANEL. ^THIS WILL CAUSE THE FRONT-END PROCESSOR TO ACCESS
THE DISK ON DRIVE 0 AND LOAD THE ^^RSX20-F\\ MONITOR.
.B
^THE ^^KL\\10 INITIALIZATION PROGRAM (^^KLINIT\\) IS AUTOMATICALLY LOADED,
AND THE DEFAULT HARDWARE CONFIGURATION OF CACHE AND
EXTERNAL MEMORY ARE ALSO AUTOMATICALLY SET UP. ^THE BOOTSTRAP
PROGRAM (^^BOOTS\\) FOR THE ^^TOPS\\-10 MONITOR IS THEN
AUTOMATICALLY LOADED INTO THE CENTRAL PROCESSOR AND STARTED. ^THE
FOLLOWING IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE OUTPUT YOU WILL RECEIVE ON THE
CONSOLE TERMINAL. ^YOU TYPE EVERYTHING THAT IS UNDERLINED.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
^^RSX-20F V005J 0:16 21-JUN-76
.B
[SY0: REDIRECTED TO DB0:]
[DB0: MOUNTED]
KLI -- VERSION V002J RUNNING
KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION 131 LOADED
KLI -- ALL CACHES ENABLED
LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION
##################CONTROLLER
.TS14,20,25,30,35,40,49
ADDRESS SIZE RQ0 RQ1 RQ2 RQ3 CONTYPE INT
00000000 256 04 FOR ALL #DMA20 #4
KLI -- BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED\\
^^BOOTS##V22(103)
BTS>
_^_\#####;T\\YPE A ^^CTRL\\/BACKSLASH.
^^PAR>MCR KLI
KLI -- VERSION V0002J RUNNING
KLI -- ENTER DIALOGUE [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?
KLI -- YES
KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,NO]?
KLI>#NO
KLI> RECONFIGURE CACHE [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]?
KLI> NO
KLI -- CONFIGURE KL MEMORY [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]?
KLI> NO
KLI -- BOOTSTRAP [YES,NO,FILENAME]?
KLI> BOOTM\\
^^KLI -- ALL CACHES ENABLED
KLI -- BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED
BOOTS###V4(16)
BTS>\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^IF AN ERROR OCCURS DURING THE ^^KL\\ INITIALIZATION PROGRAM,
YOU WILL RECEIVE AN ERROR MESSAGE PRECEDED BY ^^KLI\\#--?.
^AT THAT POINT, YOU ARE PLACED IN ^^KLINIT\\ DIALOGUE MODE
WHICH IS DESCRIBED IN ^APPENDIX ^A OF THE ^^KL\\ ^SERIES
^OPERATOR'S ^GUIDE.
^^BOOTS\\ OUTPUTS THE PROMPT ^^BTS\\>. ^AFTER ^^BOOTS\\ PRINTS
ITS PROMPT, YOU MUST TYPE A FILE SPECIFICATION, INDICATING THE
MONITOR YOU WANT TO READ FROM THE ^^BACKUP\\ SAVE SET ON THE
^MANUFACTURING ^BOOTSTRAP ^TAPE. ^TYPE THE FOLLOWING COMMAND LINE:
.B;.I5
^^DSKB: YURMON.EXE\\[1,4]
.B
^THIS RESPONSE BEGINS THE LOADING OF THE MONITOR FROM THE
^MANUFACTURING ^^BOOTSTRAP\\ TAPE. ^THEN, THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY
^DIALOGUE STARTS. ^TURN TO ^CHAPTER 4.
.B
^&^^STEP 3\&###(^^KA/KI O\\NLY)
.B
^MOUNT A RECENTLY FORMATTED DISK PACK ON A DISK DRIVE. ^FOR
EXAMPLE, ^^RPA\\0.
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 4\&###(^^KA/KI\\ ONLY)
.B
^MOUNT THE 6.03 ^MANUFACTURING ^BOOTSTRAP TAPE CONTAINING YOUR MONITOR
ON ^^MTA0\\, WHICH IS WRITE-LOCKED. ^DRIVE 0 IS REQUIRED FOR ^^READIN\\
WITH ^^TM\\10 CONTROLLERS. ^ON ^^TU\\70'S THE TAPE MUST BE MOUNTED
ON THE LOWEST NUMBERED READY DRIVE.
.B
^IF YOU ARE NOT A NEW INSTALLATION AND YOU WOULD LIKE TO CREATE YOUR OWN
MANUFACTURING TAPE, FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE LISTED BELOW.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^GET SYS:BACKUP
_.SAVE MTA0:BACKUP
_.SAVE MTA0:BACKUP
_.START
/TAPE MTA0:
/SAVE DSKB:[1,4]=DSKB:*.*[1,4]\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE ABOVE PROCEDURE SAVES TWO COPIES OF ^^BACKUP\\ AND THE [1,4] DISK AREA (^^SYS:).\\
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 5\&###(^^KA/KI\\ ONLY)
.B
^FOR A ^^TM\\10 CONTROLLED MAGTAPE SET THE ^^READIN\\ SWITCHES
TO 340. ^FOR A ^^TU\\70, SET THE ^^READIN\\ SWITCHES TO 220.
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 6\&###(^^KA/KI\\ ONLY)
.B
^IN ORDER, PRESS THE ^^STOP\\ AND ^^RESET\\ SWITCHES AND SET THE ^^NXM\\
SWITCH OFF; THEN, PRESS ^^READIN\\. ^THE TAPE REWINDS AND READS IN
THE ^^BOOTM\\ BOOTSTRAP, WHICH THEN ALLOWS YOU TO SPECIFY AND START
THE 6.03 MONITOR.
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 7\&###(^^KA/KI O\\NLY)
.B
^^BOOTM\\ OUTPUTS THE PROMPT CHARACTERS ^^BTM\\>. ^AFTER ^^BOOTM\\
PRINTS ITS PROMPT, YOU MUST TYPE A FILE SPECIFICATION, INDICATING THE
MONITOR YOU WANT TO READ FROM THE ^^BACKUP\\ SAVE SET ON THE
6.03 ^MANUFACTURING ^BOOTSTRAP TAPE. ^TYPE THE FOLLOWING
COMMAND LINE:
.B;.I5
^^DSKB:\\ ^&YURMON\&.^^EXE\\[1,4] /^^TM02
.TS28;.BR
/TX01\\
.B
WHERE:##^&YURMON\& IS THE NAME GIVEN TO YOUR MONITOR.
.B;.LM0
^YOU MUST SPECIFY THE TAPE CONTROL UNIT: EITHER ^^TM02\\ OR ^^TX01\\. ^THE
DEFAULT, IF YOU DO NOT SPECIFY A UNIT, IS ^^TM\\10.
.B
^THE COMMAND LINE FORMAT TO BE TYPED TO ^^BOOTM\\ IS DESCRIBED
IN ^CHAPTER 19.
.B
^THIS RESPONSE BEGINS THE LOADING OF THE DEFAULT MONITOR ON THE
6.03 ^MANUFACTURING ^BOOTSTRAP TAPE. ^THE FOLLOWING DIALOGUE IS
THEN PRINTED ON THE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL. ^YOU SHOULD TYPE
EVERYTHING THAT IS UNDERLINED. ^REFER TO ^CHAPTER 3 FOR A MORE DETAILED DESCRIPTION
OF THIS DIALOGUE.
.B2;.LM5;.TS30;.NF;.NJ
##########^^RK277 KI10 SYS_#514 2-15-77
WHY RELOAD:SA\\ ;^SYSTEM IS STAND-ALONE; REFER TO ^SECTION
;16.9.
^^DATE:##21-FEB-77\\ ;^ENTER THE CURRENT DATE
^^TIME:##7:10\\ ;^TYPE THE CURRENT
;TIME OF DAY, USING A 24-HR.#CLOCK.
^^STARTUP OPTION:REFRESH\\ ;^SPECIFY THE ^^LONG\\ STARTUP
;OPTION IF YOUR
;INSTALLATION IS A
;NEW INSTALLATION OR
;YOU ARE USING BLANK
;DISK PACKS.
^^TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL\\)
^^DSKB\\ ;^THE STRUCTURE ON
;WHICH THE MONITOR
;IS TO RESIDE.
;^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.8
;FOR A DESCRIPTION OF THE
;^^LONG D\\IALOGUE.
.B
^^TO AUTOMATICALLY LOG-IN UNDER [1,2] TYPE "LOGIN"
_.LOGIN
_.RUN MTA0: BACKUP\\ ;^THIS EXECUTES THE ^^BACKUP\\
;PROGRAM FOUND ON THE
;MANUFACTURING
;MAGTAPE. ^REFER TO
;^CHAPTER 17.
.B
/^^TAPE MTA0:
/RESTORE\\ ;^MOVE FILES TO ^^DSKB\\[1,4]
! ;^^BACKUP\\'S INDICATION
;THAT IT IS BUSY.
"^^DONE
?BKPHSG CANNOT GET HIGH SEGMENT BACK\\
.B
;^IGNORE THIS ERROR
;MESSAGE.
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^NOW, TURN TO ^CHAPTER 4.
.NUMBER CHAPTER 3
.CHAPTER ^&START THE MONITOR\&
\\^THIS CHAPTER BRIEFLY DESCRIBES THE SYSTEM START-UP DIALOGUE, WHICH APPEARED
IN THE EXAMPLES IN ^CHAPTERS 1 AND 2.
.B
\\^YOU CAN START YOUR MONITOR WITH THE ^^LONG\\ STARTUP OPTION AND REFRESH THE DISKS.
^IF YOUR DISKS HAVE ALREADY BEEN FORMATTED AND REFRESHED, RESPOND WITH THE ^^NOINITIA\\ STARTUP OPTION.
^NOTE THAT DISK PACKS MUST BE FORMATTED BY A ^FIELD
^SERVICE FORMATTING PROGRAM, BEFORE YOU CAN ATTEMPT TO USE THEM
WITH A MONITOR.
.B
^THE ^^LONG\\ ^^START-UP\\ ^OPTION IS NOT DESCRIBED IN THIS CHAPTER.
^THE ^START-^UP ^OPTIONS ARE A PORTION OF THE ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY DIALOGUE,
WHICH IS COMPLETELY DESCRIBED IN ^CHAPTER 16.
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 1\&
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE BEGINS BETWEEN YOU AND THE SYSTEM. ^^ONCE\\
TYPES:
.B;.I5
^^SYSCHK (Y,N)\\:
.B
^IF YOU TYPE ^Y IN RESPONSE, THE SYSTEM WILL RUN A 5-SECOND DIAGNOSTIC
PROGRAM THAT ENSURES THE ACCESSIBILITY OF ALL CONFIGURED MEMORY
AND SYSTEM DEVICES. ^A REPLY OF ^N OR A CARRIAGE RETURN SKIPS THE
EXECUTION OF THE DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM.
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 2\&
.B
^^ONCE\\ THEN TYPES THE SYSTEM NAME (WHICH WAS SPECIFIED IN ^^MONGEN\\
REFER TO ^SECTION 8.4, QUESTION NUMBER 4)
FOLLOWED BY THE MONITOR CREATION DATE. ^FOR EXAMPLE:
.B;.I5
^^LOAD 3 SYS_#10 KL 02-1-77\\
.B
^WHEN ^^ONCE\\ PRINTS THE FOLLOWING:
.B;.I5
^^WHY RELOAD\\:
.B
REPLY WITH ^^NEW\\ AND PRESS THE CARRIAGE RETURN. ^INSTEAD
OF RESPONDING WITH ^^NEW\\, YOU CAN RESPOND WITH ONE OF THE BELOW:
.B;.LM5;.TS17,25;.NF;.NJ
^^OPR NXM CM
PARITY HALT SA
POWER LOOP SCHED
STATIC HUNG OTHER
HARDWARE PM\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^IF YOU DO NOT REPLY WITHIN 60 SECONDS, ^^OTHER\\ IS ASSUMED.
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 3\&
.B
^^ONCE\\ PROMPTS WITH:
.B;.I5
^^DATE:\\
.B
AFTER WHICH YOU TYPE THE CURRENT DATE; FOR EXAMPLE:
1-^^MAR\\-77. ^^ONCE\\ THEN PROMPTS WITH:
.B;.I5
^^TIME:\\
.B
AFTER WHICH YOU TYPE A 4-DIGIT NUMBER INDICATING THE CURRENT
TIME, USING A 24-HOUR CLOCK. ^FOR EXAMPLE: 2015, INDICATING
8:15 ^^PM\\.
.B
^&^^STEP\\ 4\&
.B
^^ONCE\\ PROMPTS WITH:
.B;.I5
^^STARTUP OPTION:\\
.B
AFTER WHICH YOU RESPOND WITH ^^LONG\\ IF YOUR DISKS HAVE NOT BEEN
REFRESHED. ^OTHERWISE, RESPOND WITH ^^NOINITIA\\. ^THE ^^NOINITIA\\
OPTION RESPONDS WITH A _. AND YOU MUST ^^LOGIN\\ AS A [1,2] JOB.
.B
^THE ^^LONG\\ STARTUP OPTION ALLOWS YOU TO EXPLICITLY SET ALL
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AND TO REFRESH AND RESTRUCTURE THE FILE SYSTEM IN
A NON-STANDARD WAY.
.B
^THE ^^ONCE\\ DIALOGUE, INCLUDING THE ^^LONG\\ STARTUP DIALOGUE
IS DESCRIBED IN ^CHAPTER 16.
.PS67,70;.LM0;.RM70;.SP1;.F;.J
.NUMBER CHAPTER 4
.CH ^&RESTORE SELECTED FILES\\\&
.SP1
\\^BEFORE READING THIS CHAPTER, MAKE SURE
YOU ARE USING THE LATEST FIELD IMAGE VERSION OF ^^BACKUP\\.
^IF YOU ARE A NEW INSTALLATION AND YOU HAVE JUST GOTTEN ^^BACKUP\\
FROM THE ^MANUFACTURING ^BOOTSTRAP TAPE, YOU SHOULD HAVE THE CORRECT
^^BACKUP\\ VERSION. ^IF YOU HAVE BEEN RUNNING A ^^TOPS\\-10
MONITOR, BE SURE YOU HAVE THE PROPER VERSION OF ^^BACKUP\\ ON ^^SYS:\\.
^VERIFY THAT THE VERSION NUMBER IS THE LATEST BY CHECKING IT
AGAINST THE SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER IN THE MOST RECENT
^D^E^CSYSTEM-10 ^^DISPATCH/BULLETIN\\.
.B
^TO INSTALL A 6.03 MONITOR, CERTAIN MONITOR FILES MUST BE
RESTORED AT 800 BITS/INCH FROM THE STANDARD DISTRIBUTION TAPES
AND FROM THE UNBUNDLED DISTRIBUTION TAPES. ^THE [10,7] AREA IS USED
IN THESE INSTRUCTIONS TO DESIGNATE THE RESTORE AREA.
^BUT, ANOTHER PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBER CAN BE SUBSTITUTED FOR [10,7].
^NORMALLY, THESE FILES ARE RESTORED TO THE STRUCTURE ^^DSKB\\. ^HOWEVER,
IF YOUR SYSTEM DOES NOT HAVE A ^^DSKB, BACKUP\\ CAN BE RESTORED
TO ANY DESIGNATED FILE STRUCTURE. (^REFER TO ^CHAPTER 17.)
.B
^TO SIMPLIFY THE RESTORE PROCESS, YOU SHOULD RESTORE FILES ON
THE MONITOR TAPE IN THE ORDER THEY APPEAR ON THE DISTRIBUTION
TAPE. ^FILES ON THE MONITOR TAPE ARE NORMALLY IN ALPHABETICAL
ORDER. ^TO FIND OUT THE APPROPRIATE ORDER, PRINT A DIRECTORY
OF THE TAPE ON THE LINE PRINTER. ^TO DO SO, TYPE THE FOLLOWING
COMMAND LINES.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^START
/REWIND
/DENSITY 800
/PRINT LPT\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE NUMBER OF FILES YOU SHOULD RESTORE FROM THE MONITOR DISTRIBUTION
TAPE TO THE DISK IS DETERMINED BY THE AMOUNT OF DISK SPACE YOU HAVE
AVAILABLE. ^THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR THREE DIFFERENT SITUATIONS
ARE GIVEN BELOW:
.LS;.LE;^IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS SLIGHTLY MORE THAN 20,000 FREE
DISK BLOCKS
.LE;^IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS ABOUT 10,000 FREE DISK BLOCKS
.LE;^IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS VERY FEW FREE DISK BLOCKS.
.ELS
^IF YOU HAVE ENOUGH DISK SPACE AVAILABLE, YOU SHOULD ALSO
RESTORE ALL THE FILES FROM OTHER DISTRIBUTION TAPES USING THE
APPROPRIATE PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBER.
^OTHERWISE, YOU MAY NEED TO SELECTIVELY RESTORE CERTAIN FILES,
BECAUSE YOU MAY NEED SOME UNBUNDLED FILES FOR YOUR MONITOR.
^ALSO, SOME OF THE UTILITY PROGRAMS, ASSUMED TO BE ON THE MONITOR
DISTRIBUTION TAPE IN THE INSTRUCTIONS BELOW, MAY BE ON THE
LANGUAGE DISTRIBUTION TAPE BECAUSE OF CHANGES IN THE PACKAGING
PROCEDURE.
.LS;.LE;^IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS SLIGHTLY MORE THAN 20,000
FREE BLOCKS OF DISK SPACE, YOU CAN RESTORE ALL FILES ON
THE 6.03 MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPE. ^IN THIS CASE, THE LATEST
VERSIONS OF ALL FILES ARE AVAILABLE FOR USE, AND YOU NEED NOT
WORRY ABOUT SELECTIVELY RESTORING INDIVIDUAL FILES.
.B
^THE PROCEDURE BELOW SHOULD BE FOLLOWED, FIRST FOR THE ^^CUSP\\ TAPE,
THEN FOR THE 6.03 MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPE, AND LAST FOR EACH OF YOUR
UNBUNDLED TAPES, IF YOU HAVE ANY.
.B
^TO RESTORE ALL FILES, ENSURE THAT THE TAPE IS MOUNTED PROPERLY
AND TYPE TO ^^BACKUP\\:
.B;.LM14;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/REWIND
/INTERCHANGE
/DENSITY 800
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=PIP.EXE
"DONE
/REWIND
/SUPERSEDE ALWAYS
/INTERCHANGE
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=*.*
"DONE\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^THE PURPOSE OF RESTORING ^^PIP.EXE\\ SEPARATELY IS TO PROTECT
YOURSELF. ^IF THE DISK FILLS UP, YOU WILL NEED ^^PIP\\ TO DELETE
FILES AND THEN CONTINUE RESTORING. ^BECAUSE ALL OF THE INSTALLATION BATCH
CONTROL FILES ASSUME THAT THE FIELD IMAGE FILES ARE IN [10,7], WE
RECOMMEND YOUR USING THAT PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBER.
.B
^IF YOU ATTEMPT TO RESTORE ALL FILES AND RECEIVE THE ERROR
MESSAGE
.B;.I5
?^^LOOKUP/ENTER FAILURE\\ (14)
.B
INDICATING THAT THE DISK STORAGE CAPACITY HAS BEEN EXCEEDED,
YOU MUST RESTORE ONLY SELECTED FILES AS DESCRIBED IN
SITUATION 2, WHICH FOLLOWS.
.B
^AFTER RESTORING ALL THE FILES, YOU SHOULD PRINT THE .^^DOC
_.MAN, .RND, .RNH\\ AND .^^RNO\\ FILES. ^THEY CONTAIN USEFUL
PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION. ^THE .^^RND, RNH\\, AND .^^RNO\\ FILES
MUST FIRST BE EXPANDED WITH ^^RUNOFF\\ BY TYPING:
.B;.I5
_.^^RUN DSK:RUNOFF[10,7]
.B;.I5
\\*FILENAME
.B;.I5
*_^^C
.B
^ALL .^^RND\\ FILES BECOME .^^DOC\\ FILES, ALL .^^RNH\\ FILES
BECOME .^^HLP\\ FILES, AND ALL .^^RNO\\ FILES BECOME .^^MEM\\
FILES AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN THROUGH ^^RUNOFF\\.
.LE;^IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS ABOUT 10,000 FREE BLOCKS OF
DISK SPACE, YOU CAN RESTORE ALL MONITOR-RELATED FILES TO THE
DISK. ^THESE FILES ENABLE YOU TO BUILD AND START THE MONITOR,
TO ASSEMBLE ALL MONITOR SOURCE FILES, TO MAKE MODIFICATIONS WITH
^^SOUP\\, AND TO OBTAIN MONITOR LISTINGS.
.B
^TO BUILD THE MONITOR YOU MUST DETERMINE WHICH TYPE OF MONITOR
IS BEST FOR YOUR CONFIGURATION AND THEN CHOOSE THE APPROPRIATE
_.^^CMD\\ FILE FOR YOUR SYSTEM. (^SEE ^CHAPTER 10.)##^AFTER
SELECTING THE FILE, YOU SHOULD RESTORE IT AND ^^PIP.EXE\\ USING
^^BACKUP\\. ^IN THE EXAMPLE BELOW, THE .^^CMD\\ FILE FOR THE
STANDARD ^K^I CONFIGURATION IS USED. ^TYPE TO ^^BACKUP\\:
.B;.LM14;.NF;.NJ
/^^REWIND
/INTERCHANGE
/DENSITY 800
/SUPERSEDE ALWAYS
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=CONKI.CMD,PIP.EXE
"DONE
/_^C\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^THEN, LIST THE CONTENTS OF ^^CONKI\\ ON YOUR TERMINAL USING ^P^I^P.
.B
^TYPE:
.B;.I5
_.^^RUN PIP[10,7]
.B;.I5
*TTY:=CONKI.CMD[10,7]
.I5
*_^C\\
.B
^THE MONITOR RELATED FILES ARE PRINTED ON YOUR
TERMINAL.
.B
^THEN RESTORE ALL FILES PRINTED ON YOUR TERMINAL WITH THE EXTENSION
_.^^MAC\\, EXCLUDING ^^F???.MAC, HDW???.MAC, TTY???.MAC\\, AND
^^NET???.MAC\\, BECAUSE YOU MUST GENERATE THESE FILES WITH ^^MONGEN\\, WHICH IS
DESCRIBED IN ^CHAPTER 8.
^THERE IS NO NEED TO REPEAT FILES THAT ARE DUPLICATED ON THE
^^TTY\\ LISTING. ^ALSO, IN LINES CONTAINING AN EQUAL SIGN,
ONLY FILES TO THE RIGHT OF THE EQUAL SIGN NEED TO BE RESTORED.
^FOR EXAMPLE, FOR THE LINE,
.B;.I5
^^COMDEV.RLI=HDWKI.MAC+TTYKI.MAC+NETKI.MAC+COMDEV.MAC\\
.B
RESTORE ONLY ^^COMDEV.MAC\\. ^THESE FILES ARE FOR THE STANDARD
^K^I MONITOR, DETERMINED BY THE IMBEDDED '^K^I.'
.B
^THE PROCEDURE BELOW SHOULD BE REPEATED FOR THE ^^CUSP\\ TAPE,
THEN FOR THE 6.03 MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPE, AND LAST FOR EACH
OF YOUR UNBUNDLED TAPES, IF YOU HAVE ANY.
.B
^TO RESTORE THE NECESSARY FILES, TYPE:
.B;.LM14;.NF;.NJ
_.^^RUN DSK:BACKUP[10,7]
.B
/REWIND
/INTERCHANGE
/DENSITY 800
/SUPERSEDE ALL
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=\\ FILENAMES (SEPARATED BY COMMAS)
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
WHERE FILENAMES INCLUDE ^^BWR603.RNO, COMDEV.MAC, COMMOD.MAC,
COMMON.MAC,
MONGEN.EXE, S.MAC, WBOOT.EXE\\,
THE APPROPRIATE ^^TOP?10.REL\\ FILE, AND NECESSARY .^^MAC\\
FILES FROM THE .^^CMD\\ FILE. ^NOTE THAT THESE FILES ARE DISTRIBUTED
ON THE 6.03 MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPES.
.B
WHERE FILENAMES INCLUDE ^^COMPIL.EXE, FGEN.HLP, FILEX.EXE,
LINK.EXE, LNKSCN.EXE, LNKLOD.EXE, LNKMAP.EXE, LNKXIT.EXE, LNKERR.EXE,
LNK999.EXE, MACRO.EXE,\\ AND ^^RUNOFF.EXE\\. ^NOTE THAT THESE
FILES ARE ON THE ^^CUSP\\ TAPE.
.B
^IF YOU ARE BUILDING A MONITOR FROM SCRATCH, ALSO RESTORE THE
FOLLOWING FILES.
.B;.I5
/^^RESTORE[10,7]*.*=LOGIN.EXE,LOGOUT.EXE,REACT.EXE\\
.B
^IF YOU HAVE ANY UNBUNDLED DISTRIBUTION TAPES (E.G., VIRTUAL
MEMORY), THESE TAPES MUST BE RESTORED AT THIS TIME. ^REFER TO ^CHAPTER
10 FOR A LIST OF THE FILE NAMES CONTAINED ON THE UNBUNDLED DISTRIBUTION
TAPES.
.B
^IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOU RESTORE AND PRINT COPIES OF .^^DOC,
_.MAN, .RND, .RNH\\, AND .^^RNO\\ FILES IF THERE IS SUFFICIENT
SPACE. ^THEY CONTAIN USEFUL PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION. ^THE
_.^R^N? FILES MUST BE EXPANDED WITH ^^RUNOFF\\ BY TYPING:
.B;.I5
_.^^R RUNOFF
.B;.I5
*\\FILENAME
.B;.I5
*_^^C
.B
^ALL .^R^N^D FILES BECOME .^D^O^C FILES, ALL .^R^N^H FILES
BECOME .^H^L^P FILES, AND ALL .^^RNO\\ FILES BECOME .^M^E^M
FILES AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN RUN THROUGH ^^RUNOFF\\.
.LE;^IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS VERY FEW FREE DISK BLOCKS,
SELECTIVELY RESTORE ONLY ESSENTIAL MONITOR BUILDING FILES.
^WITH THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF FILES, YOU CAN ONLY BUILD AND START
THE MONITOR. ^YOU CANNOT ASSEMBLE ALL MONITOR SOURCE FILES
AND YOU CANNOT MERGE YOUR MODIFICATIONS WITH ^^SOUP\\. ^YOU
MAY WANT TO FREE ADDITIONAL DISK SPACE TO PERFORM
THESE FUNCTIONS.
.B
^TO RESTORE ONLY THE ESSENTIAL FILES, MOUNT THE 6.03 MONITOR TAPE AND FOLLOW
THE PROCEDURE BELOW TO RESTORE THE NECESSARY FILES:
.B;.LM12;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/REWIND
/INTERCHANGE
/DENSITY 800
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=BEWARE.603,COMMOD.MAC
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=COMMON.MAC,COMDEV.MAC,COMPIL.EXE
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=FGEN.HLP,BACKUP.EXE, MONGEN.EXE
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=PIP.EXE,S.MAC,TOP?10.REL,W?BOOT.EXE
"DONE
/_^C\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^THEN MOUNT THE ^^CUSP\\ TAPE AND FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE BELOW TO RESTORE
THE NECESSARY FILES:
.B;.LM14;.NF;.NJ
_.^^START
/REWIND
/INTERCHANGE
/DENSITY 800
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=BACKUP.EXE,FILEX.EXE
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=LINK.EXE,LNKSCN.EXE
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=LNKLOD.EXE,LNKMAP.EXE
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=LNKXIT.EXE,LNKERR.EXE
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=LNK999.EXE,MACRO.EXE
/RESTORE[10,7]*.*=PIP.EXE
"DONE
/_^C\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
WHERE ^^TOP?10.REL\\ IS THE SPECIFIC .^^REL\\ FILE NEEDED FOR
YOUR CONFIGURATION. (^SEE ^CHAPTER 9.)
.B
^IF YOU ARE BUILDING A 6.03 MONITOR FROM SCRATCH, ALSO
RESTORE THE FOLLOWING FILES:
.B;.I5
/^^RESTORE[10,7]*.*=LOGIN.EXE,LOGOUT.EXE,REACT.EXE\\
.ELS
^IF YOU HAVE ANY UNBUNDLED DISTRIBUTION TAPES (E.G., VIRTUAL
MEMORY), THESE TAPES MUST BE RESTORED AT THIS TIME. ^REFER TO
^CHAPTER 10 FOR A LIST OF THE FILE NAMES CONTAINED
ON THE UNBUNDLED DISTRIBUTION TAPES.
.B
^IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU PRINT AND READ THE LAST
MINUTE DOCUMENTATION FILE. ^YOU CAN SIMPLY LIST OR PRINT
^^BEWARE\\.603 OR, ASSUMING THE FILES ^^BWR603.RNO\\ AND
^^RUNOFF.EXE\\ HAVE BEEN RESTORED FROM THE TAPE, EXPAND THE
^^RUNOFF\\ FILE AND THEN PRINT IT.
.B
^EXPAND THE FILE WITH ^^RUNOFF\\ BY TYPING:
.B;.I5
_.^^RUN DSK:RUNOFF[10,7]
.B;.I5
*\\FILENAME
.B;.I5
*_^^C
.B
^ALL .^R^N^O FILES BECOME .^M^E^M FILES AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN
RUN THROUGH ^^RUNOFF\\.
.NUMBER CHAPTER 5
.CH ^© MONITOR SUPPORT PROGRAMS\\\&
.SP1
\\^IF YOUR INSTALLATION IS RUNNING A CURRENT MONITOR,
YOU SHOULD INSTALL MONITOR
SUPPORT PROGRAMS PRIOR TO BUILDING THE 6.03 MONITOR.
^IF YOU HAVE NOT PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED THE
LATEST VERSIONS OF MONITOR-RELATED PROGRAMS, OR YOU ARE BUILDING
THE 6.03 MONITOR FROM SCRATCH,
YOU MUST NOW COPY MONITOR SUPPORT PROGRAMS TO
^^SYS\\ WITH ^^PIP\\. ^NOTE THAT ^^ACCT.SYS\\ MUST BE ON ^^SYS\\
OR YOU WILL NOT BE ALLOWED TO ^^LOGIN\\. ^YOU SHOULD LOG IN UNDER [1,2] AND
TYPE:
.B;.I5
_.^^RUN DSK:PIP[10,7]
.B;.I5
*SYS:<155>/X=DSK:[10,7]\\FILENAME,...
.B
WHERE FILENAMES INCLUDE:
.B;.I5
^^DDT.REL,JOBDAT.REL,*.EXE,*.ATO
.I5
*.VMX (\\FOR VIRTUAL MEMORY MONITORS ONLY; IT IS ON THE ^^VM\\
.I5
#######UNBUNDLED TAPE)
.B
^SOME OF THE FILES MAY ALSO HAVE TO BE COPIED FROM [10,6].
.B
^ALSO, IF YOU DO NOT HAVE YOUR SYSTEM ACCOUNTING FILES
BUILT, COPY *.^^SYS\\ SPECIFYING PROTECTION <157>.
.B
^IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS FILE STRUCTURES OF DIFFERENT SPEEDS,
PUT THE FOLLOWING FILES ON THE FASTEST STRUCTURE (^^DSKA\\):
.B;.I5
^^DDT.REL,FORLIB.REL,BASIC.EXE,LIBOL.REL\\ (IF USING
.I5
NONREENTRANT ^^COBOL\\)
.B
^YOU MAY WANT TO PUT THE FOLLOWING FILES ON EVERY FILE
STRUCTURE:
.B;.I5
^^SYSTAT.EXE,REDALL.EXE,DSKRAT.EXE,DSKLST.EXE,
.I5
BACKUP.EXE\\
.B
BECAUSE THEY ARE NEEDED TO TRACK DOWN POSSIBLE DISK
HARDWARE PROBLEMS.
.NUMBER CHAPTER 6
.CH ^&WRITE BOOTS\&
.SP1
\\^YOU NOW MUST WRITE ^^BOOTS\\ ON DISK PACKS WITH ^^WTBOOT\\.
^^WTBOOT\\ IS A GENERIC NAME FOR ^^WABOOT, WIBOOT\\, AND ^^WLBOOT\\,
WHERE THE SECOND LETTER (^^A,I,L\\) CORRESPONDS TO
YOUR SYSTEM PROCESSOR (^^KA,KI,KL\\).
.B
^THIS STEP IS REQUIRED ON ALL SYSTEMS TO WRITE THE LATEST
VERSION OF ^^BOOTS\\ ONTO THE DISK PACKS.
.B
^^WTBOOT\\ CAN WRITE ^^BOOTS\\, A DISK BOOTSTRAP LOADER
PROGRAM, ON BLOCKS 0 AND 4 THROUGH 7 OF ALL DISK PACKS IN
THE SYSTEM. ^RUN ^^WTBOOT, WABOOT, WIBOOT\\, OR ^^WLBOOT\\
ONCE, THE FIRST TIME A NEW 6-SERIES
MONITOR IS BUILT.
^IT IS NECESSARY TO RUN ^^WTBOOT\\ AGAIN ONLY
IF THE DISKS ARE REFORMATTED OR IF THERE IS A NEW ^^BOOTS\\.
^^BOOTS\\ SHOULD BE WRITTEN ON EACH DISK PACK SO THAT THE
CRASH PROCEDURE WORKS.
.B
^WHEN WRITING ^^BOOTS\\ ON DISK PACKS FOR A ^^KL\\10 SYSTEM WITH
6.03, IT IS IMPORTANT THAT YOU USE THE ^^WLBOOT\\ DISTRIBUTED
WITH THE 6.03 MONITOR. ^THIS IS IMPORTANT BECAUSE PREVIOUS VERSIONS
OF ^^WLBOOT\\ WROTE IN BLOCK 0 OF THE DISK PACK, WHICH CONTAINS
THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM. ^WRITING IN BLOCK 0 WIPES OUT THE FRONT-END
BOOTSTRAP.
.B
^TO RUN ^^WTBOOT\\ LOG IN TO [1,2] AND TYPE:
.B;.I5
_.^^R W?BOOT\\
.B
^^W?BOOT\\ RESPONDS WITH:
.B;.I5
^^SELECT UNITS\\?
.B
WHERE YOU RESPOND WITH ^^NO\\ OR ^^YES\\. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^^NO\\, THE
DEFAULT ^^BOOT\\S WILL BE WRITTEN ON ALL DISK PACKS. ^IF YOU ARE USING
A ^^KL\\10, ^^W?BOOT\\ WILL NOT WRITE THE ^^READIN\\ LOADERS.
^IF NOT USING A ^^KL\\10, ^^W?BOOT\\ WILL WRITE THE DEFAULT ^^READIN\\
LOADER ON ALL ^^RS\\04S AND ^^RP\\0XS. ^NOTE THAT ^^RP\\0X INDICATES
^^RP04, RP05,\\ OR ^^RP\\06.
.B
^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^^YES\\, ^^W?BOOT\\ RESPONDS WITH:
.B;.I5
^^UNIT\\ UNIT-NAME
.B
^YOU ARE TO RESPOND WITH THE TYPE OF ^^BOOT\\S YOU WANT WRITTEN
ON EACH TYPE OF UNIT IN THE SYSTEM.
^YOU RESPOND WITH ^^DP, RP, R2, ZERO,\\ OR
^^SKIP\\.
.B;.LM10;.TS10;.I-10
^^DP\\ WRITES ^^RP02/RP03 BOOTS\\ ON THE PACK MOUNTED ON THAT UNIT.
.B;.I-10
^^RP\\ WRITES ^^RH10/RP0\\X ^^BOOTS\\ ON THE PACK MOUNTED ON
THAT UNIT.
.B;.I-10
^R2 WRITES ^^RH20/RP0\\X ^^BOOTS\\ ON THE PACK
MOUNTED ON THAT UNIT.
.B;.I-10
^^ZERO\\ PREVENTS THE MONITOR FROM READING ^^BOOTS\\ FROM THE
PACK MOUNTED ON THAT UNIT.
.B;.I-10
^^SKIP\\ PREVENTS ^^W?BOOT\\ FROM CHANGING THE
PACK MOUNTED ON THAT UNIT.
.B;.LM0
^IF YOU RESPOND WITH A CARRIAGE RETURN, ^^W?BOOT\\ WRITES
THE DEFAULT ^^BOOTS\\. ^THE DEFAULT IS ^^RP02/RP03 BOOTS\\
ON ^^RP02/RP03\\ PACKS, ^^RH10/RP0\\X ^^BOOTS\\ ON ^^RP0\\X PACKS
(I.E., ^^RH\\10S), ^^RH20/RP0\\X ^^BOOTS\\ ON ^^RH\\20 PACKS. ^FOR EACH
^^RS04\\ OR ^^RP0\\X, ^^W?BOOT\\ ASKS YOU IF THE ^^READIN\\ LOADER SHOULD BE
WRITTEN IN 18- OR 22-BIT MODE FORMAT. ^YOU RESPOND WITH ^^NONE\\,
18, 22, OR CARRIAGE RETURN.
.B;.LM10;.TS10;.I-10
^^NONE\\ IF NO ^^READIN\\ LOADER SHOULD BE WRITTEN ON BLOCK 0 (^^KL\\10).
.B;.I-10
22 IF THE ^^DF10C\\ IS NORMALLY IN 22-BIT MODE FORMAT.
.B;.I-10
18 IF THE UNIT IS NOT ON A CONTROLLER CONNECTED TO A ^^DF10C\\, OR
IF THE ^^DF10C\\ IS NORMALLY IN 18-BIT MODE FORMAT.
.B;.I-10
^^CR\\ FOR THE DEFAULT RESPONSE, WHICH IS 18-BIT MODE ON EVEN UNITS
AND 22-BIT MODE ON ODD UNITS.
.B;.LM0
^WHEN THE PROCEDURE IS COMPLETED, THE SYSTEM RESPONDS:
.B;.I5
^^EXIT\\
.B
^NOTE THAT ^^WTBOOT\\ WRITES ^^BOOTS\\ ONLY ON DISK PACKS
THAT ARE ON LINE AND NOT WRITE LOCKED. (^FOR MORE INFORMATION
ON ^^BOOTS\\, OR ON LOADING ^^BOOTS\\ WITH A PAPER TAPE, REFER
TO THE ^D^E^CSYSTEM-10
^OPERATOR'S ^GUIDE IN THE ^D^E^CSYSTEM-10 ^SOFTWARE
^NOTEBOOKS.)
.NUMBER CHAPTER 7
.CH ^&MERGE MODIFICATIONS\\\&
.SP1
\\^OMIT THIS STEP IF YOU ARE BUILDING AN UNMODIFIED ^D^E^C
MONITOR AND DO NOT INTEND TO MERGE ANY MODIFICATIONS DEVELOPED
AT YOUR INSTALLATION.
.B
^^SOUP (S\\OFTWARE ^UPDATING ^PACKAGE) IS A SET OF PROGRAMS
USED TO UPDATE SOURCE FILES. ^IT IS DESIGNED TO SIMPLIFY THE
MERGING OF CUSTOMER MODIFICATIONS WITH ^D^E^C-SUPPLIED FILES.
.B
^THE ^D^E^CSYSTEM-10 ^SOFTWARE ^UPDATING ^PACKAGE ^PROGRAMMER'S
^REFERENCE ^MANUAL IN THE ^D^E^CSYSTEM-10 ^SOFTWARE ^NOTEBOOKS
DESCRIBES IN DETAIL THE SET OF PROGRAMS IN THE ^^SOUP\\ PACKAGE
AND EXPLAINS HOW TO USE THEM. ^IF YOU HAVE SEVERAL MODIFICATIONS
TO BE MERGED WITH MANY SOURCE FILES, YOU MAY USE THE ^D^E^CSYSTEM-10
^SOFTWARE ^NOTEBOOK DOCUMENT ENTITLED ^^SOUP\\ING ^PARALLEL
^MONITOR ^DEVELOPMENTS ^TOGETHER (^^MULTI\\) AS A GUIDE.
.NT
^USE OF ^^SOUP\\ REQUIRES THAT THE APPROPRIATE SOURCE (.^M^A^C)
FILES HAVE BEEN RESTORED FROM THE DISTRIBUTION TAPE.
.B
^BE VERY FAMILIAR WITH ^^SOUP\\ BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO USE IT.
.EN
.PS67,70
.NUMBER CHAPTER 8
.CH ^&GENERATE A MONITOR WITH MONGEN\\\&
.SP1
.PS67,70;.SP1;.LM0;.RM70;.F;.J
.HL1 ^&INTRODUCTION\&
\\^THE ^MONITOR ^GENERATOR (^^MONGEN)\\ IS A DIALOGUE PROGRAM
ENABLING YOU TO CHOOSE THE SOFTWARE MOST APPROPRIATE FOR YOUR INSTALLATION
AND TO DEFINE YOUR HARDWARE CONFIGURATION.
.B
^THE DIALOGUE PRODUCES THE FILES NEEDED TO BUILD THE MONITOR, AND IT THEN
TAILORS THEM TO YOUR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION. ^PARAMETER ASSIGNMENTS
WITHIN THESE FILES DETERMINE HOW THE MONITOR DATA BASE MODULES
ARE ASSEMBLED. ^THE DIALOGUE CONSISTS OF QUESTIONS TYPED BY ^^MONGEN\\
ON YOUR TERMINAL AND YOUR ANSWERS FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN.
.B
^BEFORE RUNNING ^^MONGEN\\, YOU SHOULD
.LS;.LE;^BECOME ACQUAINTED WITH THE CURRENT VERSION OF THE ^^MONGEN\\
DIALOGUE.
.LE;^BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH YOUR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
.LE;^KNOW WHAT CHANGES YOU WISH TO MAKE TO THE MONITOR CURRENTLY RUNNING.
.ELS
.HL1 ^&MONGEN ORGANIZATION\&
\\^THE ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE IS DIVIDED INTO FOUR SECTIONS, EACH
ASKING QUESTIONS ABOUT A SPECIFIC ASPECT OF THE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
^THE FOUR SECTIONS ARE:
.B;.LM15;.TS15;.I-10
^^HDWGEN\\ WHICH DEFINES THE SYSTEM HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
(^SECTION 8.4)
.B;.I-10
^^TTYGEN\\ WHICH DEFINES THE SYSTEM TERMINAL CONFIGURATION
(^SECTION 8.5)
.B;.I-10
^^NETGEN\\ WHICH DEFINES THE SYSTEM NETWORK CONFIGURATION
(REFER TO ^SECTION 8.6)
.B;.I-10
^^FGEN\\ WHICH DEFINES THE SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES AND
OPTIONS (^SECTION 8.7)
.B;.LM0
^THE FIRST TIME YOU GENERATE THE FILES FOR A NEW MONITOR, YOU
SHOULD ANSWER THE QUESTIONS IN EACH OF THE FOUR SECTIONS. ^ON
SUBSEQUENT OCCASIONS, YOU CAN CHANGE ONLY ONE, TWO, OR THREE OF THE FOUR SECTIONS.
^THE NUMBER OF SECTIONS YOU CHANGE DEPENDS ON WHERE YOUR CHANGES ARE AND WHICH
SECTION(S) YOUR CHANGES AFFECT. ^YOU NEED ONLY ANSWER THE QUESTIONS IN THE SECTION
YOU ARE CHANGING.
.B
^AFTER YOU ANSWER THE QUESTIONS FOR THE FOUR SECTIONS OF ^^MONGEN\\,
FOUR FILES WILL BE GENERATED - - ^^HDWCNF.MAC, TTYCNF.MAC, NETCNF.MAC\\,
AND ^^F.MAC\\. ^THESE ARE THE DEFAULT NAMES OF THE FILES
CONTAINING YOUR ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE. ^YOU MAY
CHANGE THESE FILE NAMES BY RESPONDING TO QUESTION NUMBER 2 IN
^^HDWGEN, TTYGEN, NETGEN,\\ AND/OR ^^FGEN\\.
.B
^IF, AFTER GENERATING THE FOUR FILES, YOU WISH TO REDEFINE ONE OF
THEM, YOU CAN REANSWER THE QUESTIONS FOR THAT SECTION. ^THEN,YOU CAN ASSEMBLE THIS NEW FILE ALONG WITH THE OTHER THREE.
.B
^IN THIS CHAPTER, EACH ^^MONGEN\\ QUESTION IS DESCRIBED
WITHIN ITS APPROPRIATE SECTION.
.HL1 ^&EXECUTING MONGEN\&
\\^TO EXECUTE THE VERSION OF ^^MONGEN\\ ON ^^SYS\\:, TYPE THE FOLLOWING COMMAND:
.B;.I5
^^R#MONGEN\\
.B
^TO EXECUTE THE VERSION OF ^^MONGEN\\ ON YOUR DISK AREA,
TYPE THE FOLLOWING COMMAND:
.B;.I5
^^RUN#MONGEN\\
.B
^^MONGEN\\ WILL RESPOND WITH
.B;.I5
^^MONGEN#FOR#603#MONITORS
.I5
/HELP(PROMPT,SHORT,LONG):\\
.B
^^MONGEN\\ WISHES YOU TO INDICATE WHICH ONE OF THE THREE FOLLOWING DIALOGUE
MODES YOU WISH TO USE.
.B;.LM15;.TS15;.I-10
^^MODE ####################EFFECT\\
.B;.I-10
^^SHORT MONGEN\\ TYPES ONLY ABBREVIATED QUESTIONS ON YOUR TERMINAL.
^THIS MODE ASSUMES THAT YOU NEED NO EXPLANATION OF THE QUESTION AND
THAT YOU ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE CHOICE OF ANSWERS. ^^SHORT\\ MODE IS
RECOMMENDED ONLY FOR EXPERIENCED USERS OF
THIS VERSION OF ^^MONGEN\\.
.B;.I-10
^^PROMPT MONGEN\\ TYPES THE SAME ABBREVIATED QUESTION AS IN
^^SHORT\\ MODE, BUT ADDS, WITHIN PARENTHESES, A CHOICE OF ANSWERS.
(^NOTE THAT THE FIRST ITEM WITHIN THE PARENTHESES IS THE DEFAULT
ANSWER.)##^THIS MODE IS RECOMMENDED FOR USERS FAMILIAR
WITH THE ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE, BUT WHO WOULD PREFER TO HAVE THE
CHOICE OF ANSWERS TYPED WITH EACH QUESTION.
.B;.I-10
^^LONG MONGEN\\ TYPES THE QUESTION, THE CHOICE OF ANSWERS
WITHIN PARENTHESES, AND AN EXPLANATION OF THE QUESTION WITHIN
SQUARE BRACKETS. ^THIS MODE IS RECOMMENDED FOR ALL FIRST TIME
USERS OF THIS VERSION OF ^^MONGEN\\.
.B;.LM0
^THE MODE YOU CHOOSE WILL BE USED THROUGHOUT
THE DIALOGUE. ^TO CHANGE MODES DURING A ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE,
ANSWER A QUESTION BY TYPING
.B;.I5
^^/HELP\\
.B
^THIS ANSWER WILL CHANGE THE MODE TO THE NEXT LONGEST, BUT ONLY
FOR THE CURRENT QUESTION. ^TO CHANGE MODES FOR THE REST OF THE
DIALOGUE, TYPE
.B;.I5
^^/HELP\\:X
.B
WHERE X IS EITHER ^^SHORT, PROMPT\\, OR ^^LONG\\ (ABBREVIATED
^S,#^P, OR ^L).
.HL2 ^&^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE FORMAT\&
\\^^MONGEN\\ QUESTIONS AND RESPONSES ARE IN THE FORM:
.B;.I5
QUESTION(POSSIBLE#ANSWERS)#[EXPLANATION]:ANSWER
.B
^THE POSSIBLE ANSWER PORTION OF THIS FORMAT DESCRIPTION IS USUALLY
IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FORMS:
.B;.LM30;.TS30;.I-25
(MIN-MAX) ^LEGAL RANGE
.B;.I-25
(DEFAULT,MIN-MAX) ^DEFAULT RESPONSE FOLLOWED BY LEGAL RANGE
.B;.I-25
(^Y,^N) ^YES OR ^NO
.B;.I-25
(A,B,C,#...#Z) ^MULTIPLE CHOICE
.B;.LM0
^TYPE YOUR RESPONSE DIRECTLY AFTER THE COLON.
^WHEN YOU FINISH PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
^IF YOU WANT THE DEFAULT RESPONSE, PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY
IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE COLON. ^BECAUSE OF THE NATURE OF SOME ^^MONGEN\\
QUESTIONS, POSSIBLE ANSWERS ARE NOT OFFERED.
.B
^ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS REQUESTING CONSECUTIVE ^^TTY\\ LINE NUMBER
IDENTIFICATION CAN BE TYPED ON ONE LINE. ^FOR EXAMPLE:
.B;.LM25;.TS25;.I-20
1-10 SPECIFIES ^^TTY\\ LINE NUMBERS 1 THROUGH 10.
.B;.I-20
13 SPECIFIES ^^TTY\\ LINE NUMBER 13.
.B;.I-20
22-24 SPECIFIES ^^TTY\\ LINE NUMBERS 22 THROUGH 24.
.B;.LM0
^IF YOU TYPE AN ILLEGAL OR INAPPROPRIATE RESPONSE, ^^MONGEN\\
WILL TYPE AN ERROR MESSAGE AFTER WHICH YOU MAY RESPOND TO THE
QUESTION AGAIN. ^THE POSSIBLE ERROR MESSAGES ARE LISTED IN ^SECTION 8.19.
.HL2 ^&GENERATING \A NEW MONITOR\&
\\^AFTER TYPING THE COMMAND ^^R MONGEN\\ AND AFTER YOU RESPOND TO
THE ^^/HELP\\ QUESTION, ^^MONGEN\\ WILL TYPE
.B;.I5
1_^1##^^WHICH GEN (HDW, TTY, NET, F):\\
.FN4
.B
------------------
.BR
1.#^NOTE THAT ALL QUESTIONS WITHIN THIS DOCUMENT ARE PRECEDED
WITH A NUMBER. ^THESE NUMBERS ARE USED FOR REFERENCE ONLY;
THEY ARE NOT PRINTED BY ^^MONGEN\\.
.END FOOTNOTE
.B
^RESPOND WITH EITHER ^^HDW, TTY, NET\\, OR ^F TO INDICATE WHICH
SECTION YOU WISH TO CONFIGURE. ^FOR EXAMPLE, IF YOU RESPOND
WITH ^^HDW, MONGEN\\ WILL START TYPING THE ^^HDWGEN\\ QUESTIONS.
^WHEN THE ^^HDWGEN MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE HAS BEEN COMPLETED,
QUESTION NUMBER ONE WILL BE RETYPED REQUESTING YOU TO TYPE ANOTHER
SECTION NAME.
.HL1 ^&HDWGEN\&
\\^^HDWGEN\\ IS THE SECTION CONTAINING QUESTIONS
ABOUT THE CENTRAL PROCESSOR(S), DISKLIKE STORAGE DEVICES,
REAL-TIME DEVICES, AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES.
.B;.LM20;.TS5,20;.I-20
2 ^^OUTPUT (DSK:HDWCNF.MAC\\):
.B
^IF YOU ACCEPT THE FILE ^^HDWCNF.MAC\\ AND DEVICE ^^DSK\\: AS THE
MEDIA FOR STORING YOUR ANSWERS TO ^^MONGEN\\, PRESS THE RETURN KEY.
^IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THEM, TYPE YOUR PREFERRED DEVICE NAME, FILE NAME,
AND PROJECT/PROGRAMMER NUMBER.
.B2;.I-20
3 ^^DECSYSTEM10 (1040,1050,1055,1070,1077,1080,1088\\):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE TYPE OF SYSTEM YOU ARE CONFIGURING.
.B;.TS25,45;.NF;.NJ
^TYPE OF ^SYSTEM ^RESPONSE
.B
^^KA10 CPU (\\SMALL) ##1040
^^KA10 CPU (\\LARGE) ##1050
DUAL-^^KA10 CPU\\S ##1055
^^KI10 CPU\\ ##1070
DUAL-^^KI10 CPU\\S ##1077
^^KL10 CPU\\ ##1080
DUAL-^^KL10 CPU\\S ##1088
.B2;.LM20;.TS5,20;.F;.J;.I-20
4 ^^SYSTEM NAME:\\
.B
^RESPOND TO THIS QUESTION WITH YOUR SYSTEM NAME IN 24 CHARACTERS OR LESS.
^THIS SYSTEM NAME IS THE 'BANNER' PRINTED WHEN YOU ISSUE THE ^^INITIA\\
COMMAND. ^FOR EXAMPLE, ^^KG77A KL10 _#1026.\\
.B2;.I-20
5 ^^CPU0 SERIAL _# (1-10000):
.B
R\\ESPOND WITH ^^CPU0\\'S SERIAL NUMBER, WHICH FALLS INTO THE RANGE 1 TO 10000.
^^MONGEN\\ WILL REPEAT THIS QUESTION ONCE FOR EACH PROCESSOR IN YOUR SYSTEM.
.B2;.I-20
5^a ^^CPU1 SERIAL _#(1-10000\\):
.B
^RESPOND WITH ^^CPU1\\'S SERIAL NUMBER, WHICH FALLS INTO THE RANGE 1 TO 10000.
(^THIS QUESTION IS typed only IF YOU SPECIFIED IN QUESTION 3
THAT YOU have A DUAL-PROCESSOR SYSTEM.)
.b2;.i-20
6 ^^_# DK10'S ON CPU0 (1,0-2\\):
.B
^IF YOUR PROCESSOR IS A ^K^L10, this question will not be typed unless you answer
^N TO QUESTION 8.
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^D^K10 REAL-TIME CLOCKS FOR ^C^P^U0.
^THE DEFAULT NUMBER IS ONE; THE MAXIMUM IS TWO.
(^THE ^^DK10\\ REAL-TIME CLOCK KEEPS TIME IN UNITS OF 10 MICROSECONDS.)
^IF YOU HAVE A dual PROCESSOR SYSTEM, THIS QUESTION WILL BE repeated.
.B2;.I-20
6^a ^^_# DK10'S ON CPU1 (1,0-2\\):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^DK10\\ REAL-TIME CLOCKS FOR ^^CPU1.\\
(^THIS QUESTION IS typed only IF YOU SPECIFIED IN QUESTION 3 THAT YOU have
A DUAL-PROCESSOR SYSTEM.)
.b2;.i-20
7 ^^EXCLUDE MONITOR OVERHEAD FROM USER RUN TIME (Y,N\\):
.B
^answer ^Y (^YES) OR ^N (^NO).
^the answer to this question IS INDEPENDENT OF WHETHER TIME ACCOUNTING IS PERFORMED
WITH THE LINE FREQUENCY CLOCK (50 OR 60 ^HERTZ)
OR THE REAL-TIME CLOCK (100000 ^HERTZ). ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^Y,
USERS WILL RECEIVE A MORE ACCURATE ACCOUNTING OF THEIR PROCESSOR
USAGE, BECAUSE USER RUNTIME IS REPORTED INDEPENDENT OF SYSTEM LOADING.
^HOWEVER, ALL INSTALLATIONS THAT CHARGE THEIR CUSTOMERS
FOR PROCESSOR USAGE SHOULD BE AWARE THAT
THE EXCLUSION OF MONITOR OVERHEAD WILL DECREASE THE REPORTED USER RUNTIME
BY 10 TO 30 PERCENT.
.b
^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^N, MONITOR OVERHEAD WILL BE
INCLUDED IN RUN-TIME STATISTICS. ^WHETHER YOU RESPOND WITH ^Y OR ^N TO THIS
QUESTION, MONITOR OVERHEAD WILL BE REPORTED AS A SEPARATE STATISTIC THAT MAY BE
USED BY THE SYSTEM MANAGER IN DETERMINING THE AMOUNT OF ^^CPU\\TIME SPENT
FOR OVERHEAD.
.b
^WITH ^^EBOX/MBOX\\ ACCOUNTING (^K^L10 SYSTEMS ONLY), METERS ARE TURNED OFF AT THE BEGINNING OF THE
OVERHEAD PERIOD AND TURNED ON AGAIN AT THE END.
^IF YOUR SYSTEM IS NOT A ^^KL\\10 (1080 SERIES), JUMP TO QUESTION NUMBER 10.
.B2;.I-20
8 ^^EBOX/MBOX TIME ACCOUNTING (Y,N\\):
.B
^THIS QUESTION is TYPED ONLY IF YOU RESPONDED TO QUESTION NUMBER 3 WITH 1080 (1088, 1090, 1099).
^answer ^Y OR ^N. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^Y, RUN-TIME ACCOUNTING WILL BE COMPUTED USING THE
^^KL10\\ INTERNAL CLOCKS AND QUESTION NUMBER 9 WILL BE TYPED.
^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^N,
THE NEXT QUESTION TYPED WILL BE QUESTION NUMBER 6. ^FOR MAXIMUM
USER RUN-TIME REPRODUCIBILITY, YOU SHOULD ANSWER ^Y TO BOTH THIS
QUESTION AND QUESTION NUMBER 9.
.B2;.I-20
9 ^^EXCLUDE PI TIME FROM USER RUN TIME (Y,N\\):
.B
^THIS QUESTION is TYPED ONLY IF YOU RESPONDED WITH 1080 TO QUESTION NUMBER 3 AND ^Y TO QUESTION
NUMBER 7. ^answer ^Y OR ^N. ^IF YOUR RESPONSE IS ^Y,
THE ^^EBOX\\ AND THE ^^MBOX\\ ACCOUNTING CLOCKS WILL BE STOPPED WHENEVER A ^PRIORITY ^INTERRUPT
IS IN PROGRESS. ^FOR MAXIMUM USER RUN-TIME REPRODUCIBILITY,
you should answer ^y TO BOTH THIS QUESTION AND QUESTION NUMBER 8.
.B2;.I-20
10 ^^HIGH PRECISION TIME ACCOUNTING (Y,N\\):
.B
^THIS QUESTION is TYPED ONLY IF YOU RESPONDED TO QUESTION 6 AND/OR QUESTION 6^A
WITH A VALUE EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 1.
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N TO THIS QUESTION.
^IF ^Y, MORE PRECISE RUN-TIME MEASUREMENTS WILL BE GIVEN
BECAUSE THE SYSTEM WILL USE 10-MICROSECOND TIME ACCOUNTING. ^THIS
WILL MORE ACCURATELY REFLECT REAL ^^CPU\\-TIME,
INDEPENDENT OF CONTEXT SWITCHING.
(^THEREFORE, A COMPUTE-BOUND JOB IS NOT CHARGED FOR A WHOLE 60TH OF A SECOND,
EVEN THOUGH AN ^I/^O-BOUND JOB RAN DURING THAT TIME INTERVAL.)
^IF ^N, QUESTION NUMBER 11 WILL BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
11 ^^DK10 SOFTWARE (Y,N\\):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS TYPED ONLY IF YOU RESPONDED WITH ^N IN RESPONSE TO QUESTION NUMBER 10
AND A VALUE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 1 IN RESPONSE TO QUESTION NUMBER 6 AND/OR
QUESTION NUMBER 6^A.
^TO INCLUDE THE REAL-TIME CLOCK SERVICE ROUTINE, ANSWER ^Y;
TO OMIT IT, ANSWER ^N. ^THIS DEVICE IS NOT AVAILABLE TO A USER
PROGRAM UNLESS IT ISSUES AN ^^RTTRP\\ MONITOR CALL. ^THE SERVICE
ROUTINE IS USED ONLY FOR HIGH-PRECISION TIME ACCOUNTING.
.B2;.I-20
12 _# ^^DATA CHANNELS (2,1-8\\):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF DATA CHANNELS IN YOUR SYSTEM
(^^DF10\\S, ^^DF10C\\S, ^^DX10\\S, OR ^^RH\\20S FOR DISK OR TAPE). ^THE DEFAULT IS 2;
THE MAXIMUM IS 8.
.NT
^QUESTIONS 13 THROUGH 23 ARE REPEATED ONCE FOR EACH DATA CHANNEL
YOU SPECIFIED IN RESPONSE TO QUESTION 12.
.EN
.I-20
13 ^^CHANNEL \N TYPE (DF10,DF10C,DX10,RH20):\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE TYPE OF CHANNEL N
(^^DF10,DF10C\\ OR ^^DX10).\\ ^THIS QUESTION
IS ASKED ONCE FOR EACH DATA CHANNEL THAT YOU SPECIFIED IN
RESPONSE TO QUESTION NUMBER 12. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^^DF10\\
OR ^^DF10C\\,
READ QUESTIONS 14 THROUGH 20^B. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH
^^DX10,\\ READ QUESTIONS 21 AND 21^A. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^^RH\\20,
READ QUESTIONS 22 THROUGH 23^B.
.B
^NOTE THAT CHANNEL N CORRESPONDS TO THE FIRST, SECOND, THIRD#...#CHANNEL
YOU CONFIGURE. ^THE N DOES NOT NECESSARILY CORRESPOND TO A HARDWIRED CHANNEL
NUMBER.
.B2;.I-20
14 _# ^^RC10S\\ (0-2):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF CONTROLLERS FOR THE ^^RD10\\
^BURROUGHS DISK AND ^^RM10B\\ ^BRYANT DRUMS ON CHANNEL NUMBER
N. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0, QUESTION NUMBER 14^A WILL NOT BE PRINTED.
.B2;.I-20
14^A _# ^^UNITS ON FH\\X (1-4):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED N TIMES (WHERE
N IS YOUR RESPONSE TO QUESTION NUMBER 14.) ^EACH TIME THE
QUESTION IS TYPED, X WILL BE INCREMENTED TO THE NEXT
ALPHABETIC IN SEQUENCE STARTING WITH ^A (E.G., ^F^H^A, ^F^H^B,...).
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF DISKS
AND/OR DRUMS ASSOCIATED WITH CONTROLLER ^^FH\\X.
.B2;.I-20
15 _# ^^RH10S FOR RS04'S (0-3):\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF CONTROLLERS FOR THE ^^RS04\\
SWAPPING DISKS ON CHANNEL NUMBER N. ^IF YOU RESPOND
WITH 0, QUESTION NUMBER 15^A WILL NOT BE TYPED. ^BOTH ^R^S04 AND
^R^P04 DISK UNITS HAVE ^R^H10 CONTROLLERS; ^R^S04S HAVE THE LOWER
DEVICE CODES BETWEEN THE TWO.
.B2;.I-20
15^A _# ^^UNITS ON FS\\X (1-8):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED N TIMES (WHERE N IS YOUR RESPONSE
TO QUESTION NUMBER 15). ^EACH TIME THE QUESTION IS TYPED, X WILL
BE INCREMENTED TO THE NEXT ALPHABETIC IN SEQUENCE STARTING WITH
^A (E.G., ^F^S^A, ^F^S^B,...). ^RESPOND
WITH THE NUMBER OF SWAPPING DISKS ASSOCIATED WITH CONTROLLER
^^FS\\X ON CHANNEL N.
.B2;.I-20
16 _# ^^RH10S FOR RP04'S\\ (0-3):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF CONTROLLERS FOR ^^RP04\\ AND ^^RP\\06 DISK PACK
UNITS ON CHANNEL NUMBER N. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0, QUESTION
NUMBER 16^A WILL NOT BE TYPED. ^BOTH ^R^S04 AND ^R^P04 DISK UNITS
HAVE ^R^H10 CONTROLLERS; ^R^S04S HAVE THE LOWER DEVICE CODES
OF THE TWO.
.B2;.I-20
16^A _# ^^UNITS ON RP\\X (1-8):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED N TIMES (WHERE N IS YOUR RESPONSE
TO QUESTION NUMBER 16). ^EACH TIME THE QUESTION IS TYPED, X
WILL BE INCREMENTED TO THE NEXT ALPHABETIC IN SEQUENCE STARTING
WITH ^A (E.G., ^R^P^A, ^R^P^B,...).
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF DISK PACKS ASSOCIATED WITH
CONTROLLER ^^RP\\X.
.B2;.I-20
17 _# ^^RP10S(0-3):\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF CONTROLLERS THAT ARE IN
THE SYSTEM FOR ^^RP\\02 AND ^^RP\\03 DISK
PACK UNITS ON CHANNEL NUMBER N. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0,
QUESTION NUMBER 17^A WILL NOT BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
17^A _# ^^UNITS ON DP\\X (1-8).
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED N TIMES (WHERE N IS YOUR RESPONSE
TO QUESTION NUMBER 17). ^EACH TIME THE QUESTION IS TYPED,
X IS INCREMENTED TO THE NEXT ALPHABETIC IN SEQUENCE STARTING WITH
^A (E.G., ^D^P^A, ^D^P^B,...).
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF DISK PACK UNITS ASSOCIATED WITH
CONTROLLER ^^DP\\X.
.B2;.I-20
18 _# ^^TM\\10^^BS\\ (0-2):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF CONTROLLERS THAT ARE IN
THE SYSTEM FOR ^^NRZ\\^I-ONLY DRIVES ON CHANNEL N. ^IF YOU
RESPOND WITH 0, QUESTION NUMBER 18^A WILL NOT BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
18^A _# ^^UNITS ON MT\\X (1-8):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED N TIMES (WHERE N IS YOUR RESPONSE
TO QUESTION NUMBER 18). ^EACH TIME THIS QUESTION IS TYPED,
X IS INCREMENTED TO THE NEXT ALPHABETIC IN SEQUENCE STARTING
WITH ^A (E.G., ^M^T^A, ^M^T^B,...).
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF MAGTAPE UNITS ASSOCIATED WITH
CONTROLLER ^^MT\\X.
.B2;.I-20
19 _# ^^TC10CS \\(0-1):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS TAPE CONTROLLERS
FOR ^^TU\\42S AND ^^TU\\43S ON CHANNEL N.
^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0, QUESTION NUMBER 19^A WILL NOT BE
TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
19^A _# ^^UNITS ON MT\\X (1-8):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED N TIMES (WHERE N IS YOUR RESPONSE
TO QUESTION NUMBER 19). ^EACH TIME THIS QUESTION IS TYPED,
X IS INCREMENTED TO THE NEXT ALPHABETIC IN SEQUENCE. ^RESPOND
WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^TU\\42S AND ^^TU\\43S ASSOCIATED WITH
CONTROLLER ^^MT\\X.
.B2;.I-20
20 _# ^^RH10'S FOR TM02'S\\ (0-2)
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF MASS-BUS TAPE CONTROLLERS FOR ^^TU\\16S
AND ^^TU\\45S ON CHANNEL N. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 1 OR 2, QUESTIONS
20^A AND 20^B WILL BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
20^A ^^HOW MANY TM02'S ON RH10\\ _#N (1-8)
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF SUBUNITS (TAPE DRIVES) ON EACH UNIT.
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED ONCE FOR EACH ^^RH\\10 SPECIFIED IN QUESTION 20.
.B2;.I-20
20^B ^^HOW MANY DRIVES ON TM02\\ N (1-8)
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF DRIVES ON THE SPECIFIED ^^TM\\02.
.B;.LM0
^IF YOU HAVE MORE DATA CHANNELS TO CONFIGURE, REFER TO QUESTION 13,
OTHERWISE, REFER TO QUESTION 24. ^QUESTIONS 14 THROUGH 20^B
WILL BE REPEATED IF YOU HAVE TO CONFIGURE MORE ^^DF\\10 OR ^^DF10C\\ CHANNELS.
.B2;.LM20;.I-20
21 _# ^^CONTROLLERS\\ (0-1):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^TX\\01 OR ^^TX\\02 CONTROLLERS FOR
^^TU\\70 TAPE DRIVES. ^THIS QUESTION IS TYPED ONLY WHEN YOU HAVE
CONFIGURED A ^^DX\\10 DATA CHANNEL. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 1, QUESTION
21^A IS TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
21^A _# ^^UNITS ON MT\\X (1-8):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF UNITS ON ^^TU70\\ TAPE DRIVE.
.B;.LM0
^IF YOU HAVE MORE DATA CHANNELS TO CONFIGURE, REFER TO QUESTION 13.
^OTHERWISE, REFER TO QUESTION 24. ^QUESTIONS 21 AND 21^A WILL BE
REPEATED IF YOU HAVE MORE ^^DX\\10 CHANNELS TO CONFIGURE.
.B2;.LM20;.TS5,20;.I-20
22 _# ^^RH20S\\ FOR ^^RP04'S, RP06'S \\(0-1):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^RH\\20 CONTROLLERS FOR ^^RP\\04
AND ^^RP\\06 DISK PACK UNITS ON CHANNEL N. ^THIS QUESTION IS
TYPED ONLY IF YOU CONFIGURE AN ^^RH\\20 CHANNEL. ^IF YOU RESPOND
WITH 1, QUESTION 22^A IS TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
22^A _# ^^UNITS ON RP\\X (1-8):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF UNITS ASSOCIATED WITH CONTROLLER ^^RP\\X.
.B2;.I-20
23 _# ^^RH20'S FOR TM02'S (0-1):\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER MASS-BUS CONTROLLERS FOR ^^TU\\16S AND
^^TU\\45S ON CHANNEL N. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 1, QUESTIONS 23^A
AND 23^B WILL BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
23^A ^^HOW MANY TM02'S ON RH20 _# \\X (1-8):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF TAPE DRIVES (SUBUNITS) ASSOCIATED
WITH ^^RH\\20 NUMBER X.
.B;.I-20
23^B ^^HOW MANY DRIVES ON TM02\\ X (1-8):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED ONCE FOR EACH ^^TM02\\ YOU
SPECIFIED IN RESPONSE TO QUESTION 23^A.
.B;.LM0
^IF YOU HAVE MORE DATA CHANNELS TO CONFIGURE, REFER TO QUESTION
13. ^OTHERWISE, REFER TO QUESTION 24. ^QUESTIONS 22 THROUGH 23^B
WILL BE REPEATED IF YOU HAVE MORE ^^RH\\20 CHANNELS TO CONFIGURE.
.B2;.LM20;.I-20
24 _# ^^TM10AS\\ (0,0-2):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^I/^O ^BUS-TYPE CONTROLLERS FOR ^^NRZI\\-ONLY
DRIVES. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0, QUESTION 24^A WILL NOT BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
24^A _#^^UNITS ON MT\\X (1-8):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED N TIMES (WHERE N IS YOUR RESPONSE
TO QUESTION 24). ^EACH TIME THIS QUESTION IS TYPED, X IS INCREMENTED
TO THE NEXT ALPHABETIC IN SEQUENCE. ^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF
MAGTAPE UNITS ASSOCIATED WITH ^^MT\\X.
.B;.LM0
^FOR EACH MAGNETIC TAPE YOU HAVE CONFIGURED, ^^MONGEN\\ ASKS
IF IT IS A 7-TRACK UNIT AND IF IT IS CAPABLE OF 6250 BITS/INCH DENSITY.
.B;.LM6
^FIRST, ^^MONGEN\\ PRINTS THE FOLLOWING:
.B;.LM10
^^SPECIFY WHICH DRIVES (M-N) ARE 7-TRACK DRIVES. [TYPE ONE NUMBER (M) OR ONE
RANGE (M-N) OR ALL ON SEPARATE LINES. TYPE AN EXTRA CARRIAGE RETURN
WHEN THROUGH.]\\
.B
^^FOR CONTROLLER MTA
.BR
_.
.BR
_.
.BR
_.
.B
FOR CONTROLLER MTB
.BR
_.
.BR
_.
.BR
_.\\
.B;.LM6
^AFTER ^^MONGEN\\ HAS ASKED THE ABOVE QUESTION FOR EACH MAGNETIC TAPE DRIVE,
IT THEN ASKS THE FOLLOWING QUESTION FOR EACH TAPE DRIVE:
.B;.LM10
^^SPECIFY WHICH TAPE DRIVES (M-N) ARE CAPABLE OF 6250 BPI DENSITIES. [TYPE ONE
NUMBER (M) OR ONE RANGE (M-N) OR ALL ON SEPARATE LINES. TYPE AN EXTRA CARRIAGE
RETURN WHEN THROUGH.]
.B
FOR CONTROLLER MTA
.BR
_.
.BR
_.
.BR
_.
.B
FOR CONTROLLER MTB\\
.BR
_.
.BR
_.
.BR
_.
.B2;.LM20;.I-20
25 _# ^^JOBS \\(1-N):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF JOBS ATTACHED AND/OR DETACHED.
^DO NOT INCLUDE THE NULL JOB. ^EACH JOB REQUIRES APPROXIMATELY
1/4 OF 1^K CORE, SO SPECIFY ONLY THE NUMBER OF JOBS NEEDED.
.B2;.I-20
26 ^^MAX. K OF CORE FOR EACH JOB\\ (0, 0-N):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS TYPED ONLY FOR ^K^A10-BASED SYSTEMS; QUESTION
26^A IS TYPED FOR ^K^I10 AND ^K^L10-BASED SYSTEMS.
^RESPOND WITH THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF CORE THAT ANY ONE JOB MAY USE.
^THIS VALUE IS SPECIFIED IN NUMBER OF 1^K CORE BLOCKS.
^A RESPONSE OF 0 INDICATES ALL OF CORE.
.B2;.I-20
26^A ^^MAX. P OF CORE FOR EACH JOB\\ (256-512):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS TYPED ONLY FOR ^K^I10/^K^L10 SYSTEMS.
^RESPOND WITH THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF CORE WHICH ANY ONE JOB MAY USE.
^THIS VALUE IS SPECIFIED IN NUMBER OF 512-WORD PAGES. ^A RESPONSE
OF 0 INDICATES ALL OF CORE.
.B2;.I-20
27 ^^_# K TOTAL SYSTEM CORE (32-4096\\):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS TYPED ONLY FOR ^K^A10-BASED SYSTEMS.
^RESPOND WITH THE AMOUNT OF MEMORY THE SYSTEM IS EXPECTED TO USE.
^AT MONITOR INITIALIZATION TIME, THE OPERATOR WILL BE ASKED IF THE
ACTUAL AMOUNT OF MEMORY IS LESS THAN YOUR RESPONSE TO THIS QUESTION.
^YOU SHOULD, THEREFORE, SPECIFY THE CORRECT AMOUNT. ^IF THIS VALUE IS
SMALLER THAN THE AMOUNT OF MEMORY YOU WANT TO PUT ON LINE, THE
MONITOR WILL NOT ALLOW THE OPERATOR TO PUT IT ON LINE. ^IF MORE THAN 256^K
IS DESIRED, YOU MUST SET THE FEATURE TEST SWITCH ^^FT22BIT\\ TO -1.
.B2;.I-20
27^A _#^^P TOTAL SYSTEM CORE\\ (256-4095):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS TYPED ONLY FOR ^K^I10/^K^L10-BASED SYSTEMS.
^RESPOND WITH THE AMOUNT OF MEMORY THE SYSTEM IS EXPECTED TO USE.
^AT MONITOR INITIALIZATION TIME, THE OPERATOR WILL BE ASKED IF THE
ACTUAL AMOUNT OF MEMORY IS LESS THAN YOUR RESPONSE TO THIS QUESTION.
^YOU SHOULD, THEREFORE, SPECIFY THE CORRECT AMOUNT. ^IF THIS VALUE
IS SMALLER THAN THE AMOUNT OF MEMORY YOU WANT TO PUT ON LINE, THE
MONITOR WILL NOT ALLOW THE OPERATOR TO PUT IT ON LINE.
.B2;.I-20
28 ^^CLOCK TICKS PER SECOND (60,50\\):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF CLOCK TICKS PER SECOND (POWER LINE FREQUENCY).
^IN THE ^U.^S., THE RESPONSE SHOULD BE 60; IN MOST OTHER COUNTRIES, THE RESPONSE SHOULD BE 50.
^IF YOUR SYSTEM HAS A ^^KL10\\ PROCESSOR, YOU MAY SPECIFY EITHER 50 OR 60;
YOUR RESPONSE WILL DETERMINE THE FREQUENCY OF CLOCK INTERRUPTS, WHICH ARE GENERATED BY THE
^^KL10\\ INTERRUPT TIMER.
^IN ^^KA10\\- AND ^^KI10\\-BASED SYSTEMS, YOUR RESPONSE MUST CONFORM TO THE ACTUAL
FREQUENCY OF THE SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY.
.B2;.I-20
29 ^^_# REAL-TIME DEVICES (0,0-77\\):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF REAL-TIME DEVICES THAT CAN BE PUT ON A
PRIORITY INTERRUPT CHANNEL SIMULTANEOUSLY. ^THE DEFAULT IS ZERO; THE MAXIMUM IS 77.
^IF YOUR RESPONSE IS 0, QUESTION 29^A WILL BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
29^A ^^ALLOW JOBS TO BE LOCKED IN CORE (Y,N)\\:
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^A RESPONSE OF ^Y WILL ALLOW JOBS TO BE LOCKED
IN CORE; ^N WILL NOT ALLOW JOBS TO BE LOCKED IN CORE AND QUESTION
30 OR 30^A WILL NOT BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
30 ^^_# K MIN GUARANTEED AMONG JOBS NOT LOCKED IN CORE (0, 0-256):\\
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS TYPED ONLY FOR ^K^A10-BASED SYSTEMS.
^RESPOND WITH A VALUE INDICATING THE AMOUNT OF CORE GUARANTEED
AMONG ALL JOBS THAT ARE NOT LOCKED IN CORE.
^THE DEFAULT IS 0, WHICH INDICATES ALL OF CORE. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0
AND ANSWER ^Y TO QUESTION 29^A, NO JOBS WILL BE ALLOWED TO LOCK IN CORE.
^THE VALUE YOU SPECIFY IN QUESTION 30 CAN BE OVERRIDDEN BY A ^^SET CORMIN\\
COMMAND.
.B2;.I-20
30^A _##^^P MIN GUARANTEED AMONG JOBS NOT LOCKED IN CORE (0,0#-#\\MAX):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS TYPED ONLY FOR ^K^I10/^K^L10-BASED SYSTEMS.
^RESPOND WITH A VALUE INDICATING THE AMOUNT OF CORE GUARANTEED
AMONG ALL JOBS THAT ARE NOT LOCKED IN CORE. ^THE DEFAULT IS 0,
WHICH INDICATES ALL OF CORE. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0 AND ANSWER ^Y TO
QUESTION 29^A, NO JOBS WILL BE ALLOWED TO LOCK IN CORE. ^THE VALUE
YOU SPECIFY IN QUESTION 30^A CAN BE OVERRIDDEN BY A ^^SET CORMIN\\
COMMAND.
.B2;.I-20
31 ^^_# HIGH PRIORITY QUEUES (0,0-15\\):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF HIGH PRIORITY QUEUES IN YOUR SYSTEM.
^THE DEFAULT IS 0; THE MAXIMUM IS 15.
.B2;.I-20
32 ^^CCL COMMANDS TO STAY IN CORE (Y,N\\):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y ALLOWS SYSTEM PROGRAMS
TO PASS COMMANDS TO ONE ANOTHER VIA CORE
(^^TMPCOR\\ MONITOR CALL) RATHER THAN DISK.
^THE PREFERRED ANSWER TO THIS QUESTION IS ^Y.
.B2;.I-20
33 ^^METER (Y,N\):\\
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y INCLUDES THE ^^METER\\ MONITOR CALL SOFTWARE IN YOUR
SYSTEM, WHICH ENABLES PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS METERING.
^N OMITS THE ^^METER\\ MONITOR CALL SOFTWARE FROM YOUR SYSTEM.
.B2;.I-20
34 ^^SYSCHK (Y,N\\):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y WILL ALLOW AN INITIAL HARDWARE
INTEGRITY CHECK TO BE PERFORMED AT MONITOR INITIALIZATION TIME.
^N MAKES IT IMPOSSIBLE FOR THIS CHECK TO BE PERFORMED.
.B2;.I-20
32 ^^MSGSER (Y,N\\):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y CAUSES THE MULTIPLEXED-CHANNEL (^M^P^X) SOFTWARE TO BE LOADED.
^^MPX\\ ALLOWS
MORE THAN ONE DEVICE TO BE ASSOCIATED WITH A GIVEN ^I/^O
CHANNEL. (^THIS FEATURE IS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION OF ^^TYPESET-10\\
AND/OR ^^MCS-10\\.) ^N PREVENTS THE LOADING OF THE ^M^P^X SOFTWARE.
.B2;.I-20
36 ^^PSISER (Y,N\\):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y CAUSES
THE ^^PSISER\\ PROGRAM TO BE LOADED. ^^PSISER\\ PROVIDES THE SOFTWARE INTERRUPT
SYSTEM, WHICH ENABLES USERS TO SPECIFY CONDITIONS FOR WHICH
AN INTERRUPT IS TO OCCUR.
^^^PSISER\\ IS REQUIRED FOR THE OPERATION OF ^M^C^S-10, ^^GALAXY\\, AND/OR ^^TYPESET\\-10.
^N PREVENTS THE LOADING OF ^^PSISER\\.
.B2;.I-20
37 ^^IPCF (Y,N\\):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y CAUSES ^^IPCF\\
(^INTER-^PROCESS ^COMMUNICATION ^FACILITY) TO BE LOADED.
^^IPCF\\ ALLOWS JOBS AND/OR SYSTEM PROCESSES TO COMMUNICATE WITH EACH
OTHER. ^^IPCF\\ IS REQUIRED FOR THE OPERATION OF ^M^C^S-10, ^^GALAXY\\, AND/OR
^^TYPESET\\-10. ^N PREVENTS THE LOADING OF THE ^^IPCF\\ SOFTWARE.
.B2;.I-20
38 ^^ENQ/DEQ (Y,N\\):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y CAUSES THE ^^ENQ/DEQ\\ SOFTWARE TO BE LOADED.
^THIS SOFTWARE PROVIDES SYNCHRONIZATION PRIMITIVES USED BY ^^COBOL\\
AND FOR SIMULTANEOUS FILE UPDATES.
^N PREVENTS THE LOADING OF THE ^^ENQ/DEQ\\ SOFTWARE.
.B2;.I-20
39 _# ^^CDRS\\ (1,0-2):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF CARD READERS TO
BE CONFIGURED. ^THE DEFAULT IS 1; THE MAXIMUM IS 2.
.B2;.I-20
40 ^^CDP \\(^Y,^N):
.B
^RESPOND ^Y OR ^N. ^Y WILL PROVIDE SOFTWARE
FOR A CARD PUNCH; ^N WILL NOT.
.B2;.I-20
41 ^^DIS (Y,N):\\
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y PROVIDES
SOFTWARE FOR A DISPLAY DEVICE (E.G., ^V^P10, 340, 30, ^V^B10^C); ^N WILL NOT.
^THE DISPLAY DEVICE ASKED ABOUT HERE IS NOT TO BE CONFUSED
WITH A DISPLAY TERMINAL. ^IF YOU ANSWER ^Y, QUESTION
NUMBER 41^A WILL BE TYPED. ^QUESTION NUMBER 41^A
WILL NOT BE TYPED IF YOU ANSWER WITH ^N.
.B2;.I-20
41^A ^^TYPE \\(^^VP10,340,VB10C\\):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE TYPE OF DISPLAY DEVICE YOU HAVE
(^^VP10, 340,\\ OR ^^VB10C).\\ ^IF YOU HAVE TYPE 30,
ANSWER ^^VP10\\.
.B2;.I-20
42 _# ^^TD10S\\ (1,0-2):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^DEC\\TAPE CONTROLLERS. ^THE
DEFAULT IS 1; THE MAXIMUM IS 2. ^IF YOUR RESPONSE IS 0,
QUESTION 42^A WILL NOT BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
42^A _# ^^UNITS ON DT\\X (1-8):
.B
^THIS QUESTION WILL BE REPEATED N TIMES (WHERE N IS YOUR
RESPONSE TO QUESTION NUMBER 39). ^EACH TIME THIS QUESTION
IS TYPED, X WILL BE INCREMENTED TO THE NEXT ALPHABETIC IN
SEQUENCE BEGINNING WITH ^A (E.G., ^^DTA, DTB\\,...). ^RESPOND
WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^DEC\\TAPE UNITS ASSOCIATED WITH CONTROLLER ^^DT\\X.
.B2;.I-20
43 ^^LPTS\\ (1,0-3):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF LINE PRINTERS SUPPORTED BY
YOUR SYSTEM. ^THE DEFAULT NUMBER IS 1. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH
0, QUESTION 43^A WILL NOT BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
43^A ^^LPT\\N ^^LOWER CASE\\ (^Y,^N):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y INDICATES THAT
^^LPT\\N HAS LOWER-CASE CAPABILITY.
^N INDICATES THAT THE LINE PRINTER IS UPPER-CASE ONLY.
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED N TIMES (WHERE N IS YOUR RESPONSE
TO QUESTION NUMBER 40).
.B2;.I-20
44 ^^PLTS\\ (0,0-2):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF INCREMENTAL PLOTTERS
SUPPORTED BY YOUR SYSTEM. ^THE DEFAULT IS 0; THE
MAXIMUM IS 2.
.B2;.I-20
45 ^^PTP\\ (^Y,^N):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y INDICATES THAT
YOUR SYSTEM INCLUDES A PAPER TAPE PUNCH. ^THE INCLUSION OF A PAPER TAPE
PUNCH IS STANDARD FOR ^K^A10/^K^I10-BASED SYSTEMS, BUT
NORMALLY EXCLUDED ON ^K^L10-BASED SYSTEMS.
.B2;.I-20
46 ^^PTR\\ (^Y,^N):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y INDICATES THAT
YOUR SYSTEM INCLUDES A PAPER TAPE READER.
.B2;.I-20
47 _# ^^PTYS\\ (20,0-510):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF PSEUDO-TERMINALS. (^EACH OPERATOR
SERVICE ROUTINE AND BATCH STREAM NEEDS ONE.)##^THIS RESPONSE
WILL USUALLY EQUAL YOUR RESPONSE FOR QUESTION NUMBER
25, WHICH ASKS FOR THE NUMBER OF JOBS TO BE ATTACHED AND/OR
DETACHED AT ONE TIME. ^IF YOUR RESPONSE IS GREATER THAN ZERO,
^^FTPTYUUO\\ MUST BE SET IN ^^F.GEN\\ TO -1. ^REFER TO ^CHAPTER 8.
.B2;.I-20
48 ^^DC\\44 (^Y,^N):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y INDICATES THAT YOUR
SYSTEM INCLUDES A ^^DC\\44 FRONT-END. ^^DC\\44 IS A ^^TYPESET-10\\
FRONT-END THAT SUPPORTS A HIGH-SPEED PAPER-TAPE READER AND
PUNCH, AND AN ON-LINE PHOTOCOMPOSITION MACHINE. ^IF YOU
ANSWER ^N, QUESTION NUMBERS 48^A, ^B, ^C,
AND ^D, AND ^E WILL NOT BE TYPED. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^Y, YOU MUST SET THE
^^FTTYPE\\ FEATURE TEST SWITCH TO -1.
.B2;.I-20
48^A ^^DL10 PORT NUMBER FOR DC\\44 (0,0-7):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE ^^DC\\44 CHANNEL NUMBER (PORT NUMBER).
^THE DEFAULT IS 0; THE MAXIMUM IS 3. ^D^L10 PORT NUMBERS FOR ^D^C44S
SHOULD BE NUMBERED SEQUENTIALLY, BEGINNING WITH 0.
.B2;.I-20
48^B _# ^^OF PA611RS\\ (0,0-32):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF HIGH-SPEED PAPER TAPE READERS
TO BE SUPPORTED WITH THE ^^DC\\44. ^THE DEFAULT IS 0;
THE MAXIMUM IS 32.
.B2;.I-20
48^C _# ^^OF PA611PS\\ (0,0-32):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF HIGH-SPEED PAPER-TAPE PUNCHES
TO BE SUPPORTED WITH THE ^^DC\\44. ^THE DEFAULT IS
0; THE MAXIMUM IS 32.
.B2;.I-20
48^D _# ^^OF LPC11S\\ (0,0-6):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ON-LINE PHOTOCOMPOSITION MACHINES
TO BE SUPPORTED WITH THE ^^DC\\44. ^THE DEFAULT IS
0; THE MAXIMUM IS 6.
.B2;.I-20
48^E ^^PC\\11 (^Y,^N):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y INDICATES THAT
THERE IS A PAPER TAPE READER AND A PAPER TAPE PUNCH ON THE
^D^C44.
.B2;.I-20
49 _# ^^OF DA28S\\ (1,0-4):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF INTER-PROCESSOR DATA CHANNELS
FOR THE ^^PDP\\-8/11/15. ^THE DEFAULT IS 1; THE
MAXIMUM IS 4. ^IF YOUR RESPONSE IS 1 OR GREATER AND THE FEATURE
TEST SWITCH ^^FTXTC\\ EQUALS 0, ^^MONGEN\\ ASSUMES THAT YOU DO
NOT WANT ANY ^^DA28\\S SUPPORTED.
.B2;.I-20
49^A _# ^^OF LINES FOR TTY POOL\\ (8,0-512):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF TERMINAL LINES RESERVED FOR USE ON
^D^A28 CHANNELS. ^THE DEFAULT IS 8; THE MAXIMUM IS 512.
.B2;.I-20
50 _# ^^DAS78'S \\(0,0-8):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^DAS\\78S (BISYNCHRONOUS SUPPORT
AS USED BY ^I^B^M 360S, 370S, AND/OR 2780S). ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH
A VALUE GREATER THAN 0, YOU MUST SET THE ^^FTDAS\\78 FEATURE SWITCH
TO -1.
.B2;.I-20
50^A ^^WHICH DL10 PORT IS THE DAS78 CONNECTED TO\\ (0,0-7):
.B
^EACH ^^DAS78\\ ^^PDP\\-11 IS CONNECTED TO A ^D^L10 PORT. ^RESPOND
WITH THE NUMBER OF THE ^D^L10 PORT.
.B2;.I-20
50^B ^^DECIMAL LINES ON THE DAS78\\ (1-16):
.B
^EACH ^^DAS78\\ CAN SUPPORT UP TO 16 BISYNCHRONOUS LINES FOR
^^IBM\\ 360S, 370S, AND/OR
2760S; RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF LINES (IN DECIMAL) ON THIS ^^DAS\\78.
.B2;.I-20
51 ^^DECIMAL "SYMBOL,VALUE"\\
.B2;.I-20
52 ^^OCTAL "SYMBOL,VALUE"\\
.B2;.I-20
53 ^^SIXBIT "SYMBOL,VALUE"\\
.B
^IN RESPONSE TO QUESTIONS 51, 52, AND 53, TYPE THE CONSTANTS AT YOUR
INSTALLATION THAT DEVIATE FROM THE STANDARD. ^UNLESS YOU SPECIFY OTHERWISE,
^^HDWGEN\\ WILL DEFINE EACH SYMBOL IN ACCORDANCE
WITH PREDEFINED STANDARD VALUES. ^A LIST AND AN EXPLANATION
OF THE STANDARD SYMBOLS AND DECIMAL DEFAULT VALUES APPEAR IN
^SECTIONS 8.14.1, 8.14.2 AND 8.14.3. ^FOR EXAMPLE, YOU COULD SPECIFY 1760 AS THE
NUMBER OF NANOSECONDS PER MEMORY CYCLE (INSTEAD OF 1000) BY
TYPING:
.B
^^NSPMEM,\\1760
.B
^IF YOU WANT TO RESPOND WITH MORE THAN ONE ENTRY, YOU MUST
TYPE EACH "SYMBOL, VALUE" ON A SEPARATE LINE, AND END EACH LINE
WITH A CARRIAGE RETURN. ^WHEN YOU
FINISH TYPING RESPONSES TO QUESTION 51, TYPE AN EXTRA
CARRIAGE RETURN TO FORCE ^^MONGEN\\ TO TYPE QUESTION 52.
^IF ALL THE STANDARD VALUES ARE ACCEPTABLE,
TYPE ONLY A CARRIAGE RETURN IN RESPONSE TO THIS QUESTION.
.B
^^HDWGEN\\ NEXT TYPES THE QUESTIONS
.B;.I5
^^OCTAL "SYMBOL, VALUE"\\
.B;.I9
AND
.B;.I5
^^SIXBIT "SYMBOL, VALUE"\\
.B
REQUESTING THE ^^OCTAL\\ AND ^^SIXBIT\\ VALUES
THAT ARE TO BE CHANGED FROM THE STANDARD SETTINGS. ^THE
ANSWER FORMAT IS IDENTICAL
TO THAT FOR THE PREVIOUS QUESTION. ^DEVIATIONS FROM THE LIST
OF DEFAULT VALUES ARE THE ONLY RESPONSES REQUIRED.
^IF NO CHANGES TO THE STANDARD ARE REQUIRED,
YOU SHOULD PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY IN RESPONSE TO
EACH OF THE QUESTIONS.
.B
^SECTIONS 8.15.1 AND 8.15.2 LIST AND EXPLAIN THE STANDARD SYMBOLS AND OCTAL
VALUES; ^SECTION 8.16 LISTS AND EXPLAINS THE STANDARD SYMBOLS
AND ^^SIXBIT\\ VALUES.
.B2;.I-20
54 ^^TYPE "^^DEVICE-MNEMONIC,PI-CHANNEL,HIGHEST-AC-TO-SAVE"
.B2;.I-20
55 ^^TYPE "DEVICE-MNEMONIC, PI-CHANNEL" FOR SPECIAL DEVICES
.B2;.I-20
56 TYPE "DEVICE-MNEMONIC, PI-CHANNEL, NO-OF-DEVICES"\\
.B
^QUESTIONS 54, 55, AND 56 REQUEST
SPECIAL INFORMATION ABOUT NON-STANDARD PERIPHERAL DEVICES
AND THEIR ASSOCIATED PRIORITY INTERRUPT (^^PI\\) CHANNELS.
^IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS NO SPECIAL DEVICES, ANSWER THE
THREE QUESTIONS WITH A CARRIAGE RETURN. ^IF YOUR INSTALLATION
HAS A SPECIAL DEVICE, TURN TO ^SECTION 8.17.
.B;.LM0
^^FILE DSK:HDW04D.MAC CLOSED [HDWGEN FINISHED]\\
.HL1 ^&TTYGEN\&
\\^^MONGEN\\'S ^^TTYGEN\\ SECTION ALLOWS YOU TO DEFINE YOUR
SYSTEM TERMINAL CONFIGURATION. ^ALL POSSIBLE QUESTIONS
ARE LISTED BELOW AND ON FOLLOWING PAGES.
^IN ORDER TO START THE ^^TTYGEN\\ DIALOGUE, YOU MUST
RESPOND WITH ^^TTY\\ TO QUESTION NUMBER 1 DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 8.3.2.
.B2;.LM20;.TS5,20;.I-20
2 ^^OUTPUT(DSK:TTYCNF.MAC):\\
.B
^IF YOU ACCEPT ^^TTYCNF.MAC\\ AND THE DEVICE ^^DSK\\: AS THE
MEDIA FOR STORING YOUR ANSWERS TO ^^MONGEN\\, PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\
KEY FOR YOUR RESPONSE. ^IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THEM, TYPE YOUR
PREFERRED DISK NAME, FILE NAME, AND PROJECT/PROGRAMMER NUMBER.
.B2;.I-20
3 ^^HOW MANY DC10S\\ (1,0-2):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF DATA LINE SCANNERS TO BE
SUPPORTED BY YOUR SYSTEM. ^THE DEFAULT 1; THE
MAXIMUM IS 2. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0, QUESTION
NUMBERS 6 AND 7 WILL NOT BE TYPED. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 8.18
FOR A FURTHER DISCUSSION OF ^^DC10\\S.)
.B2;.I-20
4 ^^HOW MANY DC68S (1,0-2):\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^DC68\\S SUPPORTED BY YOUR
SYSTEM. ^THE DEFAULT IS 1; THE MAXIMUM
IS 2. ^THE ^^DC\\68 IS A ^^PDP\\-8 680 OR 680^I
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM.
^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0, QUESTION NUMBER 8 WILL NOT
BE TYPED.
.B2;.I-20
5 ^^HOW MANY DC76S\\ (1,0-8):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^DC\\76S SUPPORTED BY YOUR
SYSTEM. ^THE DEFAULT IS 1; THE MAXIMUM IS 8.
^THE ^^DC\\76 IS A ^^PDP\\-11 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM.
^IF YOU
RESPOND WITH 0, QUESTION NUMBER 9 WILL NOT BE TYPED.
^THIS IS AN UNBUNDLED PRODUCT; THEREFORE, BEFORE TYPING A CARRIAGE
RETURN, MAKE SURE YOUR SYSTEM INCLUDES A ^D^C76.
.NT
^FOR ^^DC\\68S AND ^^DC\\76S, THE MONITOR DOES NOT NEED TO
KNOW THE SPECIFIC TYPE OF DATASET CONTROL HARDWARE, BECAUSE
CORRESPONDENCE OF TERMINAL LINES TO DATASET CONTROLLER IS
PERFORMED WITHIN THE HARDWARE. ^WHEN LAYING OUT THE TERMINAL
LINE CONFIGURATION IN ^^TTYGEN\\, YOU MUST SPECIFY THE TOTAL
NUMBER OF LINES AVAILABLE THROUGH THE ^^DC\\68 AND THE TOTAL
NUMBER OF LINES AVAILABLE THROUGH EACH ^^DC\\76. ^^DC\\76
LINES THAT REQUIRE DATASET CONTROL MUST BE DEFINED
AS DATASET LINES (VIA QUESTION 13).
.EN
.LM20;.I-20
6 _# ^^DC10B [OR 632] 8 LINE DATA GROUPS \\(1-8):
.B
^RESPOND WITH A VALUE IN THE RANGE 1 TO 8, WHERE:
.B;.LM25;.TS40;.NF;.NJ
1# INDICATES ^^TTY\\0-7
2# INDICATES ^^TTY\\0-17
3# INDICATES ^^TTY\\0-27
4# INDICATES ^^TTY\\0-37
5# INDICATES ^^TTY\\0-47
6# INDICATES ^^TTY\\0-57
7# INDICATES ^^TTY\\0-67
8# INDICATES ^^TTY\\0-77
.F;.J
.NT
^D^C10^CS, ^D^C10^DS, AND ^D^C10^HS SHOULD BE TREATED AS ^D^C10^BS.
^LINE NUMBERS FOR ^D^C10^BS AND ^D^C10^ES MUST BE DENSE OR THE MESSAGE
^^SPECIFICATION ERROR-DSCTAB\\ WILL BE PRINTED AT THE TERMINAL
WHEN AN ATTEMPT IS MADE TO ASSEMBLE THE MONITOR.
.EN
.LM20;.TS5,20;.I-20
7 ^^DC\\10^E ^^DATA SET CONTROL GROUPS\\ (0-7):
.B
^RESPOND WITH A VALUE IN THE RANGE 0 TO 7.
.B2;.I-20
8 ^^CORRESPONDENCE OF DC10E LINES TO THE DC10B LINES (M-N,P)\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH M,P FOR ONE PAIR AND M-N,P FOR A RANGE OF PAIRS
(WHERE M IS AN OCTAL ^D^C10^E LINE, M-N IS THE OCTAL RANGE OF ^D^C10^E
LINES, AND P IS THE OCTAL ^D^C10^B LINE).
.B2;.I-20
9 _# ^^OCTAL LINES ON DC68, INCLUDING ITS CONSOLE TTY \\(1-144):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE TOTAL NUMBER OF LINES AVAILABLE UNDER YOUR
SYSTEM IN THE RANGE 1 TO 144.
.B2;.I-20
10 ^^WHICH DL10 PORT IS THE DC76 CONNECTED TO\\ (0,1-7):
.B
^EACH ^^PDP\\-10 IS CONNECTED TO A ^^DL\\10 PORT. ^IF
THERE IS ONLY ONE ^^PDP\\-11, IT IS ALWAYS CONNECTED TO PORT
NUMBER 0. ^IF THERE ARE TWO ^^PDP\\-11S, ONE IS CONNECTED
TO PORT 0 AND THE OTHER TO PORT 1.
.B2;.I-20
11 ^^DECIMAL LINES ON DC\\76 (1-129):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF LINES (IN DECIMAL) ON THE
^^DC\\76. ^EACH ^^DC\\76^F HAS 16 LINES, AND THE CONSOLE
TERMINAL HAS ONE LINE. ^A ^^DC\\76 WITH
TWO ^^DC\\76^FS HAS 33 LINES.
.B2;.I-20
12 ^^OPR OCTAL LINE _# (^^CTY,0-\\N):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE OCTAL NUMBER OF DEVICE ^^OPR\\ (OPERATOR
PRIVILEGED TERMINAL). ^THE DEFAULT IS ^^CTY\\.
.B;.LM0
^ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS ABOUT YOUR TERMINAL LINES
(M-N). ^TYPE ONE OCTAL LINE NUMBER (M), ONE RANGE
(M-N), OR ^^CTY\\ ON SEPARATE LINES. ^TYPE AN EXTRA CARRIAGE
RETURN WHEN YOU ARE FINISHED.
.B2;.LM20;.TS5;.I-20
13 ^^DATA SET LINES\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE LINE NUMBERS OF THOSE LINES THAT ARE DATA
SET LINES. ^DATA SET LINES ARE A CLASS OF TERMINALS RECOGNIZED
BY ^^LOGIN. LOGIN\\ WILL RESET THE LINES TO COMPUTER ECHOING
AND HARDWARE TABS. ^D^C76 LINES THAT REQUIRE DATASET CONTROL
MUST BE DEFINED AS DATASET LINES.
.B2;.I-20
14 ^^LINES WITH HARDWARE TABS\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE LINE NUMBERS OF THOSE TERMINALS WITH
HARDWARE GENERATED TAB SETTINGS. ^MOST ^^TTY\\ MODEL
35S AND 37S HAVE HARDWARE ^^TAB\\S, AND MOST MODEL 33S DO NOT.
^HOWEVER, SINCE THE VARIETY OF FEATURES FOUND ON MODEL
33, 35, AND 37 ^^TTY\\S IS SO GREAT, EVERY SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR MUST DETERMINE THE PHYSICAL
CHARACTERISTICS OF THEIR INSTALLATION TERMINALS. ^IT IS
POSSIBLE TO OVERRIDE ^^MONGEN TAB\\ SETTINGS WITH THE
^^SET TTY TAB\\ AND ^^SET TTY NO TAB\\ COMMANDS.
.B2;.I-20
15 ^^REMOTE LINES\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE LINE NUMBER OF THOSE LINES WHICH ARE TO
BE CONSIDERED REMOTE. ^ALL DATA SETS ARE IMPLICITLY REMOTE;
HOWEVER, THE INSTALLATION MAY GIVE ^^REMOTE\\ STATUS TO ANY
TERMINAL, EVEN THOSE THAT ARE HARDWIRED. ^IN THIS CONTEXT,
REMOTE IS A SOFTWARE CHARACTERISTIC OF THE TERMINAL THAT
IMPOSES CERTAIN RESTRICTIONS. ^FOR EXAMPLE, SOME
PROJECT/PROGRAMMER NUMBERS MAY NOT BE ALLOWED TO ^^LOGIN\\ AT
REMOTE TERMINALS. (^THESE TERMINALS ARE NOT TO BE CONFUSED
WITH THOSE TERMINALS LOCATED AT A REMOTE STATION.)
.B2;.I-20
16 ^^LOCAL COPY LINES\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE LINE NUMBERS OF THOSE LINES WHICH
ARE TO BE CONSIDERED LOCAL COPY LINES (FULL DUPLEX).
^WITH LOCAL COPY LINES, ECHOING IS PROVIDED BY THE
TERMINAL INSTEAD OF BY THE COMPUTER.
.B2;.I-20
17 ^^HALF DUPLEX LINES\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE LINE NUMBERS OF THOSE LINES THAT TRANSMIT
IN HALF-DUPLEX MODE. ^HALF-DUPLEX LINES PROVIDE TWO-WAY,
ALTERNATE, INDEPENDENT TRANSMISSION OVER THE SAME PAIR OF
WIRES.
.NT
^THE TERM HALF-DUPLEX IS OCCASIONALLY USED INCORRECTLY.
^TRUE HALF-DUPLEX LINES ARE RELATIVELY RARE. ^THEY INCLUDE
^^TWX\\ DATA SETS AND SOME LOCAL TERMINALS CONNECTED BY
^^DC10C\\ INTERFACES. ^SOME LINES WHICH ARE LOOSELY CALLED
HALF-DUPLEX ARE ACTUALLY LOCAL COPY FULL-DUPLEX.
^QUESTION NUMBER 15 ASKS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF LOCAL
COPY LINES. (^IF YOU ARE INTERESTED IN READING MORE ABOUT
THESE TERMS, REFER TO ^SECTION 8.3 OF THE SPECIFICATION
ENTITLED ^^SCNSER\\, ^LEVEL ^D ^SCANNER ^SERVICE IN
THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^SYSTEM ^NOTEBOOKS.)
.EN
.LM20;.TS5,20;.I-20
18 ^^SLAVES\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE LINE NUMBERS OF THOSE LINES WHICH CAN BE
CLASSIFIED AS SLAVES. ^SLAVE IS A SOFTWARE CLASSIFICATION
FOR TERMINALS THAT CANNOT ^^LOGIN\\ OR CONTROL JOBS. ^THESE
TERMINALS ARE GENERALLY USED TO PROVIDE ^I/^O FOR JOBS
THAT ARE CONTROLLED FROM OTHER TERMINALS. ^A TERMINAL CAN
BE CLASSIFIED AS A SLAVE BY ANY USER, BUT IT CAN BE
RESTORED TO NORMAL STATUS ONLY BY THE OPERATOR.
.B2;.I-20
19 ^^LINES WITH HARDWARE FORM FEED\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE LINE NUMBERS OF THOSE TERMINALS WHICH ARE
TO HAVE HARDWARE-GENERATED FORM FEEDS. ^MOST MODEL 35 ^^TTY\\S
HAVE HARDWARE-GENERATED FORM FEEDS, AND MOST MODEL
33S DO NOT. ^SINCE THE VARIETY OF FEATURES FOUND IN TERMINALS
IS SO GREAT, EVERY SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR MUST DETERMINE THE
HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS OF THEIR INSTALLATION
TERMINALS. ^YOU MAY ASSUME THAT NO TERMINALS HAVE HARDWARE-GENERATED
FORM FEEDS, SO THAT THE SCANNER SERVICE WILL ALWAYS
OUTPUT FIVE LINES TO SIMULATE FORM FEEDS. ^THIS CAN BE
CHANGED BY ANY USER AT A TERMINAL VIA THE ^^SET TTY FORM\\
OR ^^SET TTY NO FORM\\ COMMANDS.
.B2;.I-20
20 ^^LINES WHICH RUN INITIA AT STARTUP\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE LINE NUMBERS OF THOSE TERMINALS THAT ARE
TO RUN ^^INITIA\\ AT START UP. ^^INITIA\\ IS A PROGRAM THAT
PERFORMS JOB INITIALIZATION FUNCTIONS. ^WHEN THE MONITOR
STARTS UP, ^^INITIA\\ IS RUN AUTOMATICALLY FOR THOSE LINES
SPECIFIED IN YOUR RESPONSE TO THIS QUESTION.
^DEVICE ^^OPR\\ SHOULD BE SPECIFIED IN YOUR RESPONSE; REMOTE
TERMINALS, DATASET TERMINALS, AND REMOTE STATION TERMINALS
SHOULD NOT BE SPECIFIED TO RUN ^^INITIA\\. ^THERE
IS A FILE READ BY ^^INITIA\\, CALLED ^^TTY.INI\\,
WHICH CONTAINS A COMPLETE SET OF PARAMETERS FOR SETTING UP
THE TELETYPE CONFIGURATIONS. ^THE ADVANTAGE OF HAVING ^^TTY.INI\\
IS THAT ^^TTY\\ PARAMETERS CAN BE CHANGED WITHOUT
RERUNNING ^^MONGEN.\\ ^THE ^^INITIA\\ SPECIFICATION IN
THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^SOFTWARE ^NOTEBOOKS PROVIDES FURTHER
DETAILS ABOUT ^^TTY.INI.\\
.B2;.I-20
21 ^^FILLER CLASS CODES \\(^^M-N,P\\):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE LINE NUMBERS OF THOSE TERMINALS THAT REQUIRE
FILLER CHARACTERS TO STANDARDIZE OUTPUT. ^P IS THE FILLER
CLASS CODE. (^REFER TO THE DESCRIPTION OF THE ^^SET TTY FILL\\
COMMAND IN THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^OPERATING ^SYSTEM ^COMMANDS
^MANUAL FOR AN EXPLANATION OF THE FILLER CLASS CODES.)
.LM0
.HL1 ^&NETGEN\&
\\^^NETGEN\\ IS THE ^^MONGEN\\ SECTION WHICH DEFINES YOUR
SYSTEM NETWORK CONFIGURATION. ^ALL POSSIBLE QUESTIONS
ARE LISTED BELOW AND ON FOLLOWING PAGES. ^IN ORDER
TO START THE ^^NETGEN\\ DIALOGUE, YOU MUST RESPOND WITH
^^NET\\ TO QUESTION NUMBER 1, WHICH IS DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 8.3.2.
.B2;.LM20;.TS5,20;.I-20
2 ^^OUTPUT (DSK:NETCNF.MAC)\\:
.B
^RESPOND WITH A CARRIAGE RETURN IF THE FILE
NAME ^^NETCNF.MAC\\ AND THE DEVICE ^^DSK:\\ ARE ACCEPTABLE
TO STORE YOUR ^^NETGEN\\ DIALOGUE. ^IF THEY ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE,
RESPOND WITH THE DESIRED FILE NAME, DEVICE AND/OR PROJECT/
PROGRAMMER NUMBER.
.B2;.I-20
3 ^^NETWORK SOFTWARE \\(^Y,^N):
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y INDICATES THAT
YOUR INSTALLATION
DESIRES THE SOFTWARE FOR REMOTE COMPUTERS: ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10S,
^^PDP-11\\S, AND ^^PDP-15\\S.
^A RESPONSE OF ^N INDICATES THAT THE INSTALLATION
DOES NOT DESIRE NETWORK CAPABILITIES AND,
THEREFORE, DOES NOT REQUIRE THE ASSOCIATED SOFTWARE. ^THE
FILE ^^NETCNF.MAC\\ WILL BE CLOSED; ^^NETGEN\\ IS
FINISHED AND QUESTION NUMBER 1 WILL BE TYPED AGAIN, ALLOWING
YOU TO CONFIGURE ^^FGEN\\.
^IF YOU RESPOND WITH ^Y, YOU MUST ALSO SET THE ^^FTNET\\ FEATURE
TEST SWITCH TO -1.
.B2;.I-20
4 ^^HOW MANY NODES DO YOU WISH TO SUPPORT (3,0-\\N)
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF NODES/STATIONS YOU WISH TO BE SUPPORTED
BY YOUR SYSTEM. ^IF YOU RESPOND WITH 0, ^^NETGEN\\ DIALOGUE
WILL TERMINATE AND QUESTION NUMBER 1 WILL BE PRINTED.
.B2;.I-20
5 ^^HOW MANY DC75NP'S OR DN-87'S ON SYSTEM (1,1-8)\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF SYNCHRONOUS FRONT-ENDS THAT ARE TO BE
SUPPORTED FOR NETWORKS ON YOUR SYSTEM. ^THE DEFAULT RESPONSE
IS 1; THE MAXIMUM RESPONSE IS 8.
.B2;.I-20
6 ^^TO WHICH DL10 PORT IS THE DC75\\ OR ^^DN87 CONNECTED (0,0-8)\\
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS REPEATED ONCE FOR EACH FRONT-END YOU
SPECIFIED IN QUESTION 5. ^RESPOND WITH THE ^^DL\\10 PORT NUMBER CONNECTED TO THIS
^^DC75/DAS85\\. ^THE DEFAULT RESPONSE IS 0; THE MAXIMUM RESPONSE IS 8.
.B2;.I-20
7 ^^HOW MANY DN87S'\\S ^^ON THE SYSTEM\\ (1, 0-3):
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NUMBER OF ^^DN87S\\ NETWORK FRONT-ENDS THAT ARE CONNECTED
TO ^^DTE\\20S.
.B2;.I-20
7^A ^^TO WHICH DTE20 IS THE DN87S CONNECTED\\ (1, 1-3):
.B
^THIS QUESTION IS TYPED ONCE FOR EACH ^^DN87S\\ SPECIFIED IN RESPONSE
TO QUESTION 7.
.B2;.I-20
8 ^^NODE NUMBER OF CENTRAL SITE\\##(1-77)
.B
^RESPOND
WITH THE NODE NUMBER TO BE ASSOCIATED WITH THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 AT THE
CENTRAL SITE.
.B2;.I-20
9 ^^NAME OF CENTRAL SITE\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE NAME OF THE CENTRAL SITE IN SIX CHARACTERS OR LESS.
.B2;.I-20
10 ^^_# OF REMOTE TTYS (0,0-512)\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ^^TTY\\S ON NETWORK NODES TO BE
HANDLED AT ANY GIVEN MOMENT.
.B2;.I-20
11 ^^_# OF REMOTE CDRS\\ (0,0-N)
.B
^WHERE N IS THE MAXIMUM RESPONSE TO QUESTION NUMBER 4 ABOVE. ^RESPOND
WITH THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CARD READERS ON NETWORK NODES TO
BE HANDLED AT ANY GIVEN TIME.
.B1;.I-20
12 ^^_# OF REMOTE LPT'S\\ (0,0-N)
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LINE PRINTERS ON NETWORK
NODES TO BE HANDLED AT ANY GIVEN TIME.
.B2;.I-20
13 _# ^^OF REMOTE PTR'S\\ (0,0-0)
.B2;.I-20
14 _# ^^OF REMOTE PTP'S\\ (0,0-0)
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF REMOTE PAPER-TAPE PUNCHES ON NETWORK
NODES TO BE HANDLED AT ONE TIME.
.B2;.I-20
15 _# ^^OF MTA'S (0,0-0)\\
.B2;.I-20
17 _# ^^OF REMOTE PROCESSES\\ (0,0-N)
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF REMOTE PROCESSES THAT CAN BE CONNECTED
AT ANY GIVEN TIME. ^TO ANSWER THIS QUESTION WITH A VALUE GREATER THAN
1, YOU MUST SET ^^FTTSK\\ TO -1.
.B2;.I-20
18 ^^REMOTE DATA ENTRY SOFTWARE (Y,N):\\
.B
^ANSWER ^Y OR ^N. ^Y INDICATES THAT YOU WANT THE SOFTWARE TO SUPPORT REMOTE
DATA ENTRY TERMINALS, WHICH ARE USED FOR ^^MCS\\-10 APPLICATIONS. ^IF YOU RESPOND
WITH ^Y, ^^FTRDX\\ IN ^^FGEN\\ MUST BE SET TO -1.
.B2;.I-20
19 _# ^^OF CONNECTS\\ (46,1-512)
.B
^RESPOND WITH THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIONS.
.LM0
.HL1 ^&FGEN\&
\\^THE ^^FGEN\\ DIALOGUE SIMPLIFIES THE TASK OF CHOOSING
APPROPRIATE SOFTWARE FROM A WIDE SELECTION. ^FOR EXAMPLE, ^^FGEN\\
ALLOWS YOU TO SELECT THE STANDARD ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 FEATURES
FOR A GIVEN APPLICATION.
.B
^IF YOU ARE CHOOSING ALL THE STANDARD SOFTWARE FEATURES,
SIMPLY AGREE DURING THE DIALOGUE TO ACCEPT THE STANDARD SYMBOL
SETTINGS BY TYPING A CARRIAGE RETURN. ^YOUR ^^F.MAC\\ FILE WILL THEN CONTAIN ALL THESE
STANDARD SETTINGS; THESE, WHEN ASSEMBLED WITH THE OTHER ^^GEN\\
FILES, WILL PRODUCE A MONITOR WITH THE APPROPRIATE ROUTINES.
.B
^STANDARD ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 SOFTWARE FEATURES ARE INCLUDED OR
DELETED BY SETTING FEATURE TEST SWITCHES TO -1 OR TO 0: -1
PLACES THE FEATURE IN THE MONITOR, AND 0 OMITS IT.
.B
^IN ORDER TO SET THE APPROPRIATE FEATURE TEST SWITCHES, YOU WILL
NEED THE FILE ^^FGEN.HLP. MONGEN\\ WILL FIRST LOOK FOR ^^FGEN.HLP\\
ON THE DIRECTORY FROM WHICH ^^MONGEN\\ CAME, THEN IT WILL
LOOK FOR IT ON ^^SYS\\:. ^IF ^^FGEN.HLP\\ CANNOT BE FOUND,
THE MESSAGE %^CAN'T FIND ^^FGEN.HLP\\ WILL BE PRINTED ON YOUR TERMINAL.
.B
^^FGEN\\ ALLOWS YOU TO:
.NF;.LS
.LE;^LIST THE STANDARD SETTINGS FOR A GIVEN APPLICATION
(^^TINY,KALUG,KILUG,KAFULL,KIFULL,KLFULL\\).
.LE;^DETERMINE WHAT THE FEATURE TEST SWITCH SYMBOLS MEAN.
.LE;^ALTER THE FEATURE TEST SWITCH SETTINGS.
.LE;^ADD NEW FEATURE TEST SWITCHES.
.ELS
.B2;.LM20;.TS5,20;.F;.J;.I-20
2 ^^OUTPUT (DSK:F.MAC)\\:
.B
^IF YOU ACCEPT ^^F.MAC\\ AND THE DEVICE ^^DSK\\: AS THE MEDIA
FOR STORING YOUR ANSWERS TO ^^MONGEN\\, PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY
FOR YOUR RESPONSE. ^IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THEM, TYPE YOUR PREFERRED
DISK NAME, FILE NAME, AND PROJECT/PROGRAMMER NUMBER.
.B2;.I-20
3 ^^FEATURE SET(TINY,KALUG,KILUG,KAFULL,KIFULL,KLFULL):\\
.B
^THERE ARE SIX STANDARD FEATURE SETTINGS; RESPOND WITH ONE OF THEM.
^ONLY THESE STANDARD SETTINGS HAVE BEEN TESTED
DURING MONITOR DEVELOPMENT AND ARE FULLY SUPPORTED. ^ALTHOUGH
INSTALLATIONS MAY ALTER THE COMBINATION OF INDIVIDUAL FEATURE
TEST SWITCHES OR ADD NEW SWITCHES DURING ^^FGEN\\, SUCH
NON-STANDARD SWITCH COMBINATIONS HAVE NOT BEEN TESTED AND ARE
NOT SUPPORTED. ^WE WISH TO EMPHASIZE THAT YOU MAY
ALTER THE FEATURE TEST SETTING FROM THE STANDARD OR ^^LUG\\
CONFIGURATIONS; HOWEVER, THE NEW COMBINATION IS ^^NOT\\
SUPPORTED BY ^^DIGITAL.\\
.B2;.I-20
4 ^^STANDARD SETTING (YES,NO,LIST,EXPLAIN):\\
.B
^RESPOND WITH ONE OF THE WORDS WITHIN THE PARENTHESES.
.B;.LM15;.TS15;.I-10
^^YES\\ ^ANSWER ^^YES\\ (THE DEFAULT) IF YOU ACCEPT THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10
STANDARD FEATURE TEST SWITCH SETTINGS, AS IDENTIFIED IN THE PREVIOUS QUESTION.
.B
^A ^^YES\\ ENDS ^^FGEN\\ AND CLOSES THE ^^F.MAC\\ FILE.
^YOU MAY NOW REDEFINE ANOTHER SEGMENT OF ^^MONGEN\\ OR EXIT FROM THE PROGRAM.
.B;.I-10
^^NO\\ ^A ^N^O ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE THE SETTING OF INDIVIDUAL
SWITCHES OR ADD NEW FEATURE TEST SWITCHES. ^YOU CAN DO THIS BY
TYPING THE SWITCH SYMBOL (E.G., ^F^TXXX) AND THE VALUE (0 OR -1)
IN THE FORM
.B;.I5
SWITCH, VALUE
.B
^PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY TWICE AFTER THE LAST ENTRY.
.B;.I-10
^^LIST LIST\\ ALLOWS YOU TO EXAMINE THE CURRENT SETTING FOR ANY
AND ALL OF THE FEATURE TEST SWITCHES. ^YOU MAY THEN EITHER ACCEPT
OR CHANGE THE CURRENT SETTING.
.B
^THE STANDARD SETTING FOR EACH FEATURE TEST SWITCH VARIES WITH
THE INSTALLATION'S ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 APPLICATION, E.G., ^^TINY,
KALUG, KILUG, KAFULL, KIFULL \\ OR ^^KLFULL\\. ^YOU
CAN OBTAIN THE DEFAULT VALUE FOR AN INDIVIDUAL FEATURE TEST SWITCH
BY TYPING ^^LIST <CR>\\ IN ANSWER TO THE QUESTION, AND THEN TYPING
THE REQUESTED SWITCH SYMBOL FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN. ^^FGEN\\
RETURNS THAT SWITCH SYMBOL AND ITS CURRENT SETTING. ^TO OBTAIN
THE VALUE OF ANOTHER SWITCH, TYPE THE REQUESTED SWITCH, FOLLOWED
BY A CARRIAGE RETURN. ^AFTER THE LAST ENTRY, PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY TWICE.
.B
^TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT VALUES FOR ALL OF THE FEATURE TEST SWITCHES
YOU CAN TYPE ^^LIST <CR>\\ AND THEN TYPE ^^ALL\\,
FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN. ^^FGEN\\ WILL LIST ALL FEATURE TEST
SWITCH SYMBOLS AND THEIR VALUES ON YOUR TERMINAL.
.B;.I-10
^^EXPLAIN EXPLAIN\\ ALLOWS YOU TO
EXAMINE THE MEANING OF ANY OR ALL OF THE FEATURE TEST SWITCH
SYMBOLS IN ADDITION TO THE CURRENT VALUE. ^YOU CAN OBTAIN
THE DEFAULT VALUE AND MEANING FOR A FEATURE TEST SWITCH SYMBOL
BY RESPONDING TO ^^EXPLAIN\\ (OR ^E) IN THE SAME WAY YOU COULD RESPOND TO
^^LIST\\ (OR ^L). ^FOR EXAMPLE, THE DIALOGUE (IN PROMPT MODE) TO
OBTAIN THE DEFAULT VALUE AND MEANING FOR FEATURE TEST SWITCHES
^^FTTIME\\ AND ^^FTSLEE\\ IS AS FOLLOWS:
.B
^^STANDARD#SETTING#(YES,#NO,#LIST,#EXPLAIN):#EXPLAIN#<CR>\\
.B
^ONLY STAND SETTINGS HAVE BEEN TESTED BY ^^DEC;\\ ALL OTHER SETTINGS MAY PRODUCE
INCORRECT OPERATION.
.B
^SWITCH (SWITCH TO LIST OR EXPLAIN).
.B
^^FTTIME <CR>
.BR
FTTIME,#-1;
.BR;.TS24
;TIME#ACCUMULATION
.B
FTSLEE <CR>
.BR
FTSLEE,#-1;
.BR;.TS24
;SLEEP#UUO\\
.B;.LM0
^AFTER YOU HAVE COMPLETED THE DIALOGUE SEQUENCE ASSOCIATED WITH ^^NO, LIST\\,
OR ^^EXPLAIN, FGEN\\ REPEATS THE QUESTION:
.B;.I5
^^STANDARD#SETTING#(YES,#NO,#LIST,#EXPLAIN):\\
.B
^YOU SHOULD ANSWER ^^YES\\ IF ALL OF THE VALUES ARE
ACCEPTABLE, ^^NO\\ IF YOU WISH TO CHANGE ANY SETTINGS, AND ^^LIST\\
OR ^^EXPLAIN\\ IF YOU WISH TO OBTAIN ANY MORE DEFAULT INFORMATION.
.B
^WHEN YOU ANSWER ^N^O AND CHANGE THE SWITCH
SETTINGS THAT YOU WISH TO CHANGE, YOU MAY HAVE ^^FGEN\\ TYPE EACH
SWITCH AND ASK FOR ITS FINAL SETTING. ^^FGEN\\ ASKS
.B;.I5
^^SET#EACH#SWITCH#(Y,N):\\
.B
^WHEN YOU TYPE ^^YES, FGEN\\ TYPES
.B;.I5
^F^TXXXX,^^M#(ON,OFF,LIST,EXPLAIN,END):\\
.B
FOR EACH SWITCH, WHERE ^M=-1 IF THE SWITCH IS ON AND ^M=0
IF THE SWITCH IS OFF. ^YOU CAN THEN SPECIFY WHETHER THE
SWITCH SHOULD BE ^^ON\\ OR ^O^F^F, OR WHETHER TO ENTER ^^LIST\\ OR ^^EXPLAIN\\
MODE AS BEFORE. ^BY TYPING ^E^N^D, YOU CAN SPECIFY THAT NO MORE SWITCHES ARE TO BE
LISTED AND THAT THE CURRENT VALUES ARE TO BE USED.
.B2;.LM20;.TS5,20;.I-20
5 ^^DO YOU WANT THE VIRTUAL MEMORY FACILITY (YES,NO):\\
.B
^THIS QUESTION WILL ONLY BE TYPED FOR ^^KI10- \\OR ^^KL10-\\
BASED SYSTEMS. ^ANSWER ^Y IF YOU WANT VIRTUAL MEMORY
CAPABILITIES AND HAVE ^^VMSER\\ (WHICH IS AN UNBUNDLED LICENSED PRODUCT).
.LM0;.RM70;.F;.J
.HL1 ^&PRODUCING RELOCATABLE BINARY FILES COMMON.REL, COMMOD.REL, AND COMDEV.REL\&
.B2
\\
.HL2 ^&ASSEMBLING \THE CONFIGURATION FILES\&
\\^YOU SHOULD ASSEMBLE THE FILES ^^HDWCNF.MAC, TTYCNF.MAC,
NETCNF.MAC, F.MAC,\\ WITH ^^S.MAC\\ AND ^^COMMON.MAC\\ TO PRODUCE
THE RELOCATABLE BINARY FILE ^^COMMON.REL,\\ THE FILES ^^HDWCNF.MAC\\
AND ^^F.MAC\\ WITH ^^S.MAC\\ AND ^^COMMOD.MAC\\ TO PRODUCE
^^COMMOD.REL\\, AND THE FILES ^^HDWCNF.MAC, TTYCNF.MAC, NETCNF.MAC, F.MAC,\\
WITH ^^S.MAC\\ AND ^^COMDEV.MAC\\ TO PRODUCE ^^COMDEV.REL.\\
.B
^TO ASSEMBLE A 6.03 ^MONITOR TYPE
.B;.I5
^^COMPIL##F/COMP,S/COMP,HDWCNF+NETCNF+TTYCNF+<COMMON,COMDEV,COMMOD>\\
.B
^IT IS IMPORTANT THAT ^^F.MAC\\ PRECEDE ^^S.MAC,\\ BECAUSE ^S HAS
CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLIES DEPENDING ON THE CONTENTS OF ^F. ^ALSO, ALL
OF THE REMAINING FILES MUST FOLLOW ^^S.MAC\\ AND PRECEDE ^^COMMON.MAC\\.
.HL2 ^&ASSEMBLY ERROR MESSAGES \FROM ^^COMMON\\\&
\\^ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES ARE TYPED ON YOUR
TERMINAL IF YOUR ATTEMPT TO ASSEMBLE
^^COMMON\\ IS UNSUCCESSFUL.
.LS;.LE;^^?MORE THAN N. TTYS + PTYS EXCEED FIELD OF DDB.\\_^1
.FN4
.B
------------------
.BR
1.#^NOTE THAT ALL ERROR MESSAGES ARE PRECEDED BY A NUMBER. ^THESE
NUMBERS ARE USED FOR REFERENCE ONLY; THEY ARE NOT PRINTED BY ^^COMMON\\.
.END FOOTNOTE
.B
^THE SYSTEM CAPACITY OF 511 ^^TTY\\S AND ^^PTY\\S HAS BEEN EXCEEDED.
^YOU MUST RERUN ^^MONGEN\\, ANSWERING QUESTIONS FOR FEWER
^^TTY\\S AND ^^PTY\\S.
.LE;^^?NOT ENOUGH PI'S TO SERVICE THIS CONFIGURATION SUGGEST
EDITING COMMON TO PUT MORE DEVICES ON A SINGLE CHANNEL.\\
.B
^THE SYSTEM CAPACITY OF SEVEN PRIORITY INTERRUPT CHANNELS HAS BEEN
EXCEEDED. ^YOU SHOULD ASSIGN MORE DEVICES TO EACH ^P^I
CHANNEL BY EDITING ^^INTTAB\\ IN THE SOURCE OF ^^COMMON\\ OR
BY CHANGING THE ^P^I ASSIGNMENT OF THE SPECIAL DEVICES
THAT HAVE BEEN ADDED.
.LE;^^?FT2REL MUST BE -1 WHEN 2 RELOC REGISTERS EXIST\\.
.LE;^^?PLEASE ASSEMBLE SOURCES WITH FTRTTRP = -1.\\
.LE;^^?PLEASE ASSEMBLE SOURCES WITH FTLOCK = -1.
.LE;?PLEASE ASSEMBLE SOURCES WITH FTHPQ = -1.\\
.B
^MESSAGES 3 THROUGH 6 INDICATE THAT YOU SPECIFIED
INCORRECT SETTINGS IN ^^F.MAC\\, I.E., YOU HAVE ASKED FOR A FEATURE
TO BE INCLUDED WITH ^^HDWGEN\\ BUT YOU DID NOT INCLUDE THE FEATURE
IN ^^FGEN\\. ^YOU MUST RERUN ^^FGEN\\ TO CORRECT THE IMPROPER
SYMBOL DEFINITIONS.
.LE;^^?SPECIFICATION ERROR - DSCTAB\\.
.B
^THERE IS A SPECIFICATION ERROR IN THE DATA SET CONTROL TABLE.
^YOU MUST CORRECT IT BY RUNNING ^^MONGEN\\ AGAIN. ^USUALLY THIS ERROR OCCURS WHEN
LINE NUMBERS ARE NOT DENSE ON ^D^C10^BS AND ^D^C10^ES.
.LE;^^%NUMBER OF JOBS REDUCED TO MAX=511.\\
.B
^YOU SPECIFIED MORE THAN 511 JOBS. ^YOU SHOULD RERUN ^^MONGEN\\ TO
CORRECT THE ERROR.
.LE;^^?512 OR MORE PTY'S EXCEEDS FIELD OF DDB.\\
.B
^YOU SPECIFIED MORE THAN 512 ^^PTY\\S. ^YOU SHOULD RERUN
^^MONGEN\\ TO CORRECT THE ERROR.
.LE;^^?TRAP OFFSET SWITCH CANNOT BE SET ON A SINGLE PROCESSOR SYSTEM\\.
.B
^YOU INCORRECTLY SET THE ^^CPTOS\\ SWITCH. ^YOU MUST RERUN
^^MONGEN\\ AND CHANGE THE SETTING OF THE ^^CPTOS\\ SWITCH
TO 0 IF YOU HAVE A SINGLE PROCESSOR SYSTEM. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 8.15,
^OCTAL ^DEFAULT ^VALUES.)
.LE;^^?DL10 MAPPED AREA EXCEEDS 1K\\.
.B
^YOU MADE THE MAPPED AREA TOO LARGE. ^YOU MUST REDUCE THE
SIZE OF THE MAPPED AREA, OR CHANGE JUMPER IN ^^DL10\\ HARDWARE
TO 8^K AND ADD "^^DLX8K\\ ==1" IN ^^REMCNF.MAC\\.
.LE;^^? DL10 MAPPED AREA EXCEEDS 8K\\.
.B
^THE MAPPED AREA IS STILL TOO LARGE. ^YOU MUST REDUCE THE
SIZE OF THE MAPPED AREA FOLLOWING THE PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN MESSAGE 11.
.LE;^^? DLXLNG IS NOT EQUAL TO LENGTH OF MAPPED AREA\\.
.B
^YOU HAVE SPECIFIED ^^DLXNG\\ TO BE EITHER LESS THAN OR GREATER
THAN THE LENGTH OF THE MAPPED AREA. ^YOU MUST CHANGE IT SO THAT IT IS EQUAL TO
THE LENGTH OF THE MAPPED AREA. (^THIS IS AN INTERNAL ERROR AND
SHOULD NOT OCCUR.)
.ELS
.LM0;.RM70;.F;.J
.HL1 ^&DESCRIPTION OF THE CONFIGURATION FILES\&
\\^THE FOLLOWING CONFIGURATION FILES ARE PRODUCED BY THE ^^MONGEN\\
DIALOGUE PROGRAM:
.LS;.LE;^^HDWCNF.MAC\\###IS PRODUCED BY ^^HDWGEN\\
.LE;^^TTYCNF.MAC\\###IS PRODUCED BY ^^TTYGEN\\
.LE;^^NETCNF.MAC\\###IS PRODUCED BY ^^NETGEN\\
.LE;^^F.MAC\\########IS PRODUCED BY ^^FGEN\\
.ELS
^ALL FOUR OF THESE FILES CONTAIN THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FOR
EACH OF THE QUESTIONS ASKED:
.LS;.LE;^THE QUESTION ASKED BY THE PROGRAM AS A COMMENT
.LE;^YOUR RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION AS A COMMENT
.LE;^THE ^^MACRO\\ DEFINITIONS CONTAINING THE SWITCH OR SYMBOL
AND ITS VALUE.
.ELS
^^MONGEN\\ ALWAYS DEFINES ALL THE SYMBOLS THAT APPEAR IN THE
CONFIGURATION FILES, REGARDLESS OF YOUR ANSWER TO A
QUESTION. ^THEREFORE, YOU DO NOT HAVE TO STUDY THE ^^MONGEN\\
PROGRAM IN ORDER TO UNDERSTAND WHAT HAPPENS ON CERTAIN QUESTIONS.
^IT IS SUFFICIENT THAT YOU ONLY LOOK AT THE LISTINGS OF THE
CONFIGURATION FILES THAT ARE ASSEMBLED WITH ^^COMMON.MAC\\.
.HL2 ^&DESCRIPTION \OF ^^COMMON.MAC\\\&
\\^SINCE ^^COMMON.MAC\\ SELECTIVELY ASSEMBLES ONLY THOSE ITEMS NEEDED
FOR THE DEFINED CONFIGURATION, IT CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING ITEMS:
.LS;.LE;^THE DEFAULT SYMBOLS THAT YOU CAN OVERRIDE
DURING THE ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE.
.LE;^SPECIAL LOWER CORE LOCATIONS (BELOW 400 IN THE MONITOR).
.LE;^THE MONITOR STARTUP LOCATIONS.
.LE;^THE ^^EXEC\\ PAGE MAP FOR A ^K^I10/^K^L10 PROCESSOR.
.LE;^THE ^^PDP-10/PDP-11\\ SHARED CORE AREA ON SYSTEMS WITH ^D^C75S.
.LE;^^CPU\\ DATA BLOCKS (^^CDB\\S) FOR EACH PROCESSOR.
.LE;^VARIABLE DATA LOCATIONS FOR THE MONITOR.
.LE;^THE JOB AND HIGH SEGMENT TABLES.
.LE;^THE TERMINAL DATA BASE.
.LE;^MONITOR INITIALIZATION CODE TO LINK DEVICE DATA BLOCKS AND TO CREATE
MULTIPLE COPIES FOR ALL MULTIPLE DEVICES, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF DISK.
.LE;^SPECIAL ^^MACRO\\S TO DEFINE THE ^P^I ASSIGNMENT.
^THESE ^^MACRO\\S CREATE A TWO-WORD-PER-ENTRY TABLE THAT CONTAINS
THE FOLLOWING:
.B;.LM13;.TS13;.I-4
A.##^DEVICE ^DATA ^BLOCK ADDRESS
.B;.I -4
B.##^NUMBER OF DEVICES
.B;.I -4
C.##^PRIORITY ^INTERRUPT CHANNEL FOR DEVICE
.B;.I -4
D.##^INTERRUPT LOCATION FOR DEVICE
.B;.I -4
E.##^LENGTH OF ^DEVICE ^DATA ^BLOCK IF MULTIPLE DEVICE
.LM9
.LE;^LOCATIONS SET BY ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE.
.LE;^SYSTEM ERROR STOP CODE (407 RESTART).
.LE;^COMMON SUBROUTINE RETURNS.
.LE;^SUBROUTINE TO SAVE AND RESTORE PRESERVED ACCUMULATORS.
.LE;^COMMON BYTE POINTERS.
.LE;^THE ^P^I CHANNEL SAVE AND RESTORE ROUTINES.
.LE;^CODE TO HANDLE TRAPS TO 40 AND 60 (PRIMARY ^C^P^U) AND 140
AND 160 (SECONDARY ^C^P^U) AND THE CODE TO HANDLE ^A^P^R INTERRUPT
ENTRY AND EXIT.
.LE;^REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS ENTRY POINTS AND TABLES.
.LE;^REAL-TIME TRAPPING TABLES.
.LE;^HIGH PRIORITY QUEUE ^U^U^O CODE.
.LE;^SCHEDULER QUEUE DEFINITIONS AND TABLES.
.ELS
.HL2 ^&DESCRIPTION \OF ^^COMMOD.MAC\\\&
\\^YOU ASSEMBLE ^^COMMOD.MAC\\ WITH ^^HDWCNF.MAC, F.MAC\\ AND
^^S.MAC\\ TO PRODUCE ^^COMMOD.REL. COMMOD\\ SELECTIVELY
ASSEMBLES THE ITEMS REQUIRED FOR THE DEFINED CONFIGURATION. ^IT
CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING ITEMS:
.LS;.LE;^THE ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.
.LE;^THE DEFAULT SYMBOLS THAT YOU CAN OVERRIDE DURING
THE ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE.
.LE;^THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR WRITING A NEW CONTROLLER ROUTINE.
.LE;^THE SYMBOL NAMING CONVENTIONS.
.B;.LM13;.I-4
A.##3-LETTER PREFIXES
.B;.I-4
B.##3-LETTER SUFFIXES
.LM9
.LE;^THE LIST OF UPPER AND LOWER LIMITS FOR VARIOUS DISK PARAMETERS.
.LE;^THE DATA STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION.
.LE;^THE CORE AND DISK BLOCK SYMBOL DEFINITIONS FOR THE FILE SYSTEM.
.B;.LM13;.I-4
A.##^GENERALIZED CORE BLOCKS
.B;.I-4
B.##^ACCESS TABLE
.B;.I-4
C.##^^BAT\\ BLOCKS
.B;.I-4
D.##^CHANNEL ^DATA ^BLOCKS
.B;.I-4
E.##^DEVICE ^DATA ^BLOCKS
.B;.I-4
F.##^HOME BLOCKS
.B;.I-4
G.##^MONITOR JOB TABLES
.B;.I-4
H.##^CONTROLLER ^DATA ^BLOCKS
.B;.I-4
I.##^LOGICAL BLOCK NUMBERS WITHIN UNIT
.B;.I-4
J.##^MONITOR BUFFER
.B;.I-4
K.##^NAME BLOCK
.B;.I-4
L.##^PROJECT-^PROGRAMMER NUMBER BLOCK
.B;.I-4
M.##^^RIB\\ BLOCKS
.B;.I-4
N.##^^SAT\\ BLOCKS
.B;.I-4
O.##^FILE STRUCTURE DATA BLOCK
.B;.I-4
P.##^SYSTEM VARIABLES
.B;.I-4
Q.##^^UFD\\ BLOCKS
.B;.I-4
R.##^UNIT DATA BLOCKS
.ELS
.LM0
.HL2 ^&DESCRIPTION \OF ^^COMDEV.MAC\\\&
\\^^COMDEV.MAC\\ CONTAINS SYMBOLS, CODE, AND DATA BASES ASSOCIATED
WITH DEVICES (IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER). ^THE ITEMS ARE LISTED BELOW.
.LS;.LE;^CONVERSION SYMBOLS FROM THE OLD ^^MONGEN\\ FORMAT (^^XXXXX\\N)
TO THE NEW (^^M.XXXX).\\
.LE;^TERMINAL (^^TTY)\\ AND REMOTE STATION CONVERSION SYMBOLS.
.LE;^^MONGEN\\ DEFAULT SYMBOLS.
.LE;^TERMINAL (^^TTY)\\ DATA BASE.
.LE;^REMOTE STATION DATA BASE.
.LE;^ALL OTHER DEVICE-SPECIFIC CODE AND DATA BASES.
.LE;^^EXTERNS\\ USED TO LOAD THE PROPER DEVICE ROUTINES FROM THE
MONITOR LIBRARY.
.ELS
.HL1 ^&HDWGEN EXAMPLE\&
.literal
.R MONGEN
MONGEN for 603 monitors
/HELP(PROMPT,SHORT,LONG)]: LONG
Which GEN(HDW,TTY,NET,F)[
HDW to define hardware configuration
TTY to define terminal configuration
NET to define network configuration
F to define software features]: HDW
Output(DSK:<cr>HDWCNF.MAC):<cr>
DECsystem10(1040,1050,1055,1070,1077,1080,1088)[
1040 is small disk system with KA10 cpu
1050 is large disk system with KA10 cpu
1055 is disk system with 2 KA10 cpu's
1070 is disk system with KI10 cpu
1077 is disk system with 2 KI10 cpu's
1080 is disk system with KL10 cpu
1088 is disk system with 2 KL10 cpu's]: 1080<cr>
System name[24 characters or less]: TESTER603<cr>
CPU0 serial #(1-10000): 3333<cr>
Exclude Monitor overhead from user run time(Y,N)[
Overhead is CPU time spent clock queue processing, command
decoding, core shuffling, swapping, and scheduling.
User run time always includes UUO execution and
unless EBOX/MBOX runtime accounting is selected
(KL10 systems only) includes IO interrupt service time.
On KA or KI systems, each CPU must have a DK10]: Y<cr>
EBOX/MBOX runtime accounting?(y,n)[
If EBOX/MBOX runtime accounting is selected in a KL10
based system, user runtime is computed using the KL10
internal accounting clocks]: Y<cr>
Exclude PI time from user runtime?(y,n)[
An answer of "yes" to this question will cause the monitor
to set up the KL10 accounting meters in such a manner that
users will not be charged for cpu time used during interrupts]: Y<cr>
# Data Channels(2,1-8)[DF10s, DF10Cs, DX10s OR RH20'S for disk and tape]: 2<cr>
Channel 0 Type (DF10,DF10C,DX10,RH20): RH20<cr>
On channel # 0:
# RH20S for RP04'S, RP06'S(0-1)[Controllers for RP04, RP06 disk pack
units on channel 0]: 1<cr>
# Units on RPA(1-8): 2<cr>
# RH20's for TM02'S (0-1)[Mass-Bus tape controller for
TU16's and TU45's on channel 0]: 1<cr>
How many TM02's on RH20 # 0 (1-8)[EACH UNIT CAN CONTROL
UP TO 8 SUB-UNITS = TAPE DRIVES]: 2<cr>
How many drives on TM02 0 (1-8): 2<cr>
How many drives on TM02 1 (1-8):2 <cr>
Channel 1 Type (DF10,DF10C,DX10,RH20): DX10<cr>
On channel # 1:
# Controllers(0-1)[TX01's or TX02's for TU70 Tape Drives on channel 1]: 1<cr>
# Units on MTB(1-8): 2<cr>
TM10As(0,0-2)[I/O Bus type Controller for NRZI only drives]: 0<cr>
Specify which drives (M-N) are 7 track drives.
[Type one number (M) or one range(M-N) or ALL on separate lines.
Type an extra carriage return when through.]
For controller MTA
<cr>
For controller MTB
<cr>
Specify which tape drives (M-N) are capable of 6250 BPI densities.
[Type one number (M) or one range (M-N) or ALL on separate lines.
Type an extra carriage return when through.]
For controller MTA
<cr>
For controller MTB
<cr>
# DTEs on CPU0(2<cr>,1-4)[BYTE TRANSFER DEVICE USED FOR KL10 to PDP-11 front end communications]: 2<cr>
# Jobs(1-511)[Maximum number attached and detached, not
counting null job]: 80<cr>
Max. PAGES of core For each job(0,0-512)[0 means all of core]: 256<cr>
# K total system core(32-4096)[ONCE-only reports if
less core at startup]: 1056<cr>
Clock ticks per second(60,50)[Power line frequency]: 60<cr>
# Real-time devices(0,0-77)[Max. # which can be put
on PI channels simultaneously]: 0<cr>
Allow jobs to be locked in core(Y,N): Y<cr>
# PAGES min guaranteed among jobs not locked in core(0,0-512)[
minimum free core pool for unlocked jobs, 0 assumes all of core]: 256<cr>
# High priority queues(0,0-15): 2<cr>
CCL commands to stay in core(Y,N)[System programs pass
commands to each other via core(TMPCOR UUO) rather than disk]: Y<cr>
Meter(Y,N)[Performance analysis metering(METER UUO)]: Y<cr>
SYSCHK(Y,N)[Initial Hardware integrity check at ONCE-only time]: N(cr>
MSGSER(Y,N)[Support for device MPX. (more than one device
on an I/O channel). This feature is required for TYPSET-10
and MCS-10]: Y<cr>
PSISER(Y,N)[Advanced programmed software interrupt service -
Support for the PISYS. UUO. This provides an easy
and powerful interrupt method for program to trap asynchronous
events. Required bY<cr> MCS-10]: Y<cr>
IPCF(Y,N)[Inter process communition facility]; Y<cr>
ENQ/DEQ(Y,N)[Sychronization Primitives To-allow
simultaneous file update by multiple co-operating processes]: Y<cr>
# CDRs(1,0-2)[Card reader]: 0<cr>
CDP(Y,N)[Card punch]: N
CP10D(Y,N)[Special Systems unbuffered Card Punch]: N<cr>
DIS(Y,N)[Display device(VP10,340,30,VB10C) as distinguished from
display terminals]: N<cr>
# TD10s(1,0-2)[DECtape controls]: 2<cr>
# Units on DTA(1-8): 4<cr>
# Units on DTB(1-8): 2<cr>
LPTs(1,0-3)[Line printers]: 3<cr>
LPT0 Lower case(Y,N)[Does LPT0 have lower case capability]: Y<cr>
LPT1 Lower case(Y,N)[Does LPT1 have lower case capability]: Y<cr>
LPT2 Lower case(Y,N)[Does LPT2 have lower case capability]: N<cr>
PLTS(0,0-2)[Plotters]: 0<cr>
PTP(Y,N)[Paper tape punch]: Y<cr>
PTR(Y,N)[Paper tape reader]: Y<cr>
# PTYs(20,0-510)[Pseudo-terminals - each operator
service program and Batch stream needs one]: 20<cr>
DC44(Y,N)[
The DC44 is a TYPESET-10 front end which supports
the following devices:
PA611R High speed paper tape reader
PA611P High speed paper tape punch
LPC11 Online photocomposition machine]: N<cr>
# of DA28s(0,0-4)[Interprocessor channels for PDP8/11/15]: 0<cr>
# DAS78'S(0,0-8)[IBM 360, 370, and/or 2780 support]: 0<cr>
Decimal "symbol,value"[
For any symbols to be defined.
Type one per line, extra carriage return when through]
<cr>
<cr>
Octal "symbol,value"[
For any symbol to be defined.
Type one per line, extra carriage return when through]
<cr>
<cr>
SIXBIT "symbol,value"[
For any sixbit symbol to be defined.
Type one per line, extra carriage return when through]
<cr>
Type "device-mnemonic,PI-channel" for special devices[
With neither channel AC save routine nor device data block,
the "device-mnemonic" must be 3 characters or less.
Type extra carriage return when through.]
<cr>
Type "device-mnemonic,PI-channel,no.-of-devices"[
For special devices with device data blocks.
the "device-mnemonic" must be 3 characters or less.
Type extra carriage return when through.]
<cr>
Type "device-mnemonic,PI-channel,highest-ac-to-save"[
For special devices with channel save routines to save acs up to
the "highest-ac-to-save". "Device" must be 3 char or less.
Type extra carriage return when through.]
<cr>
File DSK:HDWCNF.MAC Closed [HDWGEN finished]
.end literal
.PAGE
.HL1 ^&TTYGEN EXAMPLE\&
.literal
Which GEN(HDW,TTY,NET,F)[
HDW to define hardware configuration
TTY to define terminal configuration
NET to define network configuration
F to define software features]: TTY<cr>
Output(DSK:TTYCNF.MAC): <cr>
How many DC10s(1,0-2)[
The DC10 is a data line scanner]: 1<cr>
How many DC68s(1,0-2)[
The DC68 is a PDP-8 680 or 680I communications system]: 1<cr>
How many DC76s(1,0-8)[
The DC76 is a PDP-11 communications system]: 0<cr>
For DC10 0:
# DC10B[ or 632] 8 line data groups(1-8)[
1 is TTY0-7, 2 is TTY0 - 17, ... 8 is TTY0 - 77]: 2<cr>
# DC10E Data set control groups(0-2): 2<cr>
Correspondence of DC10E lines to the DC10B lines(M-N,P)[
Type M,P for one pair and M-N,P for a range of pairs
where M is octal DC10E line, M-N is octal range of DC10E
lines, and P is octal DC10B line]
<cr>
<cr>
FOR DC68 0:
# Octal lines on DC68, including its console TTY(1-144): 20<cr>
OPR octal line #(CTY,0-37)[OPR is privileged operator terminal]:
Answer the following questions about your TTY lines(M-N).
[Type one octal line #(M) or one range(M-N) or CTY on separate
lines. Type extra carriage return when through.]
<cr>
Data set lines[Class of terminal for LOGIN, LOGIN resets line
to computer echoing and no hardware tabs]
<cr>
Lines with hardware tabs[Monitor simulates rest with spaces]
<cr>
Remote lines[Class of terminal for LOGIN, do not confuse
with remote station TTYs]
3-7<cr>
<cr>
Local copy lines[Echoing provided by terminal rather than
by computer. Often (incorrectly) called half duplex]
10-12<cr>
<cr>
Half duplex lines[TWX or half duplex wired scanner(DC10C)]
<cr>
Slaves[No commands may be typed]
<cr>
Lines with hardware form feed[Leave out if users
would rather not get form feeds until they do TTY FORM commands]
<cr>
Lines which run INITIA at startup
0-16<cr>
<cr>
Filler class codes(M-N,P)[
Type M,P for one line M with filler class code P or
M-N,P for a range of lines with filler class code P]
<cr>
2741 lines on DC-10 interfaces[]
<cr>
File DSK:TTYCNF.MAC Closed [TTYGEN finished]
.end literal
.HL1 ^&NETGEN EXAMPLE\&
.literal
Which GEN(HDW,TTY,NET,F)[
HDW to define hardware configuration
TTY to define terminal configuration
NET to define network configuration
F to define software features]: NET<cr>
Output(DSK: <cr>NETCNF.MAC): <cr>
Network software(Y,N)[
Software to support remote computers: DECsystem-10's,
PDP-11's, PDP-8's (requires FTNET to be -1)]: Y<cr>
How many nodes do you wish to support(3,0-63)[Maximum]: 3<cr>
How many DC75NP's or DN87's on the system(1,0-8)[Network
front-ends connected to DL10's.]: 1<cr>
For front end number 1:
To which DL10 port is the DC75 or DN87 connected (0,0-7)[]:
How many DN87S's on the system(1,0-3)[Network
front-ends connected to DTE-20's]: 0<cr>
Node number of central site(1-77)[
Unique number identifying DECsystem-10 to network.]: 1<cr>
Name of central site[Six characters or less.]: CENTRAL<cr>
%More than 6 characters.
Name of central site[Six characters or less.]: CENTER<cr>
# of remote TTY's(0,0-512)[
Maximum number of teletypes on network nodes to be
handled at any given time.]: 12<cr>
# of remote CDR's(0,0-63)[
Maximum number of card readers on network nodes to be
handled at any given time.]: 0<cr>
# of remote LPT's(0,0-63)[
Maximum number of line printers on network nodes to be
handled at any given time.]: 22<cr>
# of remote PTR's(0,0-0)[
Maximum number of paper tape readers on network nodes to be
handled at any given time.]: 0<cr>
# of remote PTP's(0,0-63)[
Maximum number of paper tape punches on network nodes to be
handled at any given time.]: 0<cr>
# of remote MTA's(0,0-0)[
Maximum number of magnetic tape drives on network nodes to be
handled at any given time.]: 0<cr>
# of remote processes(0,0-128)[
Maximum number of remote processes that can be connected to at
any given time (requires FTTSK to be -1).]: 12<cr>
Remote data entry software(Y,N)[
Software to support remote data entry terminals for MCS-10 applications
(requires FTRDX to be -1)]: Y<cr>
# of connects(46,1-512)[
Maximum number of simultaneous connections.]: 46<cr>
File DSK:NETCNF.MAC Closed [NETGEN finished]
.end literal
.HL1 ^&FGEN EXAMPLE\&
.literal
Which GEN(HDW,TTY,NET,F)[
HDW to define hardware configuration
TTY to define terminal configuration
NET to define network configuration
F to define software features]: F<cr>
Output(DSK: <cr>F.MAC): <cr>
Feature set(TINY,KALUG,KILUG,KAFULL,KIFULL,KLFULL)[
TINY Is minimum subset of features for KA10 timesharing
KALUG Is medium size KA10 monitor with enough features for batch
KILUG Same as KALUG but for KI10 cpu
KAFULL Includes all features of DECsystem10 monitor such
as real-time and extended file system for KA10 cpu
KIFULL Same as KAFUL but for KI10 cpu
KLFULL Same as KIFULL but for KL10 cpu]: KLFULL<cr>
Standard setting(YES,NO,LIST,EXPLAIN)[
Standard values for all feature test switches for your configuration]: YES<cr>
Do you want the virtual memory facility(YES,NO)[VMSER must
be on your distribution tape]: YES<cr>
File DSK:F.MAC Closed [FGEN finished]
Which GEN(HDW,TTY,NET,F)[
HDW to define hardware configuration
TTY to define terminal configuration
NET to define network configuration
F to define software features]:
.
.end literal
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL1 ^&DECIMAL DEFAULT VALUES\&
\\^THIS SECTION CONTAINS A DESCRIPTION OF THE STANDARD SYMBOLS
AND DEFAULT DECIMAL VALUES ASSUMED BY THE ^^MONGEN\\ PROGRAM.
^SECTION 8.14.1 LISTS THOSE SYMBOLS DEFINED IN ^^COMMON\\;
^SECTION 8.14.2 LISTS THOSE SYMBOLS DEFINED IN ^^COMDEV\\; AND
^SECTION 8.14.3 LISTS THOSE SYMBOLS DEFINED IN ^^COMCON\\. ^ALL
SYMBOLS ARE LISTED IN THE ORDER IN WHICH THEY ARE DEFINED.
.HL2 ^&SYMBOLS DEFINED \IN ^^COMMON\\\&
.LM5;.I-5
^^NSPMEM\\, 1000
.B
^THE NUMBER OF NANOSECONDS PER MEMORY CYCLE. ^THIS SYMBOL IS
USED TO COMPUTE THE AMOUNT OF TIME SPENT PERFORMING CORE
SHUFFLING, AND IT IS PRINTED BY THE ^^SYSTAT\\ COMMAND. ^FOR
SYSTEMS WITH ^M^B10 MEMORIES, THE CONSTANT SHOULD BE CHANGED
TO 1760.
.B;.I-5
^^EPL4WD\\, 17
.B
^THE NUMBER OF 4-WORD BLOCKS IN THE EXTENDED EXECUTIVE PUSH-DOWN
LIST. ^WHEN EXTENDED IT IS ONE-FOURTH THE LENGTH OF THE
MAXIMUM EXECUTIVE PUSH-DOWN
LIST. ^IF A PUSH-DOWN LIST OVERFLOW OCCURS,
THIS VALUE SHOULD BE INCREASED.
.B;.I-5
^^MONCOR, JOBN*72+EPLLEN\\ (^LARGE ^DISK ^SYSTEMS)
.B
^THE MONITOR RESERVES A TABLE OF AT LEAST ^^MINCOR\\ WORDS,
OR POSSIBLY UP TO THE NEXT 1^K BOUNDARY, FOR ALLOCATING DISK
DEVICE DATA BLOCKS AND EXTENDED PUSH-DOWN LISTS. ^^MONCOR\\ IS
NORMALLY ^^JOBN*90\\ WORDS, ALLOWING 2.5 OPEN DISK FILES PER
JOB. ^IF THIS VALUE IS TOO SMALL, A LARGER VALUE MAY BE
SUPPLIED. ^THE TOTAL SIZE OF THE MONITOR IS PRINTED AFTER THIS
SPACE IS RESERVED IN THE LONG ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE.
.B;.I-5
^^MINCOR, JOBN\\*55 (^SMALL ^DISK ^SYSTEMS)
.B
^FOR A SMALL DISK SYSTEM, THERE ARE ONLY 1.5 OPEN DISK FILES
PER JOB. ^OTHERWISE, THE EXPLANATION IS THE SAME AS FOR
LARGE DISK SYSTEMS ABOVE.
.B;.I-5
^^CTYDCR\\, 18
.B
^THE DELAY FOR ^^CTY\\ CARRIAGE RETURN DURING ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY
DIALOGUE. ^THE DEFAULT CAUSES AN 18-JIFFY DELAY. ^THIS ALLOWS
THE MONITOR TO PAUSE BEFORE PRINTING ON THE NEXT LINE,
ALLOWING THE ^^CTY\\ TO EXECUTE A CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED.
.B;.I-5
^^RLDTIM\\, 112
.B
^THE TIME UNTIL AN AUTO-RELOAD.
.B;.I-5
^^MINMAX\\, 1024*12
.B
^THE SMALLEST VALUE ALLOWED FOR ^^CORMAX\\ AFTER THE SYSTEM
BEGINS EXECUTION.
.B;.I-5
^^UNIQ1,1 UNIQ2,1 \\AND ^^UNIQ12 ... UNIQ6,1 ... UNIQ16\\
.B
^THESE REPRESENT PRIORITY INTERRUPT CHANNELS FOR THE EXCLUSIVE
USE OF A SPECIAL DEVICE. ^IF THE PRIORITY INTERRUPT CHANNELS
ARE TO BE RESERVED, SET THE VALUE OF ^^UNIQ\\N TO 1, WHERE N
IS THE CHANNEL NUMBER. ^FOR EXAMPLE, IF A REAL-TIME DEVICE
REQUIRES EXTREMELY FAST RESPONSE TIME, IT IS NECESSARY TO SET
THE ^^BLKI/BLKO\\ POINTER IN THE CHANNEL LOCATION. (^CHANNEL 7
CANNOT BE RESERVED, AS IT IS ALWAYS USED FOR THE CLOCK.)
.B;.I-5
^^INDPPN\\,0
.B
^IF THE VALUE OF ^^INDPPN\\ IS 0, EACH PROGRAMMER NUMBER REFERS
TO THE SAME PERSON IN EVERY PROJECT. ^IF THE VALUE OF ^^INDPPN\\
IS 77777, PROGRAMMER NUMBERS MAY BE ASSIGNED INDEPENDENTLY WITHIN
EACH PROJECT. ^THIS AFFECTS ONLY THE DISK FILE ACCESS PROTECTION
MECHANISM.
.B;.I-5
^^M.QSTR\\,0
.B
^THE DEFAULT STRUCTURE FOR THE ^^QUEUES\\.
.B;.I-5
^^SYSSEG\\,-1
.B
^THIS FUNCTION CHECKS FILES FOR A FLAG INDICATING
THEY ARE ^^SYS\\ FILES. ^THIS FUNCTION
ALSO PREVENTS DORMANT OR IDLE SEGMENTS FROM SITTING IN CORE, IN
ADDITION TO ACHIEVING FAST ^^GETSEG\\S FROM ^^SYS\\:.
.B;.I-5
^^CPTOS\\,0
.B
^^CPTOS\\ = 0 SETS THE TRAP OFFSET FOR DUAL PROCESSOR SYSTEMS.
^^CPU\\0 NORMALLY TRAPS TO LOCATION 40, AND ^^CPU\\1 NORMALLY TRAPS
TO LOCATION 140. ^^CPTOS\\ = 0 TRAPS ^^CPU\\1 TO LOCATION 40 AND
^^CPU\\0 TO LOCATION 140. ^THE VALUE OF ^^CPTOS\\ MUST BE SET TO
0 FOR SINGLE-PROCESSOR SYSTEMS. (^^KA\\10 ONLY.)
.B;.I-5
^^UFCO\\, 10
.B
^MONITOR CALL FAIRNESS COUNT FOR ^^CPU\\0 IN A MULTI-PROCESSOR
SYSTEM.
.B;.I-5
^^UFC\\1, 10
.B
^MONITOR CALL FAIRNESS COUNT FOR ^^CPU\\1 IN A MULTI-PROCESSOR
SYSTEM. (^^CPU\\1 PICKS ^^UFC\\1 JOBS THAT HAVE JUST COMPLETED
MONITOR CALLS ON ^^CPU\\0 BEFORE PICKING A JOB ON ^^CPU\\1.)
.B;.I-5
^^M.CBAT\\, 10
.B
^THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BAD MEMORY ADDRESSES STORED IN EACH
^^CPU\\ DATA BLOCK ON A MEMORY PARITY ERROR SWEEP OF CORE.
.B;.I-5
^^STDENS\\,5
.B
^THE STANDARD MAGTAPE DENSITY, IF THE USER PROGRAM DOES NOT OVERRIDE
THE SYMBOL VALUE WITH AN ^^INIT, OPEN,\\ OR ^^SETSTS\\ MONITOR
CALL OR WITH THE ^^SET DENSITY\\ COMMAND. ^THE STANDARD IS 6250
BPI FOR ^^TU\\70S.
.B;.LM10;.NF;.NJ
1 = ODD PARITY + 200 BPI
2 = ODD PARITY + 556 BPI
3 = ODD PARITY + 800 BPI
4 = ODD PARITY + 1600 BPI
5 = ODD PARITY + 6250 BPI
.B;.F;.J;.LM5;.I-5
^^M.BMAX\\, 13
.B
^THE INITIAL SETTING FOR THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ^^MPB\\
JOBS PERMITTED TO LOG-IN SIMULTANEOUSLY. ^THIS VALUE INITIALIZES
THE MONITOR ^^GETTAB\\ WORD ^^BATMAX\\. ^THE OPERATOR CAN CHANGE
THIS VALUE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION WITH THE ^^OPSER\\ COMMAND:
^^SET BATMAX\\.
.B;.I-5
^^M.BMIN\\, 0
.B
^THE INITIAL SETTING FOR THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF JOBS
GUARANTEED FOR ^^MPB\\. ^THIS VALUE INITIALIZES THE MONITOR
^^GETTAB\\ WORD ^^BATMIN\\. ^THE OPERATOR CAN CHANGE THIS
VALUE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION WITH THE ^^OPSER\\ COMMAND
:^^SET BATMIN\\.
.B;.I-5
^^JIFSEC\\.60
.B
^THE NUMBER OF CLOCK TICKS PER SECOND, I.E., JIFFIES.
.B;.I-5
^^DDTRY\\,4
.B
^THE NUMBER OF TIMES THE MONITOR IS TO TRY TO RECOVER FROM
^D^E^CTAPE ERRORS.
.B;.I-5
^^M.EXE\\, 1
.B
^THE SYMBOL WHICH DETERMINES THE TYPE OF FILE TO BE CREATED
ON THE EXECUTION OF THE ^^SAVE\\ COMMAND. ^IF ^^M.EXE\\ =
0, NORMAL (I.E., ^^SAV, HGH, LOW, SHR\\) FILES ARE CREATED;
IF = 1, .^^EXE\\ FILES ARE CREATED.
.B;.I-5
^^TXTRA\\,0
.B
^THE NUMBER OF EXTRA TERMINAL DISK DATA BLOCKS FOR SLAVE LINES.
.B;.I-5
^^LOGSIZE\\,12
.B
^THE MINIMUM AMOUNT OF VIRTUAL CORE REQUIRED FOR A USER TO BE
LOGGED-IN. ^THIS VALUE MUST BE AT LEAST AS LARGE AS THE ^^LOGIN\\
SYSTEM PROGRAM, WHICH IS CURRENTLY 12^K. ^IF THE AMOUNT OF CORE
IS INSUFFICIENT, THE USER WILL RECEIVE A ^^CORE UNAVAILABLE\\
ERROR MESSAGE, WHICH INCLUDES THE VIRTUAL AMOUNT OF CORE
REMAINING.
.B;.I-5
^^M.JMAX, M.JOB\\
.B
^THE INITIAL SETTING FOR THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF JOBS PERMITTED
TO ^^LOGIN\\ SIMULTANEOUSLY. (^THIS INCLUDES ALL CLASSES OF
JOBS: BATCH, INTERACTIVE, OR OPERATOR SERVICE JOBS. ^NOTE
THAT OPERATOR SERVICE JOBS, SUBJOBS UNDER [1,2], OR SUBJOBS AT
^^OPR\\ OR ^^CTY\\ ARE NOT RESTRICTED FROM LOGGING-IN EVEN
IF ^^LOGMAX\\ IS EXCEEDED, BECAUSE THE TASK MAY BE A CRITICAL
SYSTEM FUNCTION.)
.B
^THIS VALUE, WHICH CANNOT BE LESS THAN 1, INITIALIZES THE
MONITOR ^^GETTAB\\ WORD ^^LOGMAX\\. ^THE OPERATOR CAN CHANGE
THIS VALUE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION WITH THE ^^OPSER\\ COMMAND
:^^SET LOGMAX\\.
.B;.I-5
^^M.CMCT\\, 32
.B
^THE NUMBER OF TIMES THE CORE TABLES (^^CHKTAL\\) ARE TO BE CHECKED BEFORE
PERFORMING ITS DEFINED FUNCTIONS, WHICH REQUIRES APPROXIMATELY 5 MS OF OVERHEAD. ^THIS REDUCES ^^CPU\\ TIME FOR ^^CORE,
GETSEG\\, AND ^^RUN\\ MONITOR CALLS. ^THE MAXIMUM VALUE TO
WHICH THIS SYMBOL MAY BE SET IS 262,000.
.B;.I-5
^^M.XFFA, 0\\
.B
^IF ^^M.XFFA\\ IS NON-ZERO, THE ^FILE ^DAEMON WILL NOT BE CALLED
IF THE PROGRAM ACCESSING THE FILE IS BEING RUN UNDER [1,2] OR HAS THE ^^JACCT\\ BIT SET.
.LM0
.HL2 ^&SYMBOLS DEFINED \IN ^^COMDEV\\\&
.LM5;.I-5
^^MTSIZ\\, 128
.B1
^THE SIZE OF MAGNETIC TAPE RECORDS IN 36-BIT WORDS
(I.E., DATA WORDS IN THE BUFFER). ^USERS CAN OVERRIDE THIS
VALUE BY USING THE ^^SET BLOCK SIZE MTA\\N: COMMAND.
^PROGRAMS CAN OVERRIDE THIS VALUE BY BUILDING SPECIAL BUFFERS.
.B1;.I-5
^^LPTSIZ\\, 29
.B1
^THE SIZE OF THE LINE PRINTER BUFFER + 2. ^THE VALUE OF 29
ALLOWS A FULL LINE TO BE TYPED ON A 132-COLUMN LINE PRINTER
IN ONE BUFFER. ^THIS VALUE SHOULD BE CHANGED TO 26 WHEN USING
120-COLUMN LINE PRINTERS.
.B1;.I-5
^^FLCDEF\\, 1
.B1
^THE FILLER CLASS CODE TO USE IF ONE IS NOT SPECIFIED FOR A
^^TTY\\ LINE.
.B1;.I-5
^^MTELOG\\, -1
.B1
^IF = -1, ERRORS THAT REQUIRE MORE THAN ONE RETRY ARE LOGGED.
^IF = 0, ALL RECOVERABLE ERRORS ARE LOGGED.
.B1;.I-5
^^MTDAEM\\, 10
.B1
^THE NUMBER OF TIMES PER REEL TO CALL ^^DAEMON\\ FOR MAGTAPE
ERROR REPORTING.
.LM0
.HL2 ^&SYMBOLS DEFINED \IN ^^COMMOD\\\&
.LM5;.I-5
^^STRMAX\\, 14
.B1
^THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DISK FILE STRUCTURES THAT CAN BE ON LINE
SIMULTANEOUSLY. ^BY DECREASING THIS VALUE, ONE WORD WILL BE
SAVED FOR EACH DECREMENT OF 1. ^THIS VALUE IS AUTOMATICALLY SET
TO 1 FOR 1040 SYSTEMS; THE VALUE CANNOT EXCEED 14.
.B1;.I-5
^^CCWMAX\\,10
.B1
^THE MAXIMUM LENGTH IN WORDS OF EACH DISK CHANNEL COMMAND LIST.
^ALTERING THIS VALUE WILL AFFECT EFFICIENCY AND SPACE. ^THE
VALUE IS SET TO 10 FOR 1040 SYSTEMS. ^^CCWMAX\\ IS NOT USED FOR ^K^I10 AND ^K^L10 SYSTEMS.
.B1;.I-5
^^SWPMAX\\,8
.B1
^THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DISK UNITS THAT MAY BE USED FOR SWAPPING
(1 WORD PER UNIT). ^THE VALUE IS SET TO 1 FOR 1040 SYSTEMS.
.B1;.I-5
^^SWCLSN\\,7
.B1
^THE HIGHEST CLASS NUMBER FOR SWAPPING; THIS VALUE CANNOT
EXCEED 7.
.B1;.I-5
^^DSKTRY\\,10
.B1
^THE NUMBER OF TIMES TO TRY ON DISK DATA ERRORS FOR ALL
FILE STRUCTURES BEFORE RECALIBRATING (INCLUSIVE OF THE INITIAL
TRY).
.B1;.I-5
^^SERTRY\\,3
.B1
^THE NUMBER OF TIMES TO TRY ON SEARCH ERRORS BEFORE RECALIBRATING
(INCLUSIVE OF THE INITIAL TRY).
.B1;.I-5
^^RCLTRY\\,10
.B1
^THE NUMBER OF TIMES TO RECALIBRATE AND TRY ON ^^DSKTRY\\ DISK
DATA ERRORS OR ON ^^SERTRY\\ SEARCH ERRORS (INCLUSIVE OF
THE INITIAL TRY). ^THE TOTAL NUMBER OF DISK TRIES WITH RECALIBRATION
IS EQUAL TO ^^DSKTRY * RCLTRY\\ (I.E., 10 * 10 = 100).
^THE TOTAL NUMBER OF SEARCH TRIES WITH RECALIBRATION IS EQUAL
TO ^^SERTRY *RCLTRY\\ (I.E., 10 * 3 = 30).
.B1;.I-5
^^CHVIFP\\,10
.B1
^THE STANDARD INITIAL FAIRNESS COUNT FOR POSITIONING. ^THE
MONITOR CHOOSES THE NEAREST REQUEST FOR POSITIONING (^^CHVFP\\
TIMES -1) BEFORE TAKING THE LONGEST WAITING REQUEST.
.B1;.I-5
^^CHVIFT\\,10
.B1
^THE STANDARD INITIAL FAIRNESS COUNT FOR TRANSFERS. ^THE
MONITOR CHOOSES THE SHORTEST LATENCY FOR A TRANSFER (^^CHVIFT\\
TIMES -1) BEFORE TAKING THE LONGEST WAITING REQUEST.
.B1;.I-5
^^PTRLEN\\,6
.B1
^THE NUMBER OF IN-CORE RETRIEVAL POINTERS PER FILE LENGTH;
THIS OFFSETS THE SIZE OF THE DEVICE DATA BLOCK.
.B1;.I-5
^^FIL4WD\\,9
.B1
^THE NUMBER OF 8-WORD BLOCKS ALLOCATED PER JOB IN A COMMON
POOL OF MONITOR FREE CORE. ^THE VALUE OF ^^FIL4WD\\ SHOULD
BE INCREASED IF THE ^^ENTER\\ MONITOR CALL'S ERROR
CODE 16 IS RECEIVED REGULARLY. ^TO ASSIGN THIS SPACE THE
^^ONCE-O\\NLY CODE MULTIPLIES THIS FACTOR BY THE NUMBER OF
JOBS. ^THESE BLOCKS ARE USED BY THE ^LEVEL-^D ^DISK ^SERVICE
FOR ACTIVE, DORMANT, ^^ACC, NMB, PPB\\, AND
^^UFB\\ BLOCKS. ^THIS POOL IS PERMANENTLY RESERVED FOR THESE
BLOCKS AND IS NOT USED FOR ANY OTHER PURPOSE. ^ANOTHER POOL
IS USED FOR VARIABLE LENGTH CORE BLOCKS, SUCH AS DISK SERVICE
DATA BLOCKS AND EXTENDED EXEC PUSH-DOWN LISTS. ^THE SYSTEM
SETS THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF 4-WORD CORE BLOCKS TO
50 WITH 5 OR FEWER JOBS. ^THE VALUE IS SET TO 5 FOR
1040 SYSTEMS.
.B1;.I-5
^^UNVRSF\\,500
.B1
^THE RECIPROCAL FACTOR OF THE TOTAL DISK SIZE. ^THE AMOUNT OF
DISK SPACE IS SUBTRACTED FROM THE NUMBER OF FREE BLOCKS WHEN
THE MONITOR IS STARTED UP. ^THIS AREA IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR
USERS' DATA. ^IT IS A SAFETY FACTOR THAT ENSURES THERE IS
ROOM TO WRITE THE SECOND ^^RIB\\, ETC. ^THE STANDARD RESERVED
FOR THIS PURPOSE IS ONE FIVE-HUNDREDTH OF THE DISK SPACE.
.B1;.I-5
^^MBFN\\,2
.B1
^THE NUMBER OF 128-WORD MONITOR BUFFERS USED FOR THE READING
AND WRITING OF NON-USER DATA. ^THIS VALUE MUST BE AT LEAST 2.
^THE DEFAULT FOR ^^MBFN\\ IS THE NUMBER OF JOBS DIVIDED BY TEN, PLUS ONE.
^FOR EXAMPLE, THE DEFAULT FOR A 50 JOB SYSTEM IS 6.
.B1;.I-5
^^LBNHOM,1 LB2HOM,10\\
.B1
^THE STANDARD LOGICAL BLOCK NUMBER ON EACH UNIT THAT CONTAINS
THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCK. ^NOTE THAT IT IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO CHANGE
THIS VALUE FOR A SPECIFIC DISK UNIT AS FOLLOWS:
.B1;.TS10
XXXN^^HM,LBNHOM\\
.BR
XXXN^^H2,LB2HOM\\
.BR
.B1
^WHERE:XXXN IS THE UNIT DESIGNATION, E.G., ^^DPA0HM\\, 3.
.B1;.I-5
^^MFDSIZ\\,8
.B1
^THE NUMBER OF BLOCKS ALLOCATED TO THE ^^MFD\\ BY THE REFRESHER
IN EACH FILE STRUCTURE. ^THE ^^MFD\\ CAN BE LONGER THAN
THIS BUT THERE IS A SPEED ADVANTAGE TO CONSECUTIVE BLOCKS.
^INCREASE THIS VALUE IF THE ^^MFD\\ IS NORMALLY LONGER
THAN 8 BLOCKS.
.B1;.I-5
^^LIMLVL\\,0
.B1
^THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF NESTED ^^SFD\\S FOR THIS MONITOR. ^THE
MAXIMUM VALUE FOR ^^LIMLVL\\ IS 5.
.B1;.I-5
^^MAXUSI\\,8
.B1
^THE MAXIMUM NEGATIVE ^^USETI\\ FOR READING AN EXTENDED ^^RIB\\.
.LM0
.HL1 ^&OCTAL DEFAULT VALUES\&
\\^THIS SECTION CONTAINS A DESCRIPTION OF THE STANDARD SYMBOLS
AND DEFAULT OCTAL VALUES ASSUMED BY THE ^^MONGEN\\ PROGRAM.
^SECTION 8.15.1 LISTS THOSE SYMBOLS DEFINED IN ^^COMMON\\;
AND ^SECTION 8.15.2 LISTS THOSE SYMBOLS DEFINED IN ^^COMMOD\\.
^ALL SYMBOLS ARE LISTED IN THE ORDER IN WHICH THEY ARE
DEFINED.
.HL2 ^&SYMBOLS DEFINED \\IN ^^COMMON\\\&
.LM5;.I-5
^A00^^CVN\\, 0
.B1
^THE CUSTOMER VERSION NUMBER.
.B1;.I-5
^^A00MVN\\, 603
.B1
^THE MAJOR VERSION NUMBER.
.B1;.I-5
^^XPANDN\\,0
.B1
^THE VALUE AFFECTS THE LISTING OF ^^COMMON\\. ^IF IT IS
NON-ZERO, ^^COMMON MACRO\\ EXPANSIONS ARE LISTED.
.B1;.I-5
^^APRSN\\,0
.B1
^THE SERIAL NUMBER OF THE ARITHMETIC PROCESSOR.
.B1;.I-5
^^DEFDEB\\,0
.B1
^DEFINES THE STOP CODE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE MONITOR IS
AUTOMATICALLY RELOADED. ^THE DEFAULT VALUE OF 0 INDICATES THAT
THE MONITOR IS RELOADED WITH THE ^^STOP\\ CATEGORY OF STOP
CODES. ^A VALUE OF 100000000000 INDICATES THAT THE MONITOR IS
RELOADED WITH ^^JOB\\ STOP CODES; A VALUE OF 200000000000
INDICATES THAT THE MONITOR IS RELOADED WITH ^^DEBUG\\ STOP
CODES; AND A VALUE OF 300000000000 INDICATES THAT THE MONITOR
IS RELOADED ON ALL TYPES OF STOP CODES. ^IF THE VALUE IS
400000000000, AUTO-RELOAD IS DISABLED. ^IF THE VALUE IS
200000000000, THE SYSTEM STOPS IF THE ^^CPU\\ HALTS. (^REFER TO THE
SPECIFICATION ^^STOPCD.RNO\\.)
.B1;.I-5
^^M.WCH, JW.WMT\\
.B1
^THE ^^WATCH\\ BITS USED TO SET THE INITIAL ^^WATCH\\ING. ^BECAUSE
^^LOGIN\\ SETS ^^JBTWCH\\, THIS IS USEFUL ONLY FOR LINES THAT DO
NOT NEED ^^LOGIN\\, THAT IS THOSE USING ^^INITIA\\.
.B1;.TS15,27,37;.NF;.NJ
BIT 19 = 200000 = ^TIME OF DAY STARTED TO WAIT
BIT 20 = 100000 = ^^RUN\\ TIME
BIT 21 = 40000 = ^^WAIT\\ TIME
BIT 22 = 20000 = ^BLOCKS READ
BIT 23 = 10000 = ^BLOCKS WRITTEN
BIT 24 = 4000 = ^VERSION NUMBERS
BIT 25 = 2000 = ^^MTA\\ STATISTICS
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL2 ^&SYMBOLS DEFINED \IN ^^COMMOD\\\&
.LM5;.I-5
^^PRVFIL\\,057
.B1
^THE STANDARD FILE PROTECTION CODE.
.B1;.I-5
^^PRVUFD\\,775
.B1
^THE STANDARD ^USER ^FILE ^DIRECTORY (^^UFD\\) PROTECTION CODE.
.B1;.I-5
^^SYRDPR\\,355000
.B1
^THIS VALUE IS SET BY THE REFRESHER AND IT INDICATES NON-PRIVILEGED
FILES ON ^^SYS: (HOME.SYS, SAT.SYS\\).
.B1;.I-5
^^SYNRPR\\,357000
.B1
^^SYNRPR\\ = 357000 INDICATES THAT PRIVILEGED FILES ARE ON
^^SYS: (CRASH.EXE, SNAP.SYS, RECOV.SYS, BADBLK.SYS, SWAP.SYS\\).
^USED BY THE REFRESHER.
.B1;.I-5
^^MFDPRV\\,555000
.B1
^THE STANDARD ^MASTER ^FILE ^DIRECTORY (^^MFD\\) PROTECTION CODE.
^ALL USERS CAN ^^READ, LOOKUP\\, BUT NOT ^^CREATE\\ FILES. ^SET BY
THE REFRESHER.
.B1;.I-5
^^SYSPRV\\,775000
.B1
^THE ^^SYS U\\SER ^FILE ^DIRECTORY (^^UFD\\) PROTECTION CODE;
THE PROJECT-PROGRAMMER
NUMBER IS 1,4. ^PROJECT 1 MEMBERS CAN ^^READ, CREATE, LOOKUP\\ FILES;
OTHERS CAN ^^READ\\ AND ^^LOOKUP\\ ONLY. ^SET BY THE REFRESHER.
.B1;.I-5
^^BLKMAX\\,100000
.B1
^THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BLOCKS THAT CAN BE TRANSFERRED IN ONE
DISK FILE OPERATION (^^IOWD\\). ^THIS DEFAULT VALUE IS SO
HIGH THAT THE EFFECTIVE LIMIT IS ONE CYLINDER BOUNDARY.
.B1;.I-5
^^PRVSPL\\,077
.B1
^THE DEFAULT PROTECTION CODE FOR SPOOLED FILES.
.B1;.I-5
^^PRVSYS\\,155
.B1
^THE DEFAULT PROTECTION CODE FOR MOST FILES ON ^^SYS\\:
(EXCEPT FILES WITH THE .^^SYS\\ EXTENSION).
.B1;.I-5
^^PRYSYS\\,157
.B1
^THE DEFAULT PROTECTION CODE FOR .^^SYS\\ FILE ON ^^SYS\\:.
.B;.LM0
.HL 2 ^&SYMBOLS DEFINED \\IN ^^COMDEV\\\&
^^MTDLPT\\,1
.B;.LM5
^STANDARD MAGTAPE LABELS ARE ^^ASCII\\.
.LM0
.HL1 ^&SIXBIT DEFAULT VALUES\&
\\^THE FOLLOWING LIST IS A DESCRIPTION OF THE STANDARD SYMBOLS
AND DEFAULT ^^SIXBIT\\ VALUES ASSUMED BY THE ^^MONGEN\\ PROGRAM.
(^REFER TO THE DESCRIPTION OF THE ^^DESTROY\\ STARTUP OPTION
IN THE ^^HDWGEN\\ SECTION.)
.B1;.LM5;.I-5
^^M.QSTR\\,0
.B1
^FORCE QUEUES TO BE PLACED ON A SPECIFIC ^^STR\\.
.B1;.I-5
^^M.SF00,DSKA\\
.BR
^THE NAME OF THE FIRST FILE STRUCTURE TO CONTAIN FIXED HEAD
DISK UNITS (E.G., ^^FHA, FHB\\, ETC.) WHEN THE ^^DESTROY\\
STARTUP OPTION IS INVOKED. ^THE VALUE (^^DSKA\\) MAY BE ANY
1- TO 4-CHARACTER ALPHANUMERIC NAME BEGINNING WITH A LETTER.
^THE NUMBER OF FIXED HEAD UNITS IN THE STRUCTURE IS SET BY
THE ASSOCIATED DECIMAL SYMBOL ^^M.ZF\\00.
^NOTE THAT THE ^^DEC\\-DISTRIBUTED SOFTWARE SETS
THE NAME OF THE FIRST FILE STRUCTURE, WHICH CONTAINS ALL
FIXED HEAD UNITS, TO ^^DSKA\\.
.B1;.I-5
^^M.SF\\XX,AAAA
.BR
^THE NAME OF THE SECOND THROUGH SIXTEENTH STRUCTURE CONTAINING
FIXED HEAD DISK UNITS (WHERE XX =01....15, AND AAAA IS ANY
4-CHARACTER ALPHANUMERIC NAME BEGINNING WITH A LETTER). ^THE
NUMBER OF FIXED HEAD UNITS IN THE STRUCTURE IS SET BY THE
ASSOCIATED DECIMAL SYMBOL ^^M.ZF\\XX.
^NOTE THAT THE ^^DEC\\-DISTRIBUTED SOFTWARE DOES NOT DEFINE
THESE SYMBOLS, BECAUSE IT ASSUMES THAT ALL FIXED HEAD UNITS
ARE INCORPORATED INTO ONE STRUCTURE, CALLED ^^DSKA\\.
.B1;.I-5
^^M.SD00,DSKB\\
.BR
^THE NAME OF THE FIRST FILE STRUCTURE TO CONTAIN DISK PACK
UNITS (E.G., ^^DPA, DPB,\\ ETC.) WHEN THE ^^DESTROY\\ STARTUP
OPTION IS INVOKED BY THE OPERATOR. ^THE VALUE (^^DSKB\\) MAY
BE ANY 1- TO 4-CHARACTER ALPHANUMERIC NAME BEGINNING WITH A
LETTER. ^THE NUMBER OF DISK PACK UNITS IS SET BY THE DECIMAL
SYMBOL ^^M.ZD\\00. ^NOTE THAT THE
^^DEC\\-DISTRIBUTED SOFTWARE SETS THE NAME OF THE FIRST FILE STRUCTURE,
WHICH CONTAINS ALL DISK PACKS, TO ^^DSKB\\.
.B1;.I-5
^^M.SD\\XX,AAAA
.BR
^THE NAME OF THE SECOND THROUGH SIXTEENTH STRUCTURE CONTAINING
DISK PACK UNITS (WHERE XX =01....15, AND AAAA IS ANY 4-CHARACTER
ALPHANUMERIC NAME BEGINNING WITH A LETTER). ^THE NUMBER OF
DISK PACK UNITS IN THE STRUCTURE IS SET BY THE ASSOCIATED
DECIMAL SYMBOL ^^M.ZF\\XX. ^NOTE THAT
THE ^^DEC\\-DISTRIBUTED SOFTWARE DOES NOT DEFINE THESE SYMBOLS
BECAUSE IT ASSUMES THAT ALL DISK PACKS ARE INCORPORATED INTO
ONE FILE STRUCTURE CALLED ^^DSKB.
.B1;.I-5
^^M.SS\\XX,AAAA
.B1
^THE NAME OF THE FIRST FILE STRUCTURE TO CONTAIN ^^RH\\10S/^^RS\\04S
WHEN THE ^^DESTROY\\ STARTUP OPTION IS INVOKED BY THE OPERATOR.
^THE NUMBER OF FIXED
HEAD UNITS IN THE STRUCTURE IS SET BY THE ASSOCIATED DECIMAL
SYMBOL ^^M.ZS\\00.
.B1;.I-5
^^M.SR\\XX,AAAA
.B1
^THE NAME OF THE FIRST FILE STRUCTURE TO CONTAIN ^^RH\\10S/^^RP\\04S
WHEN THE ^^DESTROY\\ STARTUP OPTION IS INVOKED BY THE OPERATOR.
^THE NUMBER OF FIXED
HEAD UNITS IN THE STRUCTURE IS SET BY THE ASSOCIATED DECIMAL
SYMBOL ^^M.ZR\\00.
.LM0
.HL1 ^&NON-STANDARD DEVICE PI ASSIGNMENT\&
\\^UNDER ORDINARY CIRCUMSTANCES WHEN ^^COMMON\\ IS ASSEMBLED,
DEVICES ARE ASSIGNED TO ^^PI\\ CHANNELS ACCORDING TO THEIR
GROUP PRIORITY. (^REFER TO ^TABLE 8-1.)##^IF YOU
HAVE AT YOUR INSTALLATION A DEVICE NOT LISTED AS A STANDARD
DEVICE IN ^TABLE 9-1 AND YOU HAVE WRITTEN YOUR OWN
^MONITOR ^DEVICE ^SERVICE ^ROUTINE, YOU MUST SPECIFY THE
DEVICE MNEMONIC (IN 3 CHARACTERS OR LESS)
AND DESIGNATE AN APPROPRIATE PRIORITY INTERRUPT
CHANNEL. ^YOU MUST ANSWER ALL THREE QUESTIONS AS THEY APPLY
TO YOUR CONFIGURATION. ^THE FIRST QUESTION
.B1;.I5
^^TYPE "DEVICE-MNEMONIC,PI-CHANNEL" FOR SPECIAL DEVICES\\
.B1;.LM0
REQUESTS SPECIAL DEVICE SERVICE ROUTINES THAT DO NOT NEED EITHER
A ^CHANNEL ^SAVE ^ROUTINE OR A ^DEVICE ^DATA ^BLOCK. ^THE
SECOND QUESTION
.B1;.I5
^^TYPE "DEVICE-MNEMONIC,PI-CHANNEL, NO.-OF-DEVICES"\\
.B
REQUESTS DEVICES WITH SPECIAL SERVICE ROUTINES THAT HAVE
A ^DEVICE ^DATA ^BLOCK BUT NO ^CHANNEL ^SAVE ^ROUTINE. ^THE
THIRD QUESTION
.B1;.I5
^^TYPE "DEVICE-MNEMONIC,PI-CHANNEL, HIGHEST-AC-TO-SAVE"\\
.B
REQUESTS DEVICES WITH SPECIAL SERVICE ROUTINES THAT HAVE A
^CHANNEL ^SAVE ^ROUTINE, BUT NO ^DEVICE ^DATA ^BLOCK.
.B1
^SPECIAL DEVICES THAT YOU ADDED DURING THE ^^HDWGEN\\
DIALOGUE ARE CHAINED TO THE REQUESTED CHANNEL. ^TO GIVE A
DEVICE THE EXCLUSIVE USE OF A CHANNEL, YOU RESPOND
TO THE "SYMBOL,VALUE" QUESTION WITH
.B;.I5
^^UNIQ\\N,1
.B
WHERE N IS THE PRIORITY INTERRUPT CHANNEL TO BE RESERVED.
(^REFER TO THE ^^UNIQ\\N,1 ENTRY IN ^SECTION 8.14.1.)
.B1
^ONE OR MORE PRIORITY INTERRUPT CHANNELS MAY BE RESERVED
FOR REAL-TIME DEVICES WITH THE ^^RTTRP\\ MONITOR CALL. ^THESE DEVICES
ARE COMPLETELY CONTROLLED BY USER PROGRAMS AND HAVE NO SPECIFIC
CODE LOADED WITH THE MONITOR. ^TO RESERVE A PRIORITY INTERRUPT
CHANNEL FOR USE WITH ^^RTTRP,\\ YOU SHOULD RESPOND TO THE "SYMBOL,VALUE"
QUESTION WITH
.B1;.I5
^^RTCH\\N,1
.B
WHERE N IS THE PRIORITY INTERRUPT CHANNEL TO BE RESERVED.
.B
(^REFER TO THE ^^RTCH\\N,1 ENTRY IN ^SECTION 8.14.1 AND TO THE
^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^MONITOR ^CALLS MANUAL.)
.B1
^^I/O\\ DEVICES ARE GROUPED BY THEIR RELATIVE INTERRUPT SPEEDS.
^IF ANY DEVICE OF A PARTICULAR GROUP IS PRESENT, A ^^PI\\
CHANNEL IS ASSIGNED TO THAT DEVICE ACCORDING TO ITS GROUP
PRIORITY. ^GROUP PRIORITIES FOR STANDARD DEVICES MAY BE
REVISED BY REARRANGING THE DEVICES IN ^^INTTAB,\\ WHICH IS IN
THE ^^COMMON\\ SOURCE FILE.
.B2;.C
^TABLE 8-1
.C
^DEVICE ^GROUPS FOR ^^PI\\ ^CHANNEL ^ASSIGNMENT
.B2;.LM2;.RM68;.TS20,40
^DEVICE ^MNEMONIC ^GROUP ^NAME
.B2;.TS22,30;.LM30;.I-25
^^DCB A\\ 136 DATA CONTROL FOR 270 DISK
.B1;.I-25
^^MTA B\\ ^^TM\\10N MAGTAPE DATA CHANNEL
.I-25
^^MTB\\
.B1;.I-25
^^DCT C\\ 136 DATA CONTROL FOR 551 OR 516 TAPE CONTROLS
.B1;.I-25
^^DTA D\\ ^^TD\\10 ^^DEC\\TAPE DATA CHANNEL
.I-25
^^DTB\\
.B1;.I-25
^^CDR E\\ 461 OR ^^CR\\10 CARD READER
.B1;.I-25
^^APR E\\ ^^KI10, KA10,\\ OR 166 ARITHMETIC PROCESSOR
.B1;.I-25
^^RTC E DK\\10 REAL-TIME CLOCK (EACH ^^CPU\\)
.B1;.I-25
^^SCN\\ ^F ^TERMINAL SCANNER
.B1;.I-25
^^PTR F P\\APER-TAPE READER
.B1;.I-25
^^LPT F L\\INE PRINTER
.B1;.I-25
^^DTA F DEC\\TAPE FLAG CHANNEL
.B1;.I-25
^^MTA F M\\AGTAPE FLAG CHANNEL
.I-25
^^MTB\\
.B1;.I-25
^^CTY F C\\ONSOLE TERMINAL
.B;.I-25
^^NET F R\\EMOTE DEVICES
.B1;.I-25
^^DSK G D\\ISK FLAG CHANNEL
.B1;.I-25
^^PEN G L\\IGHT PEN
.B1;.I-25
^^PTP G P\\APER-TAPE PUNCH
.B1;.I-25
^^CDP G C\\ARD PUNCH
.B1;.I-25
^^PLT G P\\LOTTER
.B1;.I-25
^^DIS H D\\ISPLAY DATA CHANNEL
.B1;.I-25
^^CLK I S\\CHEDULER, CLOCK ROUTINES (ALWAYS ASSIGNED TO CHANNEL 7)
.LM0;.RM70;.PS67,70
.HL1 ^&TERMINAL INTERFACE LINE NUMBERS\&
\\^THE ^^DC\\10 DATA LINE SCANNER IS CAPABLE OF HANDLING
UP TO A TOTAL OF 64 LINES (PHYSICAL PORTS). ^THE LINES ARE
MONITORED BY SCANNERS OF TWO TYPES -- A ^^DC10B\\ OR A ^^DC10E.\\
^EACH ^^DC10B\\ IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE EIGHT LINES OF TERMINAL
COMMUNICATIONS, AND EACH ^^DC10E\\ IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE
EIGHT LINES OF DATASET CONTROL. ^WHEN USING A TERMINAL THROUGH
A DATASET, BOTH A ^^DC10B\\ AND A ^^DC10E\\ LINE ARE REQUIRED.
^THE ^^DC10E\\ LINE INTERFACES THE DATASET CONTROL SIGNALS
TO SYSTEM DECIPHERABLE SIGNALS, AND THE ^^DC10B\\ LINE CARRIES
THE TELETYPE INFORMATION.
.B1
^WHEN THE MONITOR ASSIGNS TERMINAL NUMBERS TO ^^DC10\\
LINES, ONLY THE ^^DC10B\\ LINES RECEIVE NUMBERS. ^THE REASON
FOR THIS ACTION IS THAT EACH ^^DC10E\\ LINE MUST BE PAIRED
WITH A ^^DC10B\\ LINE TO FUNCTION PROPERLY, MAKING
AN ADDITIONAL NUMBER UNNECESSARY.
.B1
^EACH INSTALLATION'S SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR MUST DETERMINE
WHICH ^^DC10E\\ DATASET CONTROLLERS ARE WIRED TO WHICH
^^DC10B\\ LINES. (^REFER TO ^FIGURE 8-2, WHERE LINE NUMBERS 10
THROUGH 17 ARE ^^DC10B\\ DATASET LINES THAT ARE HARDWIRED
TO THE ^^DC10E\\ CONTROLLER LINES 20 THROUGH 27.)
.B1
^THE SEQUENCE OF LINE NUMBER ASSIGNMENTS FOR ^D^C76S IS:
.B1;.LM20;.NF;.NJ
^^DC10 0
DC10 1
DC68 0
DC68 1
DC76 0
DC76 1\\
.B1
^REMOTE LINES
.B1
^C^T^YS
^P^T^YS
.PG;.LM0;.F;.J;.FG25;.C
^FIGURE 8-1 ^ONE ^^DC\\10 WITH ^TWO ^^DC10B\\S
.FG25;.C
^FIGURE 8-2 ^ONE ^^DC10\\ WITH ^ONE ^^DC10B\\ AND ^ONE ^^DC10E\\
.PG;.FG25;.C
^FIGURE 8-3 ^ONE ^^DC76\\ WITH 33 ^LINES
.FG25;.C
^FIGURE 8-4 ^ONE ^^DC10\\ WITH ^TWO ^^DC10B\\S AND ^ONE ^^DC68\\ WITH ^EIGHT ^LINES
.PG
.HL1 ^&MONGEN ERROR MESSAGES\&
.LM5;.I-5
?^^ANSWER MUST BE ONE OR (ANS0, ANS1\\,...)
.B1
^YOUR RESPONSE TO THIS QUESTION WAS NOT A LEGAL RESPONSE. ^CHOOSE
ONE OF THE RESPONSES WITHIN PARENTHESES.
.B1;.I-5
?^^ANSWER WITH ONE OF THE CHOICES WITHIN PARENS\\
.B1
^YOU RESPONDED TO A MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTION WITH AN ANSWER
THAT WAS NOT ONE OF THE CHOICES. ^REANSWER THE QUESTION WITH
ONE OF THE SUPPLIED CHOICES TYPED WITHIN PARENTHESES AFTER THE
QUESTION.
.B1;.I-5
?^^CANNOT BE SAME AS CPU\\N
.B1
^WHEN YOU RESPONDED WITH THE SERIAL NUMBER OF A ^^CPU\\, YOUR
RESPONSE MATCHED THE RESPONSE FOR ANOTHER ^C^P^U. ^RETYPE YOUR
RESPONSE AND PRESS THE CARRIAGE RETURN.
.B1;.I-5
?^^DEVICE\\ N ^^NOT AVAILABLE\\
.B1
^THE DEVICE YOU REQUESTED IS NOT AVAILABLE AT THIS TIME. ^SELECT
ANOTHER DEVICE OR WAIT UNTIL THE DESIRED DEVICE IS READY.
.B1;.I-5
?^^HIGHEST-AC-TO-SAVE MUST BE N OR LESS\\
.B1
^YOU SPECIFIED AN ILLEGAL ^^AC\\ NUMBER IN RESPONSE TO THE
QUESTION. ^REANSWER THE QUESTION AND PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
.B1;.I-5
%^^MORE THAN 6 CHARACTERS\\
.B1
^IN ANSWER TO QUESTION NUMBER 9 WITHIN THE ^NETWORKS
^CONFIGURATION DIALOGUE, YOU RESPONDED WITH A CENTRAL
SITE NAME LONGER THAN 6 CHARACTERS. ^REANSWER THE QUESTION WITH
A CENTRAL SITE NAME HAVING FEWER THAN 6 CHARACTERS.
.B1;.I-5
%^^MORE THAN 24 CHARACTERS\\
.B1
^IN ANSWER TO QUESTION NUMBER 4 WITHIN THE ^HARDWARE
^CONFIGURATION DIALOGUE, YOU RESPONDED WITH A SYSTEM NAME LONGER
THAN 24 CHARACTERS. ^REANSWER THE QUESTION WITH A SYSTEM
NAME HAVING FEWER THAN 24 CHARACTERS.
.B1;.I-5
?^^MUST BE IN RANGE MIN-MAX\\
.B1
^YOU SPECIFIED AN ANSWER THAT WAS NOT WITHIN THE LEGAL RESPONSE
RANGE OF MIN TO MAX. ^REANSWER THE QUESTION WITH A VALUE
THAT IS WITHIN THE LEGAL RANGE.
.B1;.I-5
?^^NO DEFAULT RANGE ALLOWED, TYPE A NUMBER\\
.B1
^IN RESPONSE TO A QUESTION, YOU PRESSED THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
^THERE IS NO DEFAULT ANSWER FOR THIS QUESTION. ^REANSWER
THE QUESTION BY TYPING A RESPONSE BEFORE PRESSING THE ^^RETURN\\
KEY.
.B1;.I-5
?^^NO DEFAULT VALUE ALLOWED\\
.B1
^IN ANSWER TO A QUESTION, YOU PRESSED THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY. ^THIS
QUESTION, HOWEVER, DOES NOT HAVE A DEFAULT ANSWER. ^TYPE AN
ANSWER IN RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION BEFORE YOU PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\
KEY.
.B1;.I-5
?^^NOT AVAILABLE IN\\ X ^^MONITOR\\
.B1
^A FEATURE WAS SPECIFIED THAT IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THE
MONITOR YOU ARE GENERATING. ^CHECK THE RESPONSE ^^MONGEN\\
TYPED AFTER YOU TYPED ^^R MONGEN\\; MAKE SURE THAT
YOU ARE USING THE APPROPRIATE VERSION OF ^^MONGEN\\.
.B1;.I-5
?^^NOT DEV:FILE.EXT P,PN\\
.B1
^YOUR RESPONSE WAS NOT IN THE LEGAL FILE SPECIFICATION FORMAT;
RETYPE YOUR RESPONSE AND PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
.B1;.I-5
?^^NOT DEVICE-MNEMONIC, PI-CHANNEL\\
.B1
^YOUR RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION WAS NOT IN THE DESIRED FORMAT.
^RETYPE YOUR RESPONSE IN THE CORRECT FORMAT.
.B1;.I-5
?^^NOT DEVICE-MNEMONIC, PI-CHANNEL, HIGHEST-AC-TO-SAVE\\
.B1
^YOUR RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION WAS NOT IN THE DESIRED FORMAT.
^REANSWER THE QUESTION IN THE CORRECT FORMAT.
.B1;.I-5
?^^NOT DEVICE-MNEMONIC, PI-CHANNEL, NO.-OF-DEVICES\\
.B1
^YOUR RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION WAS NOT IN THE DESIRED
FORMAT. ^REANSWER THE QUESTION IN THE CORRECT FORMAT.
.B1;.I-5
?^^NOT "SWITCH.VALUE" OR KEYWORD\\
.B1
^YOUR RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION WAS NOT LEGAL. ^REANSWER THE
QUESTION AND PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
.B1;.I-5
?^^NOT "SYMBOL.VALUE\\"
.B1
^YOUR RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION WAS NOT IN THE LEGAL FORMAT;
REANSWER THE QUESTION AND PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
.B1;.I-5
?^^TYPE ENOUGH TO UNIQUELY DISTINGUISH ANSWER\\
.B1
^YOU ABBREVIATED AN ANSWER TO A QUESTION. ^THE ABBREVIATION WAS
NOT LONG ENOUGH TO DISTINGUISH IT FROM ANOTHER POSSIBLE
ANSWER. ^REANSWER THE QUESTION WITHOUT ABBREVIATING
THE ANSWER.
.B1;.I-5
?^^TYPE OCTAL LINE NUMBER OR CTY OR CTY1 FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN\\
.B1
^YOUR RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION WAS NOT WHAT ^^MONGEN\\ EXPECTED.
^REANSWER THE QUESTION WITH A ^^TTY\\ LINE
NUMBER, THE WORD ^^CTY\\, OR THE WORD ^^CTY\\1.
.B1;.I-5
?^^TYPE OCTAL M-N\\ OR ^M
.B1
^TYPE A RANGE OF NUMBERS OR A SINGLE NUMBER IN RESPONSE TO THIS
QUESTION.
.B1;.I-5
?^^TYPE OCTAL M-N,P OR M,P\\
.B1
^YOUR RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION WAS NOT IN A LEGAL FORMAT; REANSWER
THE QUESTION WITH A RANGE OF VALUES BEFORE PRESSING THE ^^RETURN\\
KEY.
.B1;.I-5
?^^TYPE ONE ANSWER FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN\\
.B1
^YOU SUPPLIED MORE THAN ONE ANSWER TO THE QUESTION. ^TYPE ONE
ANSWER AND PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
.B1;.I-5
?^^TYPE SINGLE NUMBER FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN\\
.B1
^IN RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION YOU SUPPLIED MORE THAN ONE
DIGIT NUMBER, WHEN ONLY ONE DIGIT IS LEGAL. ^RETYPE YOUR
RESPONSE AND PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
.B1;.I-5
?^^UNKNOWN SWITCH\\
.B1
^YOU HAVE SPECIFIED A SWITCH THAT IS UNKNOWN TO ^^MONGEN\\.
^REFER TO THE LIST OF LEGAL SWITCHES. ^TYPE ONE OF THEM BEFORE
PRESSING THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
.NUMBER CHAPTER 9
.CH ^&ASSEMBLE MACRO FILES\\\&
.SP1
\\^IT IS ALWAYS NECESSARY THAT YOU ASSEMBLE ^^F, S, HDWCNF,
TTYCNF, NETCNF, COMMON, COMDEV\\ AND ^^COMMOD\\ (AND
^^NETPRM\\ AND ^^COMNET\\, IF YOU HAVE PURCHASED NETWORK
SOFTWARE) BECAUSE THEY ARE CONFIGURATION-DEPENDENT. ^THE
FOLLOWING COMMAND STRING CAN BE USED TO ASSEMBLE THESE FILES.
.B
^FOR ^^KL\\10 SYSTEMS ONLY, TYPE THE FOLLOWING:
.B;.I1
_.^^COMPILE DTEPRM\\
.B
^FOR ALL SYSTEMS, TYPE THE FOLLOWING:
.B;.I1
_.^^COMPILE F/COMP,S/COMP,HDWCNF+NETCNF+TTYCNF+<COMMON,COMDEV,COMMOD>\\
.B
^IF YOU RESPONDED ^Y TO THE ^^MONGEN\\ QUESTION ^^DO YOU WANT NETWORK
SOFTWARE\\, TYPE THE FOLLOWING COMMAND LINE INSTEAD OF THE ONE ABOVE.
.B;.I5
_.^^COMPILE F/COMP,S/COMP,NETPRM/COMP,HDWCNF+NETCNF+TTYCNF+<COMMON,
.I5
COMDEV,COMNET,COMMOD\\>
.B
^IT IS IMPORTANT THAT ^^F.MAC\\ PRECEDE ^^S.MAC\\ BECAUSE ^S HAS
CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLIES DEPENDING ON THE CONTENTS OF ^F.
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^IF YOU ARE USING A STANDARD COMBINATION OF FEATURE TEST
SWITCH SETTINGS AND ^D^E^C-SUPPLIED SOURCES, YOU DO NOT NEED
TO ASSEMBLE THE REMAINDER OF THE BUNDLED MONITOR MODULES
BECAUSE THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN ASSEMBLED AND COMBINED IN A
^^TOP?10.REL\\ FILE (SEE TABLES ON FOLLOWING PAGES).
.B
^IF YOU ARE NOT USING A STANDARD COMBINATION OF FEATURE TEST
SWITCH SETTINGS OR YOU HAVE ^^SOUP\\ED IN YOUR OWN CHANGES,
YOU MUST ASSEMBLE ALL THE BUNDLED MONITOR SOURCES. ^THE
SIMPLEST WAY TO DO THIS IS TO COMPILE INDIRECTLY THE
APPROPRIATE .^C^M^D FILE (SEE TABLES ON FOLLOWING PAGES). ^FOR EXAMPLE, TO
ASSEMBLE ALL THE BUNDLED SOURCES FOR A STANDARD ^K^I MONITOR,
TYPE:
.B;.I5
_.^^COMPILE @CONKI\\
.B
^YOU MUST ASSEMBLE ANY UNBUNDLED SOFTWARE. ^TO ASSEMBLE MONITORS
WITH THE VIRTUAL MEMORY OPTION, SUBSTITUTE ^^TOPV10.REL (KI\\10)
OR ^^TOPW10.REL (KL\\10) FOR ^^TOPI10.REL\\ IN THE COMMAND LINE.
.B
^TO ASSEMBLE MONITORS WITH THE ^D^C44 OPTION, ISSUE THE
FOLLOWING COMMAND:
.B;.I5
_.^^COMPILE F, S, TYPSER\\
.B
^AND THEN LINK YOUR MONITOR IN THE PRESCRIBED FASHION.
.B
^TO ASSEMBLE MONITORS WITH THE ^^DAS\\78 OPTION, ISSUE THE FOLLOWING
COMMAND LINE:
.B;.I5
_.^^COMPILE F, S, D78INT\\
.B
^THEN, LINK YOUR MONITOR IN THE PRESCRIBED FASHION. ^FOR
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING THE -11 PORTION OF
THE ^^DAS\\78 AND ^^D78SPL\\, CAREFULLY READ ^^D78MNT.RNO,
DAS78.RNO\\, AND ^^DAS78.RND\\ FOUND ON THE UNBUNDLED DISTRIBUTION
TAPE.
.B
^TO ASSEMBLE MONITORS WITH THE ^^XTCSER\\ OPTIONS, ISSUE THE
FOLLOWING COMMAND:
.B;.I5
_.^^COMPILE F, S, XTCSER\\
.B
^THEN, LINK YOUR MONITOR IN THE PRESCRIBED FASHION.
.B
^IF YOU ALSO WANT TO CREATE CROSS-REFERENCE (^^CREF\\) LISTINGS,
ASSEMBLE ALL THE SOURCES FOR YOUR MONITOR WITH THE ^^CREF\\
SWITCH, I.E., /^C. ^THE SIMPLEST WAY TO DO THIS IS TO
ASSEMBLE THE APPROPRIATE COMMAND FILES INDIRECTLY TO PRODUCE
_.^^REL\\ FILES AND ^^CREF\\ INPUT FILES. ^THEN, ^^CREF\\ CAN
GENERATE THE LISTINGS. (^SEE THE EXAMPLE BELOW.)
.B
^THE TABLE BELOW LISTS THE DIFFERENT ^^MACRO\\ INDIRECT COMMAND
FILES FOR BOTH BUNDLED AND UNBUNDLED SOFTWARE. ^THE
INTERMEDIATE .^^REL\\ FILE EXTENSIONS ARE THE EXTENSIONS
SPECIFIED FOR THE .^^REL\\ FILES IN THE .^^CMD\\ FILES.
.B2;.TS22,37;.NF;.NJ
^^CONFIGURATION BUNDLED INTERMEDIATE
SOFTWARE .REL FILE
FILENAME EXTENSIONS
.B
KA-LUG CONLUG.CMD *.RLG
KA-\\^STANDARD ^^CONKA.CMD *.RLA
KI-LUG CONLGI.CMD *.RLH
KI-S\\TANDARD ^^CONKI.CMD *.RLI
KI-V\\IRTUAL ^MEMORY ^^CONVI.CMD *.RLV
KL-V\\IRTUAL ^MEMORY ^^CONVL.CMD *.RLW\\
.B2;.F;.J
^AFTER ASSEMBLING THE MONITOR SOURCES, YOU MAY NEED TO COMBINE
CERTAIN MODULES INTO A ^^TOP?10.REL\\ FILE.
^IF YOU ARE NOT USING A ^^TOP?10.REL\\
FILE FROM THE DISTRIBUTION TAPE, BECAUSE YOU HAVE USED NONSTANDARD
FEATURE TEST SWITCH SETTINGS OR YOU HAVE MODIFIED THE ^D^E^C
SOURCES, YOU MUST CREATE YOUR OWN ^^TOP?10.REL\\ FILE.
.B
^TO COMBINE THE ASSEMBLED MONITOR MODULES AND MAKE ^^TOPI10.REL\\
FOR A ^K^I SYSTEM TYPE:
.B;.I5
_.^^R PIP
.B;.I5
*CMBKI@\\
.B;.I5
_.\\
.B
^NOTE THAT INDIRECT ^^PIP\\ FILES EXIT DIRECTLY TO MONITOR LEVEL
(_.#PROMPT). ^THEREFORE, YOU MUST SPECIFY ^^R PIP\\ OR ^^START\\ AFTER
SPECIFYING AN INDIRECT COMMAND FILE NAME.
.B
^TO PRODUCE THE PROPER ^^TOP?10.REL\\
FOR YOUR CONFIGURATION, USE THE APPROPRIATE ^^PIP\\ INDIRECT
COMMAND FILES FROM THE LIST BELOW.
.B2;.TS20,32,44,56;.NF;.NJ
^^CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE ##.REL
FILENAME CREATED
.B
KA-LUG CMBLUG.CCL TOPG10.REL
KA-S\\TANDARD ^^CMBKA.CCL TOPA10.REL
KI-LUG CMBLGI.CCL TOPH10.REL
KI-S\\TANDARD ^^CMBKI.CCL TOPI10.REL
KI-V\\IRTUAL ^MEMORY ^^CMBVI.CCL TOPV10.REL
KL-V\\IRTUAL ^MEMORY ^^CMBVL.CCL TOPW10.REL\\
.B2;.F;.J
^^EXAMPLE\\:##^FOR A STANDARD ^K^I SYSTEM YOU WOULD ASSEMBLE THE
SOURCE FILES, PRODUCE A COMPLETE SET OF ^^CREF\\ FILES (CROSS
REFERENCED LISTINGS) ON MAGTAPE, PRODUCE ^^TOPI10.REL\\
AND A LISTING OF THE MONITOR'S GLOBAL SYMBOLS
AS FOLLOWS:
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^COMPILE/C@CONKI
.B
_.ASSIGN MTA LPT
.B
_.CREF
.B
_.R PIP
.B
*CMBKI@
_.\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^SAVE YOUR TERMINAL OUTPUT FROM THE ^^CREF\\ COMMAND SO
YOU WILL KNOW THE ORDER OF THE FILES ON THE MAGTAPE.
.B
^WHENEVER YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ENTIRE SET OF MONITOR SOURCE
FILES, MOUNT THE TAPE CREATED IN THE PREVIOUS STEP AND TYPE:
.B;.I5
_.^^R PIP
.B;.I5
*MTA\\N:(^^MW)=
.I5
*LPT:=MTA\\N:*.*
.B
^IF YOU WANT TO PRINT A SINGLE FILE FROM THE MAGTAPE, ADVANCE
THE TAPE TO THE PROPER POSITION AND ^^PIP\\ THE FILE TO THE
LINE PRINTER. ^USE YOUR TERMINAL OUTPUT THAT YOU SAVED
FROM THE ^^CREF\\ COMMAND TO DETERMINE WHERE THE DESIRED
FILE IS ON THE TAPE.
.B
^THEN TO GET A LISTING OF THE MONITOR GLOBAL SYMBOLS, YOU
MUST RUN ^^GLOB\\. ^TO PRODUCE A ^^GLOB\\ LISTING FOR A
STANDARD ^K^I MONITOR WITH NETWORK SOFTWARE AND SOME UNBUNDLED
SOFTWARE TYPE:
.B;.I5
_.^^R GLOB
.B;.I5
*COMMON,COMDEV,COMNET,COMMOD
.B;.I5
*DSK:TOPI10.GLB=TOPI10\\$
.B
WHERE $ IS AN ^^ESCAPE\\ OR ^^ALTMODE\\.
.B
^IF YOU ASSEMBLED THE SOURCES WITH ^^CONKI.CMD\\, ADD THE
EXTENSION .^^RLI\\ TO ^^COMMON,COMDEV,COMNET\\, AND ^^COMMOD\\
IN THE ABOVE COMMAND STRING.
.NUMBER CHAPTER 10
.CH ^&LOAD AND SAVE THE MONITOR\\\&
.SP1
\\^WHETHER OR NOT YOU CAN LOAD THE MONITOR UNDER TIMESHARING
USING ^^LINK\\-10 DEPENDS ON HOW MUCH USER CORE IS AVAILABLE.
^IN GENERAL, IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS ABOUT 50^K OF USER CORE,
YOU SHOULD BE ABLE TO LOAD THE NEW MONITOR USING ^^LINK\\-10.
^IF YOU HAVE SIGNIFICANTLY LESS USER CORE THAN THIS,
CONSULT YOUR SOFTWARE SPECIALIST FOR DETAILS ON LOADING THE
MONITOR.
.B
^THE FOLLOWING SEQUENCE OF INSTRUCTIONS LOADS AND SAVES A
MONITOR FOR A STANDARD CONFIGURATION WITH NO
UNBUNDLED SOFTWARE:
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R LINK
.B
*/NOINITIAL /HASH:6000 YURMON/SAV,YURMON/MAP = /LOCALS#-
_#/MAXCOR:60K#-
_#,COMMON,COMDEV,COMMOD,TOP?10 /SEARCH /GO\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE FILENAME ^^YURMON\\ IS AN ARBITRARY NAME CHOSEN FOR
THE MONITOR; YOU MAY USE ANY FILE NAME. ^SPECIFY THE ^^TOP?\\10 TO CORRESPOND TO
YOUR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION:
.B;.I5
^^TOPG10\\ FOR ^^KALUG
.BR;.I5
TOPA10\\ FOR ^^KA\\ STANDARD
.BR;.I5
^^TOPH10\\ FOR ^^KILUG
.BR;.I5
TOPI10\\ FOR ^K^I STANDARD
.BR;.I5
^^TOPV\\10 FOR ^K^I-VIRTUAL MEMORY
.BR;.I5
^^TOPW\\10 FOR ^K^L-VIRTUAL MEMORY
.B
^NOTE THAT ^^COMMON, COMDEV,\\ AND ^^COMMOD\\ IN THIS EXAMPLE
WERE GENERATED BY THE ^^COMPILE\\ COMMANDS AT
THE BEGINNING OF ^CHAPTER 9, SO THEIR EXTENSIONS ARE
_.^^REL\\. ^IF AN INDIRECT COMPILE WAS DONE ON A .^C^M^D FILE,
THE EXTENSION CREATED BY THE .^C^M^D FILE WOULD HAVE TO BE
SPECIFIED. ^FOR EXAMPLE, IF .^^COM @CONKI\\ WAS USED, YOU WOULD
HAVE TO SPECIFY ^^COMMON.RLI, COMDEV.RLI\\, AND ^^COMMOD.RLI\\.
.B
^THE ^^TOPI10.REL\\ (OR THE APPROPRIATE ^^TOP?10.REL\\) FILE
CAN BE THE ONE FROM THE MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPE OR ONE
CREATED BY ASSEMBLING ALL THE MONITOR SOURCES WITH THE
PROPER .^C^M^D FILE (SEE ^CHAPTER 9) AND COMBINING THEM WITH
THE PROPER .^C^C^L FILE (NECESSARY IF YOU ARE USING A
NONSTANDARD COMBINATION OF FEATURE TEST SWITCH SETTINGS
OR YOU HAVE ^^SOUP\\ED IN YOUR OWN CHANGES). (^SEE ^CHAPTER 8.)
.B
^IF YOUR MONITOR INCLUDES ONE OR MORE UNBUNDLED OPTIONS (OTHER
THAN VIRTUAL MEMORY), RESTORE THE UNBUNDLED MONITOR MODULES
USING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. ^REPEAT
THE PROCEDURE FOR EACH UNBUNDLED TAPE.
.B;.LM5;.TS25;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP\\
.B
/^^TAPE MT\\XN ;THE TAPE DRIVE WITH
.BR
;THE UNBUNDLED TAPE
.BR
;ON IT.
.BR
/^^RESTORE\\ FILENAME ;FOR EXAMPLE, ^^D78INT.MAC
.BR;.TS25
! ;BACKUP\\'S INDICATION THAT IT
.BR
;IS BUSY
.BR
"^^DONE\\
.BR
;REPEAT ABOVE, BEGINNING WITH
.BR
;/^^TAPE\\ FOR EACH UNBUNDLED TAPE
.BR
_^^C ;^^CTRL/C\\ WHEN YOU ARE FINISHED.
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THEN, YOU SHOULD COMPILE THE FILES ON THE UNBUNDLED TAPES. ^FOR
EXAMPLE, TO COMPILE THE ^^D78INT\\ AND ^^TSKSER\\ OPTIONS, YOU WOULD USE THE
FOLLOWING COMMAND LINE:
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^COMPILE F, S, D78INT, TSKSER
MACRO:F
MACRO:S
MACRO:D78INT
MACRO:TSKSER\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^LASTLY, YOU SHOULD TYPE THE FOLLOWING COMMAND LINE TO LOAD THE MONITOR WITH UNBUNDLED SOFTWARE.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R LINK
.B
*/NOINITIAL/HASH:6000 YURMON/SAV,-
_#YURMON/MAP = /LOCALS/MAXCOR:60K-
_#COMMON, COMDEV, COMMOD, \\UNBMOD,...UNBMOD-
_#^^TOP?10/SEARCH/GO\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^WHERE:##UNBMOD CAN BE ^^COMNET,
.BR;.I8
TSKSER, TYPSER, XTCSER,\\ AND/OR
.BR;.I8
^^D78INT.\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE FILES INCLUDED IN EACH OF THE UNBUNDLED SOFTWARE
PACKAGES ARE LISTED BELOW:
.B
^BE SURE THAT THE UNBUNDLED PACKAGE NAME (E.G., ^^XTCSER,
TYPSER\\, OR ^^D78INT\\) PRECEDES ^^TOP?10\\. ^THIS MUST BE
DONE SO THAT .^^SYSINI, ONCE\\, ETC. WILL BE LOADED LAST AND,
THEREFORE, CAN BE DISCARDED AFTER INITIALIZATION.
.B
^USING THE COMMANDS IN THE ABOVE EXAMPLES, ^^LINK\\ WILL PRODUCE
A LOAD MAP NAMED ^^YURMON.MAP\\. ^THE MONITOR SAVE FILE WILL
BE ^^YURMON.SAVE\\ OR ^^YURMON.HGH\\ AND ^^YURMON.LOW\\. ^THESE
FILES MUST BE CONVERTED TO _.^^EXE\\ FILES BEFORE THEY CAN BE LOADED
WITH ^^BOOTS\\. ^THIS CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED BY USING THE ^^FILEX\\ PROGRAM
OR THE MONITOR COMMANDS ^^GET\\ FOLLOWED BY ^^NSAVE\\.
.B
^NOTE THAT ^^LINK\\-10 ALLOWS YOU TO LOAD AND SAVE A PROGRAM
IN THE SAME COMMAND STRING. ^ALSO, CERTAIN SWITCH SETTINGS
CAN SPEED UP THE LOADING PROCESS. ^^MAXCOR:60K\\ IS
ABOUT THE MINIMUM CORE NECESSARY FOR LOADING THE MONITOR; IF
NO PARAMETER IS SET, HOWEVER, ^^LINK\\-10 WILL EXPAND TO USE
UP TO ONE HALF THE USER CORE. ^USING A ^^HASH\\ SIZE OF 6000
IS AN UPPER LIMIT WHICH SHOULD WORK FOR ANY SYSTEM. ^FOR THE
SAKE OF ECONOMY, IF YOU HAVE A SMALLER SYSTEM, YOU SHOULD TRY
SMALLER ^^HASH\\ VALUES. ^^LINK\\-10 WILL WORK WITHOUT SPECIFYING
EITHER OF THESE PARAMETERS; HOWEVER, THEY MAY SPEED UP THE
LOADING PROCESS IF USED. ^FOR A COMPLETE DEFINITION OF ALL
SWITCHES REFER TO THE ^^LINK\\-10 MANUAL.
.B
^THEN, IF YOU HAVE BUILT A TWO-SEGMENT MONITOR, YOU MUST CONVERT
YOUR MONITOR .^H^G^H AND .^L^O^W FILES TO AN .^E^X^E FILE
(AND YOUR SYSTEM MUST SUPPORT .^E^X^E FILES). ^TYPE:
.B;.I5
_.^^R FILEX
.B;.I5
*YURMON.EXE=YURMON.HGH\\
.B
^IF YOU CHOOSE TO HAVE .^E^X^E FILE SUPPORT WITH A SINGLE
SEGMENT MONITOR, TYPE:
.B;.I5
_.^^R FILEX
.B;.I5
*YURMON.EXE=YURMON.SAV\\
.B
^&^VIRTUAL ^MEMORY\&
.B;.LM18;.TS18;.I-13
^^VMSER.MAC\\ ^THE 6.03 MONITOR SOURCE FILE THAT IMPLEMENTS
VIRTUAL MEMORY.
.B;.I-13
^^TOPV10.REL\\ ^THE COMBINED .^^REL\\ FILES FOR ^K^I10 VIRTUAL
MEMORY MONITORS.
.B;.I-13
^^TOPW10.REL\\ ^THE COMBINED .^^REL\\ FILES FOR ^K^L10 VIRTUAL
MEMORY MONITORS.
.B;.I-13
^^CONVI.CMD\\ ^THE COMMAND FILES NEEDED FOR ASSEMBLING ^K^I10
VIRTUAL MEMORY MONITORS.
.B;.I-13
^^CMBVI.CCL\\ ^THE COMMAND FILES NEEDED TO CREATE THE COMBINED
_.^^REL\\ FILES FOR ^K^I10 VIRTUAL MEMORY SYSTEMS.
.B;.I-13
^^CONVL.CMD\\ ^THE COMMAND FILES NEEDED FOR ASSEMBLING
^K^L10 VIRTUAL MEMORY MONITORS.
.B;.I-13
^^CMBVL.CCL\\ ^THE COMMAND FILES NEEDED FOR CREATING THE
COMBINED ^K^L10 VIRTUAL MEMORY .^^REL\\ FILES.
.B;.I-13
^^MAKPFH.MAC\\ ^THE PAGE FAULT HANDLER FOR ^K^I10 AND ^K^L10 VIRTUAL
.I-13
^^MAKPFH.EXE\\ MEMORY MONITORS.
.I-13
^^PFH.VMX\\
.B;.I-13
^^DDT.VMX\\ ^THE DEBUGGER TO BE USED WITH VIRTUAL MEMORY
SYSTEMS.
.B;.I-13
^^GET.* A\\ USER-MODE PROGRAM ###TO .^^GET\\### VIRTUAL# MEMORY
.I-13
^^GET2.RNO\\ EXECUTABLE PROGRAMS.
.B;.I-18
^&^D^C44 ^OPTION\&
.B;.I-13
^^TYPSER.MAC\\ ^THE 6.03 MONITOR SOURCE FILE NEEDED FOR THE
^D^C44 INTERFACE.
.B;.I-18
^&^D^A^S78 ^OPTION\&
.B;.LM0
^THE FOLLOWING FILE IS A PART OF THE MONITOR CODE.
.B;.LM18;.TS18;.I-13
^^D78INT.MAC\\ ^THE 6.03 SOURCE FILE FOR THE ^^DAS\\70 INTERFACE.
.B;.LM0
^THE FOLLOWING FILES ARE PART OF THE ^^PDP\\-11 CODE.
.B;.LM18;.TS18;.I-13
^^DAS78.CTL\\ ^THE CONTROL FLE NEEDED TO ASSEMBLE THE ^^PDP\\-11
CODE.
.B;.I-13
^^DAS78.P11\\ ^THE SOURCE FILES FOR THE ^^DAS\\78 ^^PDP\\-11
CODE.
.B;.I-13
^^DAS78.BIN\\ ^THE EXECUTABLE ^^DAS78 PDP\\-11 CODE.
.B;.I-13
^^DAS78.EX\\ ^THE ^D^D^T11 FILE FOR THE ^^PDP\\-11 CODE.
.B;.LM0
^THE FOLLOWING FILES ARE PART OF ^^QUEUE\\ AND ^^QMANGR\\,
FOR USE WITH ^^DAS78SPL\\.
.B;.LM18;.TS18;.I-13
^^D78SPL.CTL\\ ^THE CONTROL FILE TO ASSEMBLE ^^D78SPL\\.
.B;.I-13
^^D78SPL.MAC\\ ^THE SOURCE CODE FOR ^^D78SPL\\.
.B;.I-13
^^D78SPL.EXE\\ ^THE EXECUTABLE CODE FOR ^^D78SPL\\.
.B;.LM0
^THE FOLLOWING FILES ARE USED FOR ^^DAS\\78 THE MODIFIED
^^LPTSPL\\. ^THIS PROGRAM IS USED FOR 2780S, REMOTE BATCH
STATIONS CONNECTED TO THE ^D^E^CSYSTEM-10. ^THIS MODIFIED
^^LPTSPL\\ CAN ALSO BE USED TO PRINT ON THE LOCAL LINE PRINTER.
.B;.LM18;.TS18;.I-13
^^SPOOL.CTL\\ ^THE CONTROL FILE FOR ASSEMBLING A ^^DAS78 LPTSPL\\.
.B;.I-13
^^SPOOL.D78\\ ^THE SOURCE CODE FOR ^^DAS\\78 MODIFIED ^^SPOOL\\.
.B;.I-13
^^LPTSPL.EXE\\ ^THE EXECUTABLE CODE.
.B;.I-18
^THE FOLLOWING FILES SUPPORT THE ^^DAS\\78 MODIFIED ^^SPRINT\\.
.B;.LM0
^THIS PROGRAM IS FOR USE WHEN USING ONE 2780 AS A ^REMOTE
^BATCH ^STATION TO THE ^D^E^CSYSTEM-10. ^THIS MODIFIED ^^SPRINT\\
WILL ALSO BE USED TO READ CARDS FROM THE LOCAL CARD READER.
.B;.LM18;.TS18;.I-13
^^SPRINT.CTL\\ ^THE CONTROL FILE FOR ASSEMBLING A ^^DAS78 SPRINT\\.
.B;.I-13
^^SPRINT.D78\\ ^THE SOURCE CODE FOR ^D^A^S78 MODIFIED ^^SPRINT\\.
.B;.I-13
^^SPRINT.EXE\\ ^THE EXECUTABLE CODE.
.B;.I-18
^THE FOLLOWING FILES SUPPORT THE ^^PDP-11 D\\EBUGGING PROGRAM.
.B;.I-13
^^DDT11.MAC\\ ^SOURCE FOR ^D^D^T11.
.B;.I-13
^^DDT11.EXE\\ ^EXECUTABLE CODE.
.B;.I-13
^^DDT11.RNO\\ ^^DDT\\11 DOCUMENT.
.B;.I-18
^THE FOLLOWING FILES SUPPORT ^^MODEM\\ DIAGNOSTICS.
.B;.I-13
^^DQMODM.HLP\\ ^A SHORT DOCUMENT ON HOW TO USE ^^DQMODM\\.
.B;.I-13
^^DQMODM.BIN\\ ^THE EXECUTABLE CODE.
.B;.I-18
^THE FOLLOWING ARE ^^DOCUMENTS\\.
.B;.LM18;.TS18;.I-13
^^DAS78.RNO\\ ^THE ^^DAS78 "C\\OOKBOOK" - ^^WARNING\\: ^PRELIMINARY
VERSION.
.B;.I-13
^^DAS78.RND
.B;.I-13
D78MNT.RNO\\ ^INSTALLATION HINTS AND OTHER USEFUL INFORMATION.
.B;.LM0
^THE FOLLOWING ARE MISCELLANEOUS FILES CONTAINED IN THE ^^DAS\\78
OPTION.
.B;.LM18;.TS18;.I-13
^^C.MAC\\ ^NEEDED FOR ASSEMBLING ^^QUEUE\\.
.B;.I-13
^^SCNMAC.MAC\\ ^NEEDED FOR ASSEMBLING ^^QUEUE.
.B;.I-13
HELPER.REL\\ ^NEEDED FOR ^^LPTSPL, SPRINT\\, AND ^^QUEUE\\.
.B;.I-13
^^QUEUER.REL\\ ^NEEDED FOR ^^LPTSPL, SPRINT\\, AND ^^QUEUE\\.
.B;.I-13
^^SCAN.REL N\\EEDED FOR ^^QUEUE\\ (^V4).
.B;.I-13
^^WILD.REL N\\EEDED FOR ^^QUEUE\\ (^V5).
.B;.LM0
^NOTE:##^THE ^^MACDLX\\ ASSEMBLER IS REQUIRED TO ASSEMBLE
^^DAS78.P11\\, AND THE ^^BOOT\\11 BOOTSTRAP IS REQUIRED TO LOAD
CODE FROM THE -10 INTO THE -11 MEMORY. ^BOTH THESE PROGRAMS WILL
BE FOUND ON THE MAIN (BUNDLED) 6.03 MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPE.
.B
^&^^XTCSER O\\PTION\&
.B
^THE FOLLOWING FILE IS THE ^^XTCSER\\ OPTION.
.B;.LM18;.TS18;.I-13
^^XTCSER.MAC\\ ^THE 6.03 MONITOR SOURCE CODE FOR THE
^^DA28\\ DRIVER.
.B;.LM0
.PS67,70;.F;.J;.LM0;.RM70;.SP1
.NUMBER CHAPTER 11
.CH ^&MAKE A COPY OF THE NEW MONITOR\\\&
.SP1
\\^THIS STEP IS A PRECAUTION AGAINST LOSING THE NEWLY BUILT MONITOR.
^IF THE MONITOR IS ACCIDENTALLY DESTROYED, YOU NEED NOT REBUILD
IT; YOU WILL HAVE A COPY IN ^^READIN\\ MODE AVAILABLE ON TAPE.
.B
^COPY ^^BOOTM, BACKUP.EXE\\, AND YOUR NEWLY BUILT MONITOR TO
MAGNETIC TAPE. ^YOU MUST COPY THE FILES AT 556 BPI FOR ^^READIN\\
MODE ON ^^TM10\\ CONTROLLERS AND AT 800 OR 1600 BPI FOR ^^TU70\\S.
^THE ENTIRE TAPE MUST BE WRITTEN AT ONE DENSITY.
.B
^THE FOLLOWING STEPS CREATE A BACKUP MONITOR TAPE FOR A ^^TM10\\
CONTROLLER. ^FIRST, BE SURE TO READ THE ^^BOOTM\\ DESCRIPTION IN
^CHAPTER 18 ON HOW TO CREATE ^^BOOTM.REL\\ AND ^^BOOTM.RDI\\.
.B;.LM5
^^_.AS MTA0:#BACKUP
.B
_.SET DENSITY MTA0:556
.B
_.SET BLOCKSIZE MTA0:2000
.B
_.REWIND MTA0:
.B
_.COPY MTA0:=BOOTM.REL
.B
_.SET BLOCKSIZE MTA0:128
.B
_.COPY MTA0:=BACKUP.EXE\\
.B;.LM0
^THEN, ^^BACKUP\\ YOUR DISK AREA THAT CONTAINS YOUR NEW MONITOR BY
TYPING:
.B;.LM5
^^_.R BACKUP
.B
/DENSITY 556
.BR
/SAVE DSKB:[\\PPN]=^^DSKB\\:[PPN]*.*
.B;.LM0
^THE FOLLOWING STEPS CREATE A BACKUP MONITOR TAPE FOR ^^TU70\\S:
.B;.LM5
^^_.AS MTA0:#BACKUP
.B
_.REWIND MTA0:
.B
_.COPY MTA0:=BOOTM.RDI
.B
_.COPY MTA0:=BACKUP.EXE\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THEN, ^^BACKUP\\ YOUR DISK AREA THAT CONTAINS YOUR NEW MONITOR BY
TYPING:
.B;.LM5
^^_.R BACKUP
.B
/SAVE[1,2]*.*=[1,2]*.*\\
.LM0;.PG
.NUMBER CHAPTER 12
.CH ^&COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS\\\&
.SP1
\\^PREPARE FOR ^COMMUNICATIONS ^SYSTEMS AND ^REMOTE ^STATIONS
.LS;.LE;^^DC71\\#-#^INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING AND USNG A
^^DC71\\ ^COMMUNICATIONS ^SYSTEM ARE IN THE ^REMOTE ^STATION
^USER'S ^GUIDE IN THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^SOFTWARE ^NOTEBOOKS.
.LE;^^DC72\\#-#^INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING AND USING A ^^DC72\\
^COMMUNICATIONS ^SYSTEM ARE IN THE ^REMOTE ^STATION ^USER'S ^GUIDE
IN THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^SOFTWARE ^NOTEBOOKS.
.LE;^^DC76\\#-#^INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING A ^^DC76\\ ^COMMUNICATIONS
^SYSTEM ARE IN THE ^OPERATORS ^GUIDE IN THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10
^SOFTWARE ^NOTEBOOKS.
.LE;^INSTALLATIONS THAT PLAN TO INSTALL REMOTE STATION SOFTWARE
FOR THE FIRST TIME SHOULD CONTACT THEIR SOFTWARE SPECIALIST.
.ELS
.PG
.NUMBER CHAPTER 13
.CH ^&UPDATE ACCOUNTING FILES\\\&
.SP1
\\^UNDER THE PHASED INSTALLATION CONCEPT, IF YOU ARE RUNNING A
CURRENT MONITOR, YOU HAVE ALREADY CONVERTED THE ACCOUNTING
FILES ^^ACCT.SYS\\ AND ^^AUXACC.SYS\\ TO 6.02 FORMAT USING THE LATEST
VERSION OF ^^REACT\\. ^IF YOU HAVE NOT YET CONVERTED THE ACCOUNTING
FILES, ^^LOGIN\\ UNDER [1,2] AND CONVERT TO THE NEW FORMAT AT THIS TIME.
.B
^IF YOU HAVE NO PREVIOUSLY RUNNING MONITOR, YOU MUST GENERATE THE
INITIAL ACCOUNTING FILES OR AUGMENT THE ^DIGITAL ^EQUIPMENT
^CORPORATION-SUPPLIED ACCOUNTING FILES USING ^^REACT\\.
.LS;.LE;^^ACCT.SYS\\#-#PASSWORDS AND PRIVILEGES FOR ALL USERS.
.B
^TO CONVERT TO THE NEW FORMAT, SIMPLY READ THE OLD FORMAT ^^ACCT.SYS\\
WITH THE ^R COMMAND AND WRITE IT BACK WITH THE ^W COMMAND. ^BE SURE
THE LATEST VERSION OF ^^REACT\\ IS ON ^^SYS:\\
.B
^TYPE:
.B;.I5
^^_.R REACT\\
.B
^OPTIONAL: ^FOR HELP IN RUNNING ^^REACT\\ TYPE:
.B;.I5
*/^H
.B
THEN TYPE:
.B;.I5
*^R
.B;.I5
^^*W DSKA:[1,4]\\
.NT ^^CAUTION\\
^MAKE SURE THAT YOU ARE USING THE LATEST VERSION OF ^^ACCT.SYS\\.
^IF YOU HAVE A COPY OF ^^ACCT.SYS\\ ON SEVERAL FILE STRUCTURES, MAKE SURE
EACH STRUCTURE HAS THE LATEST VERSION.
.B
^ALSO, DO NOT USE THE PASSWORDS SUPPLIED IN ^^ACCT.SYS\\. ^THE
PASSWORDS ARE WELL KNOWN AND USING THEM COULD DECREASE SYSTEM SECURITY.
.EN
.LE;^^AUXACC.SYS\\#-#DISK FILE STRUCTURE QUOTAS FOR ALL USERS.
.B
^BECAUSE DEVICE ^^DSK:\\ FOR ANY JOB IS DEFINED BY THE JOB'S FILE
STRUCTURE SEARCH LIST, DIFFERENT JOBS MAY HAVE DIFFERENT, AND POSSIBLY NONINTERSECTING,
DEFINITIONS OF ^^DSK:\\. ^THEREFORE, ONE JOB COULD REFERENCE A FILE AS
^^DSK\\:FILENAME WHEN ANOTHER JOB COULD NOT (ALTHOUGH THAT JOB COULD
POSSIBLY REFERENCE THE FILE BY SPECIFYING THE FILE STRUCTURE ON
WHICH THE FILE EXISTS).
.B
^TO CIRCUMVENT THIS PROBLEM, YOU OR THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR CAN
SPECIFY ALL PUBLIC FILE STRUCTURES IN THE ^^AUXACC\\ ENTRIES FOR
ALL USERS. ^IF YOU DO NOT WANT A USER TO HAVE SPACE ON A PARTICULAR
FILE STRUCTURE, SPECIFY A LOGGED-IN QUOTA OF 0. ^IN THIS CASE, NO
^^UFD\\ IS CREATED FOR THE USER WHEN HE LOGS IN, BUT THE FILE STRUCTURE IS
INCLUDED IN THE USER'S SEARCH LIST SO THAT HE CAN ALWAYS REFERENCE
OTHER FILES ON THAT FILE STRUCTURE AS DEVICE ^^DSK:.\\
.B
^TO CONVERT THE ^^AUXACC\\ FILES, TYPE THE FOLLOWING TO 6.03 ^^REACT\\:
.B;.I5
*^A
.B;.I5
^^*W DSKA:[1,4]\\
.B
AND TO PUT A SECOND COPY ON A SLOWER FILE STRUCTURE, TYPE:
.B;.I5
^^*W DSKB:[1,4]\\
.ELS
.PG
.NUMBER CHAPTER 14
.CH ^&GET NEW MONITOR\\\&
.SP1
\\^YOU CAN NOW GET THE NEW MONITOR FROM DISK WITH ^^BOOTS\\ OR FROM
MAGTAPE WITH ^^BOOTM\\.
.B
^IF YOU HAVE A ^K^L10 SYSTEM, BEGIN READING AT ^STEP ^B1. ^IF YOU
HAVE A ^K^A10 OR ^K^I10 SYSTEM, BEGIN READING BELOW AT ^STEP ^A1.
^NOTE THAT ALL OF THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS CHAPTER ASSUME THAT
YOU HAVE A SAVED COPY OF THE MONITOR CALLED ^^SYSTEM.EXE\\ ON
[1,4] ON EITHER ^^DSKA:, DSKB:, ..., DSK0.\\
.B
^&^STEP ^A1\& ^^READIN BOOTS.\\
.B
^IF THE MONITOR WAS PREVIOUSLY RUNNING, FOLLOW ^&^SITUATION ^A\&.
^IF YOU HAVE AN ^R^P04 AND ^^BOOTS\\ WAS PREVIOUSLY WRITTEN ON
BLOCKS 0 AND 4 THROUGH 7 OF THE DISK PACKS WITH ^^WTBOOT\\,
FOLLOW ^&^SITUATION ^B\&. ^OTHERWISE, FOLLOW ^&^SITUATION ^C\&.
.B
^&^SITUATION ^A\&: ^MONITOR PREVIOUSLY RUNNING
.LS;.LE;^SET THE ^^NXM\\ SWITCH TO OFF.
.LE;^SET THE MEMORY ADDRESS SWITCHES TO 407.
.LE;^PUSH THE ^^START\\ BUTTON.
.LE;^^BOOT\\S RESPONDS WITH A CARRIAGE RETURN. ^IF THERE IS NO
RESPONSE, TRY ^SITUATIONS ^B OR ^C.
.LE;^TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN TO LOAD ^^SYS:SYSTEM.EXE\\ FROM
ANY DISK (^^DSKA\\ THROUGH ^^DSK0\\). ^IF SOME OTHER FILE, DIRECTORY,
OR STRUCTURE IS DESIRED, TYPE A LINE IN THE FOLLOWING FORMAT:
.B;.I5
STRUCTURE:FILE.EXT[DIRECTORY]
.B
^^BOOT\\S TYPES A BELL AND A QUESTION MARK IF IT CANNOT
FIND THE FILE, OR IF ANY ERRORS OCCUR WHILE READING THE FILE.
.LE;^IF SUCCESSFUL, REFER TO STEP ^C1.
.ELS
^&^SITUATION ^B\&: ^^RP04 R\\EADIN
.LS;.LE;^SET THE ^^NXM\\ AND ^^PAR STOP\\ SWITCH
.LE;^SET THE ^^READIN\\ SWITCHES TO 270. (^IF YOU HAVE
MULTIPLE ^^RH\\10S, YOU MAY HAVE TO SET THE ^^READIN\\ SWITCHES TO 274 OR 360).
.LE;^ON THE ^^READIN\\ PANEL IN THE ^^RH10\\, SET THE TOGGLE SWITCH TO
^^DISK\\, AND SET THE THUMBWHEEL TO THE ^^READIN\\ UNIT NUMBER.
(^IF THE ^D^F10^C IS IN ^K^I MODE, USE AN ODD-NUMBERED UNIT. ^IF
IT IS IN ^K^A MODE OR THE ^R^H10 IS USING A ^D^F10, USE AN
EVEN-NUMBERED UNIT.)
.LE;^PUSH THE ^^STOP\\ BUTTON.
.LE;^PUSH THE ^^RESET\\ BUTTON.
.LE;^PUSH THE ^^READIN\\ BUTTON.
.LE;^^BOOTS\\ RESPONDS WITH A CARRIAGE RETURN. ^IF THERE IS NO
RESPONSE, TRY THE PROCEDURE FOR ^SITUATION ^C.
.LE;^TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN TO LOAD ^^SYS:SYSTEM.EXE\\ FROM
ANY DISK (^^DSKA\\ THROUGH ^^DSK0\\). ^IF YOU WANT A DIFFERENT
STRUCTURE, FILE, OR DIRECTORY FROM THE DEFAULT, TYPE A LINE
IN THE FOLLOWING FORMAT:
.B;.I5
STRUCTURE:FILE.EXT[DIRECTORY]
.B
^^BOOTS\\ TYPES A BELL AND A QUESTION MARK IF IT CANNOT FIND THE
FILE OR IF ANY ERRORS OCCUR WHILE READING THE FILE.
.LE;^IF SUCCESSFUL, TURN TO STEP ^C1.
.ELS
^&^SITUATION ^C\&: ^READ ^^BOOTS\\ FROM PAPER-TAPE READER
.LS;.LE;^PUSH THE ^^STOP\\ BUTTON.
.LE;^PUSH THE ^^RESET\\ BUTTON.
.LE;^PUT THE ^^BOOTS\\ TAPE IN THE PAPER TAPE READER.
.LE;^SET THE ^^NXM\\ SWITCH TO OFF.
.LE;^SET THE ^^READIN\\ SWITCHES TO 104.
.LE;^PUSH THE ^^READIN\\ BUTTON. ^THE PAPER TAPE SHOULD
BEGIN TO MOVE. ^IF IT DOES NOT, RETRY THE PROCEDURE AT LEAST ONCE.
.LE;^^BOOTS\\ RESPONDS WITH A CARRIAGE RETURN WHEN LOADED. ^IF
THERE IS NO RESPONSE, RETRY THE PROCEDURE AT LEAST ONCE.
.LE;^TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN TO LOAD ^^SYS:SYSTEM.EXE\\ FROM ANY
DISK (^^DSKA\\ THROUGH ^^DSK0\\). ^IF YOU WANT A DIFFERENT STRUCTURE,
FILE, OR DIRECTORY FROM THE DEFAULT, TYPE A LINE IN THE FOLLOWING
FORMAT:
.B;.I5
STRUCTURE:FILE.EXT[DIRECTORY]
.B
^^BOOTS\\ TYPES A BELL AND A QUESTION MARK IF IT CANNOT FIND THE
FILE OR IF ANY ERRORS OCCUR WHILE READING THE FILE.
.LE;^IF SUCCESSFUL, TURN TO ^STEP ^C1.
.ELS
^&^STEP ^A2\& ^READIN A ^MONITOR FROM ^MAGTAPE ^USING ^^BOOTM\\.
.B
^THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS DESCRIBE HOW YOU GET A ^K^A10 OR ^K^I10
MONITOR FROM MAGTAPE WITH ^^BOOTM\\. ^THESE INSTRUCTIONS ASSUME THAT
^^BOOTM\\ HAS BEEN WRITTEN AS THE FIRST FILE ON THE MAGTAPE, ^^BACKUP\\
IS THE SECOND FILE, AND THERE IS A ^^BACKUP\\ SAVE SET CONTAINING
THE MONITOR TO BE LOADED.
.B
^NOTE THAT WHEN ^^BOOTM\\ DETECTS AN ERROR, IT TYPES A BELL
AND A QUESTION MARK FOLLOWED BY AN ERROR MESSAGE. ^THE POSSIBLE
ERROR MESSAGES ARE LISTED IN ^CHAPTER 16.
.B
^READ ^^BOOTM\\ FROM MAGTAPE. (^IF YOU HAVE A DUAL-MAGTAPE SYSTEM,
YOU MUST USE ^^MTA\\ FOR ^^READIN\\.)
.LS;.LE;^PUSH THE ^^STOP\\ BUTTON.
.LE;^PUSH THE ^^RESET\\ BUTTON.
.LE;^MOUNT THE MAGTAPE ON ^^MTA\\ UNIT 0 WRITE-LOCKED. (^IT MUST BE
MOUNTED ON UNIT 0 FOR ^^TM10\\ CONTROLLERS OR ON THE LOWEST NUMBERED
READY UNIT FOR ^T^U70S.)
.LE;^FOR A ^T^M10-CONTROLLED MAGTAPE, SET THE ^^READIN\\ SWITCHES TO
340. ^FOR A ^T^U70 UNIT, SET THE ^^READIN\\ SWITCHES TO 220.
.LE;^SET THE ^^NXM\\ SWITCH TO OFF.
.LE;^PUSH THE ^^READIN\\ SWITCH.
.LE;^THE MAGTAPE SHOULD MOVE AND READ IN ^^BOOTM\\ FROM THE FIRST
FILE
.ELS
^^BOOTM\\ OUTPUTS THE PROMPT CHARACTERS ^^BTM>\\. ^THEN, YOU MUST GIVE
A FILE SPECIFICATION FOR THE MONITOR YOU WANT TO READ; FOR EXAMPLE:
.B;.I5
^^DSKB:603.EXE[1,4]\\
.B
^IF YOU TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN IN RESPONSE TO ^^BTM>\\, THE
DEFAULT MONITOR (^^SYS:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]\\) WILL BE READ IN. ^THIS
DEFAULT FILE WILL BE GOTTEN FROM THE MAGTAPE ON THE SAME UNIT FROM
WHICH THE HARDWARE ^^READIN\\ WAS DONE. ^IF ^^BOOTM\\ WAS NOT READ
BY HARDWARE ^^READIN\\ FROM MAGTAPE, THE DEFAULT FOR CONTROLLER IS
^^TM10\\ AND THE DEFAULT FOR UNIT IS 0.
.B
^TURN TO ^STEP ^C1.
.B
^&^STEP ^B1 ^^READIN BOOTS (KL10 S\\YSTEMS)\&
.B
^IN MOST CASES YOU SHOULD ONLY HAVE TO CHECK TO SEE THAT THE
POWER LIGHT TO THE RIGHT OF THE LOAD SWITCHES IS GLOWING RED.
^OTHERWISE, PRESS THE BLACK POWER SWITCH TO THE ^^POWER ON\\ POSITION.
.B
^AFTER POWERING UP THE SYSTEM OR DECIDING THAT YOU MUST DO A COMPLETE
RELOAD, YOU HAVE A FEW ALTERNATIVES ON HOW YOU LOAD THE CONSOLE
FRONT-END PROCESSOR. ^YOU CAN DO A STANDARD LOAD FROM A DISK PACK OR
^^DEC\\TAPE, OR YOU CAN LOAD USING THE SWICTH REGISTER. ^IN MOST CASES,
YOU WILL LOAD FROM A DISK PACK BECAUSE IT IS MUCH FASTER THAN ^^DEC\\TAPE.
^HOWEVER, IF DUAL-PORT HARDWARE PROBLEMS PREVENT LOADING FROM A DISK
PACK, OR IF YOUR SYSTEM MANAGER WANTS YOU TO USE SOFTWARE RESIDING
ON A ^^DEC\\TAPE, YOU MAY NEED TO LOAD THE SYSTEM USING THE ^^DEC\\TAPE
DRIVE. ^ALSO, IF YOU NEED TO LOAD THE SYSTEM USING SOME NON-STANDARD
HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS OR SPECIAL SOFTWARE, YOU WILL HAVE TO USE
THE SWITCH REGISTER. ^THE SWITCH REGISTER ALLOWS YOU TO LOAD
FROM ANY DISK PACK OR ^^DEC\\TAPE AND ALSO ENTER THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION
OPERATOR DIALOGUE (^^KLINIT\\). ^THE ^^KLINIT\\ DIALOGUE ALLOWS YOU TO TAKE
SUCH NONDEFAULT PATHS AS CONFIGURING MEMORY YOURSELF, LOADING A
BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM FROM ANY FILE, AND LOADING A NONDEFAULT MONITOR.
^THE PROCEDURES FOR LOADING THE FRONT-END PROCESSOR VIA A DISK PACK
(^SITUATION ^A), A ^^DEC\\TAPE (^SITUATION ^B), OR THE
SWITCH REGISTER (^SITUATION ^C) ARE DESCRIBED IN THE NEXT THREE SECTIONS.
.B
^&^SITUATION ^A: ^LOADING ^^RSX-20F\\ FROM ^DISK\&
.B
^THIS IS THE MOST COMMON WAY TO LOAD THE CONSOLE FRONT END. ^IT
ASSUMES THAT THE SYSTEM POWER IS ^^ON\\, THAT ALL HARDWARE AND
SOFTWARE HAVE BEEN CORRECTLY INSTALLED, AND THAT THE DISK PACK
HAS BEEN MOUNTED PROPERLY. ^ALSO, THE DISK PACK CONTAINING BOTH THE
^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR AND THE ^^RSX-20F\\ FRONT-END MONITOR MUST BE
ON A DUAL-PORTED DRIVE (CONTROLLER SELECT SWITCH POINTS TO ^A/^B),
AND THE DRIVE MUST BE UNIT 0 WITH RESPECT TO BOTH THE CENTRAL
AND FRONT-END PROCESSORS.
.B
^THE OPERATION IS AS FOLLOWS:
.LS;.LE;^SET THE ^^ENABLE/DISABLE\\ LOAD SWITCH TO ^^ENABLE.\\
.B
^THIS WILL ENABLE THE OTHER THREE LOAD SWITCHES.
.LE;^PRESS THE ^^DISK\\ LOAD SWITCH.
.B
^THIS WILL CAUSE THE FRONT-END PROCESSOR TO ACCESS THE DISK ON
DRIVE 0 AND LOAD THE ^^RSX-20F\\ MONITOR. ^THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION
PROGRAM (^^KLINIT\\) IS LOADED AND THE DEFAULT HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS
OF CACHE AND EXTERNAL MEMORY ARE SET UP. ^THE BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM
FOR THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR IS THEN LOADED INTO THE CENTRAL PROCESSOR
AND STARTED. ^THE FOLLOWING IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE OUTPUT YOU WILL RECEIVE
ON THE CONSOLE TERMINAL.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
^^RSX-20F V006A 0:16 21-JUN-76
.B
[SY0:#REDIRECTED TO DB0:]
[DB0:#MOUNTED]
KLI#--#VERSION V002E RUNNING
KLI#--#MICROCODE VERSION 131 LOADED
KLI#--#ALL CACHES ENABLED
LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION:
.I18
CONTROLLER
.TS14,20,25,30,35,44,52
ADDRESS SIZE RQ0 RQ1 RQ2 RQ3 CONTYPE INT
000000 512K 04 FOR ALL #DMA20 4
KLI#--#BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE FIRST LINE OF OUTPUT TELLS YOU THE VERSION AND THE CREATION TIME
AND DATE OF THE ^^RSX-20F\\ MONITOR FOR THE FRONT END. ^THE
NEXT TWO LINES TELL YOU THAT ^D^B0: (THE DISK PACK ON DRIVE 0)
IS THE SYSTEM DEVICE (^S^Y0:) FOR THE FRONT-END TASKS. ^THE NEXT
EIGHT LINES ARE OUTPUT BY THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION PROGRAM. ^THEY
DOCUMENT THE VERSION OF ^^KLINIT\\ THAT IS RUNNING AND TELL YOU THAT
THE ^K^L10 MICROCODE WAS SUCCESSFULLY LOADED, THE CACHE WAS ENABLED,
EXTERNAL MEMORY WAS CONFIGURED, AND THAT THE BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM FOR THE
^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR WAS LOADED AND STARTED.
.B
^IF AN ERROR OCCURS DURING THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION PROGRAM, YOU WILL
RECEIVE AN ERROR MESSAGE PRECEDED BY "^^KLI#--#?"\\ AND YOU WILL
BE PLACED IN THE ^^KLINIT\\ DIALOGUE MODE DESCRIBED IN ^APPENDIX ^C
OF THE ^K^L ^SERIES ^OPERATOR'S ^GUIDE.
(^THE LOADING OF THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR IS DISCUSSED IN ^STEP ^B2.)
.ELS
^&^SITUATION ^B: ^LOADING ^^RSX-20F\\ FROM ^^DEC\\TAPE\&
.B
^THIS METHOD OF LOADING THE CONSOLE FRONT END SHOULD BE USED IF
YOU CANNOT LOAD FROM A DISK PACK OR IF YOU NEED A PARTICULAR VERSION
OF SOFTWARE THAT IS ONLY ON ^^DEC\\TAPE. ^IT ASSUMES THAT THE
SYSTEM POWER IS ^O^N, THAT THE PROPER SOFTWARE EXISTS ON ^^DEC\\TAPE,
AND THAT THE ^^DEC\\TAPE IS MOUNTED CORRECTLY ON ^UNIT 0. ^BE SURE
TO LEAVE THE ^^DEC\\TAPE MOUNTED WHILE THE SYSTEM IS RUNNING.
.B
^THE OPERATION IS AS FOLLOWS:
.LS;.LE;^SET THE ^^ENABLE/DISABLE\\ LOAD SWITCH TO ^^ENABLE.\\
.B
^THIS WILL ENABLE THE OTHER THREE LOAD SWITCHES.
.LE;^PRESS THE ^^DECTAPE\\ LOAD SWITCH.
.B
^THIS WILL CAUSE THE FRONT-END PROCESSOR TO ACCESS THE ^^DEC\\TAPE
ON DRIVE 0 AND LOAD THE ^^RSX-20F\\ MONITOR. ^THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION
PROGRAM (^^KLINIT)\\ IS LOADED AND THE DEFAULT HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS
OF CACHE AND EXTERNAL MEMORY ARE SET UP. ^THE BOOTSTRAP
PROGRAMS FOR THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR IS THEN LOADED INTO THE CENTRAL
PROCESSOR AND STARTED. ^THE FOLLOWING IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE OUTPUT
YOU WILL RECEIVE ON THE CONSOLE TERMINAL.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^RSX-20F V006A 0:16 21-JUN-76
.B
[SY0:#REDIRECTED TO DT0:]
[DT0:#MOUNTED]
KLI#--#VERSION V002E RUNNING
KLI#--#MICROCODE VERSION 131 LOADED
KLI#--#ALL CACHES ENABLED
LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION
.I18
CONTROLLER
.TS24,30,35,40,45,54
ADDRESS SIZE RQ0 RQ1 RQ3 CONTYPE INT
000000 512K 04 FOR ALL #DMA20 #4
KLI#--#BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE FIRST LINE OF OUTPUT TELLS YOU THE VERSION AND THE CREATION
TIME AND DATE OF THE ^^RSX-20F\\ MONITOR FOR THE FRONT END. ^THE
NEXT TWO LINES TELL YOU THAT ^D^T0: (THE ^^DEC\\TAPE ON UNIT 0) IS
THE SYSTEM DEVICE (^^SY0:\\) FOR THE FRONT-END TASKS. ^THE NEXT EIGHT LINES
ARE OUTPUT BY THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION PROGRAM. ^THEY GIVE THE VERSION
OF ^^KLINIT\\ THAT IS RUNNING AND TELL YOU THAT THE ^K^L10
MICROCODE WAS SUCCESSFULLY LOADED, THE CACHE WAS ENABLED, EXTERNAL
MEMORY WAS CONFIGURED, AND THAT THE BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM FOR THE
^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR WAS LOADED AND STARTED.
.B
^IF AN ERROR OCCURS DURING THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION PROGRAM, YOU
WILL RECEIVE AN ERROR MESSAGE PRECEDED BY "^^KLI#--#?"\\ AND YOU
WILL BE PLACED IN THE ^^KLINIT\\ DIALOGUE MODE DESCRIBED IN ^APPENDIX ^C
OF THE ^K^L ^SERIES ^OPERATOR'S ^GUIDE.
(^THE LOADING OF THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR IS DISCUSSED IN ^SECTION 3.3.)
.ELS
^&^SITUATION ^C: ^LOADING ^^RSX-20F\\ VIA THE ^SWITCH ^REGISTER\&
.B
^YOU MUST LOAD THE CONSOLE FRONT END VIA THE SWITCH REGISTER IF YOU
NEED TO DO ANY OF THE FOLLOWING:
.LS;.LE;^ENABLE SPECIFIC CACHE OR CONFIGURE EXTERNAL MEMORY
YOURSELF INSTEAD OF USING THE DEFAULT CONFIGURATIONS.
.LE;^LOAD A ^^TOPS-10\\ BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM FROM A FILE WITH A NAME OTHER THAN
^^BOOT.EXB\\; FOR EXAMPLE, ^^BOOTM.EXB\\ CONTAINING ^^BOOTM\\,
WHICH LOADS A MONITOR FROM MAGNETIC TAPE.
.LE;^LOAD FROM A DISK PACK OR ^^DEC\\TAPE THAT IS NOT ON UNIT 0.
.ELS
^THE SOFTWARE FOR THE FRONT-END PROCESSOR MUST RESIDE ON A ^^DEC\\TAPE
OR DISK PACK CONNECTED TO THE FRONT END. ^IF BOTH THE FRONT-END SOFTWARE
AND THE SYSTEM MONITOR RESIDE ON THE SAME DISK PACK, THE PACK MUST
BE MOUNTED ON A DUAL-PORTED DRIVE AND THE CONTROLLER SELECT
SWITCH MUST BE SET TO ^A/^B.
.B
^THE OPERATION IS AS FOLLOWS:
.LS;.LE;^SET THE ^^ENABLE/DISABLE\\ LOAD SWITCH TO ^^ENABLE\\.
.B
^THIS WILL ENABLE THE OTHER THREE LOAD SWITCHES.
.LE;^SET THE APPROPRIATE SWITCHES (OR BITS) IN THE SWITCH REGISTER.
.B
^SWITCH 0 IS MANDATORY WHEN LOADING VIA THE SWITCH REGISTER. ^SWITCHES 1
AND 2 MUST BE SET ON IF YOU INTEND TO USE THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION
DIALOGUE (^^KLINIT\\). ^IF ^^RSX-20F\\ RESIDES ON A DISK PACK, SET
SWITCH 7 ON; IF ^^RSX-20F\\ IS ON A ^^DEC\\TAPE, SWITCH 7 MUST
BE OFF. ^SWITCHES 8-10 MUST BE SET TO SPECIFY THE DRIVE NUMBER OF THE
DISK OR ^^DEC\\TAPE. (^FOR A DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ALL THE BIT
SETTINGS IN THE SWITCH REGISTER, SEE ^TABLE 14-1.)
.ELS
.B;.C
^TABLE 14-1
.C
^SWITCH ^REGISTER ^BIT ^DEFINITIONS
.B2;.LM0;.TS2,35
^BIT ^MEANING
.B2;.LM15;.RM68;.TS15;.I-13
0 ^IF THIS IS SET, THE REMAINING BITS ARE INTERPRETED. ^YOU
MUST SET THIS TO LOAD VIA THE SWITCH REGISTER.
.B;.I-13
1,2 ^IF BOTH ARE SET, THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION OPERATOR
DIALOGUE (^^KLINIT\\) IS LOADED AND STARTED. ^THIS IS THE
USUAL CASE WHEN LOADING VIA THE SWITCH REGISTER.
.B
^IF EITHER ONE IS SET, THE ^^RSX-20F\\ IS LOADED; NO
COMMUNICATION IS INITIATED BETWEEN THE -10 AND THE -11 PROCESSORS
AT THIS TIME.
.B
^IF BOTH ARE NOT SET, THE SYSTEM IS LOADED MUCH LIKE IT IS VIA THE
^^DISK\\ OR ^^DECTAPE\\ LOAD SWITCH. ^HOWEVER, BECAUSE OTHER BITS ARE
INTERPRETED, YOU CAN SPECIFY THE UNIT NUMBER OF THE BOOTSTRAP DEVICE
IN BITS 8-10.
.B;.I-13
3-6 ^CURRENTLY NOT USED, AND MUST NOT BE SET.
.B;.I-13
7 ^IF THIS IS SET, THE BOOTSTRAP DEVICE IS A DISK PACK ON
A DUAL-PORTED DRIVE.
.B
^IF THIS IS NOT SET, THE BOOTSTRAP DEVICE IS A ^^DEC\\TAPE
DRIVE ON THE FRONT-END PROCESSOR.
.B;.I-13
8-10 ^THESE THREE BITS ALLOW YOU TO SPECIFY THE UNIT NUMBER OF THE
BOOTSTRAP DEVICE (0 TO 7). ^NO BITS SET INDICATE UNIT 0; BITS
9 AND 8 SET INDICATE UNIT 3.
.B;.I-13
11-14 ^CURRENTLY NOT USED, AND MUST NOT BE SET.
.B;.I-13
15 ^THIS INDICATES THE ACTION TAKEN WHEN AN ^I/^O ERROR OCCURS DURING
THE BOOTSTRAPPING. ^IF THIS IS SET, THE OPERATION IS RETRIED
INDEFINITELY IF AN ERROR OCCURS. ^IF NOT SET (THE NORMAL CASE), A
HALT OCCURS AFTER TEN UNSUCCESSFUL RETRIES.
.B;.I-13
16,17 ^NOT USED, AND MUST NOT BE SET.
.B;.LM9
.LE;^PRESS THE ^^SW/REG\\ LOAD SWITCH.
.B
^THIS WILL CAUSE THE FRONT-END PROCESSOR TO ACCESS THE DISK
DRIVE (SWITCH 7 SET ON) OR THE ^^DEC\\TAPE DRIVE (SWITCH 7 SET
OFF) WITH THE UNIT NUMBER AS SPECIFIED IN SWITCHES 8-10. ^THE
^K^L INITIALIZATION PROGRAM (^^KLINIT\\) IS LOADED AND STARTED
AND THE DEFAULT HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS OF CACHE AND EXTERNAL
MEMORY ARE SET UP. ^THE STANDARD BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM FOR THE ^^TOPS-10\\
MONITOR IS THEN LOADED INTO THE CENTRAL PROCESSOR AND STARTED.
.B
^THE FOLLOWING IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE OUTPUT YOU WILL RECEIVE ON THE
CONSOLE TERMINAL IF SWITCHES 0, 7, 8, AND 9 ARE SET ON.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^RSX-20F V006A 0:16 21-JUN-76
.B
[SY0:#REDIRECTED TO DB3:}
[DB3:#MOUNTED]
KLI#--#VERSION V002E RUNNING
KLI#--#MICROCODE VERSION 131 LOADED
KLI#--#ALL CACHES ENABLED
LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION:
.I18
CONTROLLER
.TS24,30,35,40,45,50,59
ADDRESS SIZE RQ0 RQ1 RQ2 RQ3 CONTYPE INT
000000 512K 04 FOR ALL #DMA20 #4
KLI#--#BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^THE FIRST LINE OF OUTPUT TELLS YOU THE VERSION AND THE CREATION
TIME AND DATE OF THE ^^RSX-20F\\ MONITOR FOR THE FRONT END. ^THE
NEXT TWO LINES TELL YOU THAT ^^DB3:\\ (THE DISK ON UNIT 3) IS THE
SYSTEM DEVICE (^^SY0:)\\ FOR THE FRONT END TASKS. ^IF BIT 7 HAD NOT
BEEN SET, THE ^D^B3: WOULD HAVE BEEN ^D^T3: FOR A ^^DEC\\TAPE.
^THE NEXT EIGHT LINES ARE OUTPUT BY THE ^K^L INITIALIZATION
PROGRAM. ^THEY GIVE THE VERSION OF ^^KLINIT\\ THAT IS RUNNING
AND TELL YOU THAT THE ^K^L10 MICROCODE WAS SUCCESSFULLY
LOADED, THE CACHE WAS ENABLED, EXTERNAL MEMORY WAS CONFIGURED,
AND THAT THE STANDARD BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM FOR THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR WAS
LOADED AND STARTED.
(^THE LOADING OF THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR IS DISCUSSED IN ^SECTION 3.3.)
.B
^IF, IN THE PREVIOUS EXAMPLE, YOU HAD ALSO SET SWITCHES 1 AND 2
ON, THE CONSOLE OUTPUT WOULD HAVE BEEN AS FOLLOWS:
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^RSX-20F V006A 0:16 21-JUN-76
.B
[SY0:#REDIRECTED TO DB3:]
[DB3:#MOUNTED]
KLI#--#VERSION V002E RUNNING
KLI#--#ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?
KLI>\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^SWITCHES 1 AND 2 SET ON SPECIFY THAT YOU WISH TO ENTER THE ^K^L
INITIALIZATION PROGRAM (^^KLINIT\\) OPERATOR DIALOGUE. ^^KLINIT\\
HAS JUST ASKED YOU THE FIRST QUESTION AND IS WAITING FOR AN ANSWER.
^WHEN YOU HAVE ANSWERED ALL THE APPLICABLE QUESTIONS IN THE DIALOGUE,
THE LAST MESSAGE ISSUED WILL BE:
.B;.I5
^^KLI#--#BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED\\
.B
AS IN THE PREVIOUS EXAMPLE.
.B
(^FOR A COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF THE ^^KLINIT\\ DIALOGUE MESSAGES,
AND EXAMPLES, REFER TO ^APPENDIX ^C OF THE ^K^L ^SERIES
^OPERATOR'S ^GUIDE.)
.B
^&^STEP ^B2: ^LOADING ^THE ^CENTRAL ^PROCESSOR (^^TOPS-10 M\\ONITOR)\\\&
.B
^WHEN THE FRONT-END PROCESSOR HAS BEEN LOADED USING ANY ONE OF THE
THREE METHODS DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 3.2, THE SYSTEM INFORMS YOU:
.B;.I5
^^KLI#--#BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED\\
.B
^THE ACTUAL BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM THAT HAS BEEN LOADED DEPENDS UPON
THE METHOD OF LOADING THE FRONT END.
.B
^IF YOU USED THE ^^DISK\\ LOAD, ^^DECTAPE\\ LOAD, OR THE ^^SW/REG\\
LOAD WITH SWITCHES 1 AND 2 OFF, YOU WILL HAVE LOADED THE BOOTSTRAP
PROGRAM FOUND IN THE FILE ^^BOOT.EXB\\. ^THIS WOULD USUALLY BE
^^BOOTS\\, A PROGRAM TO LOAD THE MONITOR FROM A DISK PACK.
.B
^IF YOU HAD USED THE ^^KLINIT\\ DIALOG TO SPECIFY A NON-DEFAULT ^^BOOT\\
FILE, YOU COULD HAVE LOADED A PROGRAM LIKE ^^BOOT\\, WHICH WILL
LOAD THE MONITOR FROM MAGNETIC TAPE.
.B
^IF YOU ARE LOADING THE MONITOR FROM DISK, FOLLOW ^SITUATION ^A.
^IF YOU ARE LOADING THE MONITOR FROM MAGTAPE, FOLLOW ^SITUATION ^B.
.B
^&^SITUATION ^A: ^LOADING ^^TOPS-10\\ FROM ^DISK\&
.B
^IN RESPONSE TO THE MESSAGE:
.B;.I5
^^KLI#--#BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED\\
.B
YOU CAN PRESS THE CARRIAGE RETURN KEY AND LOAD THE DEFAULT
MONITOR FROM THE DISK FILE ^^SYSTEM.EXE\\ OR YOU CAN SPECIFY
ANOTHER FILE SUCH AS:
.B;.I5
^^DSKB:TSTSYS.EXE\\
.B
AND LOAD A DIFFERENT MONITOR.
.B
^WHEN THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR IS LOADED, IT WILL ENTER INTO AN INITIALIZATION
DIALOGUE WITH YOU TO DETERMINE START-UP OPTIONS AND CONDITIONS.
^THESE ARE COVERED IN ^STEP ^C1.\\
.B
^&^SITUATION ^B: ^LOADING ^^TOPS-10\\ FROM ^MAGNETIC ^TAPE\&
.B
^IN ORDER TO LOAD THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR FROM A MAGNETIC TAPE, THE
FOLLOWING PREREQUISITES MUST BE MET:
.LS;.LE;^THE MAGNETIC TAPE CONTAINING THE MONITOR SHOULD BE MOUNTED
ON DRIVE 0. ^IF THIS IS NOT POSSIBLE, MOUNT IT ON ANY DRIVE BUT MAKE
SURE THAT ALL OTHER TAPE DRIVES ARE SET ^^OFFLINE\\.
.LE;^THE BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM TO LOAD A MONITOR FROM MAGNETIC TAPE,
^^BOOTM\\, MUST RESIDE ON THE FRONT-END LOAD DEVICE; DISK OR ^^DEC\\TAPE.
.LE;^LOAD THE CONSOLE FRONT END VIA THE ^^SW/REG\\ LOAD PROCEDURE.
(^SITUATION ^C) WITH AT LEAST BITS 0, 1, AND 2 SET ^^ON.\\ ^THIS
WILL ALLOW YOU TO USE THE ^^KLINIT\\ DIALOG.
.LE;^WHEN ^^KLINIT\\ PROMPTS YOU WITH:
.B;.I5
^^KLI#--#LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP[YES,NO,\\FILENAME]?
.I5
^^KLI>\\
.B
ANSWER WITH THE NAME OF THE FILE CONTAINING THE MAGNETIC TAPE
BOOTSTRAP. ^FOR EXAMPLE, IF ^^BOOTM\\ WAS IN THE FILE ^^BOOTM.EXB\\,
RESPOND WITH:
.B;.I5
^^KLI>BOOTM.EXB\\
.B
^^KLINIT\\ WILL LOAD ^^BOOTM\\, GIVE YOU THE MESSAGE:
.B;.I5
^^KLI#--#BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED\\
.B
AND YOU WOULD THEN BE UNDER CONTROL OF THE BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM.
^WHEN ^^BOOTM\\ OUTPUTS ITS PROMPT CHARACTERS:
.B;.I5
^^BTM>\\
.B
YOU CAN GIVE THE FILE SPECIFICATION FOR THE MONITOR YOU WANT
TO LOAD, SUCH AS:
.B;.I5
^^BTM>DSKB:MAGSYS.EXE[1,4]\\
.B
OR YOU CAN SIMPLY GIVE A CARRIAGE RETURN TO GET THE DEFAULT FILE,
WHICH IS ^^DSKB: SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]\\ FROM THE SAME MAGNETIC TAPE.
.B
^WHEN THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR IS LOADED, IT ENTERS INTO AN INITIALIZATION
DIALOGUE WITH THE OPERATOR TO DETERMINE THE START-UP OPTIONS
AND CONDITIONS. ^THESE ARE COVERED IN ^STEP ^C1.\\
.ELS
^&^^STEP C1: TOPS-10 I\\NITIALIZATION ^DIALOGUE\&
.B
^WHEN THE ^^TOPS-10\\ MONITOR IS LOADED, THE SYSTEM CHECKS TO SEE
THAT THE MONITOR AND PROCESSOR ARE COMPATIBLE. ^IF THEY ARE NOT,
THE FOLLOWING ERROR MESSAGE IS ISSUED:
.B;.I5
^^?THIS MONITOR WAS BUILT FOR A\\ XXXXXX
.I6
^^AND WILL NOT RUN PROPERLY ON A\\ YYYYYY.
.B
WHERE XXXXXX AND YYYYYY CAN BE ^^KA10, KI10\\ OR ^K^L10. ^IF THIS
MESSAGE PERSISTS, THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR SHOULD REVIEW THE MONITOR
GENERATION PROCEDURE IN THE ^SOFTWARE ^NOTEBOOKS.
.B
^IF THE LOAD TIME DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM ^^SYSCHK\\ WAS INCLUDED IN THE
SYSTEM SOFTWARE AT MONITOR GENERATION TIME (DETERMINED DURING THE
^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE), THE SYSTEM WILL PROMPT WITH:
.B;.I5
^^SYSCHK (N,Y):\\
.B
^A RESPONSE OF ^Y RUNS A 5 SECOND DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM THAT ENSURES THE
ACCESSIBILITY OF ALL CONFIGURED MEMORY AND SYSTEM DEVICES. ^A
REPLY OF ^N OR A CARRIAGE RETURN SKIPS THE DIAGNOSTIC.
.B
^THE SYSTEM THEN TYPES THE MONITOR NAME, DATE AND VERSION NUMBER;
FOR EXAMPLE:
.B;.I5
^^ABC123 KL10 SYS_#1234 03-1-77\\
.B
^WHEN THE SYSTEM PROMPTS:
.B;.I5
^^WHY RELOAD:\\
.B
REPLY WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING ACCEPTABLE ANSWERS:
.B;.TS5,20,30;.NF;.NJ
^^OPR NXM CM
PARITY HALT SA
POWER LOOP NEW
STATIC HUNG SCHED
HARDWARE PM OTHER\\
.B;.F;.J
^IF YOU DO NOT REPLY WITHIN 60 SECONDS, ^^OTHER\\ IS ASSUMED. (^REFER
TO ^CHAPTER 14 FOR THE MEANINGS AND USAGE OF THE ABOVE REPLIES.)##^THE
REPLY IS STORED IN THE SYSTEM ERROR FILE (^^ERROR.SYS\\) AND CAN
BE RETRIEVED AT A LATER TIME USING THE ^^SYSERR\\ PROGRAM. ^FOR EXAMPLE,
A REPLY OF:
.B;.I5
^^WHY RELOAD:SCHED\\
.B
WILL RECORD THAT THIS PARTICULAR MONITOR LOAD WAS A SCHEDULED RELOAD.
.B
^WHEN THE SYSTEM PROMPTS:
.B;.I5
^^DATE:\\
.B
ENTER THE NUMERIC DAY AND ALPHABETIC MONTH, IN EITHER ORDER. ^THE
MONTH MAY BE ABBREVIATED TO ANY POINT WHERE IT IS STILL UNIQUE. ^THE
YEAR IS OPTIONAL. ^IF ENTERED, IT MUST BE EITHER THE FULL FOUR
DIGITS OR THE LAST TWO. ^IF THE YEAR IS NOT ENTERED, IT IS ASSUMED
TO BE THE SAME AS IN THE MONITOR CREATION DATE. ^IF, FOR EXAMPLE,
THE MONITOR CREATION DATE WAS ^JUNE 21, 1976, ANY OF THE FOLLOWING REPLIES
WOULD BE RECORDED AS ^SEPTEMBER 8, 1976.
.B;.I5
^^DATE:SEP 8 1976
.I5
DATE:S 8 76
.I5
DATE:8 SEP\\
.B
^WHEN THE SYSTEM PROMPTS:
.B;.I5
^^TIME:\\
.B
ENTER A 4 DIGIT TIME BASED ON A 24-HOUR CLOCK. ^FOR EXAMPLE,
.B;.I5
^^TIME:2015\\
.B
REPRESENTS 8:15 ^P^M.
.B
^WHEN THE SYSTEM PROMPTS:
.B;.I5
^^STARTUP OPTION:\\
.B
REPLY WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
.B;.TS5,20,30;.NF;.NJ
^^QUICK REFRESH LONG
GO UNITED NOINITIA
DESTROY CHANGE\\
.B;.F;.J
^A COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF EACH STARTUP OPTION IS CONTAINED IN
^CHAPTER 16. ^THE USUAL OPERATOR'S REPLY IS ^G^O TO START
THE SYSTEM WITH A MINUMIM AMOUNT OF DIALOGUE OR ^^QUICK\\ TO START
THE SYSTEM IMMEDIATELY WITHOUT CHANGING ANY PARAMETERS.
.B
^THE MONITOR IS NOW READY FOR TIMESHARING. ^^INITIA\\ IS BROUGHT UP AUTOMATICALLY
ON SYSTEMS WITH ^^OPSER\\ AND AN AUTOMATIC RESTART FILE.
.B
^IF YOU HAVE A ^K^A10 SYSTEM, SET THE ^^NXM\\ SWITCH ^^OFF\\ UNLESS
YOU ARE DEBUGGING AND PREFER TO HAVE THE MACHINE STOP AND DISPLAY
THE MEMORY ADDRESS WHEN NON-EXISTENT MEMORY IS REFERENCED.
.NUMBER CHAPTER 15
.CHAPTER ^© NEW MONITOR TO SYS\&
\\^YOU SHOULD NOW COPY THE NEW MONITOR TO ^^SYS\\ FOR ^^READIN\\
WITH ^^BOOTS\\ FROM DISK.
.B;.I5
_.^^COPY SYS:SYSTEM.EXE = 6.03 EXE\\
.NUMBER CHAPTER 16
.CH ^&ONCE DIALOGUE\\\&
.SP1
\\^IN MOST INSTANCES, YOU SHOULD START YOUR MONITOR WITH THE ^G^O, ^^NOINITIA\\
OR ^^QUICK STARTUP O\\PTION. ^THE ^^STARTUP O\\PTIONS ARE A PORTION OF THE
^^ONCE\\ DIALOGUE, WHICH IS DESCRIBED IN THIS CHAPTER.
.HL 1 ^&^^INTRODUCTION\\\&
.B
\\^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE (^VERSION 662) IS AN INTERACTIVE PROGRAM USED
BY THE OPERATOR AT SYSTEM STARTUP TO SET OR ALTER A NUMBER OF
IMPORTANT SYSTEM PARAMETERS. ^THESE PARAMETERS INCLUDE THE
DATE, TIME OF DAY, AND MOST OF THE DISK
FILE STRUCTURE INFORMATION.
.B
^YOU RESPOND TO A SERIES OF QUESTIONS ASKED DURING
THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE BY TYPING YOUR RESPONSES, ONE AT A
TIME, IN CONVERSATIONAL MODE.
.B
^BEFORE STARTING THE SYSTEM YOU SHOULD:
.LS;.LE;^READ THIS CHAPTER TO
ACQUAINT YOURSELF WITH THE CURRENT VERSION OF THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY
DIALOGUE FORMAT.
.LE;^DECIDE WHICH PARAMETERS YOU WISH TO SET OR ALTER WHEN
THE SYSTEM IS STARTED.
.LE;^BE PREPARED TO ANSWER THE REQUIRED ^^ONCE-O\\NLY
DIALOGUE QUESTIONS BY FAMILIARIZING YOURSELF WITH YOUR INSTALLATION'S
CONFIGURATION AND THE CONTENT AND FORMAT OF INDIVIDUAL QUESTIONS.
.ELS
^THE 6.03 VERSION OF THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE PERMITS
YOU TO ANSWER ONLY THOSE QUESTIONS DIRECTLY RELATED
TO THE PARAMETERS THAT YOU WISH TO DEFINE OR ALTER
IN SOME WAY. ^THE REST OF THE PARAMETERS ARE AUTOMATICALLY
SET ACCORDING TO A ^^DEC\\-SUPPLIED OR AN INSTALLATION-DEFINED
STANDARD. (^SOME PARAMETER DEFAULTS CAN BE MODIFIED BY THE SYSTEM PROGRAMMER AT INDIVIDUAL
INSTALLATIONS DURING THE ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE PROGRAM.)##(^REFER TO
^CHAPTER 8 FOR A DESCRIPTION OF ^^MONGEN\\.)
.HL 2 ^&^SUMMARY \\OF ^^STARTUP\\ ^OPTIONS\&
\\^YOU HAVE A CHOICE OF EIGHT ^^STARTUP O\\PTIONS. ^THEY ARE
SUMMARIZED HERE AND THEN DESCRIBED IN THE REMAINDER OF THIS CHAPTER.
.B;.LM20;.TS20;.I-10
^^QUICK T\\O START THE SYSTEM QUICKLY WITHOUT CHANGING ANY
PARAMETERS. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.2.)
.B;.I-10
^^NOINITIA\\ ^TO START THE SYSTEM QUICKLY WITHOUT SETTING ANY NEW PARAMETERS
AND WITHOUT RUNNING ^^INITIA. (R\\EFER TO ^SECTION 16.2.)
.B;.I-10
^^GO T\\O CHECK TO SEE IF EVERYTHING IS IN ORDER AND TO
START THE SYSTEM WITH A MINIMUM OF DIALOGUE. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.3.)
.B;.I-10
^^DESTROY T\\O AUTOMATICALLY RESTRUCTURE AND REFRESH ALL
DISKS ACCORDING TO A PREDETERMINED SET OF STANDARDS. (^REFER TO
^SECTION 16.4.)
.B;.I-10
^^REFRESH T\\O EXPLICITLY REFRESH SELECTED FILE
STRUCTURES WITHOUT CHANGING OTHER SYSTEM PARAMETERS. (^REFER
TO ^SECTION 16.5.)
.B;.I-10
^^UNITID T\\O CHANGE SELECTED UNIT ^I^DS WITHOUT CHANGING
OTHER SYSTEM PARAMETERS. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.6.)
.B;.I-10
^^CHANGE T\\O EXPLICITLY SET OR CHANGE SELECTED FILE
STRUCTURE PARAMETERS. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.7.)
.B;.I-10
^^LONG T\\O EXPLICITLY SET ALL PARAMETERS AND RESTRUCTURE THE
FILE SYSTEM IN A NON-STANDARD WAY. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.8.)
.B;.LM0
^YOU SHOULD SELECT THE ^^LONG\\ ^^STARTUP O\\PTION ONLY IF THERE IS NO OTHER ALTERNATIVE.
^YOU ARE ENCOURAGED TO USE ONE OR MORE OF THE OTHER SEVEN
^^STARTUP O\\PTIONS (THE SIMPLEST COMBINATION FOR THEIR
PURPOSES), AND TO ACCEPT THE SYSTEM STANDARD VALUES WHENEVER
POSSIBLE.
^NOTE THAT THE ^^STARTUP OPTION:\\
QUESTION IS REPEATED AFTER YOU DEFINE SOME OF THE PARAMETERS.
^THIS PERMITS YOU TO DEFINE A SECOND SET OF
PARAMETERS (E.G., ^^DESTROY, REFRESH, UNITID\\, OR ^^CHANGE\\) OR TO START
THE SYSTEM (^^QUICK\\ OR ^G^O).
.B
^THE FIRST EIGHT STEPS DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 16.2.2 ARE COMMON
TO ALL SYSTEM STARTUPS REGARDLESS OF WHICH OPTION
YOU CHOOSE. ^YOU MUST PERFORM THESE STEPS CORRECTLY BEFORE
THE ^^ONCE-\\ONLY DIALOGUE ASKS YOU FOR THE ^^STARTUP O\\PTION.
^THE FIRST EIGHT STEPS ARE LISTED IN ^SECTION 16.2.2 AS THEY APPLY TO
ALL ^^STARTUP\\ ^OPTIONS.
.HL 2 ^&^SPECIAL ^CONSIDERATIONS\\\&
\\^THE SOFTWARE SUPPORTS THE ^^KA10, KI10,\\ AND ^^KL10\\ PROCESSORS.
^IN GENERAL, THE PROCEDURES ARE THE SAME FOR ALL SYSTEMS.
^THE PRIMARY DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE ^K^A10 AND THE ^K^I10 IS THE
PHYSICAL LAYOUT OF THE CONSOLE. ^WHERE THE ^K^A10 CONSOLE HAS ROCKER
SWITCHES, THE ^K^I10 CONSOLE HAS LIGHTED PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES BUT THE
SWITCH FUNCTIONS ARE THE SAME. ^THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS DOCUMENT
USE THE FOLLOWING CONVENTIONS WHEN REFERRING TO THE ^^ON\\ AND ^^OFF\\
POSITIONS OF THE SWITCHES:
.B;.NF;.NJ;.TS15,40
^K^A10 ^CONSOLE ^K^I10 ^CONSOLE
------------ ------------
.B
^SWITCH ^^ON\\ ^FRONT (OR BOTTOM)OF ^LIGHTED
ROCKER SWITCH IS
PRESSED.
.B
^SWITCH ^^OFF\\ ^BACK (OR TOP) OF ^NOT ^LIGHTED
ROCKER SWITCH IS
PRESSED.
.B;.F;.J
^IN ADDITION, THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL STEPS SHOULD BE PERFORMED WITH
A ^^KI10\\ SYSTEM BEFORE BEGINNING THE ^^READIN\\ PROCEDURE.
.LS;.LE;^CHECK TO SEE THAT THE ^^MAINT\\ LIGHT IS ^^OFF\\. ^IF IT IS NOT,
CHECK THAT THE FOLLOWING SWITCHES ARE ^^OFF\\:
.B;.NF;.NJ
^^PARITY STOP
FM MANUAL
MEM OVERLAP DIS
MARGIN ENABLE
SINGLE PULSE
SINGLE INSTRUCTION\\
.F;.J
.LE;^MAKE SURE THAT THE ^^DATA\\ AND ^^ADDRESS\\ SWITCHES ARE OPERATING
PROPERLY. ^THAT IS, WHEN THE SWITCH IS PRESSED THE INDICATOR IS TURNED
EITHER OFF OR ON, THE OPPOSITE TO WHAT IT HAD BEEN. ^IF THEY
DO NOT WORK PROPERLY, MAKE SURE THAT THE ^^CONSOLE LOCK\\ AND THE
^^CONSOLE DATA LOCK\\ SWITCHES ARE ^^OFF\\.
.LE;^UNDER NORMAL CIRCUMSTANCES SYSTEMS WITH A ^K^I10 PROCESSOR SHOULD
BE RUN WITH THE SWITCHES SET AS FOLLOWS:
.B
A.##^^NXM STOP\\ SWITCH ^^OFF\\
.B
B.##^^EXEC PAGING\\ SWITCH ^^ON\\
.B
C.##^^USER PAGING\\ SWITCH ^^OFF\\
.BR;.LM13
(^THESE PAGING SWITCHES SHOULD BE SET SO THAT THE ADDRESSES EXAMINED BY
THE ^^EXAMINE\\ SWITCH ARE MONITOR (^^EXEC\\ MODE) ADDRESSES INSTEAD OF
USER PROGRAM (^^USER\\ MODE) ADDRESSES.)
.LM9
.ELS
^THE ^^NXM FLAG\\ AND PROCESSOR CLOCK ^^PIA\\ INDICATORS ARE LOCATED ON
DIFFERENT BAYS.
.LS;.LE;^ON THE ^^KA10\\ THE ^^NXM FLAG\\ AND PROCESSOR CLOCK ^^PIA\\
INDICATORS (^^PIA33, PIA34,\\ AND ^^PIA35\\) ARE LOCATED ON ^BAY 1,
THE LEFT-MOST BAY, FARTHEST FROM THE CONSOLE.
^THEY ARE IN THE SECOND ROW OF LIGHTS, BELOW THE REGISTER LABELED ^^CPA\\.
.LE;^ON THE ^^KI10\\, THE ^^NXM FLAG\\ AND PROCESSOR CLOCK ^^PIA\\
INDICATORS (^^APR CLK PIA)\\ ARE LOCATED ON ^BAY 3, THE SAME BAY AS THE
CONSOLE. ^THEY ARE IN THE BOTTOM ROW OF LIGHTS.
.ELS
.HL 2 ^&^SPECIAL ^MULTIPROCESSING ^CONSIDERATIONS\\\&
\\^UNDER ORDINARY CIRCUMSTANCES, MULTIPROCESSING SYSTEMS DO NOT REQUIRE
ANY SPECIAL STARTUP PROCEDURES. ^^CPU1\\, THE SECONDARY
PROCESSOR, WAITS AND AUTOMATICALLY STARTS AFTER ^^CPU0\\,
THE PRIMARY PROCESSOR, IS STARTED. ^HOWEVER,
IF THE SYSTEM IS STARTED AFTER A CRASH, THEN THE PROCEDURE DEPENDS
UPON WHICH ^^CPU\\ CRASHED.
.HL 2 ^&^CONVENTIONS ^USED \\IN \\THIS ^CHAPTER\\\&
.LS;.LE;\\^ERRORS MESSAGES
.B
^^ONCE-O\\NLY ERROR MESSAGES ARE PRECEDED BY EITHER A QUESTION MARK
(?) OR A PERCENT SIGN (%). ^MESSAGES PRECEDED BY A QUESTION MARK ARE
FATAL UNLESS CORRECTIVE ACTION IS TAKEN. ^MESSAGES PRECEDED BY A
PERCENT SIGN ARE WARNINGS.
.LE;^CARRIAGE ^RETURN
.B
<^^CR>\\ INDICATES THAT YOU SHOULD TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN.
^BECAUSE MOST OPERATOR TYPEINS MUST BE TERMINATED BY CARRIAGE RETURN,
^^<CR>\\ IS USED TO INDICATE A BLANK LINE AND
FOR EMPHASIS WHEN OTHER TERMINATORS, SUCH AS ALTMODE, ARE ALSO POSSIBLE.
.LE;^FILE ^STRUCTURE
.B
^^STR\\ IS AN ABBREVIATION FOR FILE STRUCTURE.
.ELS
.PG
.SUBTITLE QUICK
.HL 1 ^&^^STARTUP OPTION: QUICK\\ \\AND ^^NOINITIA\\\&
\\^THE ^^QUICK\\ OPTION ENABLES YOU TO START UP THE SYSTEM
QUICKLY, WITHOUT ALTERING ANY SYSTEM PARAMETERS AND WITHOUT
ANY FURTHER DIALOGUE. ^AFTER LISTING OFF-LINE DISK UNITS,
THE SYSTEM STARTS RUNNING.
.B
^THIS OPTION IS RECOMMENDED FOR STARTUPS WHEN SPEED IS IMPORTANT,
WHEN FILE STRUCTURE ORGANIZATION AND OTHER PARAMETERS NEED NOT BE
ALTERED, OR AFTER YOU HAVE SET SELECTED PARAMETERS BY USING ANOTHER OPTION,
AND YOU ARE READY TO START THE SYSTEM.
.B
^THE ^^NOINITIA\\ OPTION IS IDENTICAL TO ^^QUICK\\, EXCEPT THAT ^^INITIA\\
IS NOT RUN.
.B
^NOTE THAT IF ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY ENCOUNTERS PROBLEMS IN TRYING
TO START THE MONITOR, THE ^^LONG\\ DIALOGUE IS AUTOMATICALLY
INVOKED. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.10 FOR ERROR MESSAGES
AND TO ^SECTION 16.8.3 FOR A DESCRIPTION OF THE ^^LONG\\ DIALOGUE
QUESTIONS.)
.HL 2 ^&^FREQUENCY\&
\\^THE ^^QUICK\\ (OR ^G^O) OPTION IS INVOKED
EVERYTIME THE MONITOR IS RELOADED INTO THE MACHINE.
.HL 2 ^&^SUMMARY \\OF ^STEPS\\\&
.LS;.LE;\\^YOU GET THE MONITOR WITH ^^BOOTM\\ OR ^^BOOTS\\.
(^REFER TO ^CHAPTERS 2 AND 3.)
.LE;^THE SYSTEM CHECKS TO SEE THAT THE MONITOR AND PROCESSOR ARE
COMPATIBLE. ^IF NOT, AN ERROR MESSAGE IS TYPED AND THE PROGRAM
HALTS.
.LE;^THE SYSTEM ASKS IF YOU WISH TO RUN THE LOADTIME
DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM, ^^SYSCHK\\.
.B;.I5
^^SYSCHK(N,Y\\):
.B
^NOTE THAT THIS IS ASKED ONLY IF THE ^^SYSCHK\\ PROGRAM HAS
BEEN INCLUDED AS A PART OF THE SYSTEM SOFTWARE (AS DETERMINED
BY THE SYSTEM PROGRAMMER DURING THE ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE, REFER TO ^CHAPTER 8).
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:#N OR <CR>\\ TO SKIP THE DIAGNOSTIC.
.LE;^THE SYSTEM TYPES THE NAME OF THE MONITOR AND CREATION DATE; FOR EXAMPLE:
.B;.I5
^^6.03#SYS#_#160#3-17-77\\
.LE;^THE SYSTEM ASKS FOR THE REASON FOR THE RELOAD.
.B;.I5
^^WHY RELOAD\\:
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:##NEW\\
.B
^YOU ANSWER WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING ACCEPTABLE
ANSWERS DEPENDING ON YOUR REASON. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.9 FOR AN
EXPLANATION OF THESE ANSWERS.)
.B;.LM15;.TS25;.NF;.NJ
^^OPR LOOP
PARITY HUNG
POWER PM
STATIC CM
HARDWARE SA
NXM NEW
HALT SCHED
OTHER\\
.LM9;.F;.J
.LE;^THE SYSTEM ASKS FOR THE DATE.
.B;.I5
^^DATE:\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:##MAR 17 1977\\
.B
^YOU TYPE THE DATE AS THE NAME OF THE MONTH
(^JANUARY-^DECEMBER) AND THE NUMERICAL DAY OF THE MONTH (1-31) IN ANY ORDER.
(^THE NAME OF THE MONTH MAY BE SHORTENED AS LONG AS THE
ABBREVIATION IS UNIQUE.) ^THE YEAR IS OPTIONAL. ^IF INCLUDED,
THE YEAR MUST BE TYPED AS A 4-DIGIT NUMBER (1977) OR A 2-DIGIT
ABBREVIATION (77) FOLLOWING THE MONTH AND DAY. ^IF OMITTED, THE
YEAR IS ASSUMED TO BE THE SAME AS THE YEAR THE MONITOR WAS CREATED.
^EXAMPLES OF ACCEPTABLE DATES ARE:
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^MARCH 17 1977
MAR 17
17 MAR\\
.LM9;.F;.J
.LE;^THE SYSTEM ASKS FOR THE TIME.
.B;.I5
^^TIME:\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:0843\\
.B
^YOU TYPE THE TIME BASED ON A 24-HOUR CLOCK, E.G.,
0843=8:43#^A.^M. AND 1345=1:45#^P.^M.
.LE;^THE SYSTEM CHECKS TO SEE IF ALL OF MEMORY IS ACCESSIBLE.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR YOUR CHOICE OF
.B;.I5
^^STARTUP OPTION:\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:##QUICK\\
.B
^FOR A DESCRIPTION OF THE OTHER RESPONSES, REFER TO THE LIST BELOW:
.B;.TS18;.NF;.NJ
^^GO\\ ^SECTION 16.3
^^DESTROY S\\ECTION 16.4
^^REFRESH S\\ECTION 16.5
^^UNITID S\\ECTION 16.6
^^CHANGE S\\ECTION 16.7
^^LONG S\\ECTION 16.8
.TS9;.F;.J
.LE;^^ONCE\\ LISTS OFF-LINE UNITS; FOR EXAMPLE:
.B;.I5
%XXXX ^^IS OFF-LINE
.BR;.I5
\\%YYYY ^^IS OFF-LINE\\
.B
(^NOTE THAT YOU HAVE NO OPPORTUNITY TO CHANGE
THE STATUS OF THESE UNITS.)
.LE;^^ONCE\\ CHECKS TO SEE IF THERE ARE CONTROLLERS
OFF LINE OR IF ANY UNITS ARE WRITE LOCKED. ^IF SO, MESSAGES
ARE TRANSMITTED TO THE OPERATOR. ^OTHERWISE,
IF EVERYTHING IS IN ORDER, THE MONITOR STARTS RUNNING THE NULL JOB AND INITIATES
TIMESHARING, USUALLY VIA ^^INITIA, OPSER\\, AND AN AUTOMATIC
^^STARTUP\\ FILE. ^IF YOU TYPED ^^NOINITIA\\, A _. IS PRINTED AND YOU MUST
LOG IN. ^OTHERWISE, YOU ARE AUTOMATICALLY LOGGED IN.
.ELS
.HL 2 ^&^EXAMPLES\\\&
.NF;.NJ
\\^EXAMPLE 1
.B;.LM5;.TS5,7,13
^^SYSCHK (N,Y): Y
.B
MEMORY MAP=
FROM TO SIZE/K
000000 537777 176
CONTROLLER MTA IS UNACCESSIBLE.
.B
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 4-12-77
WHY RELOAD: OTHER ;MANUAL EXAMPLE
DATE:#4#MAY
TIME:#0045
.B
STARTUP OPTION: QUICK
.B
%DPA6 IS OFF-LINE
.B
%DPB0 IS OFF-LINE
.B
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 4-12-77
.TS25
^^DSKN:##S\\YSTEM _#160 ^INITIA TYPES
.BR
_. THE TEXT CONTAINED
.BR
_. IN ^^STR.TXT.\\
.BR
_.
.BR
_.^^LOGIN[1,2] ;T\\HIS IS TYPED AUTOMATICALLY
_.^^R OPSER
[OPRPAF PROCESSING AUTO COMMAND FILE]
00:45:24(0)
_.
00:45:24(0)
_.
00:45:32(0)
_.
00:45:39(B_\L1)\\
.B3;.I-5
^EXAMPLE 2
.B
^^BOOTS
.B
6.03
SYSCHK (N,Y):#N
.B
##6.03 SYSTEM _#160 4-19-77
WHY RELOAD:NEW
DATE:#APRIL 28
TIME:#1100
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#QUICK
.B
%DPA4 IS OFF-LINE
.B
%DPA5 IS OFF-LINE
.B
%DPA6 IS OFF-LINE
.B
##6.03 SYSTEM _#160 11:00:19 CTY
.B
_.LOGIN[1,2]
_.R OPSER
[OPRPAF PROCESSING AUTO COMMAND FILE]\\
_.
_.
_.\\
.B2;.I-5
^EXAMPLE 3
.B
^^SYSCHK (N,Y):##N
.B
##6.03 SYSTEM _#160 4-19-77
WHY RELOAD: NEW
DATE: APRIL 20
TIME: 700
.B
STARTUP OPTION: NOINITIA
.B
_.\\
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 1 ^&^^STARTUP OPTION: GO\\\&
\\^WHEN YOU SPECIFY THE ^G^O OPTION, ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY CHECKS TO SEE IF EVERYTHING
IS IN ORDER, AND STARTS THE SYSTEM WITH A MINIMUM OF
DIALOGUE. ^AFTER YOU RESPOND TO QUESTIONS ASKING IF
SPECIFIC OFF-LINE UNITS ARE TO BE ON LINE, OFF LINE, OR DOWN,
THE SYSTEM IS STARTED.
.B
^NOTE THAT IF ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY ENCOUNTERS PROBLEMS IN TRYING TO START
THE MONITOR, THEN THE ^^LONG\\ DIALOGUE IS AUTOMATICALLY
INVOKED. ^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.10 FOR ERROR MESSAGES AND TO
^SECTION 16.8.3 FOR A DESCRIPTION OF THE ^^LONG\\ DIALOGUE QUESTIONS.
.HL 2 ^&^FREQUENCY\\\&
\\^THE ^G^O (OR ^^QUICK\\) OPTION MUST BE INVOKED
EVERY TIME THE MONITOR IS RELOADED INTO THE MACHINE.
.HL 2 ^&^SUMMARY \\OF ^STEPS\\\&
\\^STEPS 1 THROUGH 8 ARE DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 16.2.2, BECAUSE
THEY ARE COMMON TO ALL ^^STARTUP\\ ^OPTIONS.
.B;.LM9;.TS9;.I-4
9.##^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR YOUR CHOICE OF
.B;.I5
^^STARTUP OPTION:\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:##GO\\
.B;.I-5
10.##^^ONCE\\ LISTS OFF-LINE UNITS, IF ANY, AND THEN ASKS IF OFF-LINE UNITS
ARE TO REMAIN OFF LINE OR NOT.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
%XXXX ^^IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^^USER RESPONSE:##\\1,2, OR 3
.B;.I-5
11.##^^ONCE\\ CHECKS TO SEE IF THERE ARE ANY OFF-LINE CONTROLLERS OR
IF THERE ARE ANY WRITE-LOCKED UNITS. ^IF
SO, MESSAGES ARE TRANSMITTED TO THE OPERATOR. ^OTHERWISE,
IF EVERYTHING IS IN ORDER, THE MONITOR STARTS RUNNING THE NULL
JOB AND INITIATES TIMESHARING,
USUALLY VIA ^^INITIA, OPSER\\, AND AN AUTOMATIC STARTUP FILE.
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 2 ^&^EXAMPLES\\\&
.NF;.NJ
\\^EXAMPLE 1
.B;.LM5;.TS5,7,13
^^6.03 SYSTEM _#160 4-2-77
WHY RELOAD: OTHER ;EXAMPLE
DATE: 4 MAY
TIME: 52
.B
STARTUP OPTION: GO
.B
%DPA6 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
3
.B
%DPB0 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 00:52:46 CTY
_.R OPSER
[OPRPAF PROCESSING AUTO COMMAND FILE]\\
00:52:48(0)
_.
00:52:49(0)
_.
00:52:57(0)
_.
.LM5
.B3;.I-5
^EXAMPLE 2
.B
^^BOOTS
.B
6.03
SYSCHK (N,Y):
.B
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 12-19-77
WHY RELOAD: SCHED
DATE:#D 28
TIME:#1120
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#GO
.B
%DPA4 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
%DPA5 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
%DPA6 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
1
.B
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 11-21-04 CTY
_.R OPSER
[OPRPAF PROCESSING AUTO COMMAND FILE]\\
_.
_.
_.
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 1 ^&^^STARTUP OPTION: DESTROY\\\&
\\^THE ^^DESTROY\\ OPTION AUTOMATICALLY RESTRUCTURES AND REFRESHES
ALL FILE STRUCTURES ACCORDING TO A PREDETERMINED SET OF STANDARDS.
^A MINIMUM OF DIALOGUE IS ENCOUNTERED, BECAUSE THE FILE
STRUCTURE PARAMETERS ARE DETERMINED BY THE SYSTEM PROGRAMMER
DURING THE ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE PROGRAM. (^REFER TO ^CHAPTER 8.)
.B
^THE ^^DESTROY\\ OPTION, AS THE NAME IMPLIES, DESTROYS ALL
EXISTING FILE STRUCTURES, THEN RESTRUCTURES AND REFRESHES
THE DISK UNITS AS DIRECTED BY ^^MONGEN\\. ^IF THE SYSTEM PROGRAMMER
HAS NOT ALTERED THE VALUES OF THE ^^MONGEN\\ SYMBOLS, THE
^^DESTROY\\ OPTION ORGANIZES THE FILE SYSTEM ACCORDING TO
THE "SYMBOL, VALUES" SPECIFIED BY THE ^^DEC\\-SUPPLIED SOFTWARE;
THAT IS, ALL FIXED HEAD DISKS ARE IN THE FIRST FILE STRUCTURE
(CALLED ^^DSKA\\), AND ALL DISK PACK UNITS ARE IN THE SECOND
FILE STRUCTURE (CALLED ^^DSKB\\), WITH 200^K OF SWAPPING SPACE
ALLOCATED ON EACH OF THE FIXED HEAD UNITS, AND ON THE FIRST
DISK PACK UNIT (AS BACKUP). (^REFER TO ^CHAPTER 8
FOR A DESCRIPTION OF THE ^^HDWGEN\\ DECIMAL AND OCTAL SYMBOL-VALUES
THAT AFFECT FILE STRUCTURE ORGANIZATION.)
.B
^THE ^^DESTROY\\ OPTION IS RECOMMENDED FOR NEW INSTALLATIONS
STARTING UP THEIR SYSTEMS FOR THE FIRST TIME AND FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS
USING NEW DISK UNITS FOR THE FIRST TIME.
.HL 2 ^&^FREQUENCY\&
\\^AFTER THE FILE STRUCTURE PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN
ESTABLISHED, THEY ARE WRITTEN ONTO EACH STRUCTURE IN TWO PLACES
CALLED THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS. ^ONCE THIS IS DONE,
IT NEED NOT BE DONE AGAIN. ^WHEN THE MONITOR IS RELOADED,
IT READS THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS AND SETS UP THE DISK PARAMETERS
AUTOMATICALLY.
.HL 2 ^&^SUMMARY \\OF ^STEPS\&
\\^STEPS 1 THROUGH 8 ARE DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 16.2.2, BECAUSE
THEY ARE COMMON TO ALL ^^STARTUP\\ ^OPTIONS.
.B;.LM9;.TS9;.I-4
9.##^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR YOUR CHOICE OF
.B;.I5
^^STARTUP OPTION:
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:##DESTROY\\
.B
^EXISTING STRUCTURES ARE DESTROYED, NEW STRUCTURES ARE CREATED, AND
ALL DISKS ARE REFRESHED ACCORDING TO A PREDETERMINED SET OF VALUES.
.B
^A WARNING MESSAGE IS TYPED AND CONFIRMATION IS REQUESTED.
.B;.I5
%^^WARNING-ALL STRS WILL BE REFRESHED.
.BR;.I5
PROCEED? (Y\\ OR <^^CR>)
.B
USER RESPONSE:#Y\\
.B
^WHEN FINISHED THE FOLLOWING IS TYPED
.B;.I5
^^HOME BLOCKS WRITTEN ON ALL UNITS
.BR;.I5
START SYSTEM? (Y\\ OR <^^CR\\>)
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:##Y\\ OR <^C^R>
.B
^AN ANSWER OF <^C^R> RETURNS CONTROL TO THE ^^STARTUP OPTION\\
QUESTION AGAIN. ^A ^^YES\\ ANSWER CONTINUES WITH STEP 10.
.B;.I-5
10.##^^ONCE\\ REPEATS THE ^^STARTUP\\ QUESTION, TO WHICH YOU SHOULD RESPOND ^^QUICK\\ (SEE ^EXAMPLE 1). ^^ONCE\\ ASKS YOU TO LOGIN.
.B;.I5
^^TO AUTOMATICALLY LOGIN UNDER [1,2] TYPE LOGIN\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:##LOGIN
.B;.I-5
11.##^^ONCE\\ STARTS RUNNING THE NULL JOB AND INITIATES TIMESHARING.
.B;.I-5
12.##^IF A NEW MONITOR IS BEING GENERATED FOR THE FIRST TIME,
YOU SHOULD RETURN TO ^CHAPTER 4.
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 2 ^&^EXAMPLE\\\&
.NF;.NJ
^^BOOTS\\
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
^^6.03
SYSCHK (N,Y):
.B;.TS5
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 12-13-77
WHY RELOAD:#SA
DATE:#26 DEC
TIME:#1300
.B
STARTUP OPTION:##DESTROY
%WARNING-ALL STRS WILL BE REFRESHED.
PROCEED?(Y OR <CR>)
.B
%FHA1 IS OFF-LINE
.B
%DPA0 IS OFF-LINE
.B
HOME BLOCKS WRITTEN ON ALL UNITS
START SYSTEM? (Y OR <CR>)Y
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#Q
TO AUTOMATICALLY LOG-IN UNDER [1,2] TYPE "LOGIN"
LOGIN\\
_.
_.
_.
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 1 ^&^^STARTUP OPTION: REFRESH\\\&
\\^THE ^^REFRESH\\ OPTION ALLOWS YOU TO RESTORE CERTAIN FILE
STRUCTURES TO THEIR INITIAL CONDITION (I.E., REFRESH THEM) WITHOUT
CHANGING OTHER SYSTEM PARAMETERS. (^NOTE THAT ONLY
^^HOME.SYS\\ IS REQUIRED TO DESCRIBE THE
FILE STRUCTURE. ^ONCE THESE HAVE BEEN DEFINED VIA ^^DESTROY\\
OR ^^LONG\\, REFRESHING INDIVIDUAL STRUCTURES IS VERY SIMPLE.)
.HL 2 ^&^FREQUENCY\&
\\^ORDINARILY, STRUCTURES NEED REFRESHING EVERY TWO TO THREE MONTHS.
^REFRESHING MAY BE REQUIRED WHEN:
.LS;.LE;^DISKS ARE FULL. ^WHEN YOU WISH TO RETAIN ONLY
RECENTLY ACCESSED FILES, YOU SAVE RECENTLY ACCESSED FILES WITH
^^BACKUP\\ BEFORE REFRESHING AND THEN RESTORE THEM (WITH
^^BACKUP\\) AFTER REFRESHING.
.LE;^SYSTEM CRASHES HAVE LEFT A NUMBER OF BLOCKS NOT ALLOCATED
TO ANY FILE. ^REFER TO THE ^^DSKRAT\\ DOCUMENTATION FOR INSTRUCTIONS
ON DETERMINING THE NUMBER OF LOST BLOCKS AND RECOVERING THEM WITHOUT
THE NEED FOR REFRESHING THE FILE STRUCTURE.
.LE;^FRAGMENTATION OF FREE BLOCKS RESULTS IN INEFFICIENT
USE OF DISK SPACE, I.E., WHEN FREE BLOCKS ON THE DISK ARE SO
SCATTERED THAT LONG SEQUENTIALLY WRITTEN FILES ARE USING EXTENDED
^^RIB\\S. (^REFER TO THE ^^DSKLST.RNO\\ SPECIFICATION FOR
INFORMATION ON INTERPRETING THE ^^DSKLST\\ OUTPUT.)
.ELS
.HL 2 ^&^SUMMARY \\OF ^STEPS\&
\\^STEPS 1 THROUGH 8 ARE DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 16.2.2 BECAUSE
THEY ARE COMMON TO ALL ^^STARTUP\\ ^OPTIONS.
.B;.LM9;.I-4
9.##^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR YOUR CHOICE OF
.B;.I5
^^STARTUP OPTION:
.B
USER RESPONSE:##REFRESH\\
.B;.I-5
10.##^^ONCE\\ LISTS ANY OFF-LINE UNITS AND ASKS YOU
TO INDICATE WHICH OFF-LINE UNITS ARE TO REMAIN OFF-LINE.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
%XXXX ^^IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2) OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
USER RESPONSE:##1,2,\\ OR 3
.B;.I-5
11.##^^ONCE\\ CHECKS TO SEE IF THERE ARE ANY OFF-LINE CONTROLLERS
OR IF THERE ARE ANY WRITE-LOCKED UNITS. ^IF SO, MESSAGES ARE TRANSMITTED
TO THE OPERATOR.
.B;.I-5
12.##^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR THE STRUCTURES TO BE REFRESHED.
.B;.I5
^^TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
USER RESPONSE: ALL\\ OR INDIVIDUAL STRUCTURE NAME.
.B
^WHEN THE STRUCTURES ARE REFRESHED, CONTROL RETURNS
TO THE ^^STARTUP OPTION\\ QUESTION. ^YOU CAN ENTER ANOTHER
^^STARTUP O\\PTION (SUCH AS ^^DESTROY, UNITID, CHANGE\\, OR
^^LONG\\) OR YOU CAN START THE SYSTEM (^^QUICK\\ OR ^G^O).
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 2 ^&^EXAMPLES\&
.NF;.NJ
\\^EXAMPLE 1
.B;.LM5
^^BOOTS
.B
6.03
SYSCHK (N,Y):
.B;.TS10
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 12-19-77
WHY RELOAD:#NEW
DATE:#DEC 28
TIME:#1250
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#REFRESH
TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
DSKH
TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
DSKX
TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
DSKX
TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#QUICK
TO AUTOMATICALLY LOG-IN UNDER [1,2] TYPE "LOGIN"
LOGIN\\
_.
_.
.B3;.I-5
^EXAMPLE 2
.B;.TS5,7,13,25
^^SYSCHK (N,Y):N
.B
6.03 DUAL CPU 11-21-77
WHY RELOAD: SA
DATE: 4 DEC
TIME: 1050
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#REF
.B
%DPA6 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
%DPB0 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
%NEED REFRESHING:
DSKA,DSKB,DSKC
TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
DSKA
TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
STARTUP OPTION: Q
TO AUTOMATICALLY LOG-IN UNDER [1,2] TYPE "LOGIN"
LOGIN
.B
6.03 DUAL CPU 1:06:02
.B
_.LOG
.B
_.INITIA
.B
6.03 DUAL CPU 01:06:14 CTY
_.R OPSER
[OPRPAF PROCESSING AUTO COMMAND FILE]\\
_.
_.
_.
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 1 ^&^^STARTUP OPTION: UNITID\\\&
\\^THE ^^UNITID\\ OPTION ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE
SELECTED UNIT ^I^DS, WITHOUT CHANGING ANY OTHER PARAMETERS.
.HL 2 ^&^FREQUENCY\&
\\^AFTER THE FILE STRUCTURE PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN
ESTABLISHED, THEY ARE WRITTEN ONTO EACH STRUCTURE IN TWO PLACES
CALLED THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS. ^ONCE THIS IS DONE, IT NEED NOT
BE DONE AGAIN. ^WHEN THE SYSTEM IS RELOADED, THE MONITOR
READS THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS AND SETS UP THE DISK PARAMETERS
AUTOMATICALLY.
.HL 2 ^&^SUMMARY \\OF ^STEPS\&
\\^STEPS 1 THROUGH 8 ARE DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 16.2.2, BECAUSE
THEY ARE COMMON TO ALL ^^STARTUP O\\PTIONS.
.B;.LM9;.I-4
9.##^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR YOUR CHOICE OF
.B;.I5
^^STARTUP OPTION:
.B
USER RESPONSE:#UNITID\\
.B;.I-5
10.##^^ONCE\\ LISTS ANY OFF-LINE UNITS AND ASKS YOU
TO INDICATE WHICH OFF-LINE UNITS ARE TO REMAIN OFF-LINE.
.B;.LM15
%XXXX ^^IS OFF-LINE
.B
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##1,2, OR 3
.B
^^ONCE\\ CHECKS TO SEE IF THERE ARE ANY OFF-LINE CONTROLLERS OR
IF THERE ARE ANY WRITE-LOCKED UNITS. ^IF SO, MESSAGES ARE TRANSMITTED
TO THE OPERATOR.
.B;.I-5
11.##^^ONCE\\ ASKS IF THERE ARE ANY PHYSICAL UNIT NAMES AND UNIT ^I^DS
TO BE CHANGED.
.B;.I5
^^CHANGE ALL UNIT ID\\'S (^^Y OR <CR>)\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE: Y OR <CR>\\
.B
^WHEN YOU SPECIFY ^Y, ^^ONCE\\ LISTS EACH UNIT AND
ASKS FOR THE ^I.^D.:
.B;.I5
^^AFTER EACH UNIT NAME, TYPE THE I.D.
.B;.I5
\\XXX(AAAA):
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:#ABCD
.B;.I5
\\YYYY(BBBB)
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:#EFGH
.B;.I5
\\ZZZZ(CCCC):
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:#IJKL\\
.B
^WHEN YOU RESPOND WITH <^C^R>, ^^ONCE\\ ASKS, FOR EACH UNIT, THE UNIT NAME AND ITS ^I.^D.
.B;.LM20
^^TYPE UNIT NAME, A COMMA, AND NEW UNIT ID FOR EACH DESIRED UNIT.
.BR
(EXTRA <CR> WHEN THROUGH)
.B;.LM9;.TS30
USER RESPONSE\\: XXXX, ^^ABCD <CR>\\
.BR
YYYY, ^^EFGH <CR>
.BR
<CR>\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J;.I-5
12.##^IF ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS ARE TO BE WRITTEN, ^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR
THE PHYSICAL UNIT AND THEN INDICATES WHEN ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS
ARE WRITTEN.
.B;.LM20
^^TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT TO WRITE HOME BLOCKS (EXTRA CR WHEN THROUGH)
.BR
(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL ;"ALL" IS NORMAL CASE)
.B;.LM9
USER RESPONSE:#ALL
.B;.I5
HOME BLOCKS WRITTEN\\
.B
^WHEN ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS ARE WRITTEN, CONTROL RETURNS TO THE ^^STARTUP
O\\PTION QUESTION. ^YOU CAN ENTER ANOTHER OPTION (SUCH
AS ^^DESTROY, UNITID, CHANGE\\, OR ^^LONG\\) OR YOU CAN START
THE SYSTEM (^^QUICK\\ OR ^G^O).
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 2 ^&^EXAMPLES\&
.NF;.NJ
\\^EXAMPLE 1
.B;.LM5
^^BOOTS
.B
6.03
SYSCHK (N,Y):
.B;.TS5,7,13,25
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 4-19-77
DATE:#MAY 28
TIME:#1130
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#UNITID
CHANGE ALL UNIT ID'S? (Y OR <CR>)
.B
TYPE UNIT NAME, A COMMA, AND NEW UNIT ID FOR EACH DESIRED UNIT.
(EXTRA <CR> WHEN THROUGH)
.B
DPA4,UNIT4
.B
DPA5,UNIT5
.B
TYPE PHYSICAL UNITS TO WRITE HOME BLOCKS (EXTRA CR WHEN THROUGH)
(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL ;"ALL" IS NORMAL CASE)
DPA4
DPA5
.B
HOME BLOCKS WRITTEN
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#Q
.B
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 11:32:43 CTY
_.R OPSER
[OPRPAF PROCESSING AUTO COMMAND FILE]\\
_.
_.
_.
.B3;.I-5
^EXAMPLE 2
.B
^^SYSCHK (N,Y): N
.B;.TS10
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 12-02-77
WHY RELOAD: SA
DATE: 4 DEC
TIME: 55
.B
STARTUP OPTION: UNITID
.B
%DPA6 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
%DPB0 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
CHANGE ALL UNIT ID'S? (Y OF <CR>)Y
AFTER EACH UNIT NAME, TYPE THE I.D.
.B
FHA0(GLZX):XLZG
.B
FHA1(XZLG):GLZX
.B
DPA0(RP03A):RP03A1
.B
DPA1(RP03B):RP03B1
.B
DPA2(3RPXYZ):RP03C1
.B
DPA3(2RP023):
DPA4(2RP044):
DPA5(2RP042):
DPB1(2RP004):
.B
TYPE PHYSICAL UNITS TO WRITE HOME BLOCKS (EXTRA CR WHEN THROUGH)
(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL ;"ALL" IS NORMAL CASE)
ALL
.B
HOME BLOCKS WRITTEN
.B
STARTUP OPTION: UNITID
.B
%DPA6 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
%DPB0 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
CHANGE ALL UNIT ID'S (Y OR <CR>) <CR>
.B
TYPE UNIT NAME, A COMMA, AND NEW UNIT ID FOR EACH DESIRED UNIT.
(EXTRA <CR> WHEN THROUGH)
FHA0,FHARD1
FHA1,SAM
.B
TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT TO WRITE HOME BLOCKS
(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL ;"ALL" IS NORMAL CASE)
.B
BEFORE "HOME" BLOCKS ARE WRITTEN
.B
TYPE STR NAME FOR A LIST OF ITS PARAMETERS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAME TO LIST ITS PARAMETERS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY DISK PARAMETERS(CR IF NO)
.B
TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT TO WRITE HOME BLOCKS
(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL ;"ALL" IS NORMAL CASE)
ALL
.B
HOME BLOCKS WRITTEN
.B
STARTUP OPTION: GO\\
_.
_.
_.
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 1 ^&^^STARTUP OPTION: CHANGE\\\&
\\^THE ^^CHANGE\\ OPTION ALLOWS YOU TO SET OR CHANGE
SELECTED PARAMETERS ON SPECIFIED STRUCTURES OR UNITS. ^THE
PARAMETERS ARE CHANGED, SOMETIMES CAUSING FILE STRUCTURES
TO BE REFRESHED, BUT NO RESTRUCTURING (CREATING OR DELETING)
OF STRUCTURES IS PERFORMED. ^THIS OPTION ASKS
YOU QUESTIONS ABOUT THE FOLLOWING:
.LS;.LE;^FILE STRUCTURE PARAMETERS
.LE;^PHYSICAL UNIT PARAMETERS
.LE;^ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST
.LE;^SYSTEM SEARCH LIST
.ELS
^NOTE THAT IF ANY CHANGES REQUIRE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS TO
BE WRITTEN OR DISKS TO BE REFRESHED, YOU ARE INFORMED
AND ASKED FOR VERIFICATION.
.HL 2 ^&^FREQUENCY\&
\\^AFTER THE FILE STRUCTURE PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN
ESTABLISHED, THEY ARE WRITTEN ONTO EACH STRUCTURE IN TWO PLACES
CALLED THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS. ^ONCE THIS IS COMPLETED, IT NEED
NOT BE DONE AGAIN. ^WHEN THE MONITOR IS RELOADED, THE MONITOR
READS THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS AND SETS UP THE DISK PARAMETERS AUTOMATICALLY.
.HL 2 ^&^SUMMARY \\OF ^STEPS\&
\\^STEPS 1 THROUGH 8 ARE DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 16.2.2 BECAUSE THEY
ARE COMMON TO ALL ^^STARTUP O\\PTIONS.
.B;.LM9;.I-4
9.##^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR YOUR CHOICE OF
.B;.I5
^^STARTUP OPTION:
.B
USER RESPONSE:#CHANGE\\
.B;.I-5
10.##^^ONCE\\ LISTS OFF-LINE UNITS, IF ANY, AND THEN
ASKS IF OFF-LINE UNITS ARE TO REMAIN OFF-LINE
OR NOT.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
%XXXX ^^IS OFF-LINE
^DO YOU WANT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^^ONCE\\ CHECKS TO SEE IF THERE ARE ANY OFF-LINE CONTROLLERS OR IF
THERE ARE ANY WRITE-LOCKED UNITS. ^IF SO, APPROPRIATE MESSAGES ARE TRANSMITTED
TO THE OPERATOR TERMINAL.
.B;.I-5
11.##^^ONCE\\ ASKS QUESTIONS ABOUT FILE STRUCTURE PARAMETERS,
PHYSICAL UNIT PARAMETERS, THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST, AND
THE SYSTEM SEARCH LIST. ^YOU CAN ACCEPT THE
STANDARD DEFAULT ANSWERS BY RESPONDING TO EACH QUESTION
WITH A CARRIAGE RETURN. (^SEE EXAMPLE 1 IN ^SECTION 16.7.3.)
.B
^OR, YOU CAN ANSWER THE QUESTIONS INDIVIDUALLY, THEREBY SETTING
PARAMETERS IN A NON-STANDARD WAY. ^IF YOU CHOOSE TO SET
THE PARAMETERS IN A NON-STANDARD WAY, THE
APPROPRIATE SUBSET OF "LONG DIALOGUE" QUESTIONS IS ASKED.
(^SEE EXAMPLES 2 AND 3 IN ^SECTION 16.7.3 AND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE ^^LONG\\
OPTION, ^SECTION 16.8.2.)
.B
^WHEN THE PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN SET, CONTROL RETURNS TO THE
^^STARTUP O\\PTION QUESTION. ^YOU CAN START THE SYSTEM
VIA QUICK OR ^G^O OR CONTINUE WITH ANOTHER OPTION.
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 2 ^&^EXAMPLES\&
.NF;.NJ
\\^EXAMPLE 1
.B;.LM5
^^BOOTS
.B
6.03
SYSCHK (N,Y):
.B;.TS10
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 12-19-77
WHY RELOAD:#NEW
DATE:#DEC 28
TIME:#1230
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#CHANGE
.B
%DPA4 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
%DPA5 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#9
.B
2
.B
%DPA6 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
TYPE STR NAME TO CHANGE ITS PARAMETERS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAME TO CHANGE ITS PARAMETERS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST?
.B
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE "SYS" SEARCH LIST?
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#QUICK\\
_.
_.
_.
.B3;.I-5
^EXAMPLE 2
.B
^^BOOTS
.B
6.03
SYSCHK (N,Y):
.B;.TS10
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 12-19-77
DATE:#DEC 28
TIME:#1250
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#CHANGE
.B
TYPE STR NAME TO CHANGE ITS PARAMETERS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
DSKX
.B
AFTER EACH PRINTING OF CURRENT VALUE, TYPE NEW VALUE OR CR
.B
PARAMETERS WHICH MAY BE CHANGED WITHOUT REFRESHING
_# OF CONSECUTIVE BLOCKS TRIED FOR ON OUTPUT#=#30
.BR
MIN#=#1 MAX#=#80000
.B
SUM OF BLOCKS GUARANTEED TO USERS#=#0
.BR
MIN#=#0 MAX#=#80000
.B
_# BLOCKS ALLOWED FOR OVERDRAW PER USER#=#500
MIN#=#0 MAX#=#80000
1000
.B
PARAMETERS WHICH MAY NOT BE CHANGED WITHOUT REFRESHING
K FOR CRASH.SAV#=#96
MIN#=#0 MAX#=#256
0
.B
BLOCKS PER CLUSTER#=#5
MIN#=#1 MAX#=#511
.B
THEREFORE BITS PER CLUSTER ADR.#=#13
THEREFORE BLOCKS PER SUPER-CLUSTER#=#5
THEREFORE SUPER-CLUSTERS PER UNIT#=#8000
.B
BITS PER CLUSTER COUNT#=#9
MIN#=#1 MAX#=#18
.B
THEREFORE BITS PER CHECKSUM#=#14
.B
TYPE STR NAME TO CHANGE ITS PARAMETERS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAME TO CHANGE ITS PARAMETERS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
DO YOU WNAT TO CHANGE THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST?
.B
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE "SYS" SEARCH LIST?
.B
TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT TO WRITE HOME BLOCKS
(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL ;"ALL" IS NORMAL CASE)
DPA4
DPA5
.B
HOME BLOCKS WRITTEN
.B
%NEED REFRESHING:
DSKX
TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
DSKX
TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
STARTUP OPTION:#Q
TO AUTOMATICALLY LOG-IN UNDER [1,2] TYPE "LOGIN"
.B3;.I-5
E\\XAMPLE 3
.B
^^SYSCHK (N,Y):#Y
.B
MEMORY MAP =
.TS7,14
FROM TO SIZE/K
000000 537777 176
CONTROLLER MTA IS UNACCESSIBLE
.B
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 12-02-77
WHY RELOAD: OTHER ;ONCE EXAMPLE
DATE: 4 DEC 1977
TIME: 46
.B
STARTUP OPTION: CHANGE
.B
%DPA6 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
%DPB0 IS OFF-LINE
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1)ON-LINE, 2)OFF-LINE, OR 3)DOWN? (TYPE _#)
.B
2
.B
TYPE STR NAME TO CHANGE ITS PARAMETERS (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST?
Y
FOR EACH CLASS TYPED PHYSICAL UNIT NAMES(EXTRA CR WHEN DONE)
CLASS 0
FHA0
FHA1
.B
CLASS 1
DPA0
.B
CLASS 2
DPA0
?UNIT ALREADY IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST
DPB0
?UNIT HAS NO SPACE ALLOCATED FOR SWAPPING
.B2
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE "SYS" SEARCH LIST?
Y
TYPE STR NAMES FOR "SYS" SEARCH LIST (EXTRA CR WHEN DONE)
DSKN
DSKA
DSKB
DSKC
.B
TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT TO WRITE HOME BLOCKS
(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL ;"ALL" IS NORMAL CASE)
ALL
.B
HOME BLOCKS WRITTEN
.B
STARTUP OPTION: GO
.B
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 12-2-77
_.R OPSER
[OPRPAF PROCESSING AUTO COMMAND FILE]
00:49:19(0)
_.
00:49:20(0)
_.
00:49:28(0)\\
.F;.J;.LM0
.HL 1 ^&^^STARTUP OPTION: LONG\\\&
\\^THE ^^LONG\\ OPTION ALLOWS YOU TO EXPLICITLY SET ALL
SYSTEM PARAMETERS, AND TO REFRESH AND RESTRUCTURE THE ENTIRE FILE
SYSTEM IN A NON-STANDARD WAY. ^THE ENTIRE "^^LONG\\ DIALOGUE",
AS DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 16.8.3, IS INVOKED.
^NOTE THAT THE EXACT SEQUENCE OF OPERATOR DIALOGUE DEPENDS ON YOUR ANSWERS
TO THE INDIVIDUAL QUESTIONS. ^THAT IS, THE ANSWERS TO CERTAIN QUESTIONS
CAUSE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY TO BRANCH IN DIFFERENT DIRECTIONS. ^SECTION 16.8.3
FOLLOWS THE MOST COMMONLY ENCOUNTERED PATH.
.B
^IF ^^ONCE\\ ENCOUNTERS PROBLEMS IN TRYING TO START THE MONITOR,
THE ^^LONG\\ DIALOGUE QUESTIONS MAY BE AUTOMATICALLY INVOKED
(WITH THE ^^QUICK\\ AND ^^GO\\ OPTIONS).
.HL 2 ^&^FREQUENCY\&
\\^AS STATED IN ^SECTION 16.1, YOU SHOULD CHOOSE THE ^^LONG\\ OPTION ONLY
WHEN NO OTHER OPTION OR COMBINATION OF OPTIONS WILL SUFFICE.
^FOR NEW SYSTEMS, THE PREFERRED METHOD IS FOR YOU TO SPECIFY THE ^^DESTROY\\ OPTION,
FOLLOWED BY THE ^^CHANGE\\ OPTION (FOR INDIVIDUAL EXCEPTIONS TO THE
STANDARD).
.HL 2 ^&^EXAMPLE\&
\\^THIS EXAMPLE ASSUMES THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL SYSTEM DEFAULTS, I.E.,
YOU RESPOND TO ALL QUESTIONS WITH A CARRIAGE RETURN.
(^SECTION 16.8.3 ILLUSTRATES A MORE
COMPLEX SITUATION.)
.B;.NF;.NJ;.LM5
^^BOOTS
.B
6.03
SYSCHK (N,Y):
.B;.I10
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 3-19-77
DATE: MAR 28
TIME: 1255
.B
STARTUP OPTION: LONG
.B
IN THE FOLLOWING DIALOG, ALL NUMBERS ARE DECIMAL.
TYPE <CR> IF OK, OR A NEW NUMBER TO CHANGE VALUE.
.B
_# MONITOR BUFFERS = 6
.B2
TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAME TO LIST _# BAD REGIONS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B2
DSK FILE STRUCTURES(STRS):
DSKA:FHA0(XLZG),FHA1(GLZX)
DSKB:DPA1(ONC501),DPA0(ONC517)
DSKC:DPA2(RP03A)
DSKN:DPA3(2RP023)
DSKX:DPA4(ONC554),DPA4(ONC566)
DSKH:DPA6(2RP)
.B
UNITS IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST:
FHA0(0),FHA1(0)
.B
STRS IN "SYS" SEARCH LIST:
DSKA,DSKN,DSKB,DSKC
.B
TYPE STR NAME FOR A LIST OF ITS PARAMETERS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B2
TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAME TO LIST ITS PARAMETERS(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY DISK PARAMETERS?(CR IF NO)
.B
TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED(CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B
STARTUP OPTION: QUICK
.B;.I6
6.03 SYSTEM _#160 12:56:33 CTY
.TS25
^^DSKN:\\##^SYSTEM _#160 ^^INITIA\\ TYPES THE
.BR
_. TEXT FOUND IN
.BR
_. ^^STR.TXT.
.BR
_.
.B
_.LOGIN[1,2] ;T\\HIS IS TYPED
;AUTOMATICALLY.
_.^^R OPSER
[OPRPAF PROCESSING AUTO COMMAND FILE]\\
##_.
##_.
##_.
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL 2 ^&^COMPLETE ^DESCRIPTION \\OF ^EACH "^LONG ^DIALOGUE" ^QUESTION\&
\\
.NT
^IT IS POSSIBLE FOR AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR TO STOP THE TYPEOUT OF
A LENGTHY ^^ONCE-O\\NLY QUESTION. ^WHEN YOU TYPE A CHARACTER
DURING ^^ONCE\\-ONLY TYPEOUT, A _^^O IS ECHOED AND THE REMAINDER OF
THE QUESTION IS NOT TYPED. (^THE SPACE CHARACTER IS RECOMMENDED AS THE CHARACTER
FOR YOU TO TYPE TO STOP OUTPUT, BECAUSE IT IS USUALLY IGNORED AS INPUT.)
.EN
.LS;.LE;^GET THE MONITOR FROM THE DISK
WITH ^^BOOTS\\ OR FROM MAGTAPE WITH ^^BOOTM\\.
^REFER TO THE EARLIER CHAPTERS OF THIS MANUAL.
.LE;^THE SYSTEM COMPARES THE TYPE OF MONITOR (1040, 1050, 1055, 1070, 1080, 1090)
AND THE TYPE OF PROCESSOR (^K^A10, ^K^I10, OR ^K^L10) FOR COMPATIBILITY.
^IF INCOMPATIBLE, THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE IS TYPED AND THE
MONITOR HALTS.
.B;.I5
^^THIS MONITOR WAS BUILT FOR A (KA10, KI10, KL10) AND
.I5
WILL NOT RUN PROPERLY ON (KI10, KA10, KL10).\\
.LE;^IF THE OPTIONAL LOADTIME DIAGNOSTIC ^^SYSCHK\\ IS INCLUDED IN THE
SYSTEM SOFTWARE (DETERMINED BY A SYSTEM PROGRAMMER DURING
THE ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE), ^^ONCE\\ ASKS IF
YOU WISH TO RUN IT AT THIS TIME
.B;.I5
^^SYSCHK (N,Y):
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:##N\\ OR <^^CR\\> TO SKIP THE DIAGNOSTIC
.B
^THE LOADTIME DIAGNOSTIC ^^SYSCHK\\ IS A 5-SECOND PROGRAM THAT ENSURES
THE ACCESSIBILITY OF MEMORY AND ALL DEVICES ON A
CONFIGURATION.
.B
^THE SYSTEM TYPES THE NAME OF THE MONITOR AND THE CREATION DATE AND ASKS FOR
THE REASON FOR THE RELOAD. ^^ONCE\\ TYPES
.B;.I5
^^6.03 SYS _#2 3-1-77
.B;.I5
^^WHY RELOAD\\:
.B
^YOU RESPOND WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING ACCEPTABLE ANSWERS
OR AN ABBREVIATION THAT UNIQUELY DESCRIBES IT:
.B;.LM25;.NF;.NJ
^^OPR
PARITY
POWER
STATIC
HARDWARE
NXM
HALT
LOOP
HUNG
PM
CM
SA
NEW
SCHED
OTHER\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
(^SEE ^SECTION 16.9 FOR A DETAILED EXPLANATION OF THE ^^WHY RELOAD:\\ QUESTION.)
.LE;^THE SYSTEM TYPES THE CREATION DATE AND ASKS FOR TODAY'S DATE AND TIME.
.B;.I5
^^DATE\\:##^^MAR 17 1977\\
.B
^TYPE THE DATE AS THE NAME OF THE MONTH (^JANUARY#-#^DECEMBER) AND THE NUMERICAL DAY
OF THE MONTH (1-31) IN ANY ORDER. (^THE NAME OF THE MONTH MAY BE SHORTENED
AS LONG AS THE ABBREVIATION IS UNIQUE.) ^THE YEAR IS OPTIONAL. ^IF
INCLUDED, IT MUST BE A 4-DIGIT NUMBER (1977) OR A 2-DIGIT (77)
ABBREVIATION FOLLOWING THE MONTH AND DAY. ^IF OMITTED, THE CREATION
DATE OF THE MONITOR IS ASSUMED. ^EXAMPLES OF ACCEPTABLE INPUT ARE:
.B;.I5
^^SEPTEMBER 17 1977
.I5
SEPT 17
.I5
17 SEPT
.I5
S 17\\
.B
^IF AN INCORRECT FORMAT IS DETECTED, THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE REASKS
THE QUESTION IN MORE DETAIL:
.B;.I5
^^PLEASE TYPE TODAY'S DATE AS MM-DD-YY:\\
.NT
^IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU TYPE IN THE CORRECT DATE. ^IF
YOU TYPE AN INCORRECT DATE, USER FILES WILL BE WRITTEN WITH THE WRONG
CREATION AND ACCESS DATES. ^THE AUTOMATIC ^^COMPIL\\, IF THE SOURCE FILE
WAS CREATED LATER THAN .^^REL\\ FILE, WILL BREAK DOWN. ^MORE SERIOUSLY,
IF YOUR INSTALLATION IS PURGING FILES BY DATE CREATED OR ACCESSED,
USERS' FILES COULD BE INCORRECTLY DELETED. ^IF YOU DISCOVER LATER
THAT YOU TYPED IN THE WRONG DATE BUT THE SYSTEM HAS NOT STARTED
RUNNING THE NULL JOB YET (^STEP 32), YOU MAY RESTART THE MONITOR
AT 400, RELOAD IT, OR USE THE ^^SET DATE\\ COMMAND.
.B;.I5
^^TIME:##0843<^^CR\\>
.B
^YOU TYPE TIME BASED ON A 24-HOUR CLOCK,
E.G., TYPE 0843 ^^<CR>\\ FOR 8:43 ^^AM\\, OR 1345 ^^<CR>\\ FOR 1:45
^^PM\\.
.B
^IF AN INCORRECT FORMAT IS DETECTED, THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE REASKS THE QUESTION IN MORE DETAIL:
.B;.I5
^^PLEASE TYPE TIME AS HHMM:\\
.B
^AS WITH THE DATE, IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU TYPE IN THE CORRECT TIME.
^YOU CAN CHANGE THE TIME AFTER THE MONITOR HAS STARTED TO TIMESHARE
USING THE ^^SET DAYTIM\\ COMMAND. (^REFER TO THE
^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^OPERATING ^SYSTEM ^COMMAND ^MANUAL IN THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM10
^SOFTWARE ^NOTEBOOK.) ^HOWEVER, THIS
PRACTICE IS TO BE DISCOURAGED BECAUSE IT CONFUSES THE CREATION
TIMES OF FILES AND CAUSES THE ACCOUNTING SYSTEM TO MAKE INCORRECT
CHARGES FOR CONNECT TIME. ^YOU CAN RELOAD OR RESTART THE MONITOR IF
YOU DETECT THE ERROR BEFORE ^STEP 31 (NULL JOB RUNNING).
.EN
^IF, AFTER LOADING THE MONITOR (^STEP 0), YOU ARE NOT ASKED
THE REASON FOR THE RELOAD AND THE DATE AND TIME, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING:
.B;.LM14;.I-4
A.##^CHECK THAT THE ^^NXM STOP\\ IS OFF. ^IF NOT
(THIS IS A COMMON ERROR AND IS EASILY RECOVERED), SET IF OFF.
.B;.I-4
B.##^PUSH ^^CONTINUE\\. ^^ONCE\\ GOES BACK TO ^STEP 2. ^NOW YOU MAY
RESPOND TO DATE AND TIME QUERIES.
.B;.LM9
^IF THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT WORK, IT MAY BE THAT THE MONITOR WAS
WRITTEN WITHOUT A STARTING ADDRESS. ^TRY THE FOLLOWING:
.B;.LM14;.I-4
A.##^SET THE ADDRESS SWITCHES TO 000400.
.B;.I-4
B.##^PRESS ^^STOP, RESET, START\\ (IN THAT ORDER).
.B;.I-4
C.##^GO BACK TO ^STEP 1 AND RESPOND TO ^^DATE\\, ^^WHY RELOAD\\, AND ^^TIME\\ QUERIES.
.LM9
.LE;^^ONCE\\ CHECKS TO SEE IF ALL OF MEMORY IS ACCESSIBLE.
^THE AMOUNT OF ACCESSIBLE MEMORY IS DETERMINED BY SCANNING MEMORY.
^IF THE AMOUNT FOUND IS LESS THAN THAT SPECIFIED WHEN THE
MONITOR WAS BUILT (BY A ^^MONGEN\\ QUESTION), THE FOLLOWING
MESSAGE IS TYPED.
.B;.I5
^^% MEMORY FROM XXXXXX TO YYYYYY IS OFF LINE\\
.BR;.I5
^^DO YOU WANT IT TO BE##1) ON LINE, OR##2) DOWN?
.BR;.I8
(TYPE _#)\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:##1 OR 2\\
.B
^IF THE MEMORY IS REQUIRED, CHECK TO SEE THAT THE MEMORY BANKS
IN QUESTION ARE PROPERLY SELECTED AND ADDRESSED, THEN TYPE 1
AFTER ANY ADJUSTMENTS. ^MEMORY IS RESCANNED TO CHECK FOR THE
REQUIRED AMOUNT.
.B
^IF THE MEMORY IS NOT REQUIRED, TYPE 2. ^THE MEMORY IS THEN
CLASSIFIED AS DOWN OR UNAVAILABLE, AND IS NOT USED. ^NOTE THAT
ON ^K^A10-BASED SYSTEMS (1040, 1050, AND 1055), ALL
AVAILABLE MEMORY SHOULD BE CONTIGUOUS (ALL MEMORIES
CLASSIFIED AS DOWN ARE AT THE TOP OF CORE)
FOR MAXIMUM SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, E.G., NON-CONTIGUOUS MEMORY
LIMITS THE MAXIMUM JOB SIZE AND COMPROMISES THE SWAPPING ALGORITHM. ^NEVERTHELESS,
IT IS POSSIBLE TO RUN ON A ^^KA10\\ WITH NON-CONTIGUOUS MEMORY.
.B
^NOTE THAT AFTER A SYSTEM POWER FAILURE,
THE MEMORIES THAT YOU WANT ON-LINE MAY NOT BE
IN A READY CONDITION. ^IF THE ^A^W (AWAIT REQUEST) LIGHT IS NOT
^^ON\\, OPEN THE FRONT DOOR OF THE APPROPRIATE MEMORY CABINET AND
PUSH THE ^^RESET\\ SWITCH SEVERAL TIMES. ^IF THE ^A^W LIGHT
DOES NOT GO ON, GO TO THE REAR OF THE CABINET AND POWER THE
MEMORY ^^OFF\\ AND THEN ^^ON\\. ^IF THE LIGHT STILL DOES NOT GO ON, TYPE 1
ANYWAY (BECAUSE THE INDICATOR BULB MAY BE BURNT OUT).
.B
^IF THE MONITOR REPEATS THE MESSAGE FOR THE SAME MEMORY, DESELECT
ALL PORTS ON THAT MEMORY AND, IF CONTIGUOUS MEMORY IS DESIRED, SWITCH THE HIGHEST MEMORY DOWN INTO
THE DESELECT MEMORY. ^BE SURE TO CHECK ALL PORTS AND CHECK FOR
INTERLEAVING.
.B
^IF THE HIGHEST MEMORY IS INTERLEAVED, YOU
MUST CHANGE THE INTERLEAVING OF THE MEMORIES ADJACENT TO THE
HIGHEST MEMORY.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR THE DESIRED ^^STARTUP\\ ^OPTION
.B;.I5
^^STARTUP OPTION:\\
.B
^YOU TYPE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING, DEPENDING UPON YOUR NEEDS.
(^REFER TO ^SECTIONS 16.2 THROUGH 16.8 FOR A MORE DETAILED EXPLANATION
OF EACH OPTION.)
.B;.LM20;.TS20;.I-10
^^QUICK\\ ^TO START THE SYSTEM QUICKLY WITHOUT CHANGING ANY
PARAMETERS. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.2.)
.B;.I-10
^^GO\\ ^TO CHECK TO SEE IF EVERYTHING IS IN ORDER AND TO START THE
SYSTEM WITH A MINIMUM OF DIALOGUE. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.3.)
.B;.I-10
^^DESTROY\\ ^TO AUTOMATICALLY RESTRUCTURE AND REFRESH ALL DISKS
ACCORDING TO A PREDETERMINED SET OF STANDARDS. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.4.)
.B;.I-10
^^REFRESH\\ ^TO EXPLICITLY REFRESH SELECTED FILE STRUCTURES WITHOUT
CHANGING OTHER SYSTEM PARAMETERS. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.5.)
.B;.I-10
^^UNITID\\ ^TO CHANGE SELECTED UNIT ^^ID\\S WITHOUT CHANGING OTHER
SYSTEM PARAMETERS. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.6.)
.B;.I-10
^^CHANGE\\ ^TO EXPLICITLY SET OR CHANGE SELECTED FILE STRUCTURE
PARAMETERS. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.7.)
.B;.I-10
^^LONG\\ ^TO EXPLICITLY SET ALL PARAMETERS AND RESTRUCTURE THE FILE
SYSTEM IN A NON-STANDARD WAY. (^REFER TO ^SECTION 16.8.)
.B;.I-10
^^NOINITIA\\ ^TO START THE SYSTEM QUICKLY WITHOUT SETTING ANY
NEW PARAMETERS AND WITHOUT RUNNING ^^INITIA\\ (REFER TO ^SECTION 16.2).
.B3;.LM9
^^USER RESPONSE: LONG\\
.LE;^^ONCE\\ LISTS THE NUMBER OF MONITOR BUFFERS AND ACCEPTS A CHANGE.
.B2;.I10
_##^^MONITOR BUFFERS = 6\\
.B3
^^USER RESPONSE\\: ^^<CR>\\ TO LEAVE AT THAT NUMBER
.B;.LM25
^TYPE#N (DECIMAL) TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF BUFFERS
.B;.LM9
^THE VALUE YOU TYPE IS NOT WRITTEN BACK ONTO THE DISK; THEREFORE, IT
LASTS ONLY FOR THIS LOAD OF THE MONITOR. ^NOTE THAT THE VALUE YOU TYPE MUST BE 2 OR GREATER.
.B
^THIS PARAMETER CAN BE CHANGED PERMANENTLY BY
.B;.LM14;.I-4
A.##^REDEFINING SYMBOL ^^MBFN\\ DURING THE ^^MONGEN\\ DIALOGUE OR
.B;.I-4
B.##^PATCHING THE LOCATION ^^MBFNUM\\ WITH ^^EXEC DDT\\
OR WITH ^^FILDDT\\ AND RESAVING IT.
.LM9
.LE;^^ONCE\\ READS BOTH ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS FROM EACH UNIT IN SYSTEM.
.B
^THE ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY DIALOGUE READS THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS FROM ALL DISK UNITS
THAT THE ^MONITOR WAS GENERATED TO HANDLE. ^IF A UNIT IS WRITE PROTECTED,
THE ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY DIALOGUE TYPES:
.B3;.NF;.NJ;.I5
^^%DPA2 IS WRITE PROTECTED
.B;.I5
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1) WRITE-ENABLED, OR
.I8
2) WRITE-PROTECTED? (TYPE _#)\\
.B3;.F;.J
^^USER RESPONSE:##1\\
.B
^SET THE UNIT PROPERLY.
^IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO INITIALIZE THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS,
TURN THE UNIT OFF LINE. ^AFTER THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS HAVE BEEN INITIALIZED
THE FIRST TIME, THE MONITOR CAN BE STARTED WITH THE UNIT WRITE PROTECTED.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ LISTS ^^HOME\\ BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERRORS AND ASKS TO INITIALIZE.
^IF A DISK UNIT HAS NOT BEEN REFRESHED PREVIOUSLY (TRUE FOR THE FIRST
TIME ^MONITOR STARTUP) OR HAS BEEN WRITTEN ON BY A TEST OR
MAINTENANCE PROGRAM, THE ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY DIALOGUE TYPES:
.B;.I5
?^^FHA0 FIRST HOME BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERROR
.B;.I5
?FHA0 SECOND HOME BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERROR
.B;.I5
DO YOU WANT TO INITIALIZE THE HOME BLOCKS
.I8
ON THIS UNIT\\?
.B3
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##^Y
.B
^IF ONLY ONE OF THE TWO ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS HAS A CONSISTENCY ERRORS,
YOU TYPE ^N<^C^R> AND THE DATA IN THE GOOD ^^HOME\\ BLOCK WILL BE
USED. ^IF BOTH ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS HAVE CONSISTENCY ERRORS, YOU MUST
DISSOLVE THE FILE STRUCTURE, REDEFINE, AND REFRESH. ^YOU TYPE ^Y<^C^R> TO
THIS QUESTION AND CONTINUE WITH THE ^^LONG\\ DIALOGUE.
.B
^IF THERE ARE ANY OFF-LINE CONTROLLERS, THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE MIGHT TYPE:
.B;.I5
%^^CONTROLLER FHA IS OFF-LINE
.B;.I5
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1) ON-LINE, OR
.I8
2) DOWN? (TYPE _#)\\
.B3
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##1 OR 2
.B
^YOU MUST CHANGE THE CONTROLLER IF IT WAS NOT SET PROPERLY. ^IF YOU TYPE ANYTHING OTHER
THAN 2, THE MONITOR TRIES THE CONTROLLER AGAIN.
^IF YOU SPECIFY THAT THE CONTROLLER IS DOWN, THE MONITOR
DOES NOT ATTEMPT TO USE ANY OF THE UNITS ON THE CONTROLLER.
.B
^IF THERE ARE ANY ON-LINE CONTROLLERS, ^^ONCE\\ MAY TYPE:
.B;.I5
^^%CONTROLLER DPA\N WRITE-HEADER LOCKOUT SWITCH
.I8
ALLOWS WRITING HEADERS.
.B;.I5
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1) SET OR
.I8
2) IGNORED##(TYPE _#)\\
.B3
^^USER RESPONSE:##1\\
.B
^IF THE WRITE-HEADER LOCKOUT SWITCH IS ^^OFF\\, IT ALLOWS FORMATTING OF DISK
PACKS UNDER TIMESHARING. ^IF IT IS ^^OFF\\, TURN THE SWITCH TO
^^ON\\ AND TYPE 1. ^THIS SWITCH MUST BE ^^ON\\ TO START THE MONITOR.
.B
^IF YOU TYPE 2 (IGNORED), ^^ONCE\\ TYPES
.B;.I5
^^NOT NORMALLY DONE, ARE YOU SURE?\\
.B
AS A WARNING. ^YOU TYPE ^^YES\\ IF YOU ARE SURE,
AND ^^NO\\ IF YOU WISH TO REANSWER THE PREVIOUS QUESTION.
.B
^IF THERE ARE ANY OFF-LINE UNITS ON THE CONTROLLER, THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY
DIALOGUE MIGHT TYPE:
.B;.I5
^^%FHA1 IS OFF-LINE
.B;.I5
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1) ON-LINE,
.I8
2) OFF-LINE, OR 3) DOWN? (TYPE _#)\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##1, 2, OR 3.
.B
^YOU MUST CHANGE THE UNIT IF IT HAS NOT BEEN SET PROPERLY. ^IF YOU TYPE ANYTHING OTHER THAN 2
OR 3, THE MONITOR TRIES THE UNIT AGAIN. ^IF YOU SPECIFY
THAT THE UNIT IS DOWN, THE MONITOR CANNOT ACCESS IT AGAIN, UNLESS YOU ISSUE THE ^^ATTACH\\
COMMAND TO PUT THE UNIT OFF-LINE. ^THE ^^MOUNT\\ COMMAND CAN BE USED TO PLACE THE UNIT IN THE
MONITOR'S POOL OF AVAILABLE DEVICES. ^YOU CAN ALSO ISSUE THE ^^DETACH\\ COMMAND
TO DECLARE A UNIT AS DOWN, WHICH REMOVES THE UNIT FROM THE MONITOR'S POOL OF AVAILABLE DEVICES.
^YOU CAN CAUSE A DISK PACK UNIT TO BE OFF-LINE WITHOUT POWERING IT DOWN. ^SIMPLY SET
THE ENABLE/DISABLE SWITCH TO DISABLE THE UNIT.
^IF THE MONITOR IS BUILT TO HANDLE MORE UNITS THAN ARE PHYSICALLY ATTACHED,
NO HARM IS DONE. ^THERE IS ONLY THE MINOR ANNOYANCE OF ANSWERING THIS
QUESTION WITH 3 EVERY TIME THE ^MONITOR IS STARTED (^^LONG\\ DIALOGUE).
^SOFTWARE UNIT DATA BLOCKS (^U^D^BS) CAN BE EASILY PATCHED OUT OF THE SYSTEM
WITH ^^EXEC DDT\\ OR ^^FILDDT\\ TO AVOID THE ABOVE QUESTIONS BECAUSE THE UNIT DATA BLOCKS (E.G.
^^RPA3CB\\) ARE LINKED THROUGH THE ^^LH\\ OF RELATIVE LOCATION
^^UNISYS\\. (^REFER TO ^^PATMON.)\\
.B
^ON SUBSEQUENT STARTUPS, ONE OF THE FOLLOWING ERROR MESSAGES MAY OCCUR:
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
?^^MORE THAN ONE LAST UNIT IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST
.B
?MORE THAN ONE LAST UNIT IN STR XXXX
.B
?NO UNITS IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST
.B
%LAST UNIT IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST NOT FOUND
.B
?CHANGE THE SLAVE OFFSET SWITCH IN BAY 2
.B
?TWO LOGICAL UNIT N'S FOUND IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST
.B
%LOGICAL UNIT N MISSING FROM ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST
.B
?LAST UNIT WASN'T FOUND IN STR XXXX
.B
?TWO LOGICAL UNIT N'S FOUND IN STR XXXX
.B
?LOGICAL UNIT N MISSING FROM STR XXXX
.B
?TWO LOGICAL STR N'S FOUND IN "SYS" SEARCH LIST
.B
%LOGICAL STR _# N MISSING FROM SYS SEARCH LIST\\
.B
?^^NO STR'S IN SYS SEARCH LIST\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^YOU MUST CHANGE PARAMETERS AND/OR MOUNT OR DISMOUNT
PACKS TO GET RID OF THE ERROR CONDITION.
^IT IS NOT AN ERROR TO HAVE UNITS THAT ARE NOT IN ANY FILE STRUCTURE.
^SO THE MESSAGE
.B;.I5
^^UNITS NOT IN A FILE STRUCTURE:\\
.B
DOES NOT NEED CORRECTIVE ACTION. ^IN FACT, THE SWAPPING UNIT IN A LARGE
SYSTEM MAY BE ENTIRELY DEDICATED TO SWAPPING. ^IN THIS CASE, IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT THE SWAPPING UNIT NOT BE INCLUDED IN A FILE STRUCTURE BECAUSE THE SPACE
FOR THE SKELETON FILE STRUCTURE CAN BE SAVED. ^NOTE, HOWEVER, THAT THE
FIRST 12 DECIMAL BLOCKS MUST STILL BE USED FOR ^^HOME\\ AND ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ LISTS ^B^A^T BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERRORS:
.B;.I5
?^^DPA0 FIRST BAT BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERROR
.B;.I5
?DPA0 SECOND BAT BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERROR
.B3;.I5
DO YOU WANT TO INITIALIZE THE BAT BLOCKS ON
.I8
THIS UNIT?
.B
USER RESPONSE:##N\\
.B
(^TYPE ^Y IF THE ^^BAT\\ BLOCK
HAS NOT BEEN WRITTEN ON BY THE MAPPING OPTION OF A MAINTENANCE PROGRAM.)
.B
^IF ONLY ONE ^B^A^T BLOCK HAS CONSISTENCY ERRORS, YOU TYPE ^N BECAUSE
THE OTHER ^B^A^T BLOCK IS PROBABLY ALL RIGHT. ^IF BOTH ^B^A^T BLOCKS
HAVE CONSISTENCY ERRORS, YOU TYPE ^Y. ^^ONCE\\ RESPONDS WITH
.B;.I5
^^NOT NORMALLY DONE, ARE YOU SURE?
.B
USER RESPONSE:##Y\\
.B
^^ONCE\\ RESPONDS WITH ^^INITIALIZING ^^BAT BLOCKS.\\
.B
^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR UNIT NAMES ON WHICH TO LIST THE NUMBER OF BAD
REGIONS FROM THE ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS.
.B;.I5
^^TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAME TO LIST BAD REGIONS
.B;.I5
^^(<CR> IF NONE, ALL IF ALL\\)
.B
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##<^^CR\\>
.B
^USUALLY THERE ARE NONE, BUT IF YOU SPECIFY A PHYSICAL
NAME OR ^^ALL\\, THEN ^^ONCE\\ TYPES
.B;.I5
^^DPA2 (2RP005\\)
.B;.I5
_# ^^BAD REGIONS\\=XXXXX
.B;.I5
_#^^BAD BLOCKS=XXXXX
.LE;^^ONCE \\LISTS ^^STR\\S AND UNITS FOR DISK PACKS IN THEM.
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE TYPES OUT EACH FILE STRUCTURE NAME FOLLOWED BY THE
PHYSICAL UNIT NAME OF EACH UNIT IN THE FILE STRUCTURE IN ITS LOGICAL
ORDER. ^THE UNIT ^^ID\\ IS TYPED IN PARENTHESES AFTER EACH PHYSICAL
UNIT NAME. ^EXAMPLE:
.B;.I5
^^DSK FILE STRUCTURES (STRS):
.B;.I5
DSKA:FHA0(RM10A),FHA1(RD10A)
.B;.I5
DSKB:DPA1(DP0KZQ),DPA0(DP2KMR),DPA2(DP1RWP)\\
.B
^IF THERE ARE NO FILE STRUCTURES, ONLY THE HEADER LINE IS TYPED,
BECAUSE YOU MUST TAKE ACTION.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ LISTS UNITS NOT IN AN ^^STR,\\ IF ANY.
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE TYPES OUT EACH PHYSICAL UNIT NOT IN A FILE STRUCTURE
FOLLOWED BY THE UNIT ^I^D. ^THIS LIST ALWAYS INCLUDES THE OFF-LINE AND
DOWN UNITS. ^PARENTHESES MEAN THE UNIT NAME IS ZERO. ^EXAMPLE:
.B;.I5
^^UNITS NOT IN A FILE STRUCTURE:
.B;.I5
FHA2(),DPA3(DP35WN)\\
.B
^IF THERE ARE NO UNITS IN THE FILE STRUCTURES, THE HEADING IS NOT TYPED.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ LISTS UNITS IN THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST.
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE TYPES OUT ALL PHYSICAL UNITS IN THE ACTIVE
SWAPPING LIST, ALONG WITH THE SWAPPING CLASS OF EACH UNIT. ^CLASS0, CLASS1 ... CLASSN
DESCRIBE DIFFERENT VARIETIES OF SWAPPING SPACE. ^LOWER NUMBER SWAPPING
SPACES SHOULD CONTAIN HIGH-SPEED DEVICES BECAUSE ALL LOWER CLASS
SPACE IS USED FIRST.
.B.I5
^^UNITS IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST:
.B;.I5
FHA(0),DPA1(1)\\
.B
^IF THERE ARE NO UNITS IN THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST, THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY
DIALOGUE TYPES:
.B;.I5
?^^NO UNITS IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST\\
.B
^THIS TYPEOUT IS TO BE EXPECTED ON THE FIRST MONITOR STARTUP.
^THIS SITUATION MUST BE CORRECTED BY INCLUDING AT LEAST ONE UNIT IN THE
ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ LISTS ^^STR\\S IN THE SYSTEM SEARCH LIST.
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE TYPES OUT ALL FILE STRUCTURE NAMES IN THE
SYSTEM SEARCH LIST FOR DEVICE ^^SYS\\. ^^SYS\\ SHOULD INCLUDE A FAST
AND A SLOW FILE STRUCTURE. ^MOST .^^EXE\\ FILES SHOULD BE PUT
ON THE SLOWER FILE STRUCTURE, BECAUSE THE DORMANT SEGMENTS ARE KEPT ON THE
FASTER SWAPPING UNITS.
^OTHER ACTIVE FILES SUCH AS ACCOUNTING FILES SHOULD ALSO BE
CONSIDERED AS CANDIDATES FOR A FASTER FILE STRUCTURE WITHIN ^^SYS\\.
.B
^EXAMPLE:
.B;.I5
^^STR\\'S ^^IN "SYS SEARCH LIST\\:
.B;.I5
^^DSKA,DSKB
.B
(T\\HERE WILL BE NONE THE FIRST TIME.)
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR AN ^^STR\\ NAME TO LIST ITS PARAMETERS.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE STR NAME FOR A LIST OF ITS PARAMETERS (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^USER RESPONSE:##^^<CR>\\
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR A UNIT NAME TO LIST ITS PARAMETERS.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAME TO LIST ITS PARAMETERS (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^USER RESPONSE:##^^<CR>\\
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS IF YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANYTHING.
.B;.I5
^^BEFORE "HOME" BLOCKS ARE REWRITTEN,
.I6
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY DISK PARAMETERS?\\
.B;.F;.J
^^USER RESPONSE:##Y\\
.B
(^YOU WISH TO DEFINE SOME FILE STRUCTURES.)
.B
^IF YOU TYPE ^^<CR>\\, ^^ONCE\\ GOES TO ^STEP 25
(ASK ABOUT REFRESHING).
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS IF YOU WANT TO DISSOLVE ANY ^^STR\\S.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE STR NAME TO BE DISSOLVED (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^USER RESPONSE:##^^<CR>\\
.B
(^THERE ARE NONE TO DISSOLVE.) ^IF YOU WANT TO REDEFINE A FILE
STRUCTURE ON A SUBSEQUENT STARTUP, YOU MUST FIRST DISSOLVE
ALL ^^STR\\S THAT HAVE THE UNITS YOU WISH TO INCLUDE IN THE NEW ^^STR\\.
^IF THERE ARE NO FILE STRUCTURES, WHICH IS THE CASE THE FIRST TIME
^^ONCE-O\\NLY IS RUN, THIS QUESTION IS OMITTED.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR A ^^STR\\ TO BE DEFINED.
.B;.I5
^^TYPE STR NAME TO BE DEFINED (CR IF NONE)
.B
^USER RESPONSE:##^^DSKA\\
.B
(^DEFINE THE FASTEST FILE STRUCTURE FIRST.)
.B
^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR THE NAMES OF UNITS TO BE IN THE FILE STRUCTURE.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE NAMES OF PHYSICAL UNITS IN STR (ALL IF ALL, EXTRA CR WHEN DONE)\\
.B;.LM9;.TS25
^^USER RESPONSE\\: ^^FHA0 <CR>\\
.BR
^^FHA1 <CR>\\
.BR
^^<CR>\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^IF YOU TYPE A NAME THAT IS NOT A PHYSICAL UNIT NAME,
THIS INCORRECT NAME IS IGNORED AND YOU RECEIVE
THE MESSAGE
.B;.I5
^^?NOT A PHYSICAL UNIT - TRY AGAIN\\
.B
^IF YOU HAVE TWO UNITS (^^RM10B\\ OR ^^RD10\\ OR A MIXTURE) ON
THE ^^RC10\\, FOLLOW WITH AN EXTRA CARRIAGE RETURN TO INDICATE THE
END OF FILE STRUCTURE ^^DSKA\\. ^IF THERE ARE A SMALL NUMBER OF UNITS
OF A PARTICULAR TYPE, SAY TWO OR THREE, DEFINE THEM TO BE IN ONE FILE
STRUCTURE. ^IF YOUR INSTALLATION HAS A LARGE NUMBER OF UNITS
YOU CAN DEFINE MORE THAN ONE FILE STRUCTURE FOR THAT
CONTROLLER TYPE. ^REMEMBER THAT IT IS POSSIBLE TO PUT ^^RM10B\\ AND
^^RD10\\ IN THE SAME FILE STRUCTURE. ^YOU MAY WISH TO LEAVE AN
^^RM10B\\ OUT OF ANY FILE STRUCTURE AND USE IT SOLELY FOR SWAPPING,
THEREBY ELIMINATING MOST ^^STR\\ OVERHEAD.
.B
^IF THERE ARE ANY PHYSICAL UNITS NOT YET DEFINED TO BE IN A STRUCTURE, ^^ONCE\\
ASKS FOR ANOTHER ^^STR\\ TO BE DEFINED. ^IF NOT, THEN ^^ONCE\\ GOES
DIRECTLY TO QUESTION 20.
.B;.I5
^^TYPE STR NAME TO BE DEFINED (CR IF NONE)
.B
^USER RESPONSE:##^^DSKB\\
.B
(^TYPE IN THE SECOND FASTEST FILE STRUCTURE NAME.)
.B3
^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR UNITS TO BE IN THIS FILE STRUCTURE.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE NAMES OF PHYSICAL UNIT IN STR (ALL IF ALL, CR WHEN DONE)\\
.B;.LM9;.TS25
^^USER RESPONSE\\: ^^DPA0 <CR>\\
.BR
^^DPA1 <CR>\\
.BR
^^DPA2 <CR>\\
.BR
^^<CR>\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^IF YOU HAVE, FOR EXAMPLE, THREE UNITS
ON THE ^^RP10\\.
.B3
^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR ANOTHER ^^STR\\ TO BE DEFINED.
.B;.I5
^^TYPE STR NAME TO BE DEFINED (CR IF NONE)\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##^^<CR>\\
.B
^IF ALL DESIRED UNITS HAVE BEEN DEFINED TO BE PART OF SOME FILE STRUCTURE.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS IF YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY ^^STR\\ PARAMETERS.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE STR NAME TO CHANGE ITS PARAMETERS (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##^^DSKA\\
.B
(^BECAUSE YOU HAVE NOT DEFINED ANY PARAMETERS YET, YOU COULD
TYPE ^^ALL\\ TO DEFINE ALL.)
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^AFTER EACH PRINTING OF CURRENT VALUE, TYPE NEW VALUE OR CR
.B
PARAMETERS WHICH MAY BE CHANGED WITHOUT REFRESHING
.B
_# OF CONSECUTIVE BLOCKS TRIED FOR ON OUTPUT\\=N
^^MIN=1 MAX=\\M
.B
WHERE N IS#10 FOR ^^RC10\\ FILE STRUCTURES OR
.BR
###########30 FOR ^^RP10\\ FILE STRUCTURES
.BR
AND M IS THE SIZE OF THE ^^STR\\.
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^^USER RESPONSE:##^^<CR>\\
.B3;.I5
^^SUM OF BLOCKS GUARANTEED TO USERS=0\\
.BR;.I5
^^MIN=0##MAX=\\M
.B;.LM15
WHERE M IS THE NUMBER OF BLOCKS ON THE ^^STR\\. ^BECAUSE RESERVE QUOTAS ARE NOT
IMPLEMENTED FOR THE 603 RELEASE, THIS NUMBER IS NOT USED.
.B;.I-5
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##<^^CR\\>
.B3
_# ^^BLOCKS ALLOWED FOR OVERDRAW PER USER\\=N
.BR
^^MIN=0##MAX\\=M
.B
WHERE N IS 200 FOR ^^RC10\\ FILE STRUCTURES
.BR
###########500 FOR ^^RP10\\ FILE STRUCTURES
.BR
AND M IS MAX. NUMBER OF BLOCKS IN ^^STR\\.
.B;.I-5
^^USER RESPONSE:##<CR>\\
.B
^THE OVERDRAW AMOUNT SHOULD BE AS LARGE AS A SOURCE FILE SO THAT
EDITING WITH ^^TECO\\ CAN BE COMPLETED WHILE EXCEEDING A USER'S QUOTA,
BUT BEFORE THE OVERDRAW AMOUNT RUNS OUT.
.B3;.NF;.NJ
^^PARAMETERS WHICH MAY NOT BE CHANGED WITHOUT REFRESHING
^^K FOR CRASH.EXE=\N
MIN=0##MAX=4096\\
.B3;.F;.J
N IS DETERMINED BY THE LARGER OF THE ^^MONGEN\\-SPECIFIED SIZE OR THE
ACTUAL SIZE OF THE MACHINE.
.B;.F;.J;.I-5
^^USER RESPONSE:##\\N OR <^^CR>\\
.B
^WHERE N IS THE CORE SIZE OF THE MACHINE ON WHICH THE MONITOR IS
RUNNING. (^^CRASH.EXE\\ IS USED BY ^^BOOTS\\ TO DUMP A CORE IMAGE WHEN
THE MONITOR CRASHES.)
.B3
^^BLOCKS PER CLUSTER\\=N
.BR
^^MIN\\=1##^^MAX\\=511
.B
WHERE N = 1 FOR ^^RC\\10 FILE STRUCTURES
.BR
5 FOR ^^RP\\10 FILE STRUCTURES. (10 IS ALSO
SUPPORTED FOR ^R^P10, ^R^HX0, AND ^R^P0X FILE STRUCTURES.)
.B;.I-5
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##<^^CR\\>
.B;.LM20;.NF;.NJ
^^THEREFORE BITS PER CLUSTER ADR.=13
THEREFORE BLOCKS PER SUPER CLUSTER=\M\\
^^THEREFORE SUPERCLUSTERS PER UNIT=\N\\
.B;.LM9
^FOR ^^RP02\\, M=5 N=8000
^FOR ^^RM10B,\\ M=1, N=2700
^FOR ^^RD10\\, M=1, N=4000
^FOR ^^RP03\\, M=5, N=16000
^FOR ^^RP04,\\ M=10, N=15428
^FOR ^R^P06, M=10, N=30780
.B3;.LM15
^^BITS PER CLUSTER COUNT=9\\
^^MIN=1##MAX=18\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^^USER RESPONSE\\: <^^CR\\>
.B
^THIS GIVES UP TO 511 CLUSTERS IN ONE RETRIEVAL POINTER.
.B;.I5
^^THEREFORE BITS PER CHECKSUM=14\\
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS IF YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OTHER ^^STR\\ PARAMETERS.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE STR NAME TO CHANGE ITS PARAMETERS (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL\\)
.B;.LM9;.TS25
^^USER RESPONSE\\: ^NEXT ^^STR\\ NAME TO BE CHANGED (E.G.,
^^DSKB\\)
OR
<^^CR\\> IF NONE
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^REPEAT QUESTION 21.#FOR EACH ^^STR\\.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS IF YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY UNIT PARAMETERS.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAME TO CHANGE ITS PARAMETERS (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
USER RESPONSE: ALL\\
.B
[^THE FIRST TIME.]##^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE TYPES OUT ONE PHYSICAL UNIT
NAME. ^IT REPEATS THE QUESTIONS FOR EACH UNIT.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^AFTER EACH PRINTING OF CURRENT VALUE, TYPE NEW VALUE OR CR\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
(^THEN THE MONITOR TYPES OUT THE FIRST PHYSICAL DEVICE NAME.)
.B3;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^PARAMETERS WHICH MAY NOT BE CHANGED WITHOUT REFRESHING
.B
ZERO UNIT ID-NEW ID NEEDED\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^^USER RESPONSE\\:##^^RD001\\
.B
^THE UNIT ^^ID\\ MAY BE UP TO SIX CHARACTERS IN LENGTH. ^IT IS
SUGGESTED THAT A UNIT ^^ID\\ INDICATE THE TYPE OF UNIT. ^FOR
EXAMPLE,
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^RD000, RD001, RD002, RD003, (FOR RD10\\S)
^^RM000, RM001, RM002, RM003 (FOR RM10B\\S)
^^2RP000, 2RP001, 2RP002, 2RP003, 2RP004, 2RP005,
.BR
2RP006 (FOR RP02\\S)
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^EACH PACK AT AN INSTALLATION SHOULD HAVE A UNIQUE ^^ID\\.
.B;.I5
^^K FOR SWAPPING ON UNIT=0
.I5
MIN=0##MAX=\\P
.B
^FOR ^^RP02\\ P=4095. ^FOR ^^RM10B\\ OR ^^RD10\\ P=337. ^FOR ^^RP03\\ P=8191.
.B
^^USER RESPONSE: N\\
.B
^WHERE N IS ABOUT 15 TIMES THE NUMBER OF JOBS THE SYSTEM IS BUILT
FOR IF THIS IS THE FIRST DRUM UNIT OR 0 TIMES FOR ALL OTHER UNITS.
.B
^YOU MAY WISH TO ALLOCATE SOME SPACE FOR SWAPPING ON ANOTHER
UNIT IN CASE THE FIRST UNIT GOES DOWN. ^A UNIT WILL NOT BE USED
FOR SWAPPING UNLESS IT IS IN THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST.
.B
^IF N IS GREATER THAN MAXIMUM, THE MESSAGE (FOR ^^RP02\\).
.B;.I5
?^^CANNOT EXCEED 4095\\
.B
^THE MAXIMUM (P) MAY BE TOO LARGE. ^IF THE UNIT IS IN A FILE
STRUCTURE, IT IS SUGGESTED THAT P-2 BE THE LARGEST NUMBER SPECIFIED.
.NT
.SP1
^THERE IS NO REQUIREMENT THAT A UNIT USED FOR SWAPPING BE
PART OF A FILE STRUCTURE. ^BY NOT MAKING IT PART OF A FILE STRUCTURE,
THE SPACE FOR THE SKELETON FILE STRUCTURE CAN BE SAVED. ^NOTE THAT
THE ^^HOME\\ AND ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS MUST STILL BE PRESENT (^BLOCKS 1, 2 AND
10, 11 DECIMAL).
.B;.I5
^^COMPUTED 1ST LOGICAL BLOCK FOR SWAPPING=YYYYY\\
.I5
1^^ST LOGICAL BLOCK FOR SWAPPING=YYYYY\\
.I5
^^MIN=13 MAX=YYYY\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE\\: ^^<CR>\\
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY PROGRAM HAS COMPUTED THE BEST PLACE FOR THE SWAPPING
SPACE BY PUTTING IT IN THE MIDDLE OF THE UNIT. ^IF THERE ARE ANY BAD
SPOTS IN THAT REGION, YOU SHOULD MOVE THE SWAPPING SPACE
DOWN BY TYPING A SMALLER LOGICAL BLOCK NUMBER. ^THE QUESTION
IS SKIPPED IF NO SWAPPING SPACE WAS ALLOCATED.
.B
^IF ^^YYYYY\\ IS TOO LOW, SO THAT IT WOULD INTERFERE WITH THE ^^HOME\\
AND ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS, THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE WILL TYPE:
.B;.I5
^^MUST EXCEED 11\\
.B
^IF ^^YYYYY\\ IS TOO HIGH, SO THAT IT WOULD RUN PAST END, THE ^^ONCE\\-ONLY
DIALOGUE WILL TYPE:
.B;.I5
^^CANNOT EXCEED YYYYY\\
.B3;.I5
_# ^^SAT BLOCKS ON UNIT\\=T
.I5
^^MIN\\=T###^^MAX\\=223
.B
^WHERE T IS THE MINIMUM.
.B
^FOR ^^RP02\\, T=2. ^FOR ^^RM10B\\ OR ^^RD10\\, T=1. ^FOR ^^RP03\\, T=4.
^FOR ^^RP04,\\ T=4. ^FOR ^R^P06, T=7.
.B
^^USER RESPONSE\\: <^^CR\\>
.EN
^THEN THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE TYPES
.B;.I5
^^THEREFORE CLUSTERS PER SAT=\\XXXX
.B;.I5
^^THEREFORE WORDS PER SAT=\\YYY
.B
^IF THE CLUSTER SIZE IS SMALLER THAN THE RECOMMENDED SIZE, MORE
THAN ONE ^^SAT\\ BLOCK PER UNIT WILL BE REQUIRED. ^IF YOU TYPE
A NUMBER THAT IS TOO SMALL, THE DIALOGUE RESPONDS WITH
.B;.I5
^^TOO SMALL - MIN#=N\\
.B
AND REPEATS THE QUESTION.
.B;.I5
^^PARAMETERS WHICH MAY BE CHANGED WITHOUT
.I5
REFRESHING
.B;.I5
_# ^^SAT BLOCKS IN CORE=M\\
.I5
^^MIN=1##MAX=\M
.B
^^USER RESPONSE: \M\\
.B
^THE SUGGESTED WORDS PER ^^SAT\\ BLOCK HAVE BEEN CHOSEN SO THAT EACH
UNIT HAS ONLY ONE OR TWO ^^SAT\\ BLOCKS. ^IT IS FASTER TO HAVE ALL
^^SAT\\ BLOCKS IN MEMORY. ^IF THE NUMBER OF ^^SAT\\ BLOCKS ON THIS
UNIT IS 1, THIS QUESTION IS SKIPPED. ^IF ^^ALL\\ HAD BEEN
TYPED OR ANOTHER UNIT IS TO BE CHANGED, ^^ONCE\\ GOES BACK TO BEGINNING OF QUESTION 18.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ LISTS UNITS IN THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST AND ASKS IF YOU WANT TO MAKE ANY
CHANGES.
.B;.I5
^^UNITS IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST:
.I5
FHA0 (0), DPA0 (1)
.B;.I5
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE ACTIVE SWAPPING
.I6
LIST?\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE: Y\\
.B
(^YOU MUST DEFINE AN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST IF THIS IS
INITIAL SYSTEM STARTUP.)
.B3;.I5
^^FOR EACH CLASS TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAMES (CR
.I6
WHEN DONE)
.B;.I5
CLASS 0\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE: FHA0\\
.B
^IF THERE ARE MORE UNITS IN ^CLASS 0, TYPE ^^FHA1\\. ^TYPE AN
EXTRA CARRIAGE RETURN WHEN FINISHED WITH ^CLASS 0.
.B
^^CLASS 1\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE:\\ ^^DPA0\\ IF SWAPPING SPACE IS ALLOCATED,
.C
OR
.C
<^^CR\\>
.NT
.SP1
1.##^CLASS 0, CLASS 1,....CLASS N DESCRIBE THE DIFFERENT VARIETIES OF
SWAPPING SPACE. ^LOWER NUMBERED SWAPPING SPACE SHOULD CONTAIN
HIGHER SPEED DEVICES BECAUSE ALL LOWER CLASS SPACE IS USED FIRST.
.EN
.NT
.SP1
2.##^THE SMALL MONITOR (^^DEC\\SYSTEM-1040) ALLOWS ONLY ONE FILE STRUCTURE
AND ONE UNIT FOR SWAPPING. ^AFTER THE QUESTION
.B;.I5
^^UNITS IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST:
.I13
CLASS 0
.I13
DPA0\\
.B
^^ONCE-O\\NLY TYPES
.B;.I5
^^%SWAPPING LIST FULL\\
.B
^WITH THE SMALL MONITOR THIS MESSAGE IS EXPECTED AND SHOULD
NOT ALARM YOU.
.EN
.LE;^^ONCE\\ LISTS ^^STR\\S IN THE SYSTEM SEARCH LIST AND ASKS IF YOU HAVE ANY
CHANGES.
.B;.I5
^^STRS IN "SYS" SEARCH LIST
.I5
DSKA,DSKB
.I5
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE "SYS" SEARCH LIST?\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE: Y\\
.B
(^YOU MUST DEFINE A SYSTEM SEARCH LIST IF THIS
IS THE INITIAL SYSTEM STARTUP.)
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE STR NAMES FOR "SYS" SEARCH LIST (EXTRA CR WHEN DONE\\)
.B;.LM9;.TS25
^^USER RESPONSE\\: ^^DSKA\\
.BR
^^DSKB\\
.BR
^^<CR>\\
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^THE FASTEST FILE STRUCTURE NAME (E.G., ^^DSKA\\) FOLLOWED BY A
SLOWER ONE AND AN EXTRA CARRIAGE RETURN.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS TO LIST ^^STR\\ PARAMETERS.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^BEFORE "HOME" BLOCKS ARE WRITTEN\\
^^TYPE STR NAME FOR A LIST OF ITS PARAMETERS (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL)
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
USER RESPONSE: <CR\\>
.B
^YOU WILL BE ABLE TO CHECK AFTER ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS
ARE WRITTEN. ^TO CHECK NOW TYPE STRUCTURE NAMES OR ^^ALL\\.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS TO LIST UNIT PARAMETERS.
.B;.I5
^^TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT NAME FOR A LIST OF ITS
.I6
PARAMETERS (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL\\)
.B
^^USER RESPONSE\\: <^^CR\\>
.B
^YOU ARE ABLE TO CHECK LATER.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS IF YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANYTHING.
.B;.I5
^^DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY DISK PARAMETERS?
.I6
(CR IF NO\\)
.B
^^USER RESPONSE\\: <^^CR\\>
.LE;^ASKS FOR THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS TO BE WRITTEN.
.B;.LM15
^^TYPE PHYSICAL UNIT TO WRITE HOME BLOCKS (CR IF NONE, ALL IF ALL;
"ALL" IS NORMAL CASE)\\
.B;.LM9
^^USER RESPONSE: ALL\\
.B
^UNDER NORMAL CIRCUMSTANCES ^^ALL\\ IS THE ONLY ACCEPTABLE ANSWER TO
THIS QUESTION. ^^<CR>\\ CAN BE USED DURING
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT IF YOU ARE EXPERIMENTING AND DO NOT WANT TO
CHANGE THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS PERMANENTLY. (^ANY OTHER ANSWER CAN
CAUSE PROBLEMS.)
.B2
^^ONCE\\ TYPES
.B;.I5
^^HOME BLOCKS WRITTEN\\
.B
^IF AN ERROR CONDITION EXISTS, ^^ONCE\\ TYPES A MESSAGE AND
GOES BACK TO QUESTION 8. ^IF THERE IS NO ERROR, ^^ONCE\\ LISTS
THE STRUCTURES DEFINED BY THE ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS AND INDICATES THOSE
THAT NEED REFRESHING. ^^ONCE\\ THEN LISTS THE UNITS THAT ARE NOT
IN A FILE STRUCTURE, THE UNITS THAT ARE IN THE SWAPPING
LIST ABOVE, AND THE ^^STR\\S IN THE "^^SYS\\" SEARCH LIST. ^^ONCE\\
THEN LISTS THE PARAMETERS FOR ^^STR\\S AND PHYSICAL UNITS IF
YOU REQUEST.
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS FOR THE ^^STR\\ NAME TO BE REFRESHED.
.B;.I5
^^DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY DISK PARAMETERS\\
.B
^IF ^^ONCE\\ DETERMINES THAT ONE OR MORE STRUCTURES NEEDS
REFRESHING,
IT WILL TYPE THE MESSAGE:
.B;.I5
%^^NEED REFRESHING:\\
.I5
AAA
.B
WHERE AAA ARE THE ^^STR\\S THAT NEED REFRESHING.
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NJ
^^TYPE STR NAME TO BE REFRESHED (CR IF NONE,
ALL IF ALL\\)
.B;.LM9;.F;.J
^^USER RESPONSE\\: ^^ALL\\
.B
(^THE FIRST TIME YOU WISH TO REFRESH EVERYTHING.)
.LE;^^ONCE\\ ASKS YOU TO ^^LOGIN\\.
.B;.I5
^^TO AUTOMATICALLY LOGIN UNDER [1,2] TYPE LOGIN\\
.B
^^USER RESPONSE\\: ^^LOGIN\\
.LE;^THE ^MONITOR STARTS RUNNING THE NULL JOB
AND INITIATES TIMESHARING.
.LE;^IF THE ^^LONG\\ OPTION IS RUN, POST THE OUTPUT FROM QUESTIONS 10
THROUGH 27 ON THE WALL AS THE LATEST DISK CONFIGURATION.
.LE;^WHEN BUILDING A NEW MONITOR RETURN TO ^CHAPTER 5
FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RESTORING FILES TO THE DISK.
.ELS
.LM0;.RM70;.F;.J
.HL 1 ^&WHY RELOAD QUESTION\\\&
\\^AS A PART OF THE LOADING PROCEDURE THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE ASKS
FOR THE REASON FOR THE RELOAD. ^THE QUESTION
.B;.C
^^WHY RELOAD:\\
.B
IS TYPED ON YOUR TERMINAL, JUST BEFORE THE QUESTIONS ASKING FOR THE
DATE AND TIME. ^YOU MUST SPECIFY YOUR REASON FOR RELOADING THE
MONITOR BY TYPING ONE OF THE ANSWERS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION,
OR AN ABBREVIATION THAT UNIQUELY DESCRIBES IT. ^IF MORE THAN ONE ANSWER APPLIES,
YOU TYPE THE ONE THAT APPEARS FIRST IN THE LIST. ^IF YOU WISH
TO INCLUDE INFORMATION RELATED TO YOUR ANSWER, E.G., CIRCUMSTANCES
SURROUNDING A SYSTEM CRASH, YOU MAY DO SO BY INCLUDING THE TEXT ON THE
SAME LINE AS THE ANSWER. ^THE ENTIRE STRING OF TEXT IS FIRST STORED IN
THE CRASH ^A^C AREA AND THEN COPIED TO THE LOG FILE BY ^^DAEMON\\.
.B
^THE POSSIBLE ANSWERS TO THE ^^WHY RELOAD:\\ QUESTION FALL INTO FOUR
CATEGORIES:
.B;.LM9;.NF;.NJ
^SYSTEM PROBLEM
^STAND-ALONE TIME
^NEW OR DIFFERENT MONITOR
^OTHER
.F;.J
.LS;.LE;^SYSTEM ^PROBLEM
.B
^IF YOU ARE RELOADING THE MONITOR AS A RESULT OF A SYSTEM PROBLEM OR CRASH,
YOU IDENTIFY THE CAUSE OF THE PROBLEM WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING ANSWERS.
.B;.LM30;.TS30;.I-15
^ANSWER ^MEANING
.I-15
------ -------
.B;.I-15
^^OPR\\ ^OPERATOR ERROR
.B;.I-15
^^PARITY\\ ^MEMORY PARITY STOP OR HALT
.B;.I-15
^^POWER\\ ^POWER FAILURE ON SOME DEVICE
.B;.I-15
^^STATIC\\ ^STATIC ELECTRICITY
.B;.I-15
^^HARDWARE\\ ^HARDWARE MALFUNCTION
.B;.I-15
^^NXM\\ ^NON-EXISTENT MEMORY STOP
.B;.I-15
^^HALT\\ ^^STOPCD\\ OR HALT
.B;.I-15
^^LOOP\\ ^MONITOR LOOP IN EXECUTIVE MODE
.B;.I-15
^^HUNG\\ ^NO RESPONSE
.LM9;.F;.J
.LE;^SYSTEM ^STAND-^ALONE
.B
^IF YOU ARE RELOADING THE MONITOR TO GET TIMESHARING
SERVICES BACK ON THE AIR, YOU TYPE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING ANSWERS.
.B;.LM30;.TS30;.I-15
^ANSWER ^MEANING
.I-15
------ -------
.B;.I-15
^P^M ^PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE. ^STAND-ALONE THAT WAS REQUIRED FOR REGULARLY
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
.B;.I-15
^C^M ^CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE. ^STAND-ALONE THAT WAS REQUIRED FOR UNSCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
.B;.I-15
^S^A ^OTHER STAND-ALONE PROJECTS, SUCH AS PROGRAMMER DEBUGGING
SESSION OR REFORMATTING OF DISK PACKS.
.LM9;.F;.J
.LE;^NEW OR ^DIFFERENT ^MONITOR
.B
^IF YOU ARE LOADING A NEW OR A DIFFERENT MONITOR, YOU CHOOSE ONE
OF THE FOLLOWING ANSWERS.
.B;.LM30;.TS30;.I-15
^ANSWER ^MEANING
.I-15
------ -------
.B.I-15
^^NEW\\ ^NEW MONITOR, E.G., MONITOR WITH AN ADDED FEATURE OR IMPROVEMENT
VIA A PATCH.
.B;.I-15
^^SCHED\\ ^A SCHEDULED CHANGE FROM ONE MONITOR TO ANOTHER, E.G.,
A CHANGE FROM A DUAL SYSTEM MONITOR TO A SINGLE SYSTEM MONITOR AND BACK.
.LM9
.LE;^OTHER
.B
^IF NONE OF THE ABOVE REASONS APPLIES, YOU TYPE ^^OTHER\\.
.ELS
.LM0;.RM70;.F;.J
.HL 1 ^&ERROR MESSAGES\\\&
\\^THE FOLLOWING ERROR MESSAGES MAY BE TYPED ON YOUR TERMINAL
DURING THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE.
.B;.LM10;.I-10
^^%ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST FULL\\
.B
^AN ATTEMPT WAS MADE TO SPECIFY MORE UNITS TO THE ACTIVE SWAPPING
LIST THAN THE MONITOR TABLES CAN HANDLE. ^THE CURRENT LIMIT IS 8. ^IF
YOU NEED MORE SWAPPING SPACE, YOU SHOULD INCREASE THE AMOUNTS
ON THE EIGHT UNITS ALREADY SPECIFIED.
.B3;.I-10
^^?CANNOT EXCEED _# BLOCKS IN FILE STRUCTURE\\ = N
.B
^THE NUMBER OF DISKS BLOCKS SPECIFIED FOR RESERVED QUOTAS OR THE
NUMBER OF DISK BLOCKS SPECIFIED FOR THE OVERDRAW AMOUNT WAS TOO LARGE.
^YOU SHOULD TYPE IN A NUMBER LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO N.
.B3;.I-10
^^?CANNOT EXCEED _# SAT BLOCKS ON UNIT\\ = N
.B
^THE NUMBER OF ^^SAT\\ BLOCKS IN MEMORY CANNOT EXCEED THE NUMBER OF ^^SAT\\
BLOCKS (N) ON THE UNIT. ^YOU SHOULD TYPE A NUMBER LESS THAN OR
EQUAL TO N.
.B;.I-10
^^%CONTROLLER DPA HAS WRITE HEADER LOCKOUT SWITCH OFF
.I-10
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE#1)#ON-LINE,#2)#OFF-LINE, OR
.I-7
#3)#DOWN? TYPE_#\\
.B3;.I-10
^^?CPU0 FAST AC'S ARE OFF (FM ENB)\\
.B
^IN A MULTIPROCESSING SYSTEM, THE MONITOR HALTS AFTER THIS MESSAGE
BECAUSE IT IS NOT POSSIBLE FOR A MULTIPROCESSING SYSTEM TO RUN WITHOUT THE
FAST ^^AC\\S (SPLIT MEMORY CYCLE IS ENABLED). ^YOU MUST ENABLE
THE FAST ^^AC\\S BY PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEPS:
.B;.LM14;.I-4
1.##^PUSH ^^STOP\\.
.B;.I-4
2.##^TURN ^^FM ENB\\ OFF.
.B;.I-4
3.##^SET ^^ADDRESS\\ SWITCHES TO 400.
.B;.I-4
4.##^PUSH ^^START\\.
.B;.LM10
^ON A SINGLE PROCESSOR SYSTEM, THE ABOVE IS AN ADVISORY MESSAGE. ^THE
SYSTEM RUNS CONSIDERABLY SLOWER WITHOUT THE FAST ^^AC\\S,
SO YOU SHOULD ENABLE THEM AS INDICATED IN STEPS 1-4 ABOVE.
.B3;.I-10
^^%DPA IS OFF-LINE
.I-10
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE#1)#ON-LINE OR#2)#DOWN? (TYPE_#)\\
.B
^CONTROLLER ^^DPA (RP10)\\ IS OFF LINE. ^YOU SHOULD CHECK THE
SETTINGS OF ALL SWITCHES IN ^^RP10\\ BAY. ^ALL SWITCHES SHOULD BE DOWN.
^AFTER CHANGING THE SWITCHES, YOU SHOULD TYPE 1. ^IF YOU DO
NOT WANT THE MONITOR TO USE THE CONTROLLER, YOU SHOULD TYPE 2. ^THIS ALSO
APPLIES TO ^^DPB\\.
.B3;.I-10
^^%DPA0 IS OFF-LINE
.I-10
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE#1)#ON-LINE,#2)#OFF-LINE, OR
.I-7
#3)#DOWN? (TYPE_#)\\
.B
^YOU SHOULD CHECK THE ^^START/STOP\\ ROCKER SWITCH AND THE
^^ENABLE/DISABLE\\ SWITCH ON THE INDIVIDUAL DISK PACK UNIT. ^THEY
SHOULD BE IN THE NORMAL POSITION WITH THE TOP OF THE SWITCH IN. ^AFTER
CHANGING SWITCHES, YOU SHOULD TYPE 1. ^IF YOU DO NOT WANT
THE MONITOR TO USE THE UNIT, YOU SHOULD TYPE 2. ^THIS MESSAGE ALSO
APPLIES WITH ^^DPA1,DPA2,...,DPA7,DPB0,DPB1,...,DPB7\\.
.B3;.I-10
^^%DPA0 IS WRITE PROTECTED. DO YOU WANT IT TO BE
.I-7
1) WRITE-ENABLED, OR 2)
WRITE-PROTECTED?\\
.B
^DISK PACK UNIT ^^DPA0\\ IS ON LINE, BUT IS WRITE PROTECTED. ^IF
YOU WISH IT TO REMAIN THIS WAY, YOU SHOULD TYPE 2. ^OTHERWISE, YOU SHOULD SET THE
^^READWRITE/READ ONLY\\ ROCKER SWITCH TO NORMAL (TOP
OF SWITCH IN) AND THEN TYPE 1. ^THIS MESSAGE ALSO APPLIES WITH
^^DPA1,...,DPA7,DPB0,DPB1,...,DPB7.\\
.B3;.I-10
^^?ERROR ON CPU1\\
.I-10
^^?CHANGE THE CPU1 MA TRP OFFSET SWITCH IN BAY1\\
.B
^IN A MULTIPROCESSING SYSTEM, THE MONITOR HALTS AFTER THIS MESSAGE
IS PRINTED AT ^^CTY\\ ^^(CPU0\\). ^AT THE ^^CPU1\\ CONSOLE,
BEHIND THE DOOR OF BAY 1, CHANGE THE SETTING OF THE ^^MA TRP OFFSET\\
SWITCH. ^THEN PUSH ^^CONT\\ ON ^^CPU1\\. (^^CPU0\\ IS NOT AFFECTED BY THIS
ERROR AND CONTINUES TIMESHARING.)
.B3;.I-10
^^?ERROR ON CPU1\\
.I-10
^^?FAST AC'S TURNED OFF - SET FM ENB\\
.B
^IN A MULTIPROCESSING SYSTEM, ^^CPU1\\ HALTS AFTER THIS MESSAGE IS
TYPED AT ^^CTY\\ ^^(CPU0\\). ^AT ^^CPU1\\ CONSOLE SET ^^FM ENB\\ BY
ROCKING THE ^^FM ENB\\ SWITCH (ON THE MAINTENANCE PANEL BEHIND THE DOOR).
^THEN PUSH ^^CONT\\ AT ^^CPU1\\. (^^CPU0\\ IS NOT AFFECTED BY THIS ERROR AND
CONTINUES TIMESHARING.)
.B3;.I-10
^^%FHA IS OFF-LINE
.I-10
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1) ON-LINE OR 2) DOWN? (TYPE _#)\\
.B
^CONTROLLER ^^FHA (RC-10)\\ IS OFF LINE. ^YOU SHOULD CHECK
SETTINGS OF ALL SWITCHES IN ^^RC-10\\ BAY. ^ALL SWITCHES SHOULD BE
DOWN. ^AFTER CHANGING SWITCHES, YOU SHOULD TYPE 1. ^IF YOU
DO NOT WANT THE MONITOR TO USE THE CONTROLLER, YOU SHOULD TYPE 2.
^ALSO APPLIES TO ^^FHB\\.
.B3;.I-10
^^%FHA0 IS OFF-LINE
.I-10
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1) ON-LINE, 2) OFF-LINE, OR
.I-7
3) DOWN? (TYPE _#)\\
.B
^YOU SHOULD CHECK THE UNIT DIAL SELECTORS. ^ONE OF THEM
(^^DISK A, DISK B, DISK C, \\OR ^^DISK D\\) SHOULD BE SET TO 0.
^YOU SHOULD SET THE SWITCHES FOR ALL THE UNITS YOU HAVE TO 0, 1, 2, OR 3.
^THE OTHER UNITS SHOULD BE ^^OFF\\. ^YOU SHOULD NOT TOUCH ANY
DIALS THAT ARE DIALED TO NUMBERS NUMERICALLY LESS THAN THE ONE JUST
TYPED OUT, BECAUSE THE MONITOR HAS ALREADY READ THESE UNITS. ^AFTER CHANGING
THE SWITCHES AND DIALS, YOU SHOULD TYPE 1. ^IF THE UNIT IS
TEMPORARILY DOWN AND WILL BE FIXED WHILE THE SYSTEM RUNS, YOU SHOULD
TYPE 2. ^IN ALL OTHER CASES, YOU SHOULD TYPE 3. ^THIS COULD APPLY TO
^^FHA1,...,FHA3,FHB0,...,FHB3\\.
.B3;.I-10
^^FIRST BAT BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERROR\\
.B
^THE ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY DIALOGUE HAS DISCOVERED THAT THE FIRST OF TWO
REDUNDANT ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS DOES NOT CONTAIN SOME OF THE DATA NORMALLY
EXPECTED IN A ^^BAT\\ BLOCK. ^THIS IS NOT A FATAL ERROR BECAUSE THE OTHER
^^BAT\\ BLOCK IS PROBABLY ALL RIGHT. ^IF BOTH ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS HAVE THIS ERROR,
YOU SHOULD INITIALIZE THE ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS. ^THIS ERROR MAY OCCUR
IF SOME OF THE DIAGNOSTICS ARE RUN.
.B3;.I-10
^^FIRST BAT BLOCK HARDWARE ERROR\\
.B
^THE ^^ONCE\\-^ONLY DIALOGUE HAS HAD A HARDWARE ERROR WHILE READING THE FIRST
OF TWO REDUNDANT ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS. ^BECAUSE THERE IS ANOTHER ^^BAT\\ BLOCK, THIS
ERROR IS USUALLY NOT FATAL. ^THE CONTROLLER STATUS IS PUT IN THE
CONSOLE LIGHTS.
.B3;.I-10
^^FIRST HOM BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERROR\\
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE HAS DISCOVERED THAT THE FIRST OF TWO
REDUNDANT ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS DOES NOT CONTAIN SOME OF THE DATA NORMALLY
EXPECTED IN A ^^HOME\\ BLOCK. ^THEREFORE, NONE OF THE DATA SHOULD BE
CONSIDERED VALID. ^THIS IS NOT A SERIOUS ERROR SINCE THE OTHER ^^HOME\\
BLOCK IS USUALLY ALL RIGHT. ^IF BOTH ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS HAVE CONSISTENCY ERRORS,
YOU HAVE TO DISSOLVE THE FILE STRUCTURE, REDEFINE IT, AND REFRESH IT.
.B3;.I-10
^^FIRST HOM BLOCK HARDWARE ERROR\\
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE HAS HAD A HARDWARE ERROR WHILE READING OR
WRITING THE FIRST OF TWO REDUNDANT ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS. ^THIS IS NOT FATAL BECAUSE
THERE IS ANOTHER ^^HOME\\ BLOCK. ^THE CONTROLLER STATUS IS PUT IN THE
CONSOLE LIGHTS, AND THE CONTROLLER IS LEFT IN ITS ERROR CONDITION.
.B3;.I-10
^^?LAST UNIT WASNT FOUND IN STR DSK\\N
.B
^THE LAST UNIT IN FILE STRUCTURE IS MISSING. ^YOU SHOULD
CHECK TO SEE THAT ALL THE PROPER PACKS ARE MOUNTED AND ON-LINE. ^IF NOT,
YOU SHOULD REMOUNT THEM AND RESTART THE MONITOR AT 140. ^OTHERWISE,
YOU HAVE TO DISSOLVE THE FILE STRUCTURE, REDEFINE
IT, AND THEN REFRESH IT, THEREBY DESTROYING ANY DATA ALREADY ON THE UNIT.
.B3;.I-10
^^%LOGICAL STR _# \\N ^^MISSING FROM THE "SYS" SEARCH LIST\\
.B
^A FILE STRUCTURE IS MISSING FROM THE ^^SYS\\ SEARCH LIST. ^THIS CONDITION
NEED NOT BE CORRECTED, BECAUSE THE MONITOR WILL SKIP THE MISSING FILE STRUCTURE.
^TO AVOID THE MESSAGE IN THE FUTURE, YOU SHOULD CHANGE THE SYSTEM
SEARCH LIST WHEN ASKED.
.B3;.I-10
^^%LOGICAL UNIT\\ N ^^MISSING FROM ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST\\
.B
^A UNIT IS MISSING FROM THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST. ^THIS CAN HAPPEN
IF A UNIT IS OFF LINE OR DOWN. ^THIS ERROR NEED NOT BE CORRECTED SINCE
THE MONITOR WILL ORDER THE SWAPPING LIST ACCORDINGLY.
.B3;.I-10
^^?LOGICAL UNIT \N MISSING FROM STR DSK\\N
.B
^A UNIT IS MISSING FROM A FILE STRUCTURE AND MUST BE REMEDIED. ^YOU
SHOULD CHECK THAT ALL PROPER PACKS ARE MOUNTED AND ON LINE. ^IF THIS IS
NOT SO, YOU SHOULD ADD THE PROPER PACKS AND RESTART THE
MONITOR AT 140. ^OTHERWISE, YOU HAVE TO DISSOLVE THE FILE STRUCTURE, REDEFINE
IT, AND REFRESH IT, THEREBY DESTROYING ANY DATA ALREADY ON THE UNIT.
.B3;.I-10
^^%MEMORY FROM\\ XXXXX ^^TO\\ YYYYY ^^IS OFFLINE
.I-10
DO YOU WANT IT TO BE 1) ONLINE OR 2) DOWN? (TYPE _#)\\
.B
^IF THE SPECIFIED MEMORY IS SUPPOSED TO BE OFF LINE, TYPE 2. ^OTHERWISE,
PUSH THE RESET BUTTON AT THE REAR OF THE MEMORIES. ^CHECK TO SEE THAT THE
MEMORY IS SELECTED AND ALL REQUIRED PORTS ARE ^^ON\\. ^AFTER ALL SWITCHES
ARE IN ORDER, RETURN TO THE ^^CTY\\ AND TYPE 1. ^IF THE ERROR MESSAGE
IS REPEATED, ATTEMPT TO SWITCH THIS MEMORY OUT OF THE SYSTEM AND
SWITCH THE TOP MEMORY INTO ITS PLACE.
.B3;.I-10
^^?MORE THAN ONE LAST UNIT IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST\\
.B
^THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST SPECIFIED IN THE DISK UNIT ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS
HAS MORE THAN ONE UNIT AS THE LAST ONE. ^YOU
SHOULD REDEFINE THE UNITS IN THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST TO CORRECT
THIS SITUATION.
.B3;.I-10
^^?MORE THAN ONE LAST UNIT IN STR DSK\\N
.B
^THE FILE STRUCTURE HAS MORE THAN ONE UNIT SPECIFIED AS THE LAST UNIT AS
RECORDED IN THE DISK ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS. ^YOU SHOULD DISSOLVE THE FILE
STRUCTURE AND REDEFINE IT.
.B3;.I-10
^^?NO UNITS IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST\\
.B
^NONE OF THE ON-LINE UNITS IS IN THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST. ^BECAUSE THERE
MUST BE SWAPPING SPACE, YOU MUST CHANGE THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST
TO INCLUDE A UNIT THAT HAS SOME SWAPPING SPACE. ^IF THERE ARE NO UNITS
WITH SWAPPING SPACE, YOU MUST DEFINE SWAPPING SPACE ON A UNIT
NOT IN A FILE STRUCTURE. ^IF ALL UNITS ARE IN FILE STRUCTURES, YOU
MUST REFRESH A FILE STRUCTURE, DEFINE THE NECESSARY SWAPPING
SPACE, AND REDEFINE THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST.
.B3;.I-10
^^NOT NORMALLY DONE, ARE YOU SURE?\\
.B
^THIS WARNING MESSAGE IS PRINTED WHEN YOU RESPOND TO CERTAIN
IMPORTANT QUESTIONS IN AN UNEXPECTED OR NON-STANDARD MANNER. ^IT ALLOWS
YOU TO VERIFY YOUR CHOICE OF ANSWER OR RECOVER FROM A
TYPOGRAPHICAL ERROR BEFORE SERIOUS DAMAGE IS DONE.
.B3;.I-10
^^%PROBLEM ON CPU1\\
.B
^^CPU1\\ HAS HALTED. ^RESTART IT BY SETTING DATA SWITCHES TO 400 AND
PUSHING ^^STOP, RESET, START\\. ^NOTE THAT THE ABOVE MESSAGE IS PRINTED
ONCE A MINUTE UNTIL ^^CPU1\\ IS STARTED. ^YOU CAN USE THE
^^OPSER\\ COMMAND ^^:SET#CPU\\ TO STOP SCHEDULING ^^CPU1\\ AND,
CONSEQUENTLY, STOP THE MESSAGE.
.B3;.I-10
^^SAT BLOCK HARDWARE ERROR\\
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE HAS HAD A HARDWARE ERROR WHILE READING ONE
OF THE ^^SAT\\ BLOCKS.
.B3;.I-10
^^SECOND BAT BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERROR\\
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE HAS DISCOVERED THAT THE SECOND OF TWO REDUNDANT
^^BAT\\ BLOCKS DOES NOT CONTAIN SOME OF THE DATA NORMALLY EXPECTED IN
A ^^BAT\\ BLOCK.
^THIS IS NOT A FATAL ERROR BECAUSE THE OTHER ^^BAT\\ BLOCK
IS PROBABLY ALL RIGHT. ^IF BOTH ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS HAVE THIS ERROR,
YOU SHOULD INITIALIZE THE ^^BAT\\ BLOCKS. ^THIS ERROR MAY OCCUR IF SOME
OF THE DIAGNOSTICS ARE RUN.
.B3;.I-10
^^SECOND HOM BLOCK CONSISTENCY ERROR\\
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE HAS DISCOVERED THAT THE SECOND OF TWO REDUNDANT
^^HOME\\ BLOCKS DOES NOT CONTAIN SOME OF THE DATA NORMALLY EXPECTED IN A
^^HOME\\ BLOCK. ^THEREFORE, NONE OF THE DATA SHOULD BE CONSIDERED VALID.
^THIS IS NOT A SERIOUS ERROR SINCE THE OTHER ^^HOME\\ BLOCK IS USUALLY
ALL RIGHT. ^IF BOTH ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS HAVE CONSISTENCY ERRORS, YOU HAVE
TO DISSOLVE THE FILE STRUCTURES, REDEFINE AND REFRESH.
.B;.I-10
^^SECOND HOM BLOCK HARDWARE ERROR\\
.B
^THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE HAS HAD A HARDWARE ERROR WHILE READING OR
WRITING THE SECOND OF TWO REDUNDANT ^^HOME\\ BLOCKS. ^THIS IS NOT FATAL
SINCE THERE IS ANOTHER ^^HOME\\ BLOCK. ^THE CONTROLLER STATUS IS PUT IN
THE CONSOLE LIGHTS, AND THE CONTROLLER IS LEFT IN ITS ERROR CONDITION.
.B3;.I-10
^^?THIS MONITOR WAS BUILT FOR A\\ XXXXX ^^AND
.I-10
WILL NOT RUN PROPERLY ON A\\ YYYYY.
.B
XXXXX AND YYYYY CAN BE ^^PDP-6, KA10\\, ^^KI10\\, OR ^^KL10\\. ^YOU HAVE
LOADED THE WRONG MONITOR. ^YOU MUST TRY ANOTHER. ^IF, AFTER SEVERAL
TRIES, THE MONITOR APPEARS TO BE THE CORRECT ONE, THEN YOU MUST RERUN
^^MONGEN\\ AND CHANGE THE ANSWER TO THE QUESTION ASKING FOR THE TYPE OF
PROCESSOR. ^REFER TO ^CHAPTER 9, QUESTION 3 IN ^SECTION 9.4.
.B3;.I-10
^^?TOO SMALL#-#MIN. _#=X\\
.B
^AN ANSWER TO THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE OR A DEFAULT VALUE IS TOO SMALL.
^TYPE IN AN ANSWER GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO ^X.
.B3;.I-10
^^?TWO LOGICAL UNIT\\ N'S ^^FOUND IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST\\
.B
^THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST HAS MORE THAN ONE UNIT IN THE SAME POSITION.
^YOU MUST REDEFINE THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST.
.B;.I-10
^^?TWO LOGICAL UNIT\\ N'S ^^FOUND IN STR DSK\\N
.B
^TWO UNITS ARE MARKED TO BE IN THE SAME LOGICAL POSITION IN THE FILE STRUCTURE.
^THIS HAPPENS ONLY IF TWO DIFFERENT FILE STRUCTURES HAVE BEEN GIVEN THE
SAME NAME. ^YOU SHOULD TRY TO REMOVE THE PACK THAT DOES NOT BELONG IN THE FILE STRUCTURE
AND THEN RESTART THE MONITOR AT 140. ^OTHERWISE, YOU HAVE TO DISSOLVE
^^DSK\\N, REDEFINE IT AND REFRESH IT.
.B3;.I-10
^^?TWO LOGICAL STR\\ N'S ^^FOUND IN "SYS" SEARCH LIST\\
.B
^TWO FILE STRUCTURES ARE MARKED TO BE IN THE SAME POSITION IN THE ^^SYS\\
SEARCH LIST. ^YOU SHOULD CHANGE THE ^^SYS\\ SEARCH LIST WHEN ASKED.
^REFRESHING IS NOT REQUIRED.
.B3;.I-10
UNIT
.I-10
_# ^^BAD REGIONS=\\N
.I-10
_# ^^BAD BLOCKS=\\N
.I-10
^^DO YOU WANT TO INITIALIZE THE BAD BLOCKS ON THIS UNIT?\\
.B
^YOU SHOULD ANSWER WITH ^N OR A CARRIAGE RETURN TO LEAVE THE
^^BAT\\ BLOCKS ALONE ON THIS UNIT. ^THE ONLY TIME YOU SHOULD
INITIALIZE IS THE FIRST TIME THE DISK IS WRITTEN, SINCE THE BLOCKS
CONTAIN THE ACCUMULATED INFORMATION ABOUT BAD SECTORS. ^IF YOU
ANSWER ^Y, THE ^^ONCE-O\\NLY DIALOGUE RESPONDS
WITH ^^NOT NORMALLY DONE, ARE YOU SURE\\?. ^ANSWER ^Y ONLY IF THIS
IMPORTANT DATA IS TO BE ERASED.
.B3;.I-10
^^?UNIT ALREADY IN ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST\\
.B
^AN ATTEMPT WAS MADE TO SPECIFY A UNIT TO BE IN THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST
MORE THAN ONCE. ^YOU SHOULD TYPE A DIFFERENT UNIT NAME TO BE IN
THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST. ^IF YOU HAVE INCLUDED THE UNIT NAME EARLIER
BY MISTAKE, YOU WILL HAVE ANOTHER CHANCE TO CHANGE THE ACTIVE
SWAPPING LIST.
.B3;.I-10
^^?UNIT ALREADY IN FILE STRUCTURE\\
.B
^AN ATTEMPT WAS MADE TO SPECIFY A UNIT TO BE IN MORE THAN ONE FILE
STRUCTURE. ^YOU SHOULD TYPE A DIFFERENT UNIT NAME TO BE IN THIS FILE
STRUCTURE. ^IF YOU HAVE INCLUDED THE UNIT IN AN EARLIER FILE
STRUCTURE BY MISTAKE, YOU WILL HAVE TO DISSOLVE IT.
.B3;.I-10
^^?UNIT HAS NO SPACE ALLOCATED FOR SWAPPING\\
.B
^AN ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO SPECIFY A UNIT THAT HAS NO SWAPPING SPACE
ALLOCATED TO BE PART OF THE ACTIVE SWAPPING LIST. ^THE UNIT IS NOT ADDED
TO THE LIST. ^YOU SHOULD DO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
.B;.LM14;.I-4
1.##^SPECIFY ANOTHER UNIT.
.B;.I-4
2.##^TYPE AN EXTRA CARRIAGE RETURN SIGNIFYING COMPLETION.
.B;.I-4
3.##^DEFINE SWAPPING SPACE FOR A UNIT NOT IN A FILE STRUCTURE.
.B;.I-4
4.##^CHANGE THE SWAPPING SPACE FOR A UNIT IN A FILE STRUCTURE AND REFRESH
IT.
.LM0;.F;.J
.PS67,70;.SP1;.LM0;.RM70;.F;.J
.NUMBER CHAPTER 17
.CHAPTER ^&BACKUP\&
.SP1
.HL1 ^&INTRODUCTION\&
\\^^BACKUP\\ IS A SYSTEM PROGRAM THAT IS USED TO SAVE DISK FILES
ON MAGNETIC TAPE, AND LATER TO RESTORE ANY OR ALL OF THESE FILES TO
DISK. ^MAGNETIC TAPE IS THE MEDIUM USED FOR BACKUP STORAGE
OF DISK FILES AND FOR TRANSPORTING FILES BETWEEN SITES. ^THIS CHAPTER
OUTLINES SOME OF THE FEATURES THAT ^^BACKUP\\ PROVIDES FOR ACCOMPLISHING
THESE TWO TASKS.
.HL1 ^&FEATURES\&
\\^^BACKUP\\ ALLOWS YOU FLEXIBILITY IN CHOOSING THE FILES TO BE TRANSFERRED
BETWEEN DISK AND TAPE. ^YOU SPECIFY FILES BY THE STANDARD FILE
SPECIFICATION FORMAT OF DEV:FILENAME.EXT[PROJECT,PROGRAMMMER].
^WILDCARDS AND SUB-FILE DIRECTORIES ARE FULLY SUPPORTED. ^YOU MAY
ALSO SELECT FILES BASED ON ANY OF THE DATES/TIMES ASSOCIATED WITH DISK
FILES.
.B
^^BACKUP\\ CAN HANDLE FILES THAT ARE LONGER THAN ONE REEL OF MAGTAPE.
^SWITCHES ARE PROVIDED FOR CHECKPOINTING FILES WHILE THE FILES ARE
BEING HANDLED.
.B
^IF YOU ARE BACKING UP THE DISK FILE STRUCTURE,
YOU CAN RECOVER FROM A SYSTEM CRASH WITHOUT
STARTING COMPLETELY OVER. ^YOU CAN PRODUCE A DIRECTORY LISTING OF THE TAPE
AT THE SAME TIME YOU PERFORM A SAVE. ^ANOTHER OPERATOR FEATURE IS A SET
OF RUN-TIME COMMANDS COMPATIBLE WITH THE SPOOLERS.
.B
^TO FACILITATE TRANSPORTING FILES BETWEEN SITES, ^^BACKUP\\ PROVIDES
AN "INTERCHANGE" MODE OF OPERATION THAT PREVENTS THE WRITING OF
SYSTEM SPECIFIC OVERHEAD INFORMATION ON THE TAPE. ^SOFTWARE DISTRIBUTION
TAPES FOR THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ARE PRODUCED VIA ^^BACKUP\\ IN
INTERCHANGE MODE.
.B
^TO INCREASE RELIABILITY, ^^BACKUP\\ RESPONDS TO HARDWARE REPORTED
TAPE WRITE ERRORS BY REWRITING THE DATA IN A REPEATER RECORD. ^WHEN
THE TAPE IS READ LATER, THESE REPEATER RECORDS ARE USED INSTEAD OF THE
ORIGINALS.
.B
^THESE AND OTHER FEATURES ARE DESCRIBED MORE FULLY IN ^SECTIONS
17.3 AND 17.4.
.HL1 ^&OVERVIEW OF COMMAND FUNCTIONS\&
\\^^BACKUP\\ COMMANDS ARE IN THE FORM OF VERBS. ^^BACKUP\\ PROMPTS WITH A
SLASH (/) AND HAS THREE KINDS OF VERBS:
.LS;.LE;^ACTION
.LE;^STATUS SETTING
.LE;^TAPE POSITIONING.
.ELS
^TABLES 17-1, 17-2 AND 17-3 PRESENT ^^BACKUP\\'S GENERAL FUNCTIONS AND THE
COMMAND VERBS THAT PERFORM THEM. ^VERBS ARE GROUPED INTO THE
THREE CATEGORIES NAMED ABOVE. ^TABLE 17-4 CONTAINS RUN-TIME COMMANDS,
WHICH MAY BE GIVEN DURING EXECUTION OF THE ACTION VERBS.
.B2;.LM2;.RM68;.TS48;.NF;.NJ;.C
^TABLE 17-1
.C
^ACTION ^VERBS
.B2
^FUNCTIONS ^VERBS
.B2
^PRINTING DIRECTORY OF A TAPE ^^PRINT\\
.B
^SAVING OR RESTORING DISK FILES ^^SAVE, RESTORE\\
.B
^VERIFYING AGREEMENT OF TAPE AND DISK FILES ^^CHECK\\
.B2;.C
^TABLE 17-2
.C
^STATUS ^SETTING ^VERBS
.B2
^FUNCTIONS ^VERBS
.B2
^^BACKUP\\:NAME OPTION (USE FROM ^^SWITCH.INI\\) ^^OPTION\\
.B
[DO NOT] USE ^CHECKPOINTS ^^[NO] CPOINT\\
.B
^DENSITY SETTING (OF TAPE) ^^DENSITY\\
.B
[DO NOT] ^ENCRYPT THE MAGTAPE [^^NO] ENCRYPT\\
.B
^INCLUDE FILES ACCORDING TO:
#####DATE-TIME CREATED OR MODIFIED ^^BEFORE, SINCE\\
###############MOVED OR MODIFIED ^^MBEFORE, MSINCE\\
#####DATE######ACCESSED ^^ABEFORE, ASINCE\\
.B
#####LENGTH ^^LENGTH\\
.B
^^PPN\\ EXEMPTIONS FROM ABOVE RESTRICTIONS ^^[NO] EXEMPT\\
.B
[DO NOT] RUN IN ^INTERCHANGE ^MODE [^^NO] INTERCHANGE\\
.B
[DO NOT] MAKE A ^LISTING FILE WHILE RUNNING [^^N] LIST\\
.B
^PARITY SETTING ^^PARITY\\
.B
^PROTECT DIRECTORIES ^^UPROTECTION\\
.B
^RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE ^^SUPERSEDE\\
.B
^RESUME AT A SPECIFIED BLOCK OF INITIAL FILE ^^RESUME N\\
.B
^SAVE SET NAME (SPECIFY) ^^SSNAME\\
.B
^SORT FILES OR DIRECTORIES ALPHABETICALLY,
BY LOCATION, OR BY DIRECTORY ^^SORT\\
.B
^START PROCESSING AT SPECIFIED FILE ^^INITIAL\\
.B
[DO NOT] ^SUPPRESS ERROR MESSAGE PREFIX ^^MESSAGE [NO] PREFIX\\
.B
[DO NOT] ^SUPPRESS FIRST LINE OF ERROR
MESSAGE ^^MESSAGE [NO] FIRST\\
.B
[DO NOT] ^SUPPRESS DISK WRITING DURING
A ^^RESTORE\\ [^^NO] WRITE\\
.B
^SUPPRESS FILENAMES AND DIRECTORIES ^^SILENCE\\
.B
[DO NOT] ^TYPE FILENAMES OR DIRECTORIES
WHILE RUNNING ^^[NO] FILES
[NO] DIRECTORIES\\
.B
^TAPE UNIT (USE ^^MTB0\\) ^^TAPE MTB0\\
.B
[DO NOT] RUN IN ^^USETI\\ MODE [^^NO] USETI\\
.B2;.C
^TABLE 17-3
.C
^TAPE ^POSITIONING ^VERBS
.B2
^FUNCTIONS ^VERBS
.B2
^BACK UP TO START OF SAVE SET ^^SKIP\\ 0 TAPE LIST
.B
^SKIP TO END-OF-TAPE MARK FOR EACH TAPE ^^EOT\\
#####N SAVE SETS FORWARD ^^SKIP\\ N TAPE LIST
#################BACKWARD ^^SKIP\\ -N TAPE LIST
.B
^REWIND TO START OF TAPE FOR EACH TAPE ^^REWIND\\
.B
^UNLOAD EACH TAPE ^^UNLOAD\\
.B2;.C
^TABLE 17-4
.C
^RUN-^TIME ^COMMANDS
.B2
^FUNCTIONS ^COMMANDS
.B2
^LIST AND EXPLAIN THESE COMMANDS ^^HELP\\
.B
^ABORT CURRENT ACTION VERB ^^KILL\\
.B
^CONTINUE AFTER A ^^STOP\\ ^^GO\\
.B
^DISPLAY CURRENT FILENAME AND STATUS ^^WHAT\\
.B
^EXIT FROM ^^BACKUP\\ WHEN DONE ^^EXIT\\
##^DO NOT EXIT FROM ^^BACKUP\\ WHEN DONE ^^PAUSE\\
.B
^RESET STATUS SETTINGS TO DEFAULTS WHEN DONE ^^RESET\\
.B
^STOP TEMPORARILY ^^STOP\\
.B
[DO NOT] ^TYPE ALL DIRECTORIES OF FILES ^^[NO] DIRECTORIES\\
PROCESSED ^^[NO] FILES\\
.B
^STOP TYPING ALL DIRECTORIES OR FILES ^^SILENCE\\
.LM0;.RM70;.PS67,70;.F;.J
.HL2 ^&ACTION VERBS\&
\\^THE ACTION VERBS PERFORM ^I/^O AND OPERATE ON THE TAPE SPECIFIED
BY THE LAST ^^TAPE\\ VERB (ONE OF THE STATUS SETTING VERBS).
^A TAPE MUST BE SPECIFIED BEFORE USING ANY OF THE ACTION COMMANDS,
OR AN ERROR WILL RESULT. ^IN THE FOLLOWING LISTS OF COMMANDS
AND SWITCHES
.B;.LM5;.TS20;.NF;.NJ
SPEC IS THE STANDARD FILE SPECIFICATION:
DEV:FILENAME.EXT[DIRECTORIES]
DATE IS IN THE FORM DD-MM-YY
TIME IS IN THE FORM HH:MM:SS
.B;.LM20;.TS20;.F;.J.I-20
^THE ACTION VERBS ARE:
.B;.I-20
#####^COMMAND ######################^ACTION
.B;.I-20
^^SAVE\\ SPEC-LIST ^SAVE THE SPECIFIED DISK FILES ON TAPE
.B;.I-20
^^RESTORE\\ SPEC-LIST ^RESTORE THE SPECIFIED TAPE FILES TO DISK
.B;.I-20
^^CHECK\\ SPEC-LIST ^VERIFY THAT THE TAPE AND DISK FILES AGREE
.B;.I-20
[^^N]PRINT\\ SPEC ^PRINT A DIRECTORY OF THE ENTIRE TAPE ON
SPEC. ^N IS AN OPTIONAL PREFIX MEANING NARROW. ^^PRINT\\ PRODUCES THE EFFECT
OF A ^^NODIRECTORIES\\ COMMAND; I.E., NO USER DIRECTORIES WILL BE TYPED.
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE ACTION COMMANDS TAKE AS AN OPTIONAL ARGUMENT A LIST OF FILE
SPECIFICATIONS IN A FORMAT SIMILAR TO THE MONITOR'S ^^COPY\\ COMMAND.
^THE FILE SPECIFICATIONS MAY CONTAIN WILDCARDS AND SUB-FILE DIRECTORIES.
.B
^FOR EACH ENTRY IN THE LIST, YOU MAY SPECIFY BOTH INPUT AND OUTPUT
FILE SPECIFICATIONS (OUTPUT=INPUT) OR JUST THE INPUT SPECIFICATION.
^THIS ALLOWS THE FILES TO BE RENAMED AS THEY ARE SAVED OR RESTORED.
^IF NO OUTPUT SPECIFICATION IS GIVEN, THEN THE SPECIFIED FILES ARE
TRANSFERRED WITHOUT BEING RENAMED. ^ENTRIES IN THE LIST ARE SEPARATED
BY COMMAS.
.B
^IF NO ARGUMENT IS SUPPLIED WITH AN ACTION COMMAND, ^^BACKUP\\ WILL DEFAULT
A FILE SPEC IN THE FOLLOWING WAY. ^THE DEFAULT FILE SPEC
FOR ALL ACTION VERBS IS ^^ALL:*.*[PPN,*,*,*,*,*\\]. ^THIS SPECIFIES
ALL FILES ON ALL ^^UFD\\S AND ALL ^^SFD\\S OF ALL FILE STRUCTURES WITH
NO RENAMING.
.B
^IF YOU ARE NOT LOGGED IN UNDER [1,2] THE DEFAULT FOR THE ^^SAVE\\
VERB IS ^^ALL:*.*[PPN,*,*,*,*,*]=DSK:*.*[PPN,*,*,*,*,*\\].
.B
^FOR THE ^^CHECK\\ AND ^^RESTORE\\ VERBS THE DEFAULT IS ^^DSK:*.*[PPN,*,*,*,*,*]=ALL:*.*[PPN,*,*,*,*,*]\\.
.B
^THE ARGUMENT FOR THE ^^PRINT\\ VERB IS A SINGLE FILE SPEC. ^ITS
DEFAULT IS ^^LPT:BACKUP.LOG\\.
.B
^NOTE THAT SPECIFYING ANY OF THE FILE SPEC PARAMETERS OVERLAYS
ONLY THAT PARAMETER AND LEAVES THE REST OF THE DEFAULTS STANDING.
^UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES DO THE FILE SPEC PARAMETERS BECOME "STICKY"
PARAMETERS; E.G., SPECIFYING THE ^^PPN\\ FOR ONE SPEC DOES
^^NOT\\ CARRY OVER TO THE NEXT SPEC IN THE LIST.
.HL2 ^&STATUS SETTING VERBS\&
\\^THE STATUS SETTING VERBS SET A PARAMETER THAT AFFECTS FUTURE
ACTION COMMANDS. ^ONCE A STATUS PARAMETER IS SET, IT REMAINS IN EFFECT
UNTIL YOU CHANGE IT AGAIN. ^THE FORMAT FOR DATE/TIME ARGUMENTS IS
DD-MM-YY:#HH:MM:SS; RELATIVE DATE/TIMES (PREFIXED BY + OR -) AND
SPECIAL MNEMONIC WORDS (^^YESTERDAY, TODAY, TOMORROW, LOGIN,
NOON, MIDNIGHT\\) MAY ALSO BE USED. ^^BACKUP\\ CONFORMS TO THE SPECIFICATION
IN THE ^OPERATING ^SYSTEM ^COMMANDS
MANUAL AND MORE DETAILS ON DATA FORMATS CAN BE FOUND THERE.
.B
^THE COMPLEMENTS, FORMED BY PRECEDING THE VERBS WITH ^^NO\\,
NEGATE THE COMMANDS AND SOMETIMES CAUSE ALTERNATE ACTIONS; THEIR
EFFECTS ARE EXPLAINED IN PARENTHESES.
.B;.LM35;.TS35;.I-35
^THE STATUS SETTING VERBS ARE:
.B;.I-35
###^VERB ##############^ACTION
.B;.I-35
^^ABEFORE\\ DATE ^INCLUDE ONLY FILES ACCESSED BEFORE THE
SPECIFIED DATE
.B;.I-35
^^[NO]APPEND\\ ^APPEND TO EXISTING LIST FILE (DEFAULT) (^COMPLEMENT:
DO NOT SUPERSEDE).
.B;.I-35
^^ASINCE\\ DATE ^INCLUDE ONLY FILES ACCESSED SINCE THE SPECIFIED DATE
.B;.I-35
^^BEFORE\\ DATE-TIME ^INCLUDE ONLY FILES CREATED AND LAST MODIFIED
BEFORE THE SPECIFIED DATE-TIME
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]CPOINT\\ ^USE CHECKPOINTS. (^COMPLEMENT: DO NOT USE CHECKPOINTS).
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]DATE75\\ ^ALWAYS ACCEPT FILES WITH POSSIBLE ^^DATE\\75 PROBLEMS (DEFAULT)
(^COMPLEMENT: DO NOT ACCEPT THESE FILES)
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]DELETE\\ ^DELETE DISK FILES AFTER SAVING THEM (^COMPLEMENT:
DO NOT DELETE)
.B;.I-35
^^DENSITY\\ ^SET TAPE DENSITY (DEFAULT IS SYSTEM
.I-35
(200, 556, 800, 1600, 6250) DEPENDENT)
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]DIRECTORIES\\ ^TYPE EACH USER'S DIRECTORY WHILE RUNNING (DEFAULT)
(^COMPLEMENT: DO NOT TYPE DIRECTORIES AT ALL)
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]ENCRYPT\\ ^ENCRYPT THE MAGTAPE (ASKS FOR KEY LATER) (A KEY IS
SIMILAR TO A PASSWORD AND IT CAN CONSIST OF UP TO 30 ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS)
(^COMPLEMENT: DO NOT ENCRYPT)
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]EXEMPT\\ ^EXEMPT ^^PPN\\'S OF THE FORM [^A,*] AND [10,^B],
WHERE ^A AND ^B < 7, FROM DATE/TIME AND LENGTH RESTRICTIONS (DEFAULT)
(^COMPLEMENT: DO NOT EXEMPT)
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]FILES\\ ^TYPE EACH FILENAME WHILE RUNNING (^COMPLEMENT:
DO NOT TYPE FILENAME AT ALL)
.B;.I-35
^^INITIAL\\ SPEC ^START PROCESSING AT SPEC
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]INTERCHANGE\\ ^RUN IN INTERCHANGE MODE (^IN INTERCHANGE
MODE, ONLY THE FILENAMES, EXTENSIONS, AND VERSIONS ARE WRITTEN.
^THERE IS NO INFORMATION ON WHAT ^^UFD\\ A FILE WAS
IN WHEN IT WAS SAVED.) (^COMPLEMENT: RUN IN NORMAL MODE,
IN WHICH ^^UFD\\S AND DEVICE NAMES ARE WRITTEN)
.B;.I-35
^^LENGTH\\ 1:H ^INCLUDE ONLY FILES WHOSE LENGTH IS BETWEEN LOW AND HIGH
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]LIST\\ SPEC ^WHILE RUNNING, MAKE A LISTING FILE ON SPEC
(DEFAULT SPEC IS ^^LPT\\: ^^BACKUP.LOG\\) (^COMPLEMENT:
DO NOT MAKE LISTING FILE) ^^LIST\\ PRODUCES THE EFFECT
OF A ^^NODIRECTORIES\\ COMMAND, I.E., NO USER DIRECTORIES WILL BE TYPED.
.B;.I-35
^^MBEFORE\\ DATE-TIME ^INCLUDE ONLY FILES WHICH HAVE BEEN
LAST MOVED OR MODIFIED BEFORE THE SPECIFIED TIME
.B;.I-35
^^MSINCE\\ DATE-TIME ^INCLUDE ONLY FILES WHICH HAVE BEEN MOVED
OR MODIFIED SINCE THE SPECIFIED TIME
.B;.I-35
^^MESSAGE [NO]PREFIX\\ ^SUPPRESS ERROR MESSAGE PREFIX
.B;.I-35
^^MESSAGE [NO]FIRST\\ ^SUPPRESS FIRST LINE OF ERROR MESSAGE
TEXT
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]MULTIREEL\\ ^ALLOW MULTIPLE REELS DURING A SAVE
(DEFAULT; MULTIPLE REELS ARE ALWAYS PERMITTED ON A RESTORE)
(^COMPLEMENT: DO NOT ALLOW MULTIPLE REELS DURING A
SAVE)
.B;.I-35
^^OPTION NAME\\ ^USE OPTION ^^BACKUP\\:NAME FROM ^^SWITCH.INI\\
.B;.I-35
^^PARITY (EVEN,ODD\\) ^SET TAPE PARITY
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]REPEAT\\ ^REPEAT A SPLIT FILE ON THE
CONTINUATION TAPE (^COMPLEMENT: DO NOT REPEAT)
.B;.I-35
^^RESUME\\ N ^RESUME AT BLOCK N OF INITIAL FILE
.B;.I-35
^^SILENCE\\ ^DO NOT TYPE FILENAMES OR DIRECTORIES WHILE RUNNING
.B;.I-35
^^SINCE\\ DATE-TIME ^INCLUDE ONLY FILES CREATED OR MODIFIED SINCE
THE SPECIFIED DATE-TIME
.B;.I-35
^^SORT DIRECTORIES\\ X ^SORT DIRECTORIES WITHIN EACH FILE STRUCTURE
IN ORDER X WHEN SAVING. X#=#^^ALPHABETICAL LOCATION\\ (BY COMPRESSED-FILE-POINTER,
WHICH IS RELATED TO A FILE'S PHYSICAL LOCATION ON DISK), OR ^^NONE\\
(BY ^MASTER ^FILE ^DIRECTORY)
.B;.I-35
^^SORT FILES\\ X ^SORT FILES WITHIN EACH DIRECTORY IN
ORDER X WHEN SAVING. X#=#^^ALPHABETICAL, LOCATION\\, OR
^^NONE\\ (BY DIRECTORY)
.B;.I-35
^^SSNAME\\ NAME ^SPECIFY THE SAVE SET NAME (UP TO 30 CHARACTERS;
^^ALL#=#\\ALL SAVE SETS ON TAPE)
.B;.I-35
^^SUPERSEDE ALWAYS\\ ^ALWAYS RESTORE FILE FROM TAPE
.B;.I-35
^^SUPERSEDE NEVER\\ ^RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE UNLESS ON DISK
.B;.I-35
^^SUPERSEDE OLDER\\ ^RESTORE ONLY THE NEW FILES FROM TAPE (DEFAULT)
.B;.I-35
^^TAPE MTB\\0 ^USE TAPE UNIT ^^MTB\\0. ^IF A MAGTAPE DRIVE HAS THE
LOGICAL NAME ^^BACKUP\\, THEN THE ^^TAPE\\ VERB NEED NOT BE SPECIFIED
.B;.I-35
^^UPROTECTION NNN\\ ^SET THE PROTECTION FOR CREATED DIRECTORIES
.B;.I-35
^^[NO]USETI\\ ^RUN IN ^^USETI\\ MODE (SPEEDS UP ^^SAVES\\
WITH /^^SINCE\\, ETC.) (^COMPLEMENT: DO NOT RUN IN ^^USETI\\)
.B;.I-35
[^^NO]WRITE\\ ^SUPPRESS DISK WRITING DURING A ^^RESTORE\\.
(^COMPLEMENT: ALLOW DISK WRITING DURING A ^^RESTORE\\)
.LM0
.HL2 ^&TAPE POSITIONING VERBS\&
\\^^BACKUP\\'S TAPE POSITIONING VERBS TAKE IMMEDIATE EFFECT. ^THEY TAKE,
AS AN ARGUMENT, A LIST OF TAPES. ^IF NO TAPE IS SPECIFIED FOR A GIVEN
COMMAND, THE LAST TAPE DECLARED BY A ^^TAPE\\ VERB IS POSITIONED.
^THE TAPE POSITIONING COMMANDS ARE:
.B;.LM35;.TS35;.I-30
###^COMMAND ##############^ACTION
.B;.I-30
^^EOT\\ TAPE LIST ^SKIP TO THE END-OF-TAPE MARK FOR EACH TAPE IN THE LIST
.B;.I-30
^^REWIND\\ TAPE LIST ^REWIND TO THE BEGINNING OF THE TAPE FOR EACH
TAPE IN THE LIST
.B;.I-30
^^SKIP\\ N TAPE LIST ^SKIP N SAVE SETS FORWARD FOR EACH TAPE IN THE LIST
.B;.I-30
^^SKIP\\ 0 TAPE LIST ^BACK UP TO THE START OF THE CURRENT SAVE
SET FOR EACH TAPE IN THE LIST
.B;.I-30
^^SKIP\\ -N TAPE LIST ^SKIP N SAVE SETS BACKWARD FOR EACH TAPE IN THE LIST
.B;.I-30
^^UNLOAD\\ TAPE LIST ^UNLOAD EACH TAPE FROM ITS DRIVE FOR
EACH TAPE IN THE LIST.
.B;.LM0
^THE FOLLOWING SWITCHES MAY BE INCLUDED WITHIN THE FILE SPECIFICATION
LIST FOR THE ACTION VERBS. ^THESE SWITCHES CAN BE EITHER TEMPORARY
OR PERMANENT. ^A TEMPORARY SWITCH IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWS THE FILE TO
WHICH IT APPLIES. ^A PERMANENT SWITCH PRECEDES THE LIST OF FILES
TO WHICH IT APPLIES, OR MAY BE TYPED ON A SEPARATE LINE LIKE A STATUS
SETTING VERB.
.B;.LM35;.TS35;.I-30
###^SWITCH ##############^ACTION
.B;.I-30
^^ABEFORE\\ DATE (^ON INPUT FILE) INCLUDE ONLY IF ACCESSED BEFORE DATE
.B;.I-30
^^ASINCE\\ DATE (^ON INPUT FILE) INCLUDE ONLY IF ACCESSED SINCE DATE
.B;.I-30
^^BEFORE\\ DATE-TIME (^ON INPUT FILE) INCLUDE ONLY IF CREATED
BEFORE DATE-TIME
.B;.I-30
^^ERNONE\\ (^ON INPUT FILE) GIVE ERROR IF NO FILES MATCH
.B;.I-30
^^ERPROTECTION\\ (^ON INPUT FILE) GIVE ERROR IF THERE IS A
PROTECTION FAILURE
.B;.I-30
^^ERSUPERSEDE\\ (^ON OUTPUT FILE) DO NOT RESTORE FROM TAPE IF ON DISK
.B;.I-30
^^ESTIMATE\\ N (^ON OUTPUT FILE) ESTIMATE OUTPUT SIZE
.B;.I-30
^^LENGTH L:H\\ (^ON INPUT FILE) INCLUDE ONLY IF THE FILE LENGTH
IS BETWEEN ^L:^H
.B;.I-30
^^MBEFORE\\ DATE-TIME (^ON INPUT FILE) INCLUDE
ONLY IF MODIFIED BEFORE DATE-TIME
.B;.I-30
^^MSINCE\\ DATE-TIME (^ON INPUT FILE) INCLUDE ONLY IF
MODIFIED SINCE DATE-TIME
.B;.I-30
^^OKNONE\\ (^ON INPUT FILE) DO NOT GIVE AN ERROR IF NO FILES MATCH
.B;.I-30
^^OKPROTECTION\\ (^ON INPUT FILE) DO NOT GIVE AN ERROR IF THERE IS
A PROTECTION FAILURE
.B;.I-30
^^OKSUPERSEDE\\ (^ON OUTPUT FILE) ALWAYS RESTORE EVEN IF ON DISK
.B;.I-30
^^[NO]PHYSICAL\\ (^INPUT OR OUTPUT) IGNORE LOGICAL NAMES
(^COMPLEMENT: ACCEPT LOGICAL NAMES)
.B;.I-30
^^PROTECTION\\ NNN (^ON OUTPUT FILE) SET THE PROTECTION CODE
.B;.I-30
^^SINCE\\ DATE-TIME (^ON INPUT FILE) INCLUDE ONLY IF CREATED SINCE
THE SPECIFIED DATE-TIME
.B;.I-30
^^VERSION\\ V (^ON OUTPUT FILE) SET OUTPUT FILE VERSION NUMBER
.LM0
.HL2 ^&RUN-^TIME COMMANDS\&
\\^THE FOLLOWING RUN-TIME COMMANDS MAY BE GIVEN DURING THE EXECUTION OF
THE ACTION VERBS. ^^BACKUP\\ PROMPTS WITH AN EXCLAMATION POINT
(!) WHEN READY TO ACCEPT A RUN-TIME COMMAND. (^^EXIT, HELP\\ AND ^^RESET\\
WILL ALSO WORK WITH A SLASH (/) AS A PROMPTING CHARACTER.)
.B
^THE COMPLEMENTS, FORMED BY PRECEDING THE COMMANDS WITH ^^NO\\, NEGATE
THE COMMANDS AND SOMETIMES CAUSE ALTERNATE ACTIONS; THEIR EFFECTS ARE
EXPLAINED IN PARENTHESES.
.B
^THE RUN-TIME COMMANDS ARE:
.B;.LM35;.TS35;.I-30
###^COMMANDS ##############^ACTION
.B;.I-30
[^^NO]DIRECTORIES\\ ^START TYPING EVERY DIRECTORY PROCESSED (^COMPLEMENT:
DO NOT TYPE THESE DIRECTORIES)
.B;.I-30
^^EXIT\\ ^EXIT FROM ^^BACKUP\\ WHEN DONE
.B;.I-30
[^^NO]FILES\\ ^START TYPING EVERY FILE AND DIRECTORY PROCESSED (^COMPLEMENT:
DO NOT TYPE THESE FILES)
.B;.I-30
^^GO\\ ^CONTINUE AFTER A ^^STOP\\
.B;.I-30
^^HELP\\ ^LIST THESE COMMANDS AND EXPLANATIONS
.B;.I-30
^^KILL\\ ^ABORT EXECUTION OF THE CURRENT ACTION VERB
.B;.I-30
^^PAUSE\\ ^DO NOT EXIT FROM ^^BACKUP\\ WHEN DONE
.B;.I-30
^^RESET\\ ^RESET ALL STATUS SETTINGS TO THEIR ORIGINAL
DEFAULTS WHEN DONE
.B;.I-30
^^SILENCE\\ ^STOP TYPING EVERY DIRECTORY OR FILE
.B;.I-30
^^STOP\\ ^STOP TEMPORARILY: CAN BE CONTINUED BY ^^GO\\.
.B;.I-30
^^WHAT\\ ^DISPLAY CURRENT FILENAME AND STATUS
.B;.LM0
^^BACKUP\\ ALSO SUPPORTS "/@ FILE" CONSTRUCTION, ALLOWING THE
USE OF INDIRECT COMMAND FILES, LIKE THE ^^COMPIL\\-CLASS COMMANDS.
^ALL OF ^^BACKUP\\'S VERBS AND SWITCHES, EXCEPT FOR THE RUN-TIME COMMANDS,
MAY BE USED IN AN INDIRECT FILE. (^NOTE THAT "/VERB @ FILE" IS ^^NOT\\
A VALID ALTERNATE FORMAT.)
.HL1 ^&EXAMPLES\&
\\^THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLES DEMONSTRATE THE APPLICATION OF THE
^^BACKUP\\ PROGRAM.
.HL2 ^&CONSOLE USER EXAMPLES\&
\\^THE CONSOLE USER CAN EXECUTE ALL OF THE ^^BACKUP\\ COMMANDS ON HIS OWN
DISK AREA. ^HE CAN SAVE HIS DISK AREA OR ANY OTHER FILES ACCESSIBLE TO
HIM ON HIS OWN MAGNETIC TAPE AND LATER RESTORE TO HIS AREA ALL HIS
FILES OR A SUBSET OF HIS FILES. ^IN THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLES, THE USER
IS LOGGED IN UNDER ^^PPN\\ [10,123].
.B3
17.4.1.1##^&^SAVING \A ^USER'S ^DISK ^AREA\&#-#^TO SAVE ALL
FILES ON HIS OWN DISK AREA ON A MAGNETIC TAPE
MOUNTED ON ^^MTA\\0, A USER CAN TYPE
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTA0
/REWIND
/SAVE
!10,123 DSKB
#10,123 DSKC
DONE
/UNLOAD
/_^C\\
.B3;.LM0;.F;.J
17.4.1.2##^&^RESTORING ^SELECTED ^FILES\&#-#^THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE
SHOWS HOW TO RETRIEVE A SPECIFIC FILE AND A SET
OF FILES FROM A ^^BACKUP\\ TAPE BY USING WILDCARDS.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTA1
/REWIND
/RESTORE FOO.BAR, TST???.*
!10,123 DSKB
DONE
/UNLOAD
/_^C\\
.B3;.LM0;.F;.J
17.4.1.3##^&^RENAMING ^FILES \AS ^THEY \ARE ^TRANSFERRED\&#-#^A USER
MAY CHOOSE TO CHANGE A FILE'S NAME OR LOCATION PATH AS
IT IS MOVED BETWEEN TAPE AND DISK. ^IN THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE, THE FILE
NAME ^^FILEA.MAC\\ ON TAPE IS COPIED TO DISK AS ^^FILEB.MAC\\, BUT ITS
PATH (DEVICE AND DIRECTORY LEVEL) IS NOT CHANGED.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTB0
/REWIND
/RESTORE FILEB.MAC=FILEA.MAC
!10,123 DSKB
DONE
/UNLOAD
/_^C\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^IN THE NEXT EXAMPLE, THE FILE ^^FILEC.MAC\\ WAS LOCATED ON ^^DSKB\\
IN THE USER'S ^^UFD\\ [10,123] WHEN SAVED ON TAPE, BUT IT IS RESTORED TO
THE SUB-FILE DIRECTORY ^^SFD\\1 ON ^^DSKC\\.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTB0
/REWIND
/RESTORE DSKC:[10,123,SFD1]=DSKB:FILEC.MAC[10,123]
!10,123 DSKB
DONE
/UNLOAD
/_^C\\
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL1 ^&OPERATOR USES\&
\\^AN OPERATOR SHOULD PERIODICALLY SAVE THE CONTENTS OF THE DISK ON
MAGTAPE. ^THIS PROVIDES A BACKUP CAPABILITY SHOULD SOMETHING
UNFORESEEN HAPPEN TO THE DISK.
.HL2 ^&SAVING \THE ENTIRE DISK\&
\\^TO SAVE THE ENTIRE CONTENTS OF ^^DSKB\\ ON MAGTAPE AND CONCURRENTLY
PRODUCE A DIRECTORY LISTING, ^^BACKUP\\ IS RUN WHILE LOGGED IN UNDER
[1,2] AS FOLLOWS:
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTA0
/LIST DSK:BACKUP.LOG
/SAVE DSKB:
!1,2 DSKB
#1,3
#1,4
##_.
##_.
##_.\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^^BACKUP\\ TYPES OUT EACH ^^UFD\\ AS IT BEGINS TO SAVE FILES FROM THAT
AREA. ^IF THE TAPE BECOMES FULL BEFORE THE SAVE IS COMPLETED, ^^BACKUP\\
STOPS, TYPES OUT THE FULL FILE IDENTIFICATION AND BLOCK NUMBER OF THE
CURRENT FILE BEING SAVED, UNLOADS THE MAGTAPE, AND TYPES THE MESSAGE
.B;.I5
$^^BKPEOT REACHED EOT#--#MOUNT NEW TAPE THEN TYPE "GO\\"
.B
^WHEN ^^GO\\ IS TYPED ^^BACKUP\\ CONTINUES THE SAVE ON THE NEW TAPE.
(^A FILE MAY BE SPLIT ACROSS TAPES.)
.HL2 ^&RECOVERING \FROM \A SYSTEM CRASH\&
\\^IF THE SYSTEM SHOULD CRASH DURING A SAVE, FOR EXAMPLE WHILE
^^BACKUP\\ IS SAVING FILES FROM ^^UFD\\ [10,456], THE OPERATOR,
AFTER BRINGING THE SYSTEM UP, CAN INSTRUCT ^^BACKUP\\ TO START
AT ^^UFD\\ [10,456] BY USING THE /^^INITIAL\\ SWITCH:
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTA0
/LIST DSK:BACKUP.LOG
/INITIAL DSKB:[10,456]
/SAVE DSKB:
!10,456 DSKB
###_.
###_.
###_.\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^NOTE THAT ANY STATUS PARAMETERS WHICH WERE IN EFFECT BEFORE
THE CRASH MUST BE RESET, AND THAT THE TAPE SHOULD ^^NOT\\ BE REWOUND.
^NOTE ALSO THAT ^^BACKUP\\ DOES AN APPEND TO THE EXISTING ^^LIST\\ SPEC.
.HL2 ^&SAVING ONLY RECENTLY CREATED \OR MODIFIED FILES\&
\\^THE PROCEDURE FOR SAVING ONLY THOSE FILES CREATED OR MODIFIED
TODAY IS IDENTICAL TO THAT DESCRIBED IN ^SECTION 3.2.1, WITH THE ADDITIONAL
INCLUSION OF THE /^^MSINCE\\ STATUS SETTING SWITCH:
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTA0
/LIST DSK:BACKUP.LOG
/MSINCE:YESTERDAY
/SAVE DSKB:
!1,2 DSKB
###_.
###_.
###_.\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^CERTAIN FILES AND DISK AREAS ARE AUTOMATICALLY EXEMPTED FROM DATE-TIME
RESTRICTIONS. ^FILES WITH THE ^^RP.ABU\\ BIT (ALWAYS BACKUP BIT)
SET IN THE _.^^RBSTS\\ WORD OF THE ^^RIB\\ AND ^^PPN\\'S OF THE FORM
[^A,*] AND [10,^B] WHERE ^A AND ^B ARE LESS THEN OR EQUAL TO 7 ARE
ALWAYS EXEMPTED FROM DATE/TIME RESTRICTIONS. ^THIS CAUSES ALL LIBRARIES,
ETC., TO ALWAYS BE SAVED AND RESTORED. (^THE ^^PPN\\ EXEMPTION CAN
BE OVERRIDDEN BY USING THE /^^NOEXEMPT\\ STATUS SETTING VERB.)
.HL2 ^&RESTORING ONLY RECENTLY ACCESSED FILES\&
\\^IN THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE THE /^^ASINCE\\ SWITCH IS USED TO RESTORE FROM TAPE ONLY THOSE
FILES WHOSE ACCESS DATE IS LATER THAN ^JUNE 1, 1975:
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTA1
/ASINCE:1-JUN-75
/RESTORE
!\\
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL1 ^&RESTORING FROM A DISTRIBUTION TAPE\&
\\^^BACKUP\\ FORMAT DISTRIBUTION TAPES ARE MADE IN INTERCHANGE
MODE, AND RELATED FILES ARE GROUPED TOGETHER IN NAMED SAVE SETS.
^THE USER DOES NOT NEED TO KNOW WHAT ^^UFD\\ THE FILE WAS IN WHEN IT WAS
SAVED. ^BECAUSE THE TAPES ARE MADE IN INTERCHANGE MODE, THIS INFORMATION
IS NOT EVEN INCLUDED ON TAPE. ^SUPPOSE, FOR EXAMPLE, A NEW VERSION
OF ^^SCAN\\ IS ON THE CURRENT TAPE. ^THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS TO ^^BACKUP\\
TRANSFER ALL FILES FROM ONLY THE ^^SCAN\\ SAVE SET ONTO ERSATZ
DEVICE ^^DEC\\:
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTB0
/INTERCHANGE
/REWIND
/SSNAME SCAN
/RESTORE DEC:=DSK:\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THE SAVE SET NAME "^^ALL\\" CAN BE USED IN PLACE OF ^^SCAN\\ TO
INDICATE THAT FILES FROM ALL SAVE SETS ARE TO BE COPIED.
.HL1 ^&OBTAINING DIRECTORIES OF BACKUP TAPES\&
\\^THE COMMAND
.B;.I5
[^^N]PRINT\\ SPEC
.B
PRINTS A DIRECTORY OF THE ENTIRE TAPE. ^THE OPTIONAL PREFIX ^N INDICATES
A NARROW LISTING (72 COLUMNS). ^THE DEFAULT SPECIFICATION IS
^^LPT:BACKUP.LOG\\. ^IF A LINE-PRINTER IS NOT AVAILABLE TO THE USER'S
JOB, SPOOLING IS NOT IN EFFECT, AND THE DEFAULT SPEC IS USED, AN ERROR
WILL OCCUR.
.B
^THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE PRODUCES A DISK FILE DIRECTORY LISTING NAMED
^^BACKUP.LOG\\.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
.B
/REWIND
/PRINT DSK:
!\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE OUTPUT.
.B
_.^^TYPE BACKUP.LOG\\
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
^START OF SAVE SET ^^SCAN\\ ON ^^MTB\\401
^SYSTEM#####^R5200##^^SYS _#40/2 TOPS\\-10 MONITOR 602(13053) ^^APR\\_#40
1600 ^^BPI\\ 9 TRACK 18-^SEP-75 13:09:13 ^^BACKUP\\ 2(155) FORMAT 1
.B;.TS13,21,29,37,53,61
^^SCAN REL 58 <055> 31-M\\AR-75 ^^DSKB:\\ [10,4077]
^^SCAN RNO 8 <055> #8-M\\AR-75
^^SCAN MAC 304 <055> 31-M\\AR-75
^^SCN7B REL 59 <055> #4-S\\EP-75
^^SCN7B DO 101 <055> 18-A\\UG-75
^^SCN7B RNO 97 <055> 18-A\\UG-75
^^SCN7B CTL 3 <055> 24-J\\UL-75
^^SCN7B MAC 309 <055> #4-S\\EP-75
^^SCAN MEM 11 <055> 18-S\\EP-75
.B
^END OF SAVE SET ^^SCAN\\ ON ^^MTB401
S\\YSTEM#####^R5200##^^SYS\\ _#40/2 ^^TOPS\\-10 MONITOR 602(13053) ^^APR\\_#40
1600 ^^BPI\\ 9 TRACK 18-^SEP-75 13:09:24 ^^BACKUP\\ 2(155) FORMAT 1
.B
^START OF SAVE SET ^^BACKUP\\ ON ^^MTB401\\
^SYSTEM#####^R5200##^^SYS\\ _#40/2 ^^TOPS\\-10 MONITOR 602(13053) ^^APR\\_#40
1600 ^^BPI\\ 9 TRACK 18-^SEP-75 13:46:56 ^^BACKUP\\ 2(155) FORMAT 1
.B
^^BACKUP REL 22 <055> 15-S\\EP-75 ^^DSKB: [10,4077]
BACKRS REL 52 <055> 17-S\\EP-75
^^BACKUP SHR 55 <055> 17-S\\EP-75
^^BACKUP LOW 34 <055> 17-S\\EP-75
^^BACKUP MAC 118 <055> 15-S\\EP-75
^^BACKRS MAC 270 <055> 17-S\\EP-75
.B
^^BACKUP RNH 19 <055> 15-S\\EP-75 ^^DSKC\\: [10,4077]
^^BACKUP HLP 20 <055> 15-S\\EP-75
^^BACKUP RNO 4 <055> 25-A\\UG-75
^^BACKUP DOC 4 <055> 25-A\\UG-75
^^BACKUP CTL 2 <055> 20-A\\UG-75
.B
^END OF SAVE SET ^^BACKUP\\ ON ^^MTB\\401
^SYSTEM#####^R5200##^^SYS\\ _#40/2 ^^TOPS\\-20 MONITOR 602(13053) ^^APR\\_#40
1600 ^^BPI\\ 9 TRACK 18-^SEP-75 13:47:13 ^^BACKUP\\ 2(155) FORMAT 1
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL1 ^&COMPARING TAPE AND DISK FILES\&
\\^THE COMMAND
.B;.I5
^^CHECK\\ SPEC-LIST
.B
^VERIFIES THAT THE TAPE AND DISK AGREE. ^^BACKUP\\ COMPARES THE
TAPE FILES SPECIFIED FOR INPUT TO THE DISK FILES SPECIFIED FOR
OUTPUT, WORD FOR WORD.
.B
^THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE SAVES ALL THE USER'S ^^COBOL\\ FILES ON TAPE AND
THEN VERIFIES THAT THE SAVED TAPE FILES ARE IDENTICAL TO THE DISK FILES.
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
.B
/TAPE MTA0:
/REWIND
/SAVE *.CBL
/REWIND
/CHECK
!
/\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^TO RESTORE ALL ^^SHR\\ AND ^^LOW\\ FILES FROM A TAPE AND THEN VERIFY
THAT THE FILES WERE RESTORED CORRECTLY TYPE
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
/^^REWIND
/SSNAME ALL
/RESTORE *.SHR,*.LOW
!
/REWIND
/CHECK *.SHR,*.LOW
!
/\\
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL1 ^&CHECKPOINTING LARGE FILES\&
\\^INSTALLATIONS WHICH MAINTAIN EXCEPTIONALLY LARGE FILES
(OVER 5000 BLOCKS) WILL WANT TO INCLUDE THE /^^CPOINT\\ STATUS
SETTING SWITCH WHEN SAVING AND RESTORING FILES. ^THIS SWITCH EXTENDS
^^BACKUP\\'S SYSTEM CRASH RECOVERY CAPABILITY TO THE FILE BLOCK
LEVEL. ^DURING A CHECKPOINT SAVE, THE TYPEOUT LEVEL IS SET TO TYPE THE
FILENAMES AND CHECKPOINTS AS THEY ARE PASSED. ^TO CONTINUE FROM
THE LAST CHECKPOINT AFTER A CRASH, THE /^^INITIAL\\ SWITCH IS USED TO
INDICATE THE FILE SPEC AND THE /^^RESUME\\ SWITCH TO DECLARE THE
CHECKPOINT BLOCK NUMBER. ^FOR EXAMPLE:
.B;.LM5;.NF;.NJ
_.^^R BACKUP
/TAPE MTA0
/INITIAL DSKB:[40,577]DATBAS.DBS
/RESUME 6000
/SAVE
!40,577 DSKB
#DATBAS DBS
#RESUMING AT CHECKPOINT 6000
#7000
#8000
###_.
###_.
###_.\\
.B;.LM0;.F;.J
^NOTE THAT THE TAPE SHOULD NOT BE REWOUND TO CONTINUE A
CHECKPOINT SAVE.
.B
^DURING A CHECKPOINT RESTORE, THE DISK OUTPUT FILE IS CLOSED AT
EVERY CHECKPOINT AND THEN APPENDED TO. ^THE PROCEDURE FOR CONTINUING AFTER A
CRASH IS THE SAME AS THAT FOR THE CHECKPOINT SAVE, WITH THE EXCEPTION
THAT THE TAPE MUST FIRST BE REWOUND.
.B
^THE DEFAULT FOR CHECKPOINTS IS 1000 BLOCKS.
.HL1 ^&BACKUP MESSAGES\&
\\
.HL2 ^&OPERATOR MESSAGES\&
.LM5;.I-5
^^$BKPEOT REACHED EOT#--#MOUNT NEW TAPE THEN TYPE "GO"\\
.B
^THE TAPE IS FULL. ^THE OPERATOR SHOULD MOUNT A NEW ONE AND THEN
TYPE ^^GO\\ TO CONTINUE.
.B;.I-5
^^$BKPTWL TAPE WRITE LOCKED#--#ADD WRITE RING THEN TYPE "GO\\"
.B
^THE TAPE IS WRITE LOCKED. ^THE OPERATOR SHOULD INSERT A
WRITE RING AND THEN TYPE ^^GO\\ TO CONTINUE.
.LM0
.HL2 ^&ERROR MESSAGES\&
.LM5;.I-5
^^?BKPABC AMBIGUOUS COMMAND\\
.B
^THE USER HAS GIVEN A COMMAND ABBREVIATION THAT IS NOT UNIQUE.
.B;.I-5
?^^BKPCOL CAN'T OPEN LISTING DEVICE\\
.B
^THE DEVICE SPECIFIED FOR THE ^^LIST\\ COMMAND CANNOT BE SELECTED FOR
OUTPUT.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPCOM CAN'T OPEN MAGTAPE\\
.B
^THE TAPE DEVICE SPECIFIED CANNOT BE SELECTED FOR OUTPUT.
.B;.I-5
?^^BKPCSA CAN'T SAVE WITH SAVE SET NAME "ALL"\\
.B
"^^ALL\\" IS RESERVED TO MEAN ALL ^^SAVE\\ SETS ON TAPE; THEREFORE, IT
CANNOT BE USED TO NAME AN INDIVIDUAL ^^SAVE\\ SET WHEN SAVING.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPDND DEVICE NOT A DISK\\
.B
^THE INPUT DEVICE SPECIFIED FOR A ^^SAVE\\ IS NOT A DISK.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPDNM DEVICE NOT A MAGTAPE\\
.B
^THE DEVICE SPECIFIED FOR THE ^^TAPE\\ COMMAND OR A TAPE POSITIONING
COMMAND IS NOT A MAGNETIC TAPE DRIVE.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPFSL FILE SPECIFICATION DATA LOST\\
.B
^DURING THE PROCESSING OF A FILE SPECIFICATION LIST, A CONSISTENCY
CHECK DETERMINED THAT DATA WAS LOST. ^IF THIS ERROR OCCURS, PLEASE
SEND AN ^^SPR\\.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPHSG CANNOT GET HIGH SEGMENT BACK\\
.B
^^BACKUP\\ RELEASES ITS HIGH SEGMENT COMMAND SCANNER WHEN PERFORMING
^I/^O TO ELIMINATE MOST OF THE CORE WHILE RUNNING. ^THE ATTEMPT TO RESTORE
THE HIGH SEGMENT AFTER COMPLETING THE ^I/^O OPERATION HAS FAILED.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPIRC INVALID RUN TIME COMMAND#--#TYPE KILL TO ABORT RUN FIRST\\
.B
^THE USER TYPED AN ILLEGAL RUN TIME COMMAND. ^TYPE ^^KILL\\ TO
ABORT THE RUN AND RETURN TO VERB COMMAND LEVEL. ^TYPE ^^HELP\\ TO
GET A LIST OF VALID RUN TIME COMMANDS.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPKDM KEYS DON'T MATCH#--#PLEASE TRY AGAIN\\
.B
^^BACKUP\\ ASKS FOR THE ENCRYPTION KEY TWICE, AND COMPARES THE KEYS
FOR VERIFICATION. ^THIS INDICATES THAT THE COMPARISON FAILED.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPLFE LISTING FILE ENTER ERROR\\
.B
^AFTER OPENING THE LISTING ^I/^O CHANNEL, NO ENTRY COULD BE MADE FOR
THE LISTING FILE.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPLSI LISTING SPECIFICATION INCORRECTLY FORMATTED\\
.B
^THE USER HAS USED INCORRECT FORMATTING OR A "WILD-CARD" IN SPECIFYING
THE ^^LIST\\ FILE. ^NO LIST SPECIFICATION IS CREATED.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPNTS NO TAPE SPECIFIED\\
.B
^WHILE SEARCHING FOR THE LAST TAPE SPECIFICATION GIVEN, ^^BACKUP\\
COULD NOT FINE ONE.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPNZC NEGATIVE AND ZERO CHECKPOINTS ILLEGAL\\
.B
^THE USER SPECIFIED A NEGATIVE OR ZERO ARGUMENT WITH THE ^^RESUME\\ COMMAND.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPRES REACHED EOT ON A SINGLE REEL SAVE\\
.B
^THIS MESSAGE IS ISSUED IF AND WHEN THE END OF THE TAPE IS REACHED
AND THE USER HAS SPECIFIED THE /^^NOMULTIREEL\\ COMMAND.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPRTE REACHED TAPE ERROR MAXIMUM\\
.B
^^BACKUP\\ WILL ABORT THE EXECUTION OF AN ACTION VERB AND RETURN TO COMMAND
LEVEL WHEN A LARGE NUMBER OF TAPE ^I/^O ERRORS HAVE OCCURRED. ^CURRENTLY
THE ERROR MAXIMUM IS SET TO 10. (^THIS IS AN ASSEMBLY PARAMETER.)
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPTMI INSUFFICIENT CORE FOR COMMAND\\
.B
^THE ROUTINE FOR ALLOCATING SPACE FOR FILE SPECIFICATIONS COULD
NOT EXPAND CORE ENOUGH TO STORE THE SPECIFICATION.
.B;.I-5
^^?BKPTSI TAPE SPECIFICATION INCORRECTLY FORMATTED\\
.B
^THE USER HAS USED INCORRECT FORMATTING OR A "WILD-CARD" IN
SPECIFYING THE TAPE DEVICE.
.LM0
.HL2 ^&WARNING MESSAGES\&
.LM5;.I-5
^^%BKPABT ABORT\\ SPEC
.B
^THE TRANSFER OF THE SPECIFIED FILE FROM TAPE TO DISK HAS BEEN ABORTED.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPBTL BLOCK TOO LARGE READING SPEC (BLOCK\\#=#N)
.B
^THE CURRENT RECORD READ FROM TAPE EXCEEDS THE BUFFER SIZE. ^THE RECORD WILL BE SKIPPED.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCCM CANNOT COPY MFD FOR STRUCTURE\\
.B
^THE PROGRAM CANNOT GET ENOUGH CORE TO COPY THE ^MASTER ^FILE ^DIRECTORY
FOR THE INDICATED STRUCTURE. ^FILES FOR THIS STRUCTURE
WILL NOT BE SAVED, AND THE PROGRAM WILL SKIP TO THE NEXT STRUCTURE.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCCR CANNOT COPY UFD/SFD RIB FOR\\ SPEC
.B
^THE PROGRAM CANNOT GET ENOUGH CORE TO COPY THE RETRIEVAL INFORMATION
BLOCK FOR THE INDICATED DIRECTORY. ^FILES FOR THIS ^USER ^FILE
^DIRECTORY/^SUB-^FILE ^DIRECTORY WILL NOT BE SAVED, AND THE PROGRAM
WILL SKIP TO THE NEXT ^^UFD/SFD\\.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCCU COPY UFD/SFD FOR\\ SPEC
.B
^THE PROGRAM CANNOT GET ENOUGH CORE TO COPY THE INDICATED ^USER ^FILE ^DIRECTORY
OR ^SUB-^FILE ^DIRECTORY. ^FILES FOR THIS ^^UFD\\ OR ^^SFD\\ WILL NOT
BE SAVED, AND THE PROGRAM WILL SKIP TO THE NEXT ^^UFD/SFD\\.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCDF CANNOT DELETE FILE\\ ERROR BITS (CODE) SPEC
.B
^THE SPECIFIED FILE COULD NOT BE DELETED. ^THE ERROR BITS AND CODE RETURNED
ARE LISTED IN THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^MONITOR ^CALLS ^MANUAL, ^APPENDIX ^E.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCDS CHECK DISK FILE SHORTER\\ SPEC
.B
^DURING A CHECK OPERATION, AN END-OF-FILE OCCURRED FOR THE
INDICATED DISK FILE, EVEN THOUGH THERE IS MORE FILE DATA ON TAPE.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCFD CHECK FILES ARE DIFFERENT\\ SPEC
.B
^THE CHECK OPERATION DETERMINED THAT THE DISK AND TAPE VERSIONS OF
THE IDICATED FILE ARE DIFFERENT.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCHK CHECKSUM INCONSISTENCY READING\\ SPEC (^^BLOCK\\#=#N)
.B
^DURING A READ, THE COMPUTED CHECKSUM OF THE CURRENT TAPE RECORD
DID NOT AGREE WITH THE CHECKSUM STORED WHEN THE RECORD WAS
WRITTEN.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCNF CHECK FILE NOT ON DISK\\ SPEC
.B
^THE INDICATED FILE COULD NOT BE FOUND ON DISK DURING A CHECK OPERATION.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCOD CANNOT OPEN\\ "FILE STRUCTURE"
.B
^THE FILE STRUCTURE INDICATED CANNOT BE SELECTED FOR
^I/^O. ^THE TRANSFER OF FILES FOR THIS STRUCTURE WILL BE ABORTED.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPCTS CHECK TAPE FILE SHORTER\\ SPEC
.B
^DURING A CHECK OPERATION, AND END-OF-FILE OCCURRED FOR THE INDICATED
TAPE FILE, EVEN THOUGH THERE IS MORE FILE DATA ON DISK.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPDIO DISK I/O ERROR\\ ERROR BITS ^^DURING\\ SPEC
.B
^A DISK ^I/^O ERROR OCCURRED WHILE ATTEMPTING TO READ OR WRITE THE SPECIFIED FILE.
^THE ERROR BITS INCLUDED ARE THOSE RETURNED BY THE MONITOR ^^GETSTS\\ CALL.
^THE TRANSFER WILL BE ABORTED FOR THIS FILE.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPFEE ENTER\\ ERROR-CODE SPEC
.B
^FILE ENTER ERROR FOR THE INDICATED FILE. ^THE ERROR CODE INCLUDED IS THAT
RETURNED BY THE MONITOR, AND THE ERROR CODE ABBREVIATION IS LISTED IN THE
^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^MONITOR ^CALLS ^MANUAL, ^APPENDIX ^E.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPFLE LOOKUP\\ ERROR-CODE SPEC
.B
^FILE LOOKUP ERROR FOR THE INDICATED FILE. ^THE ERROR CODE INCLUDED IS THAT
RETURNED BY THE MONITOR, AND THE ERROR CODE ABBREVIATION IS LISTED IN
THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^MONITOR ^CALLS ^MANUAL, ^APPENDIX ^E.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPFRS FRS TAPES NOT SUPPORTED\\
.B
^ON READING A TAPE, IF THE TAPE FORMAT SEEMS TO CORRESPOND TO AN ^^FRS\\
TAPE RATHER THAN A ^^BACKUP\\ TAPE, THIS MESSAGE IS ISSUED AND
^^BACKUP\\ CONTINUES SCANNING THE TAPE FOR RECORDS IN A FORMAT WHICH
IT UNDERSTANDS.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPHSI HEADER FILE SPEC INCONSISTENCY\\
.B
^DURING A RESTORE OPERATION, A CONSISTENCY CHECK DETERMINED THAT THE
END-OF-FILE RECORD FOR THE CURRENT FILE WAS MISSED, AND THE
CURRENT RECORD BELONGS TO ANOTHER FILE. ^THE
TRANSFER WILL BE ABORTED FOR THIS FILE.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPIBL INCORRECT BLOCK LENGTH\\
.B
^DURING A READ, THE PROGRAM ENCOUNTERED A TAPE RECORD OF THE
WRONG SIZE. ^THE RECORD WILL BE SKIPPED.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPLF LISTING FILE ERROR\\ ERROR BITS (CODE) SPEC
.B
^THE LISTING FILE IS CLOSED AND APPENDED TO AFTER THE PROCESSING OF EACH
^^UFD\\, SO THAT IT WILL BE PRESERVED THROUGH A SYSTEM CRASH AND RECOVERY
PROCEDURE. ^IF EITHER THE ^^LOOKUP\\ OR ^^ENTER\\ ^^UUO\\ FOR APPENDING TO THE
LISTING FILE FAILS, THIS MESSAGE IS ISSUED AND NO FURTHER
OUTPUT IS DONE TO THE LISTING FILE. ^THE ERROR BITS AND CODE RETURNED ARE
LISTED IN THE ^^DEC\\SYSTEM-10 ^MONITOR ^CALLS ^MANUAL, ^APPENDIX ^E.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPNBF NOT BACKUP FORMAT\\
.B
^THE CURRENT TAPE RECORD IS NOT IN ^^BACKUP\\ FORMAT, AND THE PROGRAM
WILL SKIP TO THE NEXT TAPE RECORD.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPNEC NOT ENOUGH CORE\\
.B
^THE PROGRAM CANNOT GET ENOUGH CORE. ^IF THIS OCCURS DURING A
^^RESTORE\\, THE ^^RESTORE\\ WILL BE ABORTED. ^DURING A ^SAVE, THE PROGRAM
WILL SKIP TO THE NEXT STRUCTURE OR ^USER ^FILE ^DIRECTORY AND ATTEMPT
TO CONTINUE.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPNFF NO FILES FOUND TO MATCH\\ SPEC
.B
^NO FILES WERE FOUND TO MATCH THE GIVEN FILE SPECIFICATION.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPRIC RESUME AT INVALID CHECKPOINT ATTEMPTED\\
.B
^THIS MESSAGE INDICATES THAT THE USER INSTRUCTED ^^BACKUP\\
TO CONTINUE SAVING OR CHECKING A FILE AT A CHECKPOINT WHICH WAS
LARGER THAN THE ACTUAL NUMBER OF BLOCKS IN THE FILE.
.B;.I-5
%^^BKPROD RESTORE OUTPUT DEVICE IS NOT A DISK\\
.B
^THE OUTPUT DEVICE SPECIFIED FOR A ^^RESTORE\\ IS NOT A DISK.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPSCE SIZE COPY ERROR\\ SPEC
.B
^WHILE TRANSFERRING A FILE FROM TAPE TO DISK AN ERROR WAS ENCOUNTERED
BECAUSE THE TRANSFERRED FILE WAS NOT THE SAME SIZE AS THE TAPE FILE. ^IF
THIS ERROR OCCURS, PLEASE SEND AN ^^SPR\\.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPSLE SFD LEVEL EXCEEDED\\
.B
^WHILE ATTEMPTING TO SAVE NEEDED ^SUB-^FILE ^DIRECTORIES THE ^^SFD\\
LEVEL WAS EXCEEDED.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPSNF SAVE SET NOT FOUND\\ NAME
.B
^THIS MESSAGE MAY OCCUR DURING A ^^RESTORE\\ OR ^^CHECK\\ OPERATION AND
INDICATES THAT THE SAVE SET NAMED WITH THE LAST /^^SSNAME\\ VERB
COULD NOT BE FOUND.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPTHE TAPE HARDWARE ERROR READING/WRITING\\ SPEC (^^BLOCK\\=N)
.B
^A HARDWARE ERROR OCCURRED. ^THE TRANSFERRED FILE MAY CONTAIN UNRELIABLE
DATA.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPTPE TAPE PARITY ERROR READING/WRITING\\ SPEC (^^BLOCK\\=N)
.B
^THE HARDWARE DETECTED A PARITY ERROR. ^THE TRANSFERRED FILE MAY CONTAIN
UNRELIABLE DATA.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPUOE UNTRACEABLE OUTPUT ERROR\\
.B
^AN ERROR WAS ENCOUNTERED WHILE TRYING TO MOVE DATA FROM DISK TO
TAPE.
.B;.I-5
^^%BKPURT UNKNOWN RECORD TYPE\\
.B
^WHILE READING THE TAPE, ^^BACKUP\\ FOUND THAT THE TYPE NUMBER OF THE
CURRENT TAPE RECORD IS NOT WITHIN THE DEFINED RANGE. ^THE PROGRAM
WILL SKIP TO THE NEXT TAPE RECORD.
.LM0
.HL1 ^&CAPACITIES OF DISK MEDIA VERSUS MAGNETIC TAPE\&
\\^THE FOLLOWING TABLE ILLUSTRATES THE MAXIMUM CAPACITY OF
VARIOUS DISK DEVICES AND THE APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF 2400-FOOT MAGNETIC TAPES
REQUIRED TO HOLD THE SAME NUMBER OF BLOCKS. ^THE CALCULATIONS WERE MADE
FOR 9-CHANNEL MAGNETIC TAPE AT 800 BPI.
.B;.LM5;.TS25,47;.NF;.NJ
^NO. OF MAGTAPES
^REQUIRED FOR SAME
^DISK ^DEVICE ^CAPACITY IN ^BLOCKS CAPACITY
^^RD10 (D\\ISK) ########4000 #######.139
.B
^^RM10B (D\\RUM) ########2700 #######.094
.B
^^RP02 (D\\ISK ^PACK) #######40000 ######1.39
.B
^^RP03 (D\\ISK ^PACK) #######80000 ######2.78
.B
^^RP04 (D\\ISK ^PACK) ######154280 ######5.37
.B
^^RS04 (D\\ISK) ########2048 #######.071
.LM0;.F;.J
.HL1 ^&BACKUP TAPE FORMAT\&
\\^NOTE THAT ^BACKUP IS DESIGNED FOR TWO PRIMARY FUNCTIONS:
PERFORMING SYSTEM BACKUP AND INTERCHANGING FILES BETWEEN SYSTEMS. ^FOR THE LATTER
FUNCTION, ^BACKUP PROVIDES AN "INTERCHANGE" SWITCH WHICH CAUSES SYSTEM
DEPENDENT DATA TO BE IGNORED AND ONLY CRITICAL FILE INFORMATION TO BE
WRITTEN ON TAPE. ^A RESTORE OPERATION IN INTERCHANGE
MODE ALSO IGNORES SYSTEM DEPENDENT DATA, ALLOWING THE OPERATING SYSTEM
TO SUPPLY DEFAULTS WHERE NECESSARY. ^ITEMS NOT INCLUDED IN INTERCHANGE MODE
ARE NOTED IN THE DESCRIPTION WHICH FOLLOWS.
.HL2 ^&TAPE RECORD TYPES\&
\\^^BACKUP\\ TAPES ARE MADE UP OF A SERIES OF TAPE RECORDS OF
VARIOUS TYPES. ^EACH RECORD IS SELF IDENTIFYING. ^ALL RECORDS ON THE
TAPE ARE WRITTEN AT THE STANDARD LENGTH OF 544(10) WORDS, MADE UP OF
A 32(10) WORD HEADER AND A 512(10) DATA AREA. ^EVEN IF THE DATA AREA IS NOT
NEEDED, OR IS ONLY PARTIALLY NEEDED IT IS FULLY WRITTEN. ^ALL UNDEFINED
OR UNUSED WORDS ARE WRITTEN WITH ZEROES AND IGNORED ON READ.
^THIS MAXIMIZES THE PROBABILITY OF READING OLD TAPES. ^IN ANY CASE, THE
TAPE FORMAT IS INCLUDED IN THE LABELS AND THE SAVE SET HEADERS.
.B
^THE RECORD TYPES ARE:
.LS;.LE;^^T$LBL\\#--#TAPE LABEL USED TO IDENTIFY REEL ^^ID\\ AND DESTRUCTION DATE/TIME.
^THIS RECORD IS OPTIONAL, BUT IF PRESENT MUST BE AT THE START OF
THE TAPE.
.LE;^^T$BEG\\#--#^BEGINNING OF A SAVE SET USED TO IDENTIFY WHEN THE
SAVE SET WAS WRITTEN AND ON WHAT DEVICE OF WHAT SYSTEM. ^IT ALSO
INCLUDES THE SAVE SET NAME. ^THIS RECORD IS MANDATORY AND MUST
BE THE FIRST RECORD OF THE SAVE SET.
.LE;^^T$END\\#--#END OF A SAVE SET. ^THIS IS IDENTICAL TO THE ^^T$BEG\\ RECORD EXCEPT
THAT IT APPEARS AT THE END.
.LE;^^T$FIL\\#--#THIS IS THE ACTUAL DATA WHICH HAS BEEN SAVED. ^IT IS
THE ONLY TYPE OF RECORD WHICH IS ENCRYPTED. ^IT IS SELF-IDENTIFYING
AS TO THE POSITION WITHIN THE FILE, BUT CONTAINS ONLY PART OF
THE FULL PATH NAME OF THE FILE.
.LE;^^T$UFD\\#--#CONTAINS THE INFORMATION FOR EACH DIRECTORY. ^IT GIVES
ALL INFORMATION NECESSARY TO RE-CREATE THE DIRECTORY. (^NOT WRITTEN IN
INTERCHANGE MODE.)
.LE;^^T$EOV\\#--#INDICATES END OF VOLUME (FUTURE).
.LE;^^T$COM\\#--#COMMENT (IGNORED).
.LE;^^T$CON\\#--#CONTINUATION OF SAVE SET. ^THIS IS IDENTICAL TO ^^T$BEG\\
EXCEPT THAT IT INDICATES THE CONTINUATION OF THE SAVE SET AT
THE START OF A NEW VOLUME. ^THIS ENSURES THAT EACH VOLUME IS COMPLETELY
SELF IDENTIFYING.
.ELS
.HL2 ^&STANDARD RECORD FORMAT\&
\\^EVERY TAPE RECORD HAS THE SAME GENERAL FORMAT. ^THIS CONSISTS OF A
32(10) WORD RECORD HEADER FOLLOWED BY ONE PAGE OF DATA (512(10)
WORDS). ^ALL RECORD HEADERS START WITH THE SAME FIRST TWELVE WORDS.
^THE FIRST SEVEN WORDS ARE:
.LS;.LE;^^G$TYPE\\#--#^RECORD TYPE AS DESCRIBED IN THE PREVIOUS SECTION.
^THIS IS A SMALL POSITIVE INTEGER.
.LE;^^G$SEQ\\#--#RECORD SEQUENCE NUMBER. ^THIS IS INCREMENTED BY ONE FOR
EACH RECORD ON THE TAPE. ^IF A RECORD IS REPEATED BECAUSE OF A TAPE WRITE
ERROR, THE NUMBER OF THE REPEATED RECORD IS THE SAME AS THAT OF THE ORIGINAL.
.LE;^^G$RTNM\\#--#RELATIVE TAPE NUMBER. ^THIS IS INCREMENTED BY ONE FOR EACH
VOLUME.
.LE;^^G$FLAG\\#--#VARIOUS FLAG BITS:
.B;.LM13;.TS13;.I-4
A. ^^GF$EOF\\#--#^THIS FLAG IS SET IF THIS IS THE LAST TAPE RECORD
FOR THIS DISK FILE. ^ON SHORT FILES, THIS CAN EVEN BE SET ON THE FIRST
RECORD OF THE FILE.
.B;.I-4
B. ^^GF$RPT\\#--#THIS FLAG IS SET IF THIS TAPE RECORD IS A
REPEAT OF THE PREVIOUS RECORD. ^THIS IS SET WHENEVER THE RECORD IS
REWRITTEN BECAUSE OF A TAPE WRITE ERROR.
.B;.I-4
C. ^^GF$NCH\\#--#THIS FLAG IS SET IF NO CHECKSUM HAS BEEN COMPUTED
FOR THE TAPE RECORD.
.B;.I-4
D. ^^GF$SOF\\#--#THIS FLAG IS SET IF THIS IS THE FIRST TAPE RECORD
FOR THIS DISK FILE.
.LM9
.LE;^^G$CHK\\#--#CHECKSUM OF THE TAPE RECORD.
.LE;^^G$SIZ\\#--#NUMBER OF WORDS USED FOR DATA IN THIS TAPE RECORD.
.LE;^^G$LND\\#--#NUMBER OF WORDS TO SKIP BEFORE THE DATA STARTS.
.ELS
^THE NEXT FOUR WORDS ARE RESERVED FOR FUTURE EXPANSION. ^THE TWELFTH
(LAST) WORD IN THE GENERAL SECTION OF THE RECORD HEADER IS RESERVED
FOR CUSTOMER USE. ^THE REMAINING 20 WORDS IN THE RECORD HEADER
VARY FOR EACH RECORD TYPE, WITH THE LAST WORD OF EACH RECORD HEADER BEING
RESERVED FOR CUSTOMER USE. ^IN INTERCHANGE MODE, CUSTOMER RESERVED
WORDS WILL BE WRITTEN AS ZERO ON A SAVE AND IGNORED ON A READ.
.HL2 ^&NON-^DATA BLOCKS\&
\\^THE DATA PORTION OF A TAPE RECORD IS PRIMARILY FOR STORING
FILE DATA, BUT MAY BE USED FOR SAVING SOME OVERHEAD INFORMATION. ^ANY
NON-DATA INFORMATION WRITTEN IN THE DATA AREA OF A TAPE RECORD
IS PREFACED WITH A CONTROL WORD OF THE FORM:
.B
^^LH\\#=#TYPE, ^^RH\\#=#LENGTH IN WORDS INCLUDING THIS WORD.
.B
^MORE THAN ONE OVERHEAD REGION CAN APPEAR. ^IN THIS CASE, THEY FOLLOW
EACH OTHER WITH NO INTERVENING SPACE. ^THE CURRENTLY DEFINED
TYPES FOR OVERHEAD BLOCKS ARE:
.LS;.LE;^^O$NAME\\#--#GIVES THE FULL PATH IDENTIFICATION OF THE FILE
WITHOUT PUNCTUATION. ^THE PATH COMPONENTS ARE TREATED AS IF THE USER
GAVE A QUOTED REPRESENTATION IN "^^DEC\\ ^INTEGRATED ^COMMAND
^LANGUAGE". ^THIS BLOCK CONSISTS OF SUB-BLOCKS IN THE STANDARD ORDER:
DEVICE, DIRECTORIES (TOP DOWN), FILE NAME, EXTENSION, VERSION, GENERATION.
^SUB-BLOCKS CORRESPONDING TO MISSING FIELDS IN THE PATH SPECIFICATION
ARE OMITTED. ^EACH SUB-BLOCK IS IN THE FORMAT:
.B
^^WORD0\\: ^^LH\\#=#TYPE, ^^RH\\#=#LENGTH IN WORDS INCLUDING THIS WORD.
.B
^THE REST OF THE SUB-BLOCK IS THE PATH FIELD IN ^^ASCIZ\\ WITHOUT LEADING
OR IMBEDDED NULLS, TERMINATED BY AT LEAST ONE NULL. ^OMITTED FIELDS WILL
BE DEFAULTED. ^IN INTERCHANGE MODE, ONLY THE NAME, EXTENSION AND VERSION
ARE WRITTEN. ^IN INTERCHANGE RESTORE, ONLY NAME, EXTENSION AND VERSION
ARE USED.
.B
SUB-BLOCK TYPE CODES ARE:
.B;.NF;.NJ
1##=#DEVICE
2##=#NAME
3##=#EXTENSION
4##=#VERSION
5##=#GENERATION
40#=#DIRECTORY (LOWER DIRECTORIES ARE 41, 42, ...)
.F;.J
.LE;^^O$FILE\\#--#A BLOCK CONTAINING FILE ATTRIBUTES. ^THE FIRST
SECTION OF THIS BLOCK IS A FIXED LENGTH HEADER AREA CONTAINING IN FIXED
LOCATIONS EITHER SINGLE WORD ATTRIBUTES OR BYTE POINTERS TO
^^ASCIZ\\ STRING ATTRIBUTES LOCATED IN THE REMAINING SECTION. ^ALL
DATES AND TIMES ARE IN UNIVERSAL DATE/TIME FORMAT. ^IN INTERCHANGE
MODE ONLY THE CRITICAL ATTRIBUTES (STARRED) WILL BE WRITTEN, AND THE REST
OF THIS BLOCK WILL CONTAIN ZEROS. ^IN THE DESCRIPTION WHICH FOLLOWS,
THE SYMBOLS IN BRACKETS REPRESENT THE ^^RIB\\ DATA FROM WHICH THE
ATTRIBUTE VALUES WILL BE CONVERTED. (^IF NONE IS GIVEN, THE LOCATION WILL BE ZERO.)
.B;.LM13;.TS13;.I-4
A. ^^A$FHLN\\ (*)#--#FIXED HEADER LENGTH IN WORDS.
.B;.I-4
B. ^^A$FLGS\\#--#FLAGS:
.B;.LM27;.TS17,27;.I-14
1. ^^B$PERM\\#--#PERMANENT (NOT DELETABLE) [^^RP.NDL\\]
.B;.I-14
2. ^^B$TEMP\\#--#TEMPORARY
.B;.I-14
3. ^^B$DELE\\#--#ALREADY DELETED
.B;.I-14
4. ^^B$DLRA\\#--#DON'T DELETE FOR LACK OF RECENT ACCESS [^^RP.ABU\\}
.B;.I-14
5. ^^B$NQCF\\#--#NOT QUOTA CHECKED [^^RP.NQC\\]
.B;.I-14
6. ^^B$NOCS\\#--#DOES NOT HAVE VALID CHECKSUMS [^^RP.ABC\\]
.B;.I-14
7. ^^B$CSER\\#--#HAS CHECKSUM ERROR [^^RP.FCE\\]
.B;.I-14
8. ^^B$WRER\\#--#HAS DISK WRITE ERROR [^^RP.FWE\\]
.B;.I-14
9. ^^B$MRER\\#--#HAD ^^BACKUP\\ READ ERROR ON ^^RESTORE\\
[^^RP.BFA\\]
.B;.I-15
10. ^^B$DAER\\#--#DECLARED BAD BY DAMAGE ASSESSMENT [^^RP.BDA\\]
.B;.LM13;.TS13;.I-4
C. ^^A$WRIT\\ (*)#--#DATE/TIME OF LAST WRITE [^^RB.CRD\\ AND ^^RB.CRT\\]
.B;.I-4
D. ^^A$ALLS\\#(*)#--#ALLOCATED SIZE IN WORDS [.^^RBALC\\]
.B;.I-4
E. ^^A$MODE\\#(*)#--#MODE OF LAST WRITE [^^RB.MOD]\\
.B;.I-4
F. ^^A$LENG\\#(*)#--LENGTH IN BYTES (1^B0 IF > 2_^35-1) [^^.RBSIZ\\]
.B;.I-4
G. ^^A$BSIZ\\#(*)#--#BYTE SIZE (7 OR 36).
.B;.I-4
H. ^^A$VERS\\#(*)#--#VERSION IDENTIFICATION (.^^JBVER\\ FORMAT) [.^^RBVER\\]
.B;.I-4
I. ^^A$PROT\\#--#PROTECTION [^^RB.PRV\\]. ^THE PROTECTION FOR DIRECTORIES
APPEARS IN THE DIRECTORY ATTRIBUTE BLOCK (^^O$DIRT\\). ^FOR FILES,
THE PROTECTION WORD IS DEFINED AS FOUR FIELDS OF EIGHT BITS EACH WITH
A "5" STORED IN THE LEFTMOST THREE BITS IN ORDER TO AVOID LOOKING LIKE A
BYTE POINTER:
.B;.TS30
BITS 0-2 "5"
.B
BIT 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE
.B
BITS 4-11 FUTURE ACCESS
.B
BITS 12-19 OWNER ACCESS
.B
BITS 20-27 AFFINITY GROUP ACCESS
.B
BITS 28-35 "WORLD" ACCESS
.B
^EACH FILE ACCESS FIELD IS SUBDIVIDED INTO BYTES WHICH DESCRIBE
THE ATTRIBUTE, WRITE AND READ (RESPECTIVELY) PROTECTIONS ASSOCIATED
WITH THE FILE. ^A DESCRIPTION OF THE "WORLD" ACCESS FIELD FOLLOWS, WITH
THE ASSOCIATED ^^TOPS\\-10 PROTECTION GIVEN IN PARENTHESES, IF APPLICABLE.
^THE OWNER AND AFFINITY GROUP (PROJECT) FIELDS ARE SIMILARLY DEFINED.
.B;.LM17;.TS17;.I-4
1. ^^PR$SPC\\#(BIT 28)#--#RESERVED FOR SPECIAL CHECKING. ^THE
REST OF THE FIELD IS SPECIAL IF THIS BIT IS SET.
.B;.I-4
2. ^^PR$ATR\\#(BITS 29-31)#--#THE ATTRIBUTE SUBFIELD IS A 3-BIT
BYTE INTERPRETED AS FOLLOWS:
.B
0#--#FILE IS COMPLETELY HIDDEN.
.B
1#--#FILE NAME IS VISIBLE (7-6).
.B
2#--#FILE ATTRIBUTES ARE VISIBLE (5-2).
.B
3#--#CAN CHANGE UNPROTECTED ATTRIBUTES.
.B
4-5#--#(FUTURE)
.B
6#--#CAN CHANGE PROTECTION (0).
.B
7#--#CAN DELETE THE FILE (1).
.B;.I-4
3. ^^PR$WRT\\#(BITS 32-33)#--#THE WRITE ACCESS SUBFIELD IS DEFINED AS:
.B
0#--#NO WRITE ACCESS (7-5).
.B
1#--#APPEND (4).
.B
2#--#WRITE (3).
.B
3#--#SUPERSEDING GENERATION (2-0).
.B;.I-4
4. ^^PR$RED\\#(BITS 34-35)#--#THE READ ACCESS SUBFIELD IS DEFINED AS:
.B
0#--#NO READ ACCESS (7).
.B
1#--#EXECUTE ONLY (6).
.B
2#--#CAN READ THE FILE (5-0).
.B
3#--#(FUTURE).
.B;.LM13;.TS13;.I-4
J. ^^A$ACCT\\#--#BYTE POINTER TO ACCOUNT STRING
.B;.I-4
K. ^^A$NOTE\\#--#BYTE POINTER TO ANNOTATION STRING [.^^RBSPL\\]
.B;.I-4
L. ^^A$CRET\\#--#CREATION DATE AND TIME OF THIS GENERATION
.B;.I-4
M. ^^A$REDT\\#--#LAST READ DATE AND TIME OF THIS GENERATION [^^RB.ACD\\]
.B;.I-4
N. ^^A$MODT\\#--#MONITOR SET LAST WRITE DATE AND TIME [.^^RBTIM\\]
.B;.I-4
O. ^^A$ESTS\\#--#ESTIMATED SIZE IN WORDS [^^.RBEST\\]
.B;.I-4
P. ^^A$RADR\\#--#REQUESTED DISK ADDRESS [^^.RBPOS\\]
.B;.I-4
Q. ^^A$FSIZ\\#--#MAXIMUM FILE SIZE IN WORDS
.B;.I-4
R. ^^A$MUSR\\#--#BYTE POINTER TO IDENTIFICATION OF LAST MODIFIER
.B;.I-4
S. ^^A$CUSR\\#--#BYTE POINTER IDENTIFICATION OF CREATOR [.^^RBAUT\\]
.B;.I-4
T. ^^A$BKID\\#--#BYTE POINTER TO IDENTIFICATION OF PREVIOUS
^^BACKUP\\ [.^^RBMTA\\]
.B;.I-4
U. ^^A$BKDT\\#--#DATE AND TIME OF LAST BACKUP
.B;.I-4
V. ^^A$NGRT\\#--#NUMBER OF GENERATIONS TO RETAIN
.B;.I-4
W. ^^A$NRDS\\#_-#NUMBER OF OPENS FOR READ THIS GENERATION
.B;.I-4
X. ^^A$NWRT\\#--#NUMBER OF OPENS FOR WRITE THIS GENERATION
.B;.I-4
Y. ^^A$USRW\\#--#UNDEFINED USER WORD [.^^RBNCA\\]
.B;.I-4
Z. ^^A$PCAW\\#--#PRIVILEGED CUSTOMER WORD [.^^RBBCA\\]
.B;.LM9
^THE REMAINDER OF THIS BLOCK IS RESERVED FOR FUTURE EXPANSION.
.LE;^^O$DIRT\\#--#A BLOCK CONTAINING DIRECTORY ATTRIBUTES (NOT
WRITTEN IN INTERCHANGE MODE). ^THE FIRST SECTION OF THIS BLOCK IS FIXED
LENGTH HEADER AREA CONTAINING EITHER DIRECTORY ATTRIBUTES OR POINTERS
TO ATTRIBUTES LOCATED IN THE REMAINING SECTION. ^THE SYMBOLS IN BRACKETS REPRESENT
THE ^^RIB\\ DATA USED FOR CONVERSION (THE LOCATION IS ZERO IF NONE IS GIVEN).
^THE DIRECTORY PROTECTION WORD APPEARS IN THIS BLOCK RATHER
THAN IN THE ^^O$FILE\\ BLOCK (^^A$PROT\\ IS ZERO FOR DIRECTORIES).
.B;.LM13;.TS13;.I-4
A. ^^D$FHLN\\#--#FIXED HEADER LENGTH IN WORDS
.B;.I-4
B. ^^D$FLGS\\#--#DIRECTORY FLAGS:
.B;.LM17;.TS17;.I-4
1. ^^DF$FOD\\#--#FILE ONLY DIRECTORY
.B;.I-4
2. ^^DF$AAL\\#--#ALPHA ACCOUNTS ARE LEGAL
.B;.I-4
3. ^^DF$RLM\\#--#REPEAT LOGIN MESSAGES
.B;.LM13;.TS13;.I-4
C. ^^D$ACCT\\#--#ACCOUNT NUMBER OR ^^ASCII\\ BYTE POINTER TO ACCOUNT STRING
.B;.I-4
D. ^^D$PROT\\#--#DIRECTORY PROTECTION [^^RB.PRV\\]. ^THE DIRECTORY
PROTECTION WORD IS DIVIDED INTO THE SAME ACCESS FIELDS AS THE FILE
PROTECTION WORD, ^^A$PROT\\, BUT EACH DIRECTORY ACCESS FIELD HAS BITS
AS FOLLOWS (^^RIB\\ BITS GIVEN IN PARENTHESES):
.B
^BIT 28#--#RESERVED FOR SPECIAL CHECKING. ^THE REST OF THE FIELD
IS SPECIAL IF THIS BITS IS SET.
.B
^BITS 29-31#--#(FUTURE)
.B
^BIT 32#--#CONNECT ALLOWED
.B
^BIT 33#--#CAN OPEN FILES (4)
.B
^BIT 34#--#CAN CREATE GENERATIONS (2)
.B
^BIT 35#--#DIRECTORY CAN BE READ (1)
.B;.LM13;.TS13;.I-4
E. ^^D$FPRT\\#--#DEFAULT FILE PROTECTION
.B;.I-4
F. ^^D$LOGT\\#--#DATE/TIME OF LAST LOGIN IN ^^DEC\\-10 UNIVERSAL
FORMAT [^^RB.CRD\\ AND ^^RB.CRT\\]
.B;.I-4
G. ^^D$GENR\\#--#DEFAULT NUMBER OF GENERATIONS TO KEEP
.B;.I-4
H. ^^D$QTF\\#--#FIRST-COME-FIRST-SERVED LOGGED-IN QUOTA
IN WORDS [^^.RBQTF\\]
.B;.I-4
I. ^^D$QTO\\#--#LOGGED OUT QUOTA IN WORDS [.^^RBQTO\\]
.B;.I-4
J. ^^D$ACSL\\#--#LIST OF GROUPS WHICH CAN ACCESS THIS DIRECTORY (SEE BELOW)
.B;.I-4
K. ^^D$USRL\\#--#LIST OF GROUPS WHICH THIS USER IS IN (SEE BELOW)
.B;.I-4
L. ^^D$PRVL\\#--#PRIVILEGE LIST (SEE BELOW)
.B;.I-4
M. ^^D$PSWD\\#--#^^ASCII\\ BYTE POINTER TO PASSWORD
.B;.LM9
^THE LIST ATTRIBUTE WORDS GIVEN ABOVE (^^D$ACSL, D$USRL, D$PRVL\\)
MAY BE IN ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FORMATS:
.B;.LM13;.TS13;.I-4
A. AN ^^ASCII\\ STRING POINTER
.B;.I-4
B. 5^B2 + GROUP (OR 5^B2 + PRIVILEGE FOR ^^D$PRVL\\)
.B;.I-4
C. -^N,, ^RELATIVE LOCATION OF START OF LIST
.B;.LM9
^IF IN FORMAT (C), EACH WORD OF THE LIST IS 5^B2 + GROUP (5^B2 +
PRIVILEGE FOR ^^D$PRVL\\)
.LE;^^O$SYSN\\#--#A BLOCK CONTAINING THE SYSTEM HEADER LINE
IN ^^ASCIZ\\.
.LE;^^O$SSNM\\#--#A BLOCK CONTAINING THE USER SUPPLIED SAVE SET NAME IN
^^ASCIZ\\ (MAX OF 30 CHARACTERS). ^THIS BLOCK IS OMITTED IF NO SAVE SET
NAME WAS SPECIFIED.
.ELS
.HL2 ^&LOCATIONS \IN ^^T$LBL\\ RECORD\&
\\^THIS RECORD HAS NO CONTENTS IN THE "DATA" REGION. ^THE REMAINING
LOCATIONS IN THE RECORD HEADER ARE DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:
.LS;.LE;^^L$DATE\\#--#DATE/TIME OF LABELLING IN ^^DEC\\-10 UNIVERSAL FORMAT
(I.E., ^^LH=DAYS\\ SINCE 17-^^NOV-1858, RH=FRACTION\\ OF DAY)
.LE;^^L$FMT\\#--#^^BACKUP\\ TAPE FORMAT (CONSTANT#=#1).
.LE;^^L$BVER\\#--#VERSION OF ^^BACKUP\\ WRITING LABEL IN STANDARD
^^.JBVER\\ FORMAT.
.LE;^^L$MON\\#--#MONITOR TYPE (^^%CNMNT\\).
.LE;^^L$SVER\\#--#SYSTEM VERSION (^^%CNDVN\\).
.LE;^^L$APR\\#--#^^APR\\ PROCESSOR SERIAL NUMBER ON WHICH THIS LABEL WAS
WRITTEN (INTEGER).
.LE;^^L$DEV\\#--#PHYSICAL DEVICE ON WHICH THE TAPE WAS WRITTEN IN ^^SIXBIT\\.
.LE;^^L$MTCH\\#--#^^BTYE\\ (31) 0 (1) 7-TRACK (1) 0 (3) DENSITY. ^DENSITY IS
1=200, 2=556, 3=800, 4=1600, 5=6250.
.LE;^^L$RLNM\\#--#^^REELID\\ IN ^^SIXBIT\\.
.LE;^^L$DSTR\\#--#DATE/TIME BEFORE WHICH THE TAPE CANNOT BE SCRATCHED.
^BEFORE THIS TIME, THE ONLY VALID OPERATION IS TO APPEND.
.ELS
.HL2 ^&LOCATIONS \IN ^^T$BEG, T$END, T$CON\\ RECORDS\&
\\^THESE SAVE SET RECORDS ALL HAVE THE SAME FORMAT AND ARE
DISTINGUISHED BY THEIR RECORD TYPES AND THEIR LOCATION ON THE TAPE.
^ALL ITEMS ARE FILLED IN AT THE TIME OF WRITING. ^THE DATA AREA
CONTAINS TWO NON-DATA BLOCKS, TYPES ^^O$SYSN\\ AND ^^O$SSNM\\.
^RECORD HEADER LOCATIONS FOLLOWING THE FIRST STANDARD TWELVE WORDS ARE
DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:
.LS;.LE;^^S$DATE\\#--#DATE/TIME OF WRITING THIS RECORD IN UNIVERSAL
FORMAT.
.LE;^^S$FMT\\#--#^^BACKUP\\ TAPE FORMAT (CONSTANT#=#1).
.LE;^^S$BVER\\#--#^^BACKUP\\ VERSION IN ^^.JBVER\\ FORMAT.
.LE;^^S$MON\\#--#MONITOR TYPE (^^%CNMNT\\).
.LE;^^S$SVER\\#--#SYSTEM VERSION (^^%CNDVN\\).
.LE;^^S$APR\\#--#APR SERIAL NUMBER ON WHICH WRITTEN.
.LE;^^S$DEV\\#--#PHYSICAL NAME OF DEVICE ON WHICH WRITTEN IN ^^SIXBIT\\.
.LE;^^S$MTCH\\#--#^^BYTE\\ (31) 0 (1) 7-TRACK (1) 0 (3) DENSITY. ^DENSITY
IS 1=200, 2=556, 3=800, 4=1600, 5=6250.
.ELS
.HL2 ^&LOCATIONS \IN ^^T$UFD\\ RECORD\&
\\^THIS RECORD IS NOT WRITTEN IN INTERCHANGE MODE. ^WHEN WRITTEN,
THE DATA PORTION CONTAINS TWO OR THREE NON-DATA BLOCKS:
TYPES ^^O$NAME\\, ^^O$FILE\\ (OPTIONAL) AND ^^O$DIRT\\.
^REMAINING LOCATIONS IN THE HEADER RECORD CONTAIN:
.LS;.LE;^^D$PCHK\\#--#CHECKSUM OF THE ^^O$NAME\\ FULL PATH FILE NAME BLOCK.
.LE;^^D$LVL\\#--#DIRECTORY LEVEL: 0=^^UFD, 1=\\FIRST ^^SFD\\, ETC.
.LE;^^D$STR\\#--#FILE STRUCTURE NAME STORED IN THE FOLLOWING
FORMAT: ^^BYTE\\ (7) DATA TYPE, LENGTH IN WORDS, ^^ASCII\\. (^DATE
TYPES ARE DEFINED IN THE ^^T$FIL\\ SECTION.)
.ELS
.HL2 ^&LOCATIONS \IN ^^T$FIL\\ RECORD\&
\\^THE FIRST TAPE RECORD FOR A FILE CONTAINS TWO NON-DATA BLOCKS, TYPES
^^O$NAME\\ AND ^^O$FILE\\. ^THERE IS ROOM FOR TWO BLOCKS OF FILE DATA
IN THE FIRST TAPE RECORD, AND IF THE FILE WILL COMPLETELY FIT IN ONE
TAPE RECORD, THESE WILL BE USED. ^IF THE FILE IS LONGER THAN TWO
BLOCKS, THE FILE WILL BE STARTED IN THE SECOND TAPE RECORD,
SO ITS PAGES WILL BE LINED UP WITH TAPE RECORDS. ^EACH TAPE RECORD
IDENTIFIES THE LOGICAL DISK WORD WITH WHICH IT STARTS. ^REMAINING
LOCATIONS IN THE RECORD HEADER ARE:
.LS;.LE;^^F$PCHK\\#--#CHECKSUM OF THE FULL PATH FILE NAME BLOCK
(^^O$NAME).\\ ^THIS IS JUST A CONSISTENCY CHECK FOR CONSECUTIVE RECORDS OF
THE FILE.
.LE;^^F$RDW\\#--#RELATIVE DATA WORD OF FILE OF THE FIRST DATA WORD
IN THIS TAPE RECORD.
.LE;^^F$PTH\\#--#A TWELVE WORD BLOCK USED TO STORE INFORMATION SUITABLE
FOR A RESTORATION OF THE FILE. ^THIS AREA IS BIG ENOUGH TO HOLD THE
ENTIRE PATH TO A ^^TOPS\\-10 FILE IN A ^^UFD\\ AND TWO ^^SFDS\\. ^THE PATH
INFORMATION WILL BE STORED IN THE STANDARD ORDER OF DEVICE,
^^UFD\\, FIRST ^^SFD\\, FILE NAME, EXTENSION; WITH MISSING FIELDS
OMITTED. ^THE PATH INFORMATION WILL BE STORED IN THE FORMAT:
.B
^^BYTE\\ (7) DATA TYPE, LENGTH IN WORDS, ^^ASCII\\
.B
WHERE DATA TYPES ARE DEFINED AS:
.B
DEVICE#=#001
.B
FILE NAME#=#002
.B
EXTENSION#=#003
.B
DIRECTORY#=#040
.B
(LOWER DIRECTORIES = 041,042, ...)
.ELS
.PG
.PS67,70;.LM0;.RM70;.F;.J;.SP1
.NUMBER CHAPTER 18
.CH ^&BOOTM\&
.SP1
.HL 1 ^&INTRODUCTION\\\&
\\^^BOOTM\\ IS A BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM USED FOR LOADING THE MONITOR FROM A MAGNETIC
TAPE SAVED IN ^^BACKUP\\ FORMAT. ^^BOOTM\\ RUNS IN ^^EXEC\\ MODE, AND AUTOMATICALLY
LOADS ITSELF INTO THE TOP 2^K OF MEMORY. ^YOU LOAD ^^BOOTM\\ EITHER FROM MAGNETIC TAPE
VIA THE ^^READIN\\ FACILITY OR FROM PAPER TAPE.
.HL 1 ^&OPERATION\\\&
\\^^DIGITAL\\ SUPPLIES ^^BOOTM\\ ON EITHER A PAPER TAPE OR A BOOTSTRAP MAGNETIC TAPE.
.HL 2 ^&LOAD FROM PAPER-TAPE\\ (^^KA/KI O\\NLY)\&
\\^YOU SHOULD FOLLOW THE STEPS OUTLINED BELOW TO LOAD ^^BOOTM\\ FROM PAPER TAPE.
.LS;.LE;^LOAD THE ^^BOOTM\\ PAPER TAPE INTO THE PAPER-TAPE READER.
.LE;^SET THE ^^READIN\\ DEVICE SWITCHES TO 104.
.LE;^PRESS ^^STOP, RESET,\\ AND ^^READIN\\.
.LE;^WHEN THE PAPER TAPE HAS BEEN READ, ^^BOOTM\\ TYPES:
.B;.I5
^^BOOTM##V4(16)
.BR;.I5
BTM\\>
.B
^THE PROMPT CHARACTERS, INDICATING THAT YOU CAN TYPE A COMMAND, ARE ^^BTM\\>.
.LE;^TYPE A COMMAND STRING AND PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
.LE;^AFTER ^^BOOTM\\ PROCESSES THE COMMAND YOU TYPED, ^^BOOTM\\ EITHER RESTARTS
ITSELF OR TRANSFERS TO THE NEWLY LOADED PROGRAM. ^THE ACTION ^^BOOTM\\ TAKES
DEPENDS ON THE COMMAND YOU TYPE.
.ELS
.HL 2 ^&LOAD FROM MAGNETIC TAPE\\\&
\\^YOU SHOULD FOLLOW THE STEPS OUTLINED BELOW TO LOAD ^^BOOTM\\ FROM MAGNETIC TAPE.
.LS;.LE;^PLACE THE ^^BOOTM\\ TAPE ON MAGNETIC TAPE DRIVE 0 (E.G., ^^MTA\\0).
^IF YOU'RE USING A ^^DX\\10 CONTROLLER, YOU CAN USE ANY DRIVE.
.LE;^SET THE ^^READIN\\ SWITCHES TO 340. ^WHEN USING A ^^DX\\10 CONTROLLER, SET
THE SWITCHES TO 220.
.LE;^PRESS ^^STOP, RESET,\\ AND ^^READIN\\.
.LE;^WHEN THE MAGNETIC TAPE HAS BEEN READ, ^^BOOTM\\ TYPES:
.B;.I5
^^BOOTM##V4(16)
.BR;.I5
BTM\\>
.B
^THE PROMPT CHARACTERS, INDICATING THAT YOU CAN TYPE A COMMAND, ARE ^^BTM\\>.
.LE;^TYPE A COMMAND STRING AND PRESS THE ^^RETURN\\ KEY.
.LE;^AFTER ^^BOOTM\\ PROCESSES THE COMMAND YOU TYPED, ^^BOOTM\\ EITHER RESTARTS
ITSELF OR TRANSFERS TO THE NEWLY LOADED PROGRAM. ^THE ACTION ^^BOOTM\\ TAKES
DEPENDS ON THE COMMAND YOU TYPE.
.ELS
.HL 1 ^&COMMAND FORMAT\\\&
\\^THE GENERAL FORMAT OF A ^^BOOTM\\ COMMAND IS SHOWN BELOW.
.B;.I5
STRUCTURE:FILE.EXT[PROJ,PROG]/SWITCH
.B;.LM8;.TS8;.I-8
WHERE: STRUCTURE REPRESENTS A FILE STRUCTURE NAME WITHIN THE DISK FILE SYSTEM
(AS SAVED BY ^^BACKUP\\). ^THE DEFAULT IS ^^DSKB\\.
.B
FILE.EXT IS THE NAME AND EXTENSION OF THE FILE INVOLVED IN THE LOADING OPERATION.
^THE DEFAULT IS ^^SYSTEM.EXE.\\
.B
[PROJ,PROGRAMMER] IS THE DIRECTORY IN WHICH THE SPECIFIED FILE CAN BE FOUND. ^THE DEFAULT IS [1,4].
.B
/SWITCH IS AN OPTIONAL ^^BOOTM\\ SWITCH THAT SPECIFIES WHAT OPERATION OR OPTION
^^BOOTM\\ SHOULD PERFORM. ^THE AVAILABLE OPTIONS AND OPERATIONS ARE LISTED IN ^SECTION 6.3.1.
.LM0
.HL 2 ^&OPTIONS \\AND OPERATIONS\\\&
\\^IF YOU DO NOT SPECIFY A SWITCH IN THE COMMAND, 1) ^^BOOTM\\ FINDS THE SPECIFIED
FILE, 2) CLEARS MEMORY, 3) READS THE SPECIFIED FILE INTO MEMORY, 4) SETS THE
^^PROGRAM START ADDRESS\\, AND 5) STARTS THE PROGRAM AT THAT ADDRESS. ^THE
DEFAULT FILE USED IS ^^DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE\\[1,4]. ^^BOOTM\\ POSITIONS THE TAPE TO THE
SECOND FILE ON THE TAPE BEFORE IT STARTS THE PROGRAM.
.B
^THE POSSIBLE SWITCHES THAT YOU CAN SPECIFY IN THE ^^BOOTM\\ COMMAND LINE ARE LISTED BELOW.
.B2;.LM20;.TS20;.I-15
/^^LOAD\\ ^^BOOTM\\ PERFORMS ALL THE OPERATIONS LISTED ABOVE, EXCEPT
THAT IT DOES NOT START THE PROGRAM (I.E., DOES NOT PERFORM STEP 5).
.B;.I-15
/^^START\\:N ^^BOOTM\\ PERFORMS ALL THE OPERATIONS LISTED ABOVE, EXCEPT
IT STARTS THE PROGRAM AT LOCATION N. ^THE DEFAULT VALUE FOR N IS THE START ADDRESS
SPECIFIED IN THE FILE.
.B;.I-15
/^^NOREWIND BOOTM\\ IS DISABLED FROM REPOSITIONING THE TAPE TO THE SECOND
FILE, WHICH IS ASSUMED TO BE A COPY OF ^^BACKUP.EXE.\\
.B;.I-15
/^^DENSITY\\:D ^SET THE TAPE READ DENSITY TO THE VALUE OF D. ^LEGAL VALUES
ARE 200, 556, 800, AND 1600.
.B;.I-15
/KONTROLLER:U ^INFORM ^^BOOTM\\ WHAT TYPE OF TAPE CONTROLLER YOU ARE READING
FROM AND THE UNIT "U" THAT HAS THE TAPE MOUNTED. ^LEGAL VALUES FOR "KONTROLLER"
ARE ^^TM10, TX01, TM02,\\ AND ^^TC\\10. ^IF ^^READIN\\ WAS DONE FROM EITHER A ^^TM10\\ OR A
^^TX\\01, THEN IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO SPECIFY THIS SWITCH. ^THE DEFAULT TAPE DRIVE
IS THE UNIT THAT A ^^READIN\\ WAS PERFORMED ON IF A ^^TM\\10 OR A ^^TX\\01
WAS USED. ^IF ^^BOOTM\\ WAS READ IN FROM A DEVICE OTHER THAN MAGTAPE, THEN THE
DEFAULT IS ^^TM\\10 UNIT 0. ^IF A ^^TC\\10 CONTROLLER IS USED, IT MUST BE
SPECIFIED BY A /^^TC\\10 SWITCH. ^THE DEFAULT VALUE FOR U IS UNIT _#0. ^EXAMPLE:
/^^TX01:2\\ SPECIFIES UNIT 2 ON THE ^^TX\\01 CONTROLLER.
.B;.I-15
/^^REWIND T\\HIS OPERATION WILL REWIND THE TAPE TO LOAD POINT. /^^DENSITY\\
AND /KONTROLLER ABOVE MAY BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS SWITCH; HOWEVER,
NO FILENAME CAN BE GIVEN.
.B;.I-15
/^^SKIP\\ ^THIS OPERATION WILL SKIP FORWARD OVER ONE FILE. ^OPTIONS 5 AND 6
ABOVE MAY BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS COMMAND; HOWEVER, NO FILENAME CAN BE GIVEN.
.LM0
.HL 1 ^&ERRORS\\\&
\\^WHENEVER ^^BOOTM\\ ENCOUNTERS AN ERROR, THE FOLLOWING STYLE OF ERROR MESSAGE APPEARS:
.LS;.LE;^THE USER TERMINAL END-OF-LINE BELL IS RUNG;
.LE;^THE STRING ?^^BTM\\ FOLLOWED BY A 3-CHARACTER MNEMONIC FOLLOWED BY THE
ERROR MESSAGE TEXT TERMINATED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN AND LINE FEED;
.LE;^^BOOTM\\ IS THEN RESTARTED.
.ELS
.HL 2 ^&ERROR MESSAGES\\\&
.B;.NF;.NJ;.TS5,15
\\?^^BTMIPP\\ - ^INVALID ^^PROJ,PROG\\ NUMBER
?^^BTMCME\\ - ^COMMAND ERROR
?^^BTMISW\\ - ^ILLEGAL SWITCH OR ARGUMENT
?^^BTMFNF\\ - ^FILE NOT FOUND
?^^BTMTSF\\ - ^TAPE MARK IN SAVE FILE
?^^BTMSFI\\ - ^SAVE FILE INCONSISTENT
?^^BTMNSA\\ - ^NO START ADDRESS
?^^BTMNDL\\ - ^NOT AN ^^EXE\\ FILE OR DIRECTORY TOO LONG
?^^BTMPNM\\ - ^PAGE NOT MONOTONICALLY INCREASING
?^^BTMTRE\\ - ^TAPE READ ERROR
?^^BTMCSD\\ - ^CANNOT START ^^DX\\10
?^^BTMCSE\\ - ^CHANNEL SYNCHRONIZATION ERROR
?^^BTMNMS\\ - ^NO MAGTAPE STATUS
?^^BTMFDE\\ - ^FATAL ^^DX\\10 ERROR OR DRIVE OFF-LINE
?^^BTMNES\\ - ^NOT ENDING STATUS (^^TU\\70 ONLY)
?^^BTMNCS\\ - ^NOT ^^CU\\ STATUS (^^TU\\70 ONLY)
.F;.J
.HL 1 ^&ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS\\\&
\\^THE FOLLOWING FEATURE TEST SWITCHES ARE AVAILABLE IN ^^BOOTM\\:
.B2;.LM13;.TS13;.I-8
^^FTEXE\\ ^INCLUDE ^^EXE\\ FILE SUPPORT (DEFAULT)
.BR;.I-8
^^FTFRS\\ ^INCLUDE ^^FRS/BACKUP\\ FILE FORMAT (DEFAULT)
.BR;.I-8
^^FTTU70\\ ^INCLUDE ^^TU\\70 SUPPORT (DEFAULT)
.BR;.I-8
^^FTTC10\\ ^INCLUDE ^^TC\\10 SUPPORT (DEFAULT)
.BR;.I-8
^^MAGRIM\\ ^ASSEMBLE IN ^^MAGRIM\\ FORMAT (DEFAULT)
.BR;.I-8
^^PTPSW\\ ^MAKE PAPER TAPE VERSION (NORMALLY OFF)
.BR;.I-8
^^CORE\\ ^VALUE SET TO 5000 (DEFAULT) USED TO DETERMINE WHERE TO READIN
^^BOOTM\\ BEFORE RELOCATION.
.BR;.I-8
^^DEBUG\\ ^MAKE DEBUG VERSION
.B2;.LM0
^ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS:
.LS;.LE;^TO MAKE A PAPER TAPE VERSION (LOCATION INDEPENDENT):
.LM15;.NF;.NJ;.B
_.^^MAKE BTMPTP.MAC
*IPTPSW==1
MAGRIM==0
$EX$$
_.R MACRO
*PTP:=BTMPTP,BOOTM\\
.LM9;.F;.J
.LE;^TO MAKE A FILE THAT CAN BE COPIED TO A MAGTAPE FOR ^^READIN,\\ JUST ASSEMBLE
WITH NO SPECIAL SWITCHES.
.LE;^TO MAKE A FILE THAT CAN BE LOADED WITH ^^DXLD\\ TO MAKE A ^^TU\\70 READIN TAPE:
.B;.LM15;.NF;.NF
_.^^MAKE BTMDX.MAC
*IMAGRIM==0
$EX$$
_.LOAD DXLD,BTMDX+BOOTM
_.ASSIGN DSK OUT
_.START###;T\\HIS PRODUCES ^^BOOTM.RDI\\
.F;.J;.ELS
.HL 1 ^&EXAMPLES\\\&
\\^TO RETRIEVE AND RUN A FRESH MONITOR FROM A ^^BACKUP\\ FORMAT MAGTAPE CONTAINING
^^DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE\\(1,4), TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN ONLY.
.B
^TO REWIND A TAPE ON ^^TM\\10 DRIVE _#3 TYPE:
.B;.I5
/^^REWIND/TM10:3\\
.B
^TO LOAD ^^RV\\765 FROM ^^DSKB\\:[10,2362] ON A ^^BACKUP\\ FORMAT TAPE AND START
^^EXEC DDT\\ TYPE:
.B;.I5
^^RV765[10,2362]/START:401\\
.HL 1 ^&SPECIAL 1080 INSTRUCTIONS\\\&
\\^THERE IS NO READIN ON ^^KL10 CPU\\S. ^SEE THE ^OPERATORS ^GUIDE FOR INSTRUCTIONS
FOR READIN IN ^^BOOTM\\ ON 1080S. ^BE SURE TO SPECIFY ^^/TX\\01, WHEN READING
IN A TAPE ON A ^^TU\\70.